asc3 programming manual - university of idaho manual i table of contents 1.1. purpose of this...

��

��

��

� ��

P/N 100-0903-001 Rev. 01

October 7, 2005

© Copyright 2005 by Econolite Control Products, Inc.

Warranty Econolite Control Products, Inc. warrants, for a period as shown below, from date of shipment, all control equipment listed below to be free from defects in material or workmanship and to be of the kind and quality designated or specified in the contract. This warranty does not extend to products not manufactured or sold by Econolite. Econolite has the sole right to determine whether or not an item is covered under our warranty policy.

Controller Warranty Period ASC/3 Series Controller 2 years

Econolite is not responsible for damage caused by negligence, acts of God, or use of equipment in a manner not originally intended. Econolite's liability under this warranty shall not exceed the cost of correcting defects in the equipment. Upon the expiration of the warranty period, all such liability shall terminate. To obtain service under this warranty, deliver the product to the factory at the address listed below. When returning products to Econolite, the following must be done:

• Pack in original (or equivalent) shipping container

• Insure it (or assume the risk of loss/damage during shipment)

• Obtain Return Authorization number from your sales representative

• Pay all shipping charges to factory. Econolite will pay the return shipping charges

• List on packing sheet inside carton the return Authorization No., Econolite's Sales

Order No., your Purchase Order No., equipment serial No., description of problem with equipment, and date of installation.

Ship to the nearest Econolite Service Department:

Econolite Control Products, Inc or Econolite Control Products, Inc Attn: Service Department Attn: Service Department 3360 E. La Palma 212 San Marco Avenue #B Anaheim, California 92806 St. Augustine, Florida 32084

© Copyright 2005 by Econolite Control Products, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED This manual is provided for use by Econolite Control Products Inc. licensees and customers. No part of this manual may be reproduced, copied or distributed in any form without the prior written approval of Econolite Control Products Inc. The content of this manual is subject to change without notice. Econolite Control Products, Inc., logo, and the ASC/3 logo are registered trademarks of Econolite Control Products, Inc. in the United Stated and / or in other countries. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

�� Programming Manual i

Table of Contents

�� 1.1. Purpose of this document .............................................................................................. 1-1 1.2. Document Layout........................................................................................................... 1-1 1.2.1. Main Sections ................................................................................................................ 1-1 1.2.2. Appendices .................................................................................................................... 1-2

�� 2.1. Unpacking...................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.2. Installation...................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.2.1. Preparation .................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.2.2. Cable Connectors and Part Numbers............................................................................. 2-2 2.2.3. Environmental Operation Specifications......................................................................... 2-3 2.3. Software Installation....................................................................................................... 2-3 2.4. Storage/Shipping ........................................................................................................... 2-3

�� 3.1. ASC/3 Series General Features..................................................................................... 3-1 3.1.1. Equipment Enclosure Features ...................................................................................... 3-1 3.1.2. Central Processing Unit (CPU)....................................................................................... 3-1 3.1.3. Power Supply................................................................................................................. 3-1 3.2. System Operating Characteristics .................................................................................. 3-2 3.3. ASC/3 Series Controllers ............................................................................................... 3-2 3.3.1. ASC/3-1000 and 2100 Controller Description................................................................. 3-2

�� 4.1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 4-1 4.2. Function Keypad ............................................................................................................ 4-1 4.2.1. MAIN MENU Key ........................................................................................................... 4-1 4.2.2. SUBMENU Key.............................................................................................................. 4-1 4.2.3. NEXT DATA Key............................................................................................................ 4-1 4.2.4. NEXT SCREEN Key ...................................................................................................... 4-2 4.2.5. NEXT PAGE Key ........................................................................................................... 4-2 4.2.6. STATUS DISPLAY Key.................................................................................................. 4-2 4.2.7. HELP Key ...................................................................................................................... 4-2 4.2.8. Display Contrast Adjust Keys ......................................................................................... 4-2 4.2.9. Cursor Arrow Keys......................................................................................................... 4-2 4.2.10. ENTER Key ................................................................................................................... 4-2 4.3. Numeric Keypad ............................................................................................................ 4-3 4.3.1. Number Keys (0-9)......................................................................................................... 4-3 4.3.2. Alpha-Numeric Keys ...................................................................................................... 4-3 4.3.3. Toggle Key (“0” numeric key) ......................................................................................... 4-4 4.3.4. SPEC FUNC (Special Function) Key.............................................................................. 4-4 4.3.5. CLEAR Key.................................................................................................................... 4-4 4.4. LCD Display Screen....................................................................................................... 4-4 4.4.1. Screen Messages .......................................................................................................... 4-4 4.4.2. Security Access Codes .................................................................................................. 4-5 4.4.3. Key Click and Backlight Enable...................................................................................... 4-5 4.4.4. Help ............................................................................................................................... 4-5 4.4.5. Exit................................................................................................................................. 4-5

�� 5.1. Introduction .................................................................................................................... 5-1 5.1.1. Main menu ..................................................................................................................... 5-1 5.1.2. Display Screen Navigation ............................................................................................. 5-2

�� Programming Manual ii

5.1.3. Horizontal Display Screen Scrolling ............................................................................... 5-2 5.1.4. Vertical Display Screen Scrolling ................................................................................... 5-3 5.1.5. Scroll Removed Illustrations........................................................................................... 5-4 5.1.6. Display Screen Page Format ......................................................................................... 5-4 5.1.7. Page Format with Scrolling ............................................................................................ 5-5 5.1.8. Normally Inaccessible Screens ...................................................................................... 5-5

�� 6.1. Configuration Submenu ................................................................................................. 6-1 6.2. Controller Sequence Submenu ...................................................................................... 6-2 6.2.1. Phase Ring Sequence and Assignment ......................................................................... 6-3 6.2.2. Phase Compatibility ....................................................................................................... 6-3 6.2.3. Reserved ....................................................................................................................... 6-4 6.2.4. Backup Prevent Phases................................................................................................. 6-4 6.2.5. Simultaneous Gap Phases............................................................................................. 6-4 6.3. Phases in Use/Exclusive Pedestrian .............................................................................. 6-6 6.3.1. Phases in Use................................................................................................................ 6-6 6.3.2. Exclusive Pedestrian Timing .......................................................................................... 6-6 6.4. Load Switch Assignment (MMU CHANNEL) .................................................................. 6-7 6.5. Port 1 (SDLC) Submenu ................................................................................................ 6-8 6.5.1. SDLC Options................................................................................................................ 6-8 6.5.2. MMU Program.............................................................................................................. 6-11 6.5.3. Color Check Disable .................................................................................................... 6-12 6.6. Communication Ports Submenu................................................................................... 6-13 6.6.1. Global Port Parameters................................................................................................ 6-13 6.6.2. Port 2 (Terminal) .......................................................................................................... 6-14 6.6.3. Port 3A (RS 232 Telemetry) ......................................................................................... 6-17 6.6.4. Port 3B (FSK Telemetry).............................................................................................. 6-20 6.6.5. Ethernet Port................................................................................................................ 6-23 6.7. Enable Logging Submenu............................................................................................ 6-24 6.7.1. Event Logging.............................................................................................................. 6-24 6.8. Display/Access Submenu ............................................................................................ 6-27 6.8.1. Administration .............................................................................................................. 6-27 6.8.2. Display Options............................................................................................................ 6-28 6.9. Logic Processor Submenu ........................................................................................... 6-29 6.9.1. Logic Statement Control............................................................................................... 6-29 6.9.2. Logic Statements ......................................................................................................... 6-29 6.10. General Programming Notes........................................................................................ 6-30

�� 7.1. Controller Submenu ....................................................................................................... 7-1 7.1.1. Timing Plans .................................................................................................................. 7-2 7.1.2. Vehicle Overlap.............................................................................................................. 7-7 7.1.3. Pedestrian Overlaps .................................................................................................... 7-11 7.1.4. Guaranteed Minimum Times........................................................................................ 7-12 7.1.5. Start/Flash Data ........................................................................................................... 7-13 7.1.6. Option Data.................................................................................................................. 7-17 7.1.7. Actuated Pre-Timed Mode ........................................................................................... 7-21 7.1.8. Recall Data .................................................................................................................. 7-22

� �� 8.1. Coordinator Submenu.................................................................................................... 8-1 8.2. Coordinator Options....................................................................................................... 8-2 8.3. Coordinator Pattern Data ............................................................................................... 8-8 8.4. Added Definitions......................................................................................................... 8-16

�� Programming Manual iii

8.5. Split Pattern ................................................................................................................. 8-18 8.6. Automatic Permissive Minimum Green ........................................................................ 8-19 8.6.1. Split Demand ............................................................................................................... 8-20

!� ��!�� 9.1. Preemptor Submenu...................................................................................................... 9-1 9.1.1. Preemptor 1-10.............................................................................................................. 9-2 9.1.2. Low Priority Preemptor Selection ................................................................................. 9-13

�"� �� "�� 10.1. Time Base Submenu.................................................................................................... 10-1 10.1.1. Clock/Calendar Data.................................................................................................... 10-2 10.1.2. Day Plan Schedule ...................................................................................................... 10-4 10.1.3. Day Plan Creation........................................................................................................ 10-5 10.1.4. Action Plan Creation .................................................................................................... 10-6 10.1.5. Exception Days .......................................................................................................... 10-11

�� 11.1. Detectors Submenu ..................................................................................................... 11-1 11.2. Vehicle Detector Type/TS1 Detector Select ................................................................. 11-2 11.3. Vehicle Detector Setup ................................................................................................ 11-4 11.4. Pedestrian and System Detector Options..................................................................... 11-8 11.5. Log - Speed Detector Setup......................................................................................... 11-9 11.6. Vehicle Detector Diagnostics ..................................................................................... 11-12 11.7. Pedestrian Detector Diagnostics ................................................................................ 11-13

�� 12.1. Status Display Submenu.............................................................................................. 12-1 12.2. Controller Status Display.............................................................................................. 12-3 12.3. Coordinator Status Display .......................................................................................... 12-8 12.3.1. Preemptor Status Display .......................................................................................... 12-12 12.4. Time Base Status Display .......................................................................................... 12-16 12.5. Communications Submenu ........................................................................................ 12-19 12.5.1. Port 1 (SDLC) Status ................................................................................................. 12-19 12.5.2. Ports 2 and 3A Status ................................................................................................ 12-20 12.5.3. Port 3B Status............................................................................................................ 12-26 12.5.4. Ethernet Status .......................................................................................................... 12-29 12.5.5. NTCIP Status............................................................................................................. 12-29 12.6. Detector Status Display.............................................................................................. 12-30 12.6.1. Flash/MMU Status Display......................................................................................... 12-30 12.6.2. Flash Condition Displays............................................................................................ 12-31 12.6.3. Controller (Emergency) Flash / No MMU Flash .......................................................... 12-31 12.6.4. Controller (Emergency) Flash and MMU Flash........................................................... 12-32 12.6.5. Controller Flash.......................................................................................................... 12-33 12.6.6. Automatic Flash (Remote Flash)................................................................................ 12-33 12.7. Input/Output Status Display........................................................................................ 12-34 12.7.1. Connector A-E Inputs................................................................................................. 12-34 12.7.2. Connector A-E Outputs .............................................................................................. 12-35 12.7.3. Logic Processor Status .............................................................................................. 12-36 12.8. MMU Compatibility Status.......................................................................................... 12-37

�� 13.1. Utilities submenu.......................................................................................................... 13-1 13.1.1. Copy Utility................................................................................................................... 13-2 13.1.2. Print Utility.................................................................................................................... 13-4

�� Programming Manual iv

13.1.3. Transfer Utility.............................................................................................................. 13-4 13.1.4. Sign On Screen Utility .................................................................................................. 13-4 13.2. Log Buffers Submenu .................................................................................................. 13-5 13.2.1. Display Log Buffers Submenu...................................................................................... 13-5 13.2.2. Print Log Buffers .......................................................................................................... 13-5 13.2.3. Clear Submenu............................................................................................................ 13-6 13.3. Software Modules ........................................................................................................ 13-6

��

�� #��$�� %��

�� #��$��

�� #�$� ��

� � ��#��$��

�!� ��#��$�� !��

�"� ��#��$�� %��&��'�� "��

�� #��$� ��'��

�� #�&$��

�� #��$�� %��

�� #�($��

�� #��$��

�� #��$��

�� #��$�&��'��

� � ��#��$��

�� Programming Manual 1-1

��

� �� ! � " � # � $ � �

This document is to provide basic programming and operational information pertaining to the Advanced System Controller, Series 3 (ASC/3). Instructional data provided here should enable qualified programming and operating personnel to easily enter appropriate software control parameters into an ASC/3 controller so as to properly configure the controller for both vehicular and pedestrian traffic patterns within the predefined traffic area.

Instructions in this document facilitate both the initial system configuration and also later system updates required to accommodate changes in both vehicular and pedestrian traffic patterns, direction of traffic flows, and time-of-day traffic variations.

� �% � �� " � # � $ � ��& ' � � � �

This document is divided into fourteen main sections, followed by the appendices.

� �% �� & $ �� " � � $ � �

The main sections of this manual are:

Section 1 – Introduction

Describes the purpose and layout of this document.

Section 2 – Installation Procedures

Provides instructions and precautions to be observed for unpacking, installing, and storing the hardware equipment included in the system. This section also includes a table that lists Cable Connector Part Numbers and another that gives the Equipment Environmental Specifications.

Section 3 – Equipment Descriptions

Individually provides brief physical and functional descriptions of each of the two controllers (ASC/3-1000 and ASC/3-2100), covered by this document. Also provides descriptions of general Operational Features that can be acquired through the system Main Menu.

Section 4 – Keyboard and Display

Describes the basic features and functions of the front panel display and controls.

Section 5 – Display Screen Navigation

Describes how the titles of display screen illustrations, beginning with the Main Menu (MM) screen, are used to navigate through a sequence of screens to a desired data entry or display screen location. Also discusses the viewing of large amounts of data by scrolling or moving page by page through a large screen file. Closes with a Programming Summary of the Main Menu screen.

Section 6 – Configuration

Provides a Programming Summary of the Configuration Submenu screen (MM-1) that includes eight configuration-related data group options: Controller Sequence, Phases in Use/Exclusive Pedestrian, Load Switch Assignment, Port 1 (SDLC), Communication Ports, Enable Logging, Display/Access, and Logic Processor.


Section 7 – Controller

Provides a Programming Summary of the Controller Submenu screen (MM-2) that includes seven controller-related data group options: Timing Plans, Vehicle Overlap, Pedestrian Overlap, Guaranteed Minimum Time, Start Flash Data, Option Data, and Actuated Pre-Timed Mode.

Section 8 – Coordinator

Provides a Programming Summary of the Coordinator Submenu screen (MM-3) that includes five coordinator-related data group options: Options, Coordinator Pattern Data, Split Pattern Data, Auto Permissive Minimum Green, and Split Demand.

Section 9 – Preemptors

Provides a Programming Summary of the Preemptors Submenu screen (MM-4) that includes two preemptor-related data group options: Preemptors 1-10 and Low Priority Preemptor Selection.

Section 10 – Time Base

Provides a Programming Summary of the Time Base Submenu screen (MM-5) that includes five time base-related data group options: Clock Calendar, Schedule, Day Plan Event, Action Plan, and Exception Day.

Section 11 – Detectors

Provides a Programming Summary of the Detectors Submenu screen (MM-6) that includes seven detector-related data group options: Vehicle Detector Type/TS1 Detector Select, Vehicle Detector Setup, Phase Detector Options, Pedestrian and System Detector Assignments, Log Intervals/Speed Detectors, Vehicle Detector Diagnostics, and Pedestrian Detector Diagnostics.

Section 12 – Status Display

Provides a Programming Summary of the Status Display Submenu screen (MM-7) that includes nine status display-related data display group options: Controller, Coordinator, Preemptor, Time Base, Communications, Detectors, Flash/MMU Status, Inputs/Outputs, and MMU Compatibility.

Section 13 – Utilities

Provides a Programming Summary of the Utilities Submenu screen (MM-8) that includes seven utilities-related data group options: Copy, Memory Clear, Print, Transfer, Sign On, Log Buffers, and Software Modules.

Section 14 – Diagnostics

Provides information regarding the location of diagnostic operations data (MM-9).

� �% �% � �� $ ! " � � �

Appendix A – ASC/3 Keyboard Tree

Contains a tree diagram illustrating the keying sequences required to accomplish any function.

Appendix B – Programming Reference Screens

Provides illustrations of the Main Menu screen, all associated Submenu screens, and all data entry screens that can be viewed on the ASC/3 series liquid crystal display (LCD) screen.


Appendix C – Standard Default Database

Provides charts showing standard default Configuration, Controller, Coordinator, Detector, and Guaranteed Minimum backup timing values.

Appendix D – ASC/3 Program Reference Card

Provides a blank copy of the ASC/3 Program Reference Card for use when establishing programming criteria for your specific controller operating parameters.

Appendix E – Event and Coordination Status Messages

Provides a list of error messages and flash status condition messages.

Appendix F – Hardware Diagnostic Screens

Provides illustrations of all screens that are used in association with the Hardware Diagnostics programs that can be viewed on the ASC/3 series LCD screen.

Appendix G – Software Installation

Provides procedures for installing the controller applications software.

Appendix H – Coordination Pattern Selection

Contains a table that defines the Coordination pattern selected when the interconnect format is TS2 or STD (COS).

Appendix I – ASC/3 Boot Menu Tree

Contains a tree diagram illustrating the ASC/3 Boot Menu tree.

Appendix J – Pin Lists for Interface Connectors

Provides a pin list for each interface connector.

Appendix K – BIU Connector Pin Assignments

Provides pin lists and function assignments for the Terminal & Facilities and the Detector Rack Bus Interface Units (BIUs).

Appendix L – Logic Processor

Provides a list of all the testable elements available to the IF statements and executable statements available to the THEN and the ELSE statements used when configuring logic gates.

Appendix M – Hardware Diagnostic Cables

Provides interconnection information for the set of Loop Back Cables used in the Diagnostic testing of the controller.

Appendix N – Pre-Timed Controller Operation

Provides pre-timed controller operation information.


(This page left intentionally blank.)


��

% �� $ � & " ( $ ) �

The ASC/3 controller is packed in a specially designed protective shipping carton. All necessary precautions have been taken to ensure that equipment arrives intact and in proper working order. However, you should follow these steps when unpacking the controller to verify that there is no shipping damage. 1. Carefully inspect the shipping container for damage before opening. If the container is damaged,

unpack the controller unit in the presence of the carrier. 2. Save the packing materials as they have been specially designed to protect the controller during

shipment. The special packing materials must be used should it be necessary to ship the controller again.

3. Carefully inspect the controller for damage. Check for broken wires, broken connectors, loose

components, bent panels, and dents or scratches on the enclosure. 4. If you discover any physical damage, notify the carrier.

% �% � �$ � � & **& � � $ �

% �% �� & � & � � $ �

Install ASC/3-1000 and ASC/3-2100 controllers in a location where the front panel is easily accessible. Leave adequate room around the controllers to allow easy removal. Care should be taken to make sure vents on the backside of the controllers are not blocked. For all controllers, perform the following checks before applying AC power. 1. Open the front panel using the two thumb screws at the top of the panel and verify that all modules

are properly secured and all connectors are in place. Check to make sure that all ASC/3 socket-mounted components are properly seated.

2. On the Processor/Power Supply Board (see Figure 1, next page) and find the battery jumper JP-2

next to connector J11. During shipping or storage, this jumper is normally placed in the OFF (center-to-right, 2-3) position. Move jumper JP-2 to the ON (center-to-left, 1-2) position to activate the backup battery.


Figure 1. Processor/Power Supply Board

(Top left on the Front Panel) 3. If the intersection cabinet is equipped with a MMU or CMU that latches Fault Monitor (FM) or

Controller Voltage Monitor (CVM), the monitor power-on flash time on the MMU/CMU must be set to nine seconds or larger. Refer to the MMU/CMU manufacturer’s manual for setting instructions.

The controller is now ready for installation. Cable connector part numbers are shown below. Refer to Appendix J and Appendix K for pin lists for all interface connectors.

% �% �% � �& + *� �� $ $ � " � � � � �& $ ! ��& � � �� # + � � � �

CONNECTOR CABLE CONNECTOR ECONOLITE PART NUMBER A (ASC/3-1000) MS-3106-18-1S 44181P1 A (ASC/3-2100) MS-3116-22-55S 44143P1 B (ASC/3-2100) MS-3116-22-55P 44143P2 C (ASC/3-2100) MS-3116-24-61P 44143P3 D (ASC/3-2100) AMP #205842-1 31163P2 SDLC (Port 1) CANNON DAU-15P 54665P4 TERMINAL (Port 2) CANNON DBU-25P 54665P7 TELEMETRY (Port 3A) CANNON DEU-9S 54647P9 TELEMETRY (Port 3B) (Optional 9-pin) (Optional 25-pin)

CANNON DEU-9S CANNON DBU-25S

54647P9 54647P6


% �% �� $ , � � $ # � $ � & *�� & � � $ �� " � " & � � $ � �

The ASC/3 controller meets or exceeds the NEMA environmental standards for traffic control equipment summarized below.

(NEMA TS 2-2003 SECTION 2)

CATEGORY REQUIREMENT

Ambient Temperature

Operating Range: -34°C to +74°C Storage Range: -45°C to +85°C

Humidity Relative humidity is not to exceed 95% over the temperature range of +4.4°C to +43.3°C

Vibration The controller will maintain its programmed functions and physical integrity when subjected to a vibration of up to 0.5g at 5 to 30 cycles per second, applied in each of the three mutually perpendicular planes.

Shock The controller will not suffer either permanent mechanical deformation or any damage that renders the unit inoperable, when subjected to a shock of 10g applied in each of the three mutually perpendicular planes.

% �� - & � � ��$ � � & **& � � $ �

Refer to Appendix G for instructions on updating the software in the ASC/3.

% �. � �� & ) � � �� $ ) �

Should it be necessary to store or ship an ASC/3-1000 or ASC/3-2100 controller that is equipped with a backup battery, move the battery jumper JP-2 to the OFF (center-to-right, 2-3) position.


��

� �� $ � � & *�/ � & � � � � � �

The ASC/3 series of controllers includes the models ASC/3-1000 and ASC/3-2100 shown below. As can be seen, both models have similar display and keyboard sections on their front panels. However, the connector sections differ considerably. The ASC/3-1000 has a single fuse and a single input/output connector, while the ASC/3-2100 has two fuses and four input/output connectors.

ASC/3-1000 ASC/3-2100

The ASC/3 controller designs use the latest microprocessor, display, and keyboard technology. Fewer components increase overall system reliability and allow an efficient use of space. Each controller has two main electronic modules that are accessible without the use of extender cards.

There are minor differences in the databases for the ASC/3-1000 and the ASC/3-2100 because the hardware platforms are different. These differences are clearly indicated in the text describing the data entries.

Since this is a programming manual, only brief descriptions of the physical characteristics are included in this document. Detailed physical specifications and descriptions are included in the respective ASC/3 series maintenance manuals.

� �� 0 � � # � $ � ��$ " *� � � � � �/ � & � � � � � �

Both controllers are enclosed in an aluminum enclosure designed for shelf mounting within a street-side cabinet.

� �� % � �� $ � � & *�� " � � � $ ) ��$ � �1��2�

Both of these controllers use the Motorola MPC862 Power PC Reduced Instruction Set Computer (RISC) Processor and, as a result, both can run the same software programs and use the same database configuration. For these reasons this programming manual is used for both controllers.

� �� - � � �� *' �

Both the ASC/3-1000 and ASC/3-2100 have easily accessible power supply assemblies.


� �% � �' � � � # �� & � $ ) �� & � & " � � � � � " � �

The ASC/3-1000 and ASC/3-2100 controllers function as semi-actuated or fully actuated traffic controller units in accordance with the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standards Publication TS2-2003.

The ASC/3 series of controllers operates as sixteen phase controllers with any combination of sixteen vehicle phases, sixteen pedestrian phases, sixteen timed overlaps, and four timing rings. A configuration file may be specifically programmed to meet customer configuration requirements. In addition to the standard controller capabilities, the ASC/3 controllers provide outstanding software and hardware features that greatly simplify programming, operation, monitoring, and maintenance.

Programming is completely menu driven and in most cases involves only option selections or numeric value data entries. Control flexibility is provided by numerous programming options and enhancements that include time base coordination, preemption, and diagnostic capabilities. Real-time controller activity can be monitored via the dynamic status displays which together show all controller dynamic parameters.

� �� $ � � � **� � � �

The ASC/3 series of controllers include the ASC/3-1000 and the ASC/3-2100. Each model provides the same control functions but uses different hardware input/output (I/O) configurations to interface with other components in a traffic control cabinet.

Both models include three serial communication channels. The Port 1 channel is used to exchange data with a Malfunction Management Unit (MMU), retrieve vehicle detector data from detector rack Bus Interface Units (BIUs) and route I/O functions through Terminal and Facility BIUs. Port 2 is a terminal port with an RS-232 interface. Port 3A is a telemetry port using an RS-232 interface. An optional Port 3B supplies a 25 pin or 9 pin telemetry port using frequency-shift-keying (FSK) that is compatible with the ASC/2 and ASC-8000 controllers.

� �� 3� 4 4 4 �& $ ! �% � 4 4 �� $ � � � **� � �� " � � � � $ �

The single NEMA specified “A” connector on the ASC/3-1000 controller meets NEMA TS2 Type 1 requirements as referenced in NEMA TS2 3.3.4.

The ASC/3-2100 controller has NEMA specified “A”, “B”, “C” connectors and meets the NEMA TS2 Type 2 requirements referenced in NEMA TS2 3.3.5. In addition, an Econolite specific “D” connector allows the model 2100 to replace any NEMA TS1, NEMA TS2, ASC-8000 or other controllers (with adapter cables).

The Port interfaces for both models 1000 and 2100 are:

• Port 1 NEMA TS2 3.3.1 • Port 2 NEMA TS2 3.3.2 • Port 3A NEMA 3.3.3 specified connector used for RS232 communication. • Port 3B (Optional plug-in module) NEMA TS2 3.3.3 specified connector used for FSK

communication.


��

. �� $ � � � ! � " � � $ �

This section describes and gives basic operating procedures for the Function Keypad, Numeric Keypad, and the LCD Display Screen.

. �% � / � $ " � � $ �5� ' � & ! �

The Function Keypad, shown below, contains a group of keys that provides control of specific functions used within the ASC/3 system. Generally they control selection of displays and movement within and between display screen pages.

ASC/3 FUNCTION KEYPAD

. �% �� 5� ' �

MAIN MENU (MM) Press and release the MAIN MENU key to display the Main Menu. The main menu lists nine submenus containing all possible categories for data entry. While viewing the Main Menu, press one of the 1-9 number keys that corresponds to the desired submenu title and that submenu will appear.

For example, while viewing the Main Menu screen, press the #2 key on the numeric keypad and the Controller Submenu screen will appear.

ASC/3 MAIN MENU

1. CONFIGURATION 6. DETECTORS 2. CONTROLLER 7. STATUS DISPLAY 3. COORDINATOR 8. UTILITIES 4. PREEMPTOR 9. DIAGNOSTICS INFO 5. TIME BASE PRESS KEYS 1..9 TO SELECT

When viewing any other display screen, press and release the MAIN MENU key at any time to immediately return to view the Main Menu.

. �% �% � ��6 � �� 5� ' �

While viewing any data entry screen, press and release the SUBMENU key to back up through all screens to view the currently active submenu screen. Repeatedly pressing this key will sequentially move you back through previous submenu screens until the Main Menu is reached.

. �% �� 7 �� 5� ' �

This key searches for non-zero data and goes to that screen and allows the user to search through data screens for valid entries. Press and release NEXT DATA and a prompt asks for direction. Press a cursor (arrow) key after prompt to control direction of search. Choose from two directions for this


function. The up/left arrows (�, �) have same effect and down/right arrows (�, �) have same effect.

. �% �. � � �7 �� 5� ' �

This key allows single screen or rapid screen-by-screen advancing through data screens within the selected submenu data group. The word MORE and an arrow at the top right of the screen indicate the possible direction(s) where additional screens are located.

Single Screen Advance - Press and release NEXT SCREEN and a prompt asks for direction. Press an arrow key (see above) corresponding to the desired advance direction and the next screen in the selected direction will appear.

Rapid Screen Advance- Press and hold NEXT SCREEN, a prompt asks direction. While continuing to hold NEXT SCREEN, press the appropriate cursor arrow key until the desired screen is reached.

. �% �8 � � �7 ��5� ' �

This key allows single page or rapid page-by-page advancing to the previous or next group of data entry screens (data group) in a submenu.

Single Page Advance - Press and release NEXT PAGE and a prompt asks for direction. Press the appropriate cursor up or down arrow key to control direction and the next page in that direction will appear.

Rapid Page Advance - Press and hold NEXT PAGE, a prompt asks direction. While continuing to hold NEXT PAGE, press the appropriate cursor arrow key until the desired page is reached.

. �% �9 � � � ��5� ' �

Press the STATUS DISPLAY key and the Controller Status display (MM-7-1) appears. This screen (discussed in detail at Section 12, page 12-3, of this manual) displays a large variety of current status indications for the intersection(s) being serviced by this controller.

. �% �: � ; ��5� ' �

Press the HELP key to display help screens with information about the current data entry field or status display you are viewing. To Exit from help, press CLEAR or again press the HELP key.

. �% �< � � � � *& ' �� $ � � & � � ��! =� � � �5� ' � �

A pair of arrow-shaped keys at the left side of the Function Keypad adjusts the contrast of the LCD display screen for darker (upper arrow) or lighter (lower arrow) contrast.

. �% �> � �� - �5� ' � �

These four keys, that surround the ENTER key, move the cursor in the direction of the arrow on the key (up �, down �, right �, or left �). If briefly pressed, they move the cursor only a short distance in their designated direction. If the key is held depressed, the cursor moves in the designated direction at a moderate speed until the key is released.

. �% �� 4 � �� 5� ' �

The ENTER key can be used to either store data or to execute a function as described below: Store Data Data is stored when ENTER is pressed or when user leaves a data field by using the cursor arrow keys or by going to main menu or submenus using the function keys.


Execute Function Used to execute functions (such as Memory Clear) to protect user from erasing data by inadvertently pressing Toggle at this field.

. �� # � � " �5� ' � & ! �

The Numeric Keypad, shown below, contains a group of numbered keys (0-9) that provides a means of inputting numerical information into the system memory. There is also a SPEC FUNC (Special Function) key and a CLEAR key. You should also notice there are alphabetic characters, special characters, and words printed above the keys. This indicates that these keys can perform dual functions as described in the following paragraphs.

ASC/3 NUMERIC KEYPAD

. �� # + � � �5� ' � �14 3> 2��

These keys are mostly used for entry of numeric data into the system programming files. While viewing a data entry screen, these keys are used to enter/select menu options, timing values, detectors, program steps, addresses and other data entry values. An auto-repeat feature allows multiple entry of a number by pressing and holding a number key.

. �� % � �*� � & 3� � # � � " �5� ' � �

When the cursor is positioned at an alphanumeric data entry field, the numeric keypad will automatically enter the alpha mode. Printed above each numeric key are the characters that the key can input when the cursor is so positioned.

Examples: The #1 key can input a space, an asterisk (*), a hyphen (-), or a number/pound sign (#); the #2 key can input a, b, or c; and the #3 key can input d, e, or f.

When the keypad is in the alpha mode, pressing a numeric key will put the first character of its character sequence in the cursor position (#2 key puts in A). If the #2 key is not pressed again within 2 seconds, the letter A will be entered and the cursor may be moved to the next position. If the #2 key is pressed again before the 2 seconds expire, the letter B will appear in the cursor position. Repeated pressing of the #2 key within the 2-second interval will result in a full sequence that includes A, B, C, a, b, c, and 2. If the #2 key is pressed again (within 2 seconds), the sequence can be repeated.

Each of the numeric keys (except for the #1 key and the zero “0” key) has a similar sequence in which it’s alphabetical characters are input in sequence as capital letters, then lower-case letters, then the number is input (A, B, C, a, b, c, 2) and the sequence may be repeated.

For the #1 key, a sequence consisting of a space ( ), an asterisk ( * ), a hyphen ( - ), and pound ( # ) symbols, followed by the number 1 ( * - # 1). The “0” key is the Toggle key and is used as described in the following paragraph.


. �� ) ) *� �5� ' �1? 4 @ �$ � # � � " �( � ' 2�

This key often used to “toggle” between two or more choices at a data entry field, such as: YES/NO, ON/OFF, enable (X) or disable (“.”), red/yellow/green, rings 1/2/3/4, etc. The shift between its numeric function and Toggle function is automatic depending upon the cursor position.

. �� . � ��/ �� 1�� " & *�/ � $ " � � $ 2�5� ' �

The Special Function key can be used to place Pedestrian Calls or lock access to controller data.

Pedestrian Calls – When viewing the Controller Status display screen (MM-7-1), press the SPEC FUNC (Special Function) key then the number key corresponding to called phases 1-8 or cursor arrows for phases 9 (�), 10 (�), 11 (�), and 12 (�). Phase 10-16 pedestrian calls can also be entered by pressing the SPEC FUNC key, then the 0 (Toggle) key, then the number keys corresponding to called phases 10-16. Calls may be placed only when viewing the Controller Status display screen (MM-7-1) that can also be accessed by pressing the STATUS DISPLAY key.

Lock Access –Lock access to controller data entry by pressing the SPEC FUNC key, then the STATUS DISPLAY key. The keyboard is locked until supervisor or data change access codes are entered. The Lock Access function operates only when access codes have been previously entered.

. �� 8 � �� 5� ' �

The CLEAR key can be used to clear just-typed data or to exit from help screens as described below.

Clear Data - Press the CLEAR key to clear a current data entry and restore the previous entry. This must be done before the data is stored/entered using ENTER, cursor, or the function keys. The CLEAR key will have no effect once the data is stored.

Exit Help Screens – After pressing the HELP key and viewing the displayed help screen, you can exit from the help screen by pressing either the CLEAR key or pressing the HELP key once more.

. �. � �� *& ' ��" � � � $ �

The User Interface module contains a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) formatted as 16 lines of 40 characters, the display contrast control, the display backlight circuit, the display heater circuit, the keyboard matrix and the system buzzer. The display contains its own control and drive electronics. The display is connected to the processor module via User Interface connector J3.

. �. �� " � � � $ �� & ) � � �

The following are messages that may appear on your display screen.

MORE (Sample: MORE � �) – This message appears at the top right of the display screen to show when scrolling is available because the screen currently being displayed is both too wide and too long for the display screen. The arrows indicate in what direction(s) the screen can be scrolled.

Arrows include: UP �, DOWN �, RIGHT �, and LEFT �.

The sample above shows that the sample screen could be scrolled in either the down or right directions. If you scroll down, the up arrow will also appear showing that you can now also scroll upward to return to the original position. Similarly, if you scroll right, the left arrow will also appear so it is possible that all four arrows can appear simultaneously.


. �. �% � �� " � � � ' ��" " � � � �� ! � � �

A security access code may be required before any data entries can be made on this system. These codes are established in the USERCFG.DB file that is loaded into the controller, but is not immediately operational after initial controller installation. Until it is activated, the controller allows all users to access all data and menus.

The security system is activated, through file USERCFG.DB, by a system administrator who may set up access privileges for up to 49 users. Thereafter, using their assigned 4-8 digit access codes, the administrator or authorized users may access permitted menus to make system configuration changes. Separate menu and data masks are established for each user to define which data that user may view (Read-Only) or view and modify (Read/Write).

Once activated, the security access provisions can also be accessed remotely using remote NTCIP SNMP messages that rely on a “Community Name” imbedded within the message that determines who is sending the message and their level of permitted access.

After access, the controller can be manually locked against any data entry by pressing the SPEC FUNC key, then the STATUS key. The controller also automatically locks when there has been no keyboard activity for 20 minutes. Once locked, the keyboard remains locked until administrator or user access codes are entered. The Lock Access function operates only when the security access codes have been previously activated.

Refer to the programming instructions in the Configuration section of this manual for further information on this security access code feature.

. �. �� 5� ' ��* " ( �& $ ! �6 & " ( * ) � � ��$ & + *� �

SCREEN MM-1-7-2 As part of the Configuration function, a Display Options screen (MM-1-7-2) provides the option of enabling/disabling the Key Click and Backlight functions. Use the Toggle (0) key to enable (YES) or disable (NO) either of these functions.

When enabled, the Key Click function automatically generates an audio beep each time any key is pressed.

When the Backlight function is enabled, it activates the display screen backlight and the two arrow-shaped keys at the left of the cursor/enter array can be used to adjust the backlight contrast.

DISPLAY OPTIONS KEY CLICK ENABLE . . . . . . . YES BACKLIGHT ENABLE . . . . . . . YES PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

. �. �. � ; � *� �

The HELP function key can be pressed at any time. Help information is available for each data entry parameter.

. �. �8 � �A � �

To exit from any data entry pages, press the SUBMENU, MAIN MENU, or STATUS DISPLAY function keys. Display Screen Navigation


��

8 �� $ � � � ! � " � � $ �

The Main Menu screen (shown below) is the basic starting place for most ASC/3 system operation. You access this screen by pressing the MAIN MENU function key at the upper left of the function keypad array.

By selecting from the nine menu options (each of which represents a major system data group), you can navigate to all normally accessible system data entry and display screens. The following nine sections of this manual discuss (in the same sequence as they are presented in the Main Menu), each of these major data groups that make up the ASC/3 system.

8 �� & $ �# � $ � �

SCREEN MM MAIN MENU

1. CONFIGURATION 6. DETECTORS 2. CONTROLLER 7. STATUS DISPLAY 3. COORDINATOR 8. UTILITIES 4. PREEMPTOR 9. DIAGNOSTIC INFO 5. TIME BASE PRESS 1..9 TO SELECT

Programming Summary

The Main Menu has nine data groups as shown in the figure at the right. To view or enter data, press the keyboard number (1 through 9) corresponding to desired data group.

1. CONFIGURATION Accesses a submenu with 8 data groups that cover Controller sequencing, phases in use/exclusive pedestrian, load switch assignment, SDLC options, comm. ports, event logging, display/access, and logic processor. (See Section 6 for details.)

2. CONTROLLER Accesses a submenu with 8 data groups that cover timing plans, vehicle and ped overlap, guaranteed minimum time, start flash data, option data, actuated pre-timed mode, and recall data. (See Section 7 for details.)

3. COORDINATOR Accesses a submenu with 5 data groups that cover Coordinator options, pattern data, split pattern data, auto-permissive minimum green, and split demand. (See Section 8 for details.)

4. PREEMPTOR Accesses a submenu with 2 data groups that cover Preemptors 1-10 and the low priority (filtered input) preemptors. (See Section 9 for details.)

5. TIME BASE Accesses a submenu with 5 data groups that cover clock/calendar, schedule, day plan events, action plans, and exception days. (See Section 10 for details.)

6. DETECTORS Accesses a submenu with 7 data groups that cover vehicle detector type select and setup, a “reserved” data group, ped and system detector assignments, log interval/speed detect, vehicle/ped detector diagnostics. (See Section 11 for details.)

7. STATUS DISPLAY Accesses a submenu with 9 data groups that cover all aspects of Status Display for the entire system. (See Section 12 for details.)

8. UTILITIES Accesses a submenu with 7 data groups that cover utilities for copy, a “reserved” data group, print, transfer, sign on, log buffers, and software modules. (See Section 13 for details.)

9. DIAGNOSTIC INFO Accesses an information screen that refers you to Appendix F of this manual for instructions on loading the diagnostic file and its operation. (See Section 14 for further details.)


8 �� % � � � � *& ' ��" � � � $ �� & , ) & � � $ ��

Basic SCREEN NAVIGATION

SCREEN MM-2

CONTROLLER SUBMENU 1.TIMING PLANS 5. START/FLASH 2.VEHICLE OVERLAP 6. OPTION DATA 3.PED OVERLAP 7. ACT PRE-TIMED 4 GUAR MIN TIME 8. RECALL DATA PRESS 1...8 TO SELECT

SCREEN MM-2-6

Within this manual, as each submenu and data entry screen is discussed and programming instructions are given, an illustration of the screen is typically provided. You will note that there is a title above each such illustration, such as SCREEN MM-2-6-1. That title actually gives you the keystrokes you will use to access that screen.

Screen MM-2-6-1 is the Controller Options data entry screen. To reach that screen, no matter what screen you are presently viewing, you begin by pressing the MAIN MENU function key to bring up the Main Menu screen (Screen MM shown above).

Since you want to get to the Controller Options data entry screen, you select the

Controller data group by pressing the #2 key on the numeric keypad. That brings up the Controller Submenu screen (MM-2) shown below. You find Option Data as #6 on that list and press the #6 key to select it. The Option Data Submenu screen (MM-2-6) appears. From that 2-item menu, you select #1 (Controller Options) and the Controller Options data entry screen (MM-2-6-1) will appear.

OPTION DATA SUBMENU 1. CONTROLLER OPTIONS 2. EXTENDED OPTIONS PRESS 1...2 TO SELECT

Thus, by starting at the Main Menu screen, you can successively navigate through a number of screens (making appropriate submenu selections as you go) to get to any normally accessible desired data entry or display screen in the system.

8 �� ; � � B � $ � & *�� *& ' ��" � � � $ ��" � � ** $ ) �

Now, let’s look below at our destination data entry screen Controller Options (MM-2-6-1). When you first access it, you will see the screen shown at the left. However, because there is not enough horizontal space on the screen to show all 16 phases, you will have to scroll horizontally to view and/or edit the data for phases 9 through 16.

SCREEN MM-2-6-1 SCREEN MM-2-6-1 (Scroll) CONTROLLER OPTIONS MORE ��

PED CLEAR PROTECT................. OFF UNIT RED REVERT................... 2.0 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 GUAR PASSAGE.... . . . . . . . . NON-ACT I....... . X . . . X . . NON-ACT II...... . . . X . . . X DUAL ENTRY...... . . . . . . . . PED RESERVICE... . . . . . . . . REST IN WALK.... . . . . . . . . FLASHING WALK... . . . . . . . . PED CLR>YELLOW.. . . . . . . . . PED CLR>RED..... . . . . . . . . IGRN + VEH EXT.. . . . . . . . . PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

CONTROLLER OPTIONS MORE �� PED CLEAR PROTECT................. OFF UNIT RED REVERT................... 2.0 PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 GUAR PASSAGE.... . . . . . . . . NON-ACT I....... . . . . . . . . NON-ACT II...... . . . . . . . . DUAL ENTRY...... . . . . . . . . PED RESERVICE... . . . . . . . . REST IN WALK.... . . . . . . . . FLASHING WALK... . . . . . . . . PED CLR>YELLOW.. . . . . . . . . PED CLR>RED..... . . . . . . . . IGRN + VEH EXT.. . . . . . . . . PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

HORIZONTAL DISPLAY SCREEN SCROLLING (CONTINUED)


In the upper right corner of the screen, you’ll see the word MORE and an arrow (�) that indicates you may scroll horizontally to the right. To scroll, on the Function keypad, repeatedly press the right arrow key. As you scroll to the right, notice that both right and left arrows are visible (�, �). Notice also that only the Phase columns are scrolled, the top three lines, the data line labels, and the bottom instruction line do not scroll. When Phase 16 appears in the display, only the left arrow (� ) shows to indicate that you cannot go further right. To return to the original Phase 1 through 8 display, repeatedly press on the left arrow key.

8 �� . � �� " & *�� *& ' ��" � � � $ ��" � � ** $ ) �

SCREEN MM-1-1-2

PHASE COMPATIBILITY MORE � 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 . . . X X . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . X X . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . X X . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . X X . . . . . . . . 5 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . X X . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . X X . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . X X . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . X X . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . X X . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . X X . . . . . PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

SCREEN MM-1-1-2 (Scroll)

In a manner similar to horizontal scrolling, the Up and Down arrow keys (�,�) are used to vertically scroll a screen, as shown at the right by the Phase Compatibility screen (MM-1-1-2). In this case, the screen must be scrolled vertically to view and/or edit the compatibility data for phases 13 through 16.

PHASE COMPATIBILITY MORE �� 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 5 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . X X . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . X X . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . X X . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . X X . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . X X . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . X X . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . X X 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . X X 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . X X . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . X X . PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE


8 �� 8 � �" � � **� � # � , � ! ��**� � � � & � � $ � �

SCREEN MM-6-7 (Scroll removed) As you can see in the preceding screen illustrations, the screen views obtained by scrolling have a (Scroll) indicator in their title.

In some cases, for ease of viewing within this manual, we modify our screen illustrations that require scrolling to show the full text of the scrolled data within a single enlarged frame as shown at the right (Screen MM-6-7). Where this is done, the screen title will show a (Scroll removed) indication in the title.

DESTRIAN DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS MORE �� PED DIAGNOSTIC PLAN NUMBER [1] DET COUNTS ACT PRES MULTIPLIER 1 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 1 4 0 0 0 1 5 0 0 0 1 6 0 0 0 1 7 0 0 0 1 8 0 0 0 1 9 0 0 0 1 10 0 0 0 1 11 0 0 0 1 12 0 0 0 1 13 0 0 0 1 14 0 0 0 1 15 0 0 0 1 16 0 0 0 1 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

SCREEN MM-6-6 (Scroll removed) At other times, as shown in Screen MM-6-6 at the right, some data is edited out of the illustration (in this case detector numbers 9 through 63) where showing such a large amount of similar data would be of little value to the viewer. Again, the (Scroll removed) indication is included in the title.

VEHICLE DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS MORE � VEH DIAGNOSTIC PLAN NUMBER [1] DET COUNTS ACT PRES MULTIPLIER 1 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 1 4 0 0 0 1 5 0 0 0 1 6 0 0 0 1 7 0 0 0 1 8 0 0 0 1 . . (Detectors 9 through 63 not shown) . 64 0 0 0 1 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

8 �� 9 � � � � *& ' ��" � � � $ ��& ) � �/ � � # & � �

SCREEN MM-7-1 (Page 1) CONTROLLER STATUS: 1 OF 3�

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T/N..... . T . . . T . . . . . . . T . . VEH..... . C R N X S . . . . . . . O I D PED..... . C R N 2 A . . . . . . . O I D R1/PH 2 R2/PH 6 R3/PH 12 R4/PH 16 GRN REST VEXT 25.5 RED REST YEL 25.5 MAX3 255 GAP OUT CMD SRC NIC COS 654 ACTION PLAN 100 SYS CYC 7s PTN 64 START TIME 11:11 LOC CYC 15s FLASH STOP TIME 23:59 TLM ADD 65535 OK PATTERN 64 PREEMPTOR 1 NEXT PLAN 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 C D - I R A . - - . 01/01/01 23:50:59

For some functions where large quantities of data must to be shown, rather than scrolling, the data is formatted into separate pages. Screen MM-7-1 (shown at the right) is an example of such formatting with the indicator “1 of 3” showing that this screen consists of 3 pages.

To see the next page, press the NEXT PAGE function key (lower right of the function keypad) and page 2 of the data entry group will appear. Press the NEXT PAGE key again and page 3 is displayed. When you reach the final page of the group, pressing NEXT PAGE again will return you to the first page of the group.

Note: In this manual, the page number for each such screen will be included in the title


8 �� : � �& ) � �/ � � # & � �- � � ��" � � ** $ ) �

In some cases, individual pages within a page-formatted group may require scrolling to view/edit one or more pages within the group. Screen MM-7-2 (shown below) is an example of such a screen. As shown, when a page requires scrolling, the MORE � indicator is added to the page display and vertical scrolling is done with the Up and Down arrow keys. In this case, both pages 2 and 3 require scrolling and the pages are shown here with their scroll removed so that all of the data can be viewed.

SCREEN MM-7-2 (Page 1) SCREEN MM-7-2 (Page 3)(Scroll removed) COORDINATOR STATUS: 1 OF 3 01/01/01 00:00:00 STATUS....... FREE PATTERN........ 254 COMMAND SOURCE. NIC COMMAND CYCLE.. 0s SYSTEM CYCLE.. 0s LOCAL CYCLE.... 0S LOCAL OFFSET... 0% CORRECTION. ACTUAL OFFSET.. 0% SPLIT DEMAND... / 0 RING 1 2 3 4 HOLD APPLIED TO PHASE. . . . . FORCE OFF PHASE....... . . . . VEHICLE PERMISSIVE.... . . . . PEDESTRIAN PERMISSIVE. . . . . SPLIT COUNT DOWN...... 0s 0s 0s 0s SPLIT EXTENSION TIME.. 0s 0s 0s 0s OFFSET FROM RING 1.... 0s 0s 0s RING IN GREEN BAND.... . . . .

SPLIT PATTERN [ 1] 3 OF 3 MORE � 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 COORD PH . X . . . X . . . . . . . . . . PHASE 1 2 3 4 SPLIT.... 20 30 20 30 MODE.... NONE NONE NONE NONE PHASE 5 6 7 8 SPLIT.... 20 30 20 30 MODE.... NONE NONE NONE NONE PHASE 9 10 11 12 SPLIT.... 0 0 0 0 MODE.... NONE NONE NONE NONE PHASE 13 14 15 16 SPLIT.... 0 0 0 0 MODE.... NONE NONE NONE

SCREEN MM-7-2 (Page 2)(Scroll removed)

COORD PATTERN [ 1} 2 OF 3 MORE � TS2 (PAT-OFF).. 0-1 STD (COS)...... 111 CYCLE.......... 80s SPLIT PATTERN... 1 OFFSET VAL..... 0s SEQUENCE....... 0 SPLITS IN.. SECONDS OFFSET IN..PERCENT XART PATTERN... 0 SEQ SELECT...COORD VEH PERM 1..... 0s VEH PERM 2..... 0s VEH PERM 2 DISP 0s ACTION PLAN.... 0 ACTUATED COORD... NO TIMING PLAN.... 0 ACT WALK REST.... NO PHASE RESRVCE.. NO 1 2 3 4 RING SPLIT EXT 0s 0s 0s 0s SPLIT DEMAND PATTERN 0 0 RING DISPLACEMENT... 0% 0% 0% DIRECTED SPLIT PREFERENCE PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PREFERENCE 1.... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PREFERENCE 2.... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 PREFERENCE 1.... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PREFERENCE 2.... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SPARE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OUTPUTS . . . . . . . .

8 �� < � � � � # & **' ��$ & " " � � � + *� ��" � � � $ � �

Some display screens are not normally accessible using the keystroke approach (MM-1-2-3 etc.) that begins from the Main Menu screen. Rather, these screens are automatically displayed by the system software when their display becomes appropriate. These screens include the Power On screens and the Hardware Diagnostic screens. The Power On screens can be seen near the start of the Programming Reference Screens in Appendix B of this manual. The Hardware Diagnostic screens can be found in the Hardware Diagnostic Screens, Appendix F of this manual.


��

9 �� $ � ) � � & � � $ �� + # � $ � �

Programming Summary SCREEN MM-1

The Configuration Submenu has eight data groups as shown in the figure at the right. To view or enter data, press the keyboard number (1 through 8) corresponding to desired data group.

1. CONTROLLER SEQUENCE

Accesses the Controller Sequence submenu with four active data groups (Option 3 is reserved for future revision), Phase Ring Sequence and Assignment, Phase Compatibility, Backup Prevent, and Simultaneous Gap. The four active data group screens allow configuration of all controller sequencing functions.

5. COMMUNICATION PORTS Accesses the Communication Ports submenu with five data entry groups: Global Port Parameters, Port 2 (Terminal), Port 3A, Port 3B, and Ethernet Port. These five data groups allow setup of communications and priority of ports for commands.

2. PHASES IN USE/EXCLUSIVE PEDESTRIAN Enables phases to be used by the controller. Selects phases to act as exclusive pedestrian phases.

6. ENABLE LOGGING Accesses the Enable Logging submenu with one data group (Event Logging). Allows events and alarms to be logged in real time for later retrieval.

3. LOAD SWITCH ASSIGNMENT Assigns phase, pedestrian, and overlap outputs to the MMU load switch channels. Also selects dimming and automatic flash options.

7. DISPLAY/ACCESS Accesses the Display/Access submenu with two data groups (Administration and Display Options). Allows enabling of supervisor functions, keypad, and display backlight options.

4. PORT 1 (SDLC) Accesses the Port 1 (SDLC) submenu with three data groups: SDLC Options, MMU Program, and Color Check Disable.

8. LOGIC PROCESSOR Accesses the Logic Processor submenu with two data groups: Logic Statement Control and Logic Statements.

CONFIGURATION SUBMENU 1. CONTROLLER SEQUENCE 2. PHASES IN USE / EXCLUSIVE PED 3. LOAD SWITCH ASSIGNMENT 4. PORT 1(SDLC) 5. COMMUNICATION PORTS 6. ENABLE LOGGING 7. DISPLAY/ACCESS 8. LOGIC PROCESSOR PRESS 1..8 TO SELECT


9 �% � �� $ � � � **� � �� 0 � � $ " � �� + # � $ � �

WARNING DO NOT change the controller sequencing while the controller is in operation on the street. This should

be done only during flash or bench tests.

Programming Summary

From the Configuration Submenu (screen MM-1), press key #1 to select the Controller Sequence submenu. The Controller Sequence Submenu (screen MM-1-1) lists four active sequence data groups (Option 3 is reserved for future system releases).

From the Controller Sequence Submenu, press a number key (1-5) to select the desired data entry group. Each data entry group represented in this submenu is briefly described in the following paragraphs.

SCREEN MM-1-1

1. PHASE RING SEQUENCE AND ASSIGNMENT Assigns phase sequences and phases to the rings that they time in.

4. BACKUP PREVENT Assigns phases that are prevented from backing up. Also selects the action that is to take ring when a phase needs to backup.

2. PHASE COMPATIBILITY Assigns the compatibility of phases. Compatibility is defined as those phases that can time together.

5. SIMULTANEOUS GAP Assigns phases that must gap at the same time to allow servicing a conflicting phase

3. RESERVED For future system releases.

CONTROLLER SEQUENCE SUBMENU 1. PHASE RING SEQUENCE AND ASSIGNMENT 2. PHASE COMPATIBILITY 3. RESERVED 4. BACKUP PREVENT 5. SIMULTANEOUS GAP PRESS 1..5 TO SELECT


9 �% �� & � � � $ ) �� 0 � � $ " � �& $ ! �� ) $ # � $ � ��

WARNING DO NOT change the controller sequencing while the controller is in operation on the street. This should

be done only during flash or bench tests.

SCREEN MM-1-1-1 (Standard Quad Shown)

Programs the sequence of phases in each of the four rings. 1. Position cursor at a location beneath the

phase to be assigned, then press a number key (1-4) to assign the phase to the specified ring.

2. Phase Ring assignments can be made in any order.

3. Entering 0 (Zero) removes the phase ring assignment.

4. All phase sequences must be compatible with this phase ring assignment programming.

PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE PHASE 1-16 RING

Defines the ring that phases are to time in.

WARNING DO NOT change ring assignments while the controller is in operation in the field. Change this parameter ONLY during flash or bench tests.

1-4 assigns phase to ring.

0 removes phase from ring assign.

9 �% �% � �� & � � �� # � & � + * � ' ��

SCREEN MM-1-1-2 (Standard Quad Shown) (Scroll Removed)

Phase compatibility defines the phases that can time concurrently (together). 1. Pressing the Toggle (0) key alternately selects

(X) or deselects (".") the phases that are compatible (allowed to time concurrently).

2. Phases in the same ring cannot be compatible. Only phases in different rings can be compatible.

3. Phase compatibility must be entered twice to ensure that the compatible phases are cross-checked against two separate entries so as to comply with the NTCIP 1202 structure.

Example: Phases 1 and 5 are compatible. Therefore, Phase 1 is marked with an X at the Phase 5 position and Phase 5 is marked with an X at the Phase 1 position.

PHASE COMPATIBILITY MORE �� 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 . . . X X . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . X X . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . X X . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . X X . . . . . . . . 5 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . X X . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . X X . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . X X . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . X X . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . X X . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . X X . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . X X 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . X X 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . X X . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . X X . PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

PHASE RING ASSIGNMENT MORE � DATA FOR CONTROLLER[ 1]AND SEQUENCE[ 1] HARDWARE ALTERNATE SEQUENCE ENABLE.. NO COPY TO FOLLOWING SEQUENCES......... . RING 1 1 2 3 4 9 10 13 14 . . . RING 2 5 6 7 8 11 12 15 16 . . . RING 3 . . . . . . . . . . . RING 4 . . . . . . . . . . . INFORMATION ONLY PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RING............1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 RING........... 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE


9 �% �� , � ! �

SCREEN MM-1-1-3 This screen is reserved for system future releases.

9 �% �. � 6 & " ( � � �� , � $ � �� & � � � �

SCREEN MM-1-1-4


A backup condition occurs when a phase is at rest and there is a call on a specified phase in the same ring. The Backup Prevent Phases screen programs the action that is to take place when a backup condition occurs.

Press the Toggle (0) key to alternately inhibit (X) or enable (B or ".") service to a backup phase from the current phase. Backup (B) will be through an enabled (C) phase or red revert. “.” Allows normal non-restricted phase rotation.

In the standard Quad example shown:

Phases 2/6 will backup through all-red in response to a call on phase 1 or 5.

Phases 4/8 will backup through phase 2/6 in response to a call on phase 3 or 7.

Phases 10/12 will not backup in response to a call on phase 9 or 10.

Phases 14/16 will time nominally in response to calls on any phase.

PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE X X Inhibits the controller from servicing the BACKUP (column) phase

when the "TIMING" (row) phase is active or next. X inhibits

B without C "B" without a "C" programmed for the timing phase, inhibits the controller from servicing the 'BACKUP" phase when the "TIMING" phase is active or next until the controller goes through red revert as described in NEMA TS2 3.5.5.7 and RED CLEAR as described in NEMA TS2 3.5.4.2.

B without C Inhibits

B with C "B" with a "C" programmed for the timing phase, places a demand on that "BACKUP" (column) phase. The controller will then service the called phase and proceed normally.

B with C enables

9 �% �8 � � # � *� & $ � � � � ��& � �� & � � � �

Press the Toggle (0) key to select (X) or deselect (".") SCREEN MM-1-1-5

BACKUP PREVENT PHASES MORE � BACKUP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 TIMING 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . B . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . C B . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . X . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . X . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

BACKUP PREVENT PHASES MORE � BACKUP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 TIMING 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . C B . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . B . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . C B . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . X . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . X . . . . PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

RESERVED FOR FUTURE RELEASE



the phases that are to gap together. Each row associates a phase (“row” phase) with the phases (“column” phases) it must simultaneously gap with when terminating together to service a conflicting demand. If the “row” phase is terminating to service a phase that is permissive with the “column” phases, then it will not wait to gap simultaneously with the “column” phases. If a “column” phase is not selected, it is allowed to gap independently with the “row” phase.

From the Controller Sequence submenu (MM-1-1), select Option #5 Simultaneous Gap and the Simultaneous Gap Phases screen (MM-1-1-5) appears.

1. Use the Toggle (0) key to insert an “X” or “.” where appropriate.

2. “X” indicates that when the row and column phases are required to terminate together because of Phase Compatibility (ref. MM-1-1-2), they must gap together.

3. “.” indicates that when the row and column phases are required to terminate together because of Phase Compatibility (ref. MM-1-1-2), they gap independently.

In the Quad example shown:

Phases 1/5, 1/6, 2/5, and 2/6 gap together in response to a demand on phases 3, 4, 7-16.

Phases 3/7, 3/8, 4/7, and 4/8 gap together in response to a demand on phases 1, 2, 5, 6, 9-16.

Phases 9/11, 9/12, 10/11, and 10/12 gap together in response to a demand on phases 1-8, 13-16.

Phases 13-16 do not gap together in response to a demand on phases 1-12.

PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE X X on a ("row") phase requires that it gaps with the ("column")

phase when terminating together to service a conflicting demand. If the either phase is terminating to service a phase that is permissive with the other/s then it will not wait to gap simultaneously with the "column" phase/s.

X selects “.” deselects

“.” "." on the ("row") phase allows it to gap independently with the ("column") phase.

SIMULTANEOUS GAP PHASES MORE � PHASE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MUST 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . X X . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . X X . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . X X . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . X X . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . X X . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . X X . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X X 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X X 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . X X . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . X X . . DISABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

SIMULTANEOUS GAP PHASES MORE � PHASE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MUST 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 GAP 1 . . . . X X . . . . . . . . . . WITH 2 . . . . X X . . . . . . . . . . PHASE 3 . . . . . . X X . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . X X . . . . . . . . 5 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . X X . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . X X . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . X X . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . X X . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . X X . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . X X . . . . . . PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE


9 �� & � � � � $ �� A " *� � , � �� ! � � � � & $ �

9 �� & � � � � $ ��

Phases must be programmed "IN USE" to be active and able to use any assigned functions. This allows phases to be omitted from use without having to remove them from the phase sequence, phase compatibility, phase ring sequence, applying phase omit, deleting the assignment of detectors and/or recall functions through various data entry pages. When the phase is needed, it can be selected as active.

In the following example, the sixteen phase quad is reduced to a standard eight phase quad.

SCREEN MM-1-2 1. Select #2 (Phases In Use/Exclusive

Pedestrian) from the Configuration Submenu.

2. Use the Toggle key to select phase(s) in use. Select with X under Phases 1-8 next to the IN USE parameter. “.” Deselects.

9 �� % � �A " *� � , � �� ! � � � � & $ � # $ ) �

Applications that require phases only to time pedestrian intervals are programmed as Exclusive Pedestrian. An example is diagonal pedestrian crossings at an intersection where vehicle traffic is stopped in all directions and only pedestrian intervals are displayed to allow pedestrian traffic to cross in any number of directions at one time.

In this example, Phase 9 has been added to the eight phase standard quad as an exclusive pedestrian movement.

SCREEN MM-1-2 1. Select #2 (Phases In Use/Exclusive

Pedestrian) from the Configuration Submenu.

2. Use the Toggle (0) key to select exclusive pedestrian phase(s). Press key to indicate X under desired phase next to EXCLUSIVE PED parameter.

3. Enter pedestrian interval timing values as needed (Controller Submenu, Timing Data).

PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE

PHASES IN USE Indicates phases to be active. A phase times intervals only when it is in use so phases not selected are omitted from controller operation.

X enables “.” disables

EXCLUSIVE PED

Phases timing only pedestrian intervals without concurrent vehicle movement


PHASES IN USE/EXCLUSIVE PEDESTRIAN PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 IN USE....... X X X X X X X X EXCLUSIVE PED . . . . . . . . PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 IN USE....... X . . . . . . . EXCLUSIVE PED X . . . . . . . PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

PHASES IN USE/EXCLUSIVE PEDESTRIAN PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 IN USE....... X X X X X X X X EXCLUSIVE PED . . . . . . . . PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 IN USE....... . . . . . . . . EXCLUSIVE PED . . . . . . . . PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE


9 �. � �� & ! ��- � " � �� ) $ # � $ � �1� � ��; �� 2�

SCREEN MM-1-3 (Scroll removed)

DIMMING (D): Selects the positive 1/2 cycle (“+”) or the negative 1/2 cycle (“-“) for dimming.

NOTE: When dimming, the indication load current should be balanced for the positive and negative 1/2 cycles of the AC line.

AUTO FLASH (R, Y): Defines the color to be flashed at 1pps when Remote (Automatic) Flash is requested.

AUTO FLASH (TOGETHER): Defines the indications that will be on at the same time during Remote (Automatic) Flash.

NOTE: When flashing, the indication load current should be balanced between the “X” and “.” Indications

PHASE / OVLP: 1-16 assigns phase 1-16 or overlap A-P (respectively) indications (Green/Walk, Yellow/Ped Clear and Red/ Don’t Walk) to that load switch and MMU channel. Zero (0) deselects.

This assignment applies only to TS2 operation with a TS2 MMU. It provides the assignment of and correlation between the indication and MMU channel for verifying that the load switch output sensed by the MMU corresponds to the BIU command.

TYPE: V, O, P: Assigns the source of that load switch as a Vehicle, Overlap or Pedestrian indication (Walk, Pedestrian Clear, and Don't Walk) to that load switch and MMU channel. “.” Deselects.

This assignment applies only to TS2 operation with a TS2 MMU. It provides the assignment of and correlation between the indication and MMU channel for verifying that the load switch output sensed by the MMU corresponds to the BIU command.

ECPI Feature: This assignment also allows the controller to redundantly check and verify the load switch outputs indications as sensed by the MMU are as it commanded.

DIMMING (R,Y,G): X: Selects the load switch indication(s) that are to be dimmed when dimming is enabled. ".": Inhibits dimming of the load switch indication(s) when dimming is enabled.

LD SWITCH ASSIGN (MMU CHANNEL) MORE � PHASE DIMMING AUTO FLASH /OVLP TYPE R Y G D R Y TOGETHER 1 1 V X . X + X . X 2 15 O X . X - . X . 3 1 P . . X + X . . 4 . . . . . + X . . 5 . . . . . + X . . 6 . . . . . + . X . 7 . . . . . + X . . 8 . . . . . + X . . 9 . . . . . + . . . 10 . . . . . + . . . 11 . . . . . + . . . 12 . . . . . + . . . 13 . . . . . + . . . 14 . . . . . + . . . 15 . . . . . + . . . 16 . . . . . + . . . PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE


9 �8 � �� 1��2�� + # � $ � ��

SCREEN MM-1-4 From the Configuration Submenu (screen MM-1), press the #4 key to select the Port 1 (SDLC) submenu (screen MM-1-4) which lists three Port 1 data groups.

From the Port 1 (SDLC) Submenu, press a number key (1- 3) to select the desired data entry group. Each data entry group in this submenu is briefly described in the following paragraphs.

9 �8 �� $ � �

SCREEN MM-1-4-1 General

TS2 controllers use the Port 1 controller interface which connects to the Malfunction Management Unit (MMU), Terminals and Facilities (TF), and/or Detector (DET) rack. Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) protocol is used to communicate with various devices where the controller is the master and BIUs and MMU are slaves. Only the controller can send or request data from the BIUs or MMU. Up to eight TF BIUs, eight DET rack BIUs, and one MMU can be attached to the controller network.

WARNING

Incorrect programming of TF BIUs or MMU Enable can result in immediate intersection flash. Terminal and Facilities –Toggle to enable TF BIUs when the controller is operating in a NEMA TS2 Type 1 cabinet.

Detector – Toggle to enable DET BIUs when the controller is operating in a NEMA TS2 Type 1 or Type 2 cabinet.

Peer-to-Peer Communication – Toggle to enable Peer-to-Peer communications when the controller is operating in a NEMA TS2 Type 1 or Type 2 cabinet. When Peer-to-Peer communication is enabled the controller checks each device for communication requests. When a request is present the controller receives and transmits information from one device to the other.

1. Use Toggle key to enable (X) peer-to-peer communication. 2. Use keyboard numeric keys to enter a unique address for each device used in network. Address

assignment enables and a zero entry disables device communication. Do not enable a device if not physically present in the network.

SDLC OPTIONS TERM & FACILITY.. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ENABLE........... X X . . . . . . PEER TO PEER EN.. . . . . . . . . DETECTOR......... 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ENABLE........... X . . . . . . . PEER TO PEER EN.. . . . . . . . . MMU ENABLE.......................... YES MMU STOP TIME....................... NO DIAGNOSTIC (TEST FIXTURE) ENABLE.... NO CONTROLLER PEER TO PEER ENABLE...... NO DISABLE 3 CRITICAL RFE’S LOCKUP..... NO TOGGLE TO CHANGE

PORT 1 (SDLC) SUBMENU 1. SDLC OPTIONS 2. MMU PROGRAM 3. COLOR CHECK DISABLE


SDLC Options (Continued) MMU Enable – Toggle to select YES for NEMA TS2 installations and select NO for NEMA TS1 installations.

• For a NEMA TS2 Type 1 installation, TF BIUs are enabled and the MMU communication is enabled regardless of this programming.

• For a TS2 Type 2 installation, (no TF BIUs enabled) the MMU must be enabled. • For a NEMA TS1 installation, (no TF BIUs, DET BIUs, or MMU enabled).

MMU Stop Time – (NOTE - The MMU must be enabled for this option to be useable.) Use Toggle key to select YES to enable the MMU FAIL (output relay transferred) response to stop time the controller. Select NO to disable MMU FAIL response from stopping the controller timing. This option allows a cabinet STOP TIME: AUTO-OFF-ON switch to control the TF BIU stop time and/or the TS2 connector stop time inputs.

Diagnostic (Test Feature) – Toggle to enter YES to enable or NO to disable communication with a test fixture that responds to the TS2 defined frame 30. An error is logged, if enabled, when not connected to a test fixture.

Controller Peer-to-Peer Enable – Toggle to select YES to enable or NO to disable peer-to-peer communications with this controller as a secondary station via the RS-485 SDLC link.

Disable 3 Critical RFEs Lockup – Toggle to select YES to disable the lockup feature that occurs when 3 critical Response Frame Errors (RFEs) occur or NO to allow such lockups to occur.


TERM & FACIL 1-8

TERM and FACIL 1-8 refers the Terminal and Facilities (TF) BIUs #1-8. TF BIUs #1-8 correspond to TS2 BIUs 1-8 respectively. Each BIU provides an interface between the controller’s serial RS-485 SDLC link and discrete NEMA level I/O ports.

1-4 usable BIUs 5-8 spare or reserved

T&F BIUs ENABLE

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) TF BIUs. TF BIUs #1-4 are defined by NEMA, #5-6 are reserved by NEMA, and #7-8 are spare (mfg. specific).


T&F PEER-PEER ENABLE

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) peer-to-peer communications with secondary stations via the RS-485 SDLC link. X enables

“.” disables

DETECTOR 1-8 DETECTOR 1-8 refers the Detector (DET) rack #1-8. DET BIUs #1-8 correspond to TS2 BIUs 9-16 respectively. Each BIU provides an interface between the controller’s serial RS-485 SDLC link and discrete NEMA level I/O ports.

1-4 usable BIUs 5-8 spare or reserved

DETECTOR BIUs ENABLE

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) DET BIUs. BIUs #1-4 are defined by NEMA, #5-6 are reserved by NEMA, and #7-8 are spare (mfg. specific).


DETECTOR PEER-PEER ENABLE

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) peer-to-peer communications with secondary stations via the RS-485 SDLC link. X enables

“.” Disables


SDLC Options (Continued) PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE MMU ENABLE Toggle to enable (YES) or disable (NO) MMU read back

capabilities of detection and response to improper and conflicting signals and improper operating voltages. Disable when other monitoring device is used.

NOTE: If the intersection is equipped with an MMU that has Monitor (FM) latch programmed, the monitor power-on flash time must be set to 9 seconds or larger.

YES enables NO disables

MMU STOP TIME Toggle to select YES to enable the MMU FAIL (output relay transferred) response to stop time the controller. Select NO to disable MMU FAIL response from stopping the controller timing. This option allows a cabinet STOP TIME: AUTO-OFF-ON switch to control the TF BIU stop time and/or the TS2 connector stop time inputs.

NOTE: The MMU must be enabled for this option to be useable.


DIAGNOSTIC (TEST FIXTURE) ENABLE

Toggle to select YES to enable or NO to disable communication with a test fixture that responds to the TS2 defined frame 30. An error is logged, if enabled, when not connected to a test fixture.


CONTROLLER PEER-PEER ENABLE

Toggle to select YES to enable or NO to disable peer-to-peer communications with this controller as a secondary station via the RS-485 SDLC link.


DISABLE 3 CRITICAL RFE’S LOCKUP

Toggle to select YES to disable the lockup feature that occurs when 3 critical Response Frame Errors (RFEs) occur or NO to allow such lockups to occur.

YES disables NO enables


9 �8 �% � � � �� ) � & # �

SCREEN MM-1-4-2


General

While viewing the Port 1 (SDLC) Submenu screen (MM-1-4), press numeric key 2 to select MMU PROGRAM and the scrollable MMU Program screen shown on the right appears.

The MMU Program provides redundant checking of compatibility and verifies that the MMU program card is compatible with the controller programming.

With all channels disabled ("."), the controller computes an internal compatibility program. The MMU program may be more, but not less restrictive than this computed compatibility. If it is not, the controller will cause the Fault and Voltage Monitor to force outputs inactive.

With any channel enabled (X), the programmed compatibility program must EXACTLY match the MMU compatibility.

Selecting X enables channel compatibility. These channels can have their Green (or Walk) or Yellow (or pedestrian clearance) indications on at the same time.

Selecting “.” Disables compatibility. These channels cannot have their Green or Yellow indications on at the same time.

The MMU program card is pre-programmed and installed in the cabinet. The same program specified by the jumpers on the MMU program card can be entered at the controller using this MMU program option. If no entries are made for this MMU program, the controller attempts to compute the correct MMU program. In either case, the controller MMU program is compared to the pre-programmed MMU program on the card. If the programs are incompatible, the controller generates a compatibility program fault that will result in flash.

Please note that the layout of the MMU program screen (MM-1-4-2) and the layout of the MMU program card are not the same. Make sure that compatible MMU channels on the MMU program card and the program entries in the MMU data entry screen are the same.

Phase Assignment

1. Make note of the MMU program card program. Note: not all MMU program cards may be programmed in the same way and therefore may not be interchangeable.

2. Copy the MMU program to this screen by entering an X for the appropriate channel assignments. The channels listed on the far left of the screen can time with the channels listed across the top of the screen, which are assigned by X. Do not program while the intersection is in operation.

3. Verify that the controller program and MMU program match exactly. If they do not match, the intersection will go into flash.

MMU PROGRAM MORE �� CHANNEL CAN SERVE WITH 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CHANNEL 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 6 . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . 11 . . . . . 12 . . . . 13 . . . 14 . . 15 . PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

MMU PROGRAM MORE �� CHANNEL CAN SERVE WITH 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CHANNEL 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 . . . . . . . . . . X X . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . X X . . 3 . . . . . . . . X X . . . 4 . . . . . . . . X X . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . 11 . . . . . PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE


MMU Program (Continued) WARNING

The controller cannot be operational in the intersection when this screen is being programmed. ANY DIFFERENCE between this screen and the MMU compatibility results in immediate flash.


MMU Program Channel Can Serve With:

This option is used to verify controller program compatibility with the MMU program card at the cabinet thus insuring that the MMU program card has the correct program for the intersection.

Entries made must match the MMU program exactly. If no entries are made for this option, the controller attempts to compute the correct MMU program. In either case, the controller MMU program is compared to the pre-programmed MMU program on the card. If the programs are incompatible, the controller generates a compatibility program fault, which results in flash.

The appearance (layout) of the MMU program screen (MM-1-4-2) and the layout of the MMU program card are not the same. Make sure that compatible MMU channels are correct on the MMU program card and in the MMU data entry screen.

X selects “.” deselects

9 �8 �� *� � �� " ( �� & + *� �

SCREEN MM-1-4-3 General

While viewing the Port 1 (SDLC) Submenu screen (MM-1-4), press the #3 key to select the Color Check Disable option and the screen shown on the right appears.

This screen allows selective color checks to be performed on some or all of the 16 MMU channels. By using the YES option in the DISABLE ALL COLOR CHECKS line, all color checking can be disabled.


DISABLE ALL COLOR CHECKS

Use Toggle (numeric 0) key to select YES and all color checks by the controller will be disabled. Select NO and color checks can be performed.

YES disables all checks NO allows checks

MMU CHANNEL If the Disable All Color Checks Color line is marked NO, a “.” allows the MMU channel indication to be color checked by the controller and an X prevents the channel indication from being color checked. Thus, an X allows an unused MMU channel indication not to be checked by the controller

“.” allows channel check X prevents channel check

COLOR CHECK DISABLE DISABLE ALL COLOR CHECKS........... NO Disable (X) / Enable (.) MMU CHANNEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 GRN/WLK.. . . . . . . . . YEL/PC... . . . . . . . . RED/DW... . . . . . . . . MMU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CHANNEL 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 GRN/WLK.. . . . . . . . . YEL/PC... . . . . . . . . RED/DW... . . . . . . . . PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE


9 �9 � �� # # � $ " & � � $ �� + # � $ � �

SCREEN MM-1-5 While viewing the Configuration Submenu screen (MM-1), press the #5 key to select the Communication Ports option submenu screen (MM-1-5). This submenu lists five Communication Ports data groups.

From the Communication Ports Submenu, press a number key (1-5) to select the desired data entry group. Each data entry group in this submenu is described in the following paragraphs.

9 �9 �� *� + & *�� & � & # � � � � � �

SCREEN MM-1-5-1 Port parameters define the NTCIP backup time and priority of the port communications. This programming is only required when the controller is communicating through one of it’s ports.

From the Communication Ports Submenu (MM-1-5), press the #1 key to access the Global Port Parameters screen (MM-1-5-1). From this screen the NTCIP Backup Time parameters and Ports 2, 3A, 3B, and Ethernet Priority values can be specified.

PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE NTCIP BACKUP TIME

Use numeric keys (0-9) to enter the appropriate NTCIP Backup Time value in seconds. Value entered (1-65535) establishes the time that the parameters are under control of the “SET” command and will remain if no “SET” command is received by the controller. Value 0 disables clearing of the parameters that were set regardless of the time between “SET” commands.

0 disables 1-65535 sets time

PORTS 2, 3A, 3B, AND ETHERNET PRIORITY

Use numeric keys (0-9) to enter appropriate priority level value (1-4, with 1 highest) for the port. Value selects the priority of commands from that port. While a higher priority port is in control, the lower priority port can continue to retrieve status information. The order of priority when two or more have the same priority number is (from highest to lowest) Ethernet, Port 2, Port 3A, then Port 3B.

1-4, with 1 highest

GLOBAL PORT PARAMETERS NTCIP BACKUP TIME (in seconds).... 0 PORT 2 PRIORITY..................... 0 PORT 3A PRIORITY.................... 0 PORT 3B PRIORITY.................... 0 ETHERNET PRIORITY................... 0 PRESS 0..9 TO CHANGE

COMMUNICATION PORTS SUBMENU 1. GLOBAL PORT PARAMETERS 2. PORT 2 (TERMINAL) 3. PORT 3A (TELEMETRY) 4. PORT 3B 5. ETHERNET PORT PRESS 1..5 TO SELECT


9 �9 �% � �� % �1 � � # $ & *2�

SCREEN MM-1-5-2


This port provides for the EIA-232 terminal communications required by NEMA TS2.

From the Communication Ports Submenu screen (MM-1-5) press the #2 key to access the Port 2 (Terminal) screen (MM-1-5-2).

Protocol Selection

Terminal - Provides VT100 compatible connection between the controller and computers, printers, or modems.

ECPIP - Provides an ECPIP compatible connection between computers, modems, and Zone Masters. This protocol is tailored to function in an Econolite Aries or Zone Master system.

NTCIP - Provides an NTCIP compatible connection between computers and modems. This protocol is tailored to function in an NTCIP system.

AB3418 - Provides an AB3418 compatible connection between computers and modems. This protocol is tailored to comply with the California AB3418 specification.

PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE PROTOCOL Toggle to select TERMINAL, NTCIP, ECPIP, or AB3418

protocol, as appropriate.

NOTE: Regardless of the protocol selected, if a modem is going to be connected, a null-modem adaptor or cable may be required.

TERMINAL, NTCIP, ECPIP, or AB3418

ENABLE Toggle to enable (YES) or disable (NO) PORT 2 operations.

NOTE: The port should not be enabled during setup or non-use.


DATA RATE (BPS)

Toggle to select the data transfer rate from range values provided. Rate is in bps. Port 2 default value is 9600.

1200, 4800, 9600, 19.2K, 38.4K, 57.6K, or 115.2K

DATA, PARITY, STOP

TOGGLE to select: 8N1, 8Z1, 8E1 or 7E1

• Data bits of 7 or 8. • Parity E=Even, Z=Odd or N=None. • Stop bits 1.

The selected value applies only when the communication protocol is either TERMINAL or NTCIP. AB3418 automatically selects 8N1 and ECPIP automatically selects 8Z1.

8N1, 8Z1, 8E1, or 7E1

PORT 2 (TERMINAL) MORE � PROTOCOL....................... TERMINAL ENABLE......................... NO DATA RATE (BPS)................ 9600 DATA, PARITY, STOP............. 8 N 1 MODEM SETUP STRING............. NONE USER STRING. . TELEMETRY RESPONSE DELAY (in ms).... 0.0 DUPLEX – HALF OR FULL.............. HALF AB3418 / NTCIP GROUP ADDRESS....... 0 AB3418 / NTCIP SINGLE FLAG ENABLE.. NO RTS TO CTS DELAY (in ms)........... 0.0 RTS TURN OFF DELAY (in ms)......... 0.0 DROP-OUT TIME (in seconds)......... 10 EARLY RTS....................... NO PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

PORT 2 (TERMINAL) MORE � PROTOCOL....................... TERMINAL ENABLE......................... NO DATA RATE (BPS)................ 9600 DATA, PARITY, STOP............. 8 N 1 MODEM SETUP STRING............. NONE USER STRING. COMM. PORT ADDRESS.................. 0 SYSTEM DETECTOR 9-16 ADDRESS......... 0 TELEMETRY RESPONSE DELAY (in ms).... 0.0 DUPLEX – HALF OR FULL.............. HALF AB3418 / NTCIP GROUP ADDRESS.... 0 AB3418 / NTCIP SINGLE FLAG ENABLE.... NO RTS TO CTS DELAY (in ms)........... 0.0 RTS TURN OFF DELAY (in ms)......... 0.0 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE


PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE MODEM SETUP STRING

Toggle to select one of the internal modem setup string options (NONE, 56K, or USER).

NONE, 56K, USER

USER STRING Specifies the unique modem setup string required for the modem being used. This string is only used if the MODEM SETUP STRING is set to USER.

The keyboard is in alphanumeric data entry mode when in this field. Consult the manual for your modem to determine the setup string required.

0-9, A-Z

COMM PORT ADDRESS

NON-ECPI Protocol: Use numeric keys (0-9) to specify a unique address number (1-65535) to which this port will respond. Zero (0) disables responding to any address.

ECPIP Protocol: 1-24 programs the address to which this port will respond. 0 and 25-65535 disables communication responses from this port.

Non-ECPI 1-65535 address 0 disables ECPIP 1-24 address 0 and 25-65535 disables

SYSTEM DETECTOR 9-16 ADDRESS

When PROTOCOL is set to ECPIP, use numeric keys (0-9) to specify a unique address (1-24) to allow the Zone Master to access system detectors 9-16. This address must be one of the 24 addresses available on the Zone Master system. Zero (0) disables access to system detectors 9-16.

NOTE: System detectors 1-8 do not require an address separate from that of the controller.

0 disable 1-24 enable

TELEMETRY RESPONSE DELAY

Telemetry Response Delay (TRD) compensates response timing for overall communication delays. Decrease (start communication earlier) to compensate for longer delays and increase (start communication later) to compensate for shorter delays. For Port 2, set the TRD for a Zone Master system as follows:

Y.Z msec when using an RS-232 interface with fiber optic interconnect at 1200 bps.

C.D msec when using an RS-232 interface with fiber optic interconnect at 9600 bps.

0.0-25.5 msec

DUPLEX HALF OR FULL

CAUTION: Please consult with the factory before changing this setting.

As required by modem specifications, the port may be con-figured as Half or Full Duplex. Toggle to select HALF or FULL.

HALF duplex can receive data only after transmission of a response is complete.

FULL duplex can receive and transmit data at the same time.

HALF/FULL


PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE AB3418 / NTCIP GROUP ADDRESS

Use the numeric keys (0-9) to specify an address number that allows a master station to access this slave station via group command of NTCIP protocol.

1-62 and 64-65535 for AB3418.

1-62 for NTCIP.

Address 63 is reserved as an “all stations” group address.

Address zero (0) excludes the station from any group.

0-65535 except 63

AB3418 / NTCIP SINGLE FLAG ENABLE

Toggle to select YES (enable) or NO (disable).

YES: The frame flag is used as both the closing flag for one frame and the opening flag for the next frame.

NO: Each response frame contains an opening and a closing flag.

YES - NO

RTS TO CTS DELAY

Use numeric keys (0-9) to specify the amount of delay (in milliseconds) between Request To Send (RTS) and Clear To Send (CTS). (0-9) to specify the amount of delay (in milliseconds) between RTS and CTS. Delay between the RTS and CTS is required by some communication devices. This period of time after RTS is applied prior to sending data for transmission. RTS is turned on and timing begins at the end of the telemetry response delay or a response is ready for transmission, whichever is greater.

0-381 milliseconds

RTS TURN OFF DELAY

Use numeric keys (0-9) to specify the amount of delay (in milliseconds) between Request To Send (RTS) and Clear To Send (CTS). (0-9) to specify the amount of delay (in milliseconds) between RTS and CTS. Delay between the RTS and CTS is required by some communication devices. This period of time after RTS is applied prior to sending data for transmission. RTS is turned on and timing begins at the end of the telemetry response delay or a response is ready for transmission, whichever is greater.

0-681 milliseconds

DROP-OUT TIME Use the numeric keys (0-9) to enter the time in seconds (1-65535) from when the last valid command occurs before the controller is returned to local control. Zero (0) disables the dropout feature.

1-65535 seconds 0 disables

EARLY RTS Toggle to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the Early RTS function.

YES: RTS is turned on when the telemetry response delay begins. This minimizes overall response time, if Telemetry Response Delay is not zero, by using that delay time as part of the RTS to CTS delay. RTS is not turned on early if Telemetry Response Delay is zero.

NO: RTS is off during timing of Telemetry Response Delay. This can be a minimum turnaround delay for half-duplex operation.

YES enable NO prevent


9 �9 �� 1 ��% � % � � *� # � � � ' 2�

SCREEN MM-1-5-3


This port provides for EIA-232 serial communications through the NEMA-defined Port 3 connector (reference NEMA TS2 3.3.3). This adapts the controller to operate in place of an ASC/2 equipped with an RS 232 telemetry module.

Protocol Selection








TERMINAL, NTCIP, ECPIP, or AB3418

ENABLE Toggle to enable (YES) or disable (NO) PORT 3A operations.

NOTE: The port should not be enabled during setup or non-use.


DATA RATE (BPS)

Toggle to select the data transfer rate from the range of values provided. Rate is in bps. Port 3A default value is 9600.

1200, 4800, 9600, 19.2K, 38.4K, 57.6K, or 115.2K

DATA, PARITY, STOP



The selected value applies only when the communication protocol is either TERMINAL or NTCIP. AB3418 should select 8N1 and ECPIP should select 8Z1.

8N1, 8Z1, 8E1, or 7E1

PORT 3A MORE � PROTOCOL....................... TERMINAL ENABLE......................... NO DATA RATE (BPS)................ 9600 DATA, PARITY, STOP............. 8 N 1 MODEM SETUP STRING............. NONE USER STRING. . TELEMETRY RESPONSE DELAY (in ms)... 0.0 DUPLEX – HALF OR FULL.............. HALF AB3418 / NTCIP GROUP ADDRESS....... 0 AB3418 / NTCIP SINGLE FLAG ENABLE.. NO RTS TO CTS DELAY (in ms)........... 0.0 RTS TURN OFF DELAY (in ms)......... 0.0 DROP OUT TIME (in seconds)......... 10 EARLY RTS....................... NO PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

PORT 3A MORE � PROTOCOL....................... TERMINAL ENABLE......................... NO DATA RATE (BPS)................ 9600 DATA, PARITY, STOP............. 8 N 1 MODEM SETUP STRING............. NONE USER STRING. COMM PORT ADDRESS.................... 0 SYSTEM DETECTOR 9-16 ADDRESS......... 0 TELEMETRY RESPONSE DELAY (in ms).... 0.0 DUPLEX – HALF or FULL.............. HALF AB3418 / NTCIP GROUP ADDRESS.... 0 AB3418 / NTCIP SINGLE FLAG ENABLE.... NO RTS TO CTS DELAY (in ms)........... 0.0 RTS TURN OFF DELAY (in ms)......... 0.0 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE




NONE, 56K, USER


The keyboard is in alphanumeric data entry mode when in this field. Consult the manual for your modem to determine the setup string required.

0-9, A-Z

COMM PORT ADDRESS

NON-ECPI Protocol: Use numeric keys (0-9) to specify a unique address number (1-65535) that allows a master station to access this slave station. Zero (0) disables responding to any address.








Telemetry Response Delay (TRD) compensates response timing for overall communication delays. Decrease (start communication earlier) to compensate for longer delays and increase (start communication later) to compensate for shorter delays. For Port 3A, set the TRD for a Zone Master system as follows:

Y.Z msec when using an RS-232 interface with fiber optic interconnect at 1200 bps.

C.D msec when using an RS-232 interface with fiber optic interconnect at 9600 bps.

0.0-25.5 msec

DUPLEX HALF OR FULL


As required by modem specifications, the port may be configured as Half or Full Duplex. Toggle to select HALF or FULL.



HALF/FULL


PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE AB3418 / NTCIP GROUP ADDRESS


1-62 and 64-65535 for AB3418.

1-62 for NTCIP.

Address 63 is reserved as an “all stations” group address.

Address zero (0) excludes the station from any group.

0-65535 except 63


Toggle to select enable (YES) or disable (NO).



YES - NO

RTS TO CTS DELAY

Use the numeric keys Use numeric keys (0-9) to specify the amount of delay (in milliseconds) between Request To Send (RTS) and Clear To Send (CTS). (0-9) to specify the amount of delay (in milliseconds) between RTS and CTS.Delay between the RTS and CTS is required by some communication devices. This period of time after RTS is applied prior to sending data for transmission. RTS is turned on and timing begins at the end of the telemetry response delay or a response is ready for transmission, whichever is greater.

0-381 milliseconds

RTS TURN OFF DELAY

RTS turn-off delay is a timed interval required by some communication devices to keep RTS applied after the last character in a frame is transmitted. For Port 3A, set the RTS Turn-Off Delay for a Zone Master system as follows:

G.H msec when using an RS-232 interface with fiber optic interconnect (Port 3A) at 1200 bps.

C.D msec when using an RS-232 interface with fiber optic interconnect (Port 3A) at 9600 bps.

0-681 milliseconds


1-65535 seconds 0 disables






9 �9 �. � �� 6 �1/ �5� � *� # � � � ' 2�

SCREEN MM-1-5-4


This port provides for FSK serial communications through NEMA defined Port 3 connections (reference NEMA TS2 3.3.3) or an ASC/2 defined 25 pin Telemetry connector. These options allow the controller to be compatible with NEMA TS2 and replace an ASC-8000 or ASC/2 family controller.

Protocol Selection








TERMINAL-NTCIP-ECPIP-AB3418

ENABLE Toggle to select enable (YES) or disable (NO) of PORT 3B operations.

NOTE: The port should not be enabled during setup or non-use


DATA RATE (BPS)

Specify the data transfer rate from range values provided. Rate is bps. Port 3B value is either 1200 or 9600 bps.

1200, 4800, 9600, 19.2K, 38.4K, 57.6K, 115.2K

DATA, PARITY, STOP



The selected value applies only when the communication protocol is either TERMINAL or NTCIP. AB3418 automatically selects 8N1 and ECPIP automatically selects 8Z1.

8N1, 8Z1, 8E1, 7E1

PORT 3B MORE � PROTOCOL........................ ECPIP ENABLE......................... NO DATA RATE (BPS)................ 1200 DATA, PARITY, STOP............. 8 Z 1 MODEM SETUP STRING............. NONE USER STRING. . TELEMETRY RESPONSE DELAY (in ms)... 0.0 DUPLEX – HALF OR FULL.............. FULL AB3418 / NTCIP GROUP ADDRESS....... 0 AB3418 / NTCIP SINGLE FLAG ENABLE.. NO RTS TO CTS DELAY (in ms)........... 0.0 RTS TURN OFF DELAY (in ms)......... 0.0 DROP-OUT TIME (in seconds)......... 10 EARLY RTS....................... NO PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

PORT 3B MORE � PROTOCOL....................... ECPIP ENABLE........................ NO DATA RATE (BPS)............... 1200 DATA, PARITY, STOP............ 8 Z 1 MODEM SETUP STRING............... NONE USER STRING. COMM PORT ADDRESS.................... 0 SYSTEM DETECTOR 9-16 ADDRESS......... 0 TELEMETRY RESPONSE DELAY (in ms).... 0.0 DUPLEX – HALF or FULL.............. FULL AB3418 / NTCIP GROUP ADDRESS.... 0 AB3418 / NTCIP SINGLE FLAG ENABLE.... NO RTS TO CTS DELAY (in ms)........... 0.0 RTS TURN OFF DELAY (in ms)......... 0.0 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE




NONE, 56K, USER


0-9, A-Z

COMM PORT ADDRESS

NON-ECPI Protocol: Use numeric keys (0-9) to specify a unique address number (1-65535) that allows a master station to access this slave station. Zero (0) disables responding to any address.








Telemetry Response Delay (TRD) compensates response timing for overall communication delays. Decrease (start communication earlier) to compensate for longer delays and increase (start communication later) to compensate for shorter delays. For Port 3B, set the TRD for a Zone Master system as follows:

X.W msec when using an FSK telemetry module at 1200 bps. A.B msec when using an FSK telemetry module at 9600 bps.

0.0-25.5 msec

DUPLEX HALF OR FULL


As required by modem specifications, the port may be configured as Half or Full Duplex. Toggle to select HALF or FULL.



FULL/HALF

AB3418 / NTCIP GROUP ADDRESS


1-62 and 64 -255 for AB3418. 1-62 for NTCIP.

Address 63 is reserved as an “all stations” group address. Address zero (0) excludes the station from any group.

0-255 except 63


PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE AB3418 / NTCIP SINGLE FLAG ENABLE

Use the Toggle (0) key to select YES (enable) or NO (disable).



YES - NO

RTS TO CTS DELAY

Use the numeric keys Use numeric keys (0-9) to specify the amount of delay (in milliseconds) between Request To Send (RTS) and Clear To Send (CTS).(0-9) to specify the amount of delay (in milliseconds) between RTS and CTS. Delay between the RTS and CTS is required by some communication devices. This period after RTS is applied prior to sending data for transmission. RTS is turned on and timing begins at the end of the telemetry response delay or a response is ready for transmission, whichever is greater.

0-381 milliseconds

RTS TURN OFF DELAY

RTS turn-off delay is a timed interval required by some communication devices to keep RTS applied after the last character in a frame is transmitted. For Port 3B, set the RTS Turn-Off Delay for a Zone Master system as follows:

P.L msec when using an FSK telemetry module at 1200 bps.

E.F msec when using an FSK telemetry module at 9600 bps.

0-681 milliseconds


0-65535 seconds






9 �9 �8 � �� $ � � ��

SCREEN MM-1-5-5

The Ethernet Port provides the capability of a 100 Mbs connection between the controller and external devices.

NOTE: Contact your Internet Protocol (IP) specialist to determine the correct setting for each of the parameters defined below.

PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE MAC ADDRESS Display (for info only) of the factory set controller MAC address. -

IP ADDRESS A unique address used by the Ethernet interface. The format follows the Transmission Control Protocol/internet Protocol (TCP/IP) standard dot notation. When used, the address must be assigned from the same subnet as the other network devices with which it may communicate, such as a system controller or File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. If the controller is connected to an IP router, the address must be valid for that router.

0-255

ADDRESS MASK

The address mask must be the same as the other devices on the IP subnet to which the controller is attached (when an Ethernet interface is being used).

0-255

FTP SERVER ADDR

This address is optional, and is only required when the IP-based file download options are to be used. The address must be that of the system where the FTP server resides. This field is only used for local downloads from an FTP server “host” on the local area network.

0-255

DEFAULT GATEWAY IP ADD

The default IP address must be that of the Ethernet interface which is on the same subnet as this controller. This gateway address will be used for transmitting IP messages to end systems, which are not on the same subnet as this controller.

0-255

ETHERNET PORT CONFIGURATION MAC ADDRESS.. 63:00:00:5a:00:00 IP ADDRESS...... . . . . ADDRESS MASK.... . . . . FTP SERVER ADDR. . . . . DEFAULT GATEWAY IP ADD. . . . . PRESS 0..9 TO CHANGE


9 �: � �$ & + *� �� ) ) $ ) �� + # � $ � �

SCREEN MM-1-6 When viewing the Configuration Submenu (Screen MM-1), press the #6 key to select the Enable Logging submenu option (Screen MM-1-6).

From the Event Logging Submenu, press the #1 key to select the Event Logging data entry group. The Event Logging data entry group selections are described in the following paragraphs.

9 �: �� , � $ � �� ) ) $ ) �

SCREEN MM-1-6-1


This menu permits the user to selectively enable and disable the real time logging of ASC/3 events. The event buffer can store 500 non-detector error events and 300 detector error events. When full, the oldest events are discarded to make room for the new.

Use the Toggle (0) key to select either YES or NO for each of the options (including the scroll area) provided on the Event Logging data entry (Screen MM-1-6-1).


CRITICAL RFEs (MMU/TF)

Enables logging SDLC Response Frame Errors (RFEs) that result in the controller flash. These RFEs, related to the MMU and/or Terminals & Facilities (TF), are considered critical and will put the intersection into flash when there are six or more RFEs in the last ten tries. This logging mode applies to TS2 operation only.


3 CRITICAL RFE ERRORS IN 24 HOURS

Enables logging of the latched controller flash caused by three of the same critical RFEs (MMU/TF) in the last 24 hour period. This logging mode applies to TS2 operation only.


EVENT LOGGING MORE � LOW BATTERY. . . . . . . . . . . . . YES ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YES DATA CHANGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . YES CONTROLLER DOWNLOAD. . . . . . . . . YES ALARM 1........ NO ALARM 2........ NO ALARM 3........ NO ALARM 4........ NO ALARM 5........ NO ALARM 6........ NO ALARM 7........ NO ALARM 8........ NO ALARM 9........ NO ALARM 10....... NO ALARM 11....... NO ALARM 12....... NO ALARM 13....... NO ALARM 14....... NO ALARM 15....... NO ALARM 16....... NO PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

EVENT LOGGING MORE ��

CRITICAL RFE'S (MMU/TF). . . . . . . YES 3 CRITICAL RFE ERRORS IN 24 HOURS. . YES NON-CRITICAL RFE'S (DET/TEST). . . . YES DETECTOR ERRORS. . . . . . . . . . . YES COORDINATION ERRORS. . . . . . . . . YES MMU FLASH FAULTS . . . . . . . . . . YES LOCAL FLASH. . . . . . . . . . . . . YES PREEMPT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YES POWER ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . YES LOW BATTERY. . . . . . . . . . . . . YES ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YES DATA CHANGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . YES CONTROLLER DOWNLOAD. . . . . . . . . YES PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

ENABLE LOGGING SUBMENU 1. EVENT LOGGING PRESS 1..1 TO SELECT



NON-CRITICAL RFEs (DET/TEST)

Enables logging of the non-critical SDLC response frame errors (RFEs) when there are six or more in the last ten tries related to detector (DET) BIUs and the TEST fixture. These RFEs are considered non-critical and will not put the intersection into flash. Applies only if the DET BIUs and/or TEST fixture are enabled (Reference MM-1-4-1). This logging mode applies to TS2 operation only.


DETECTOR ERRORS

Enables logging of detector errors reported by:

• Valid SDLC response frames including watchdog failure, open loop, shorted loop, and excessive inductance change.

• Controller detected errors reported under TS1, TS2 operations that include no activity, max presence, and erratic counts.


COOORDINATION ERRORS

Enables logging of: • COORD ACTIVE: No fault or conflict. • COORD FAULT: A cycle fault is in effect and a

serviceable call has not been serviced within two cycles.

• COORD LOCAL FREE: Controller taken out of co-ordination by a command or input.

• COORD PROGRAM FREE: Controller taken out of coordination by the TIME BASE program.

• COORD DATA ERRORS: Incorrect programming data. The coordinator cannot run.


MMU FLASH FAULTS

Enables logging of flash events reported via SDLC from the MMU or detected by the controller. This logging mode applies to TS2 operation only.


LOCAL FLASH Enables logging of local flash events: • CYCLE FAULT: A serviceable call has not been

serviced for two controller cycles. NOTE: A controller cycle is the time the controller would take to time all phases if max recall was applied to all phases.

• CABINET FLASH caused by input, TIME BASE action plan, coordination pattern, manual selection, or system command.

This logging mode applies toTS1 and TS2 operation.


PREEMPT Enables logging of preemption events. Log indicates when priority preemptors are active. Records occurrence date, time, and preemptor number. This logging mode applies to TS1 and TS2 operation.


POWER ON/OFF Enables logging of power ON and power OFF events. Reports when power on and off occur. This logging mode applies to TS1 and TS2 operation.

YES enables NO isables



LOW BATTERY Enables logging of low voltage conditions of the battery used to hold up the CMOS RAM that stores run-time data. A battery in good condition can hold up the RAM in excess of 30 days. This logging mode applies to TS1 and TS2 operation.


ACCESS Enables the log to record the access code and when an access was granted to the controller. This logging mode applies to TS1 and TS2 operation.


DATA CHANGE Enables the log to record when there is a data change by the keyboard. Only the first data change event is logged after access is granted. All further data change events are not logged until a new user logs in or the display has timed out (20 minutes). This logging mode applies to TS1 and TS2 operation.


CONTROLLER DOWNLOAD

Enables the logging of controller download events. An event will be logged when the controller starts responding to download commands. This logging mode applies to TS1 and TS2 operation.


LOG ALARM EVENTS

Enables logging of all ALARM 1-16 EVENTS. Each alarm can be individually enabled or disabled by positioning the cursor on the line to be changed, then pressing the Toggle (0) key to display either YES or NO. This logging mode applies to TS1 and TS2 operation.



9 �< � � � � *& ' � �" " � � � �� + # � $ � �

SCREEN MM-1-7 From the Configuration Submenu (Screen MM-1), press the #7 key to select the Display/Access submenu (Screen MM-1-7) that lists the Administration and Display Options data groups.

From the Display/Access Submenu, press a number key 1 or 2 to select the desired data entry group. Each data entry group in this submenu is briefly described in the following paragraphs.

This submenu screen can be accessed at any time from lower-level data entry screens by pressing SUBMENU function key.

9 �< �� ! # $ � � � & � � $ �

SCREEN MM-1-7-1 From the Display/Access Submenu screen (MM-1-7), press the #1 key and the Administration screen (MM-1-7-1) appears.

The Administration screen allows control of three functions: Enable Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) of Database, CRC of Program Data, Request Download Of Program Data. These functions are described in the following paragraphs.

PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE ENABLE CRC CHECK OF DATABASE

YES: Enables checking of the database 16-bit CRC and the CRC wired in the cabinet to the controller inputs. When there is a discrepancy, the controller will go to flash.

CAUTION: The 16-bit CRC input must match the database CRC. With this option enabled, there is NO data entry or download.

NO: Disables the CRC check and allows for data entry and download.

NOTE: When this option is used, the cabinet must be wired to reflect any change to the ASC/3 database before the controller is put in service.


CRC OF PROGRAMMED DATA

Display of the CRC for the programmed data as four hexadecimal characters. This information is used to program the cabinet to accept only a controller with this database.

0000 - FFFF

REQUEST DOWNLOAD

YES requests the management station to download the controller database. This selection is automatically set to NO after being read by the management station.


ADMINISTRATION ENABLE CRC CHECK OF DATABASE........ NO CRC OF PGM DATA................... 5B0C REQUEST DOWNLOAD OF PROGRAM DATA.... NO SUPERVISORS ACCESS CODE REQUIRED TO ACCESS THIS SCREEN PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

DISPLAY/ACCESS SUBMENU 1. ADMINISTRATION 2. DISPLAY OPTIONS


9 �< �% � � � � *& ' �� $ � �

SCREEN MM-1-7-2 From the Display/Access Submenu screen (MM-1-7), press the #2 key and the Display Options screen (MM-1-7-2) appears.

The Display Options screen provides YES/NO options for two functions: Key Click Enable and Backlight Enable. Use the Toggle (0) key to change the setting for either function.

Toggle the Key Click Enable function to YES and a beep will sound each time any keyboard key is pressed. NO selects silent keyboard operation.

Toggle the Backlight Enable function to YES and the LCD backlight will come ON and turn OFF only if the YES/NO indicator is toggled to NO or after 30 minutes of keyboard inactivity.

PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE KEY CLICK ENABLE

YES enables a beep sound feedback in addition to the tactile feedback when a front panel key is pressed. NO selects silent operation.


BACKLIGHT ENABLE

YES allows the LCD backlight to come on whenever a front panel key is actuated. The backlight automatically turns off after 30 minutes of keypad inactivity. Selecting NO disables the backlight.




9 �> � �� ) " �� " � � � � � �� + # � $ � �

SCREEN MM-1-8 From the Configuration Submenu (screen MM-1), press the #8 key to select the Logic Processor submenu (screen MM-1-8) that lists the Logic Statement Control and Logic Statements data groups.

From the Logic Processor Submenu, press the #1 or #2 key to select the desired data entry group. Each data entry group in this submenu is briefly described in the following paragraphs.

This submenu screen can be accessed at any time from lower-level data entry screens by pressing SUBMENU function key.

9 �> �� ) " �� & � � # � $ � �� $ � � � *�

SCREEN MM-1-8-1 From the Logic Processor Submenu screen (MM-1-8), press the #1 key and the Logic Statement Control screen (MM-1-8-1) appears.

The Logic Statement Control screen selects whether or not the particular Logic Processor Statement is:

• ALWAYS enabled (‘E’) • NEVER enabled (‘D’) • Subject to activation or deactivation by a

lower priority source (“.”) The priority of Logic Processor sources, from highest to lowest is as follows:

1. Front Panel Selection (MM-1-8-1)

2. External Input

3. Central (Remote) Command

4. Time Base Action Plan (MM-5-4) Hard-coded entries

9 �> �% � �� ) " �� & � � # � $ � � �

SCREEN MM-1-8-2 From the Logic Processor Submenu screen (MM-1-8), press the #2 key and the Logic Statements screen (MM-1-8-2) appears. The Logic Processor can hold up to 100 logic gates. A typical logic gate configuration is shown.

The Logic Statements screen allows the inputs and outputs to be under logical control of conditions developed by the user.

LOGIC # 98 ACTIVE: N IF GREEN ON PHASE 10 IS ON AND VEHICLE DET # 1 IS ON OR MINGRN TMR ON PHASE 10 < 15.7 THEN SET VEHICLE DET # 1 OFF SET GREEN OVERLAP B OFF SET YELLOW OVERLAP B ON ELSE DELAY FOR 15.7 SECONDS SET BEHICLE DET # 1 ON

LOGIC STATEMENT CONTROL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 LP 1-10 D D D D D D D D D D LP 11-20 D D D D D D D D D D LP 21-30 D D D D D D D D D D LP 31-40 D D D D D D D D D D LP 41-50 D D D D D D D D D D LP 51-60 D D D D D D D D D D LP 61-70 D D D D D D D D D D LP 71-80 D D D D D D D D D D LP 81-90 D D D D D D D D D D LP 91-100 D D D D D D D D D D D = DISABLED E = ENABLED “.” = ENABLED / DISABLED BY OTHER SOURCE PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

LOGIC PROCESSOR SUBMENU 1. LOGIC STATEMENT CONTROL 2. LOGIC STATEMENTS PRESS 1..2 TO SELECT


9 �� 4 � �� $ � � & *�� ) � & # # $ ) ��

To program a logic statement, the proper sequence should be:

1. Go to Screen MM-1-8-1

2. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to the position of the LP statement to be programmed.

3. Use the toggle key to set the LP statement to either ‘.’ or ‘D,’ making the LP statement ‘INACTIVE’.

4. Go to Screen MM-1-8-2

5. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to the LOGIC # field and enter the number (1-100) of the LP statement to be programmed.

6. Press the ENTER key (Note: The ACTIVE field should display ‘N’).

7. Use the cursor and toggle keys to program the IF, THEN and ELSE statement fields.

NOTE: While programming LP statements, press the 8 key to move backward through the list of testable elements and executable commands, press the 0 (zero) key to move forward.

With the cursor on the Statement Number in the top line, pressing the CLEAR key will clear the entire logic statement. All “IFs,” “THENs,” and “ELSEs” will be erased. If the user presses the CLEAR key while the cursor is on a testable or executable element, only that element will be cleared.

When the LP statements are completed, press the ENTER key.

Go to Screen MM-1-8-1

Set the LP statement just programmed to ‘E.’

NOTE: Screens MM-1-8-1 and MM-1-8-2 are tied together through the “ACTIVE Y/N” entry on Screen MM-1-8-2, with Screen MM-1-8-1 having primary control.

However: Setting ACTIVE to ‘Y’ on Screen MM-1-8-2 automatically sets the entry on MM-1-8-1 to ‘E.’ Once the MM-1-8-1 entry is set to ‘E,’ the only way to disable it is through the MM-1-8-1 screen by selecting either the “D” or “.” value. The ACTIVE: ‘Y’ value on MM-1-8-2 cannot be toggled to ‘N.’

PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE LOGIC # The number of the logic gate that is being programmed or viewed.

NOTE: 0 (Zero): Selects the next open logic gate starting with Logic Gate 1.

CAUTION: The logic statements are executed in sequence once every 1/10th second from 1-100. Any condition that is to be used by a logic gate must be determined before that gate evaluated.

1-100 0 - Selects next open gate.

IF A set of statements that are connected by operators to create a TRUE or FALSE outcome. This outcome will execute the THEN statements if TRUE and the ELSE statements if FALSE.

-

(operator column)

Determines how the “IF” statement testable elements are combined to create a “TRUE or “FALSE.”

AND, OR, NAND, NOR,XOR

(testable element column)

Refer to the Appendix L for a list of all testable elements available to the IF statements.

Various*

(testable element number column)

The number of the testable element*. Example: “2” when “GREEN ON PHASE” is the testable element represents Phase 2 green.

Various*

(testable element operator column)

Selects how the testable element is to be compared* to the testable element value.

IS, <, >. <>*


PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE (testable element value column)

The value that the testable element will be evaluated* to by the operator to determine the TRUE or FALSE of the statement

ON, OFF 0-65535*

THEN When all of the conditions of the IF statements are met, the THEN statements are executed from top to bottom.

-

(executable statement column)

Refer to the Appendix L for a list of all executable statements available to the THEN statements.

Various*

(executable statement number column)

The number of the executable statement element*. Example: “1” when “HOLD PHASE” is the executable statement represents setting or resetting Phase one Hold.

Various*

(executable statement value column)

The condition that the executable statement will set or the time in 1/10-second increments that the following statements will be delayed.

ON, OFF 0-65535*

ELSE When all of the conditions of the IF statements are not met, the ELSE statements are executed from top to bottom.

-

(executable statement column)

Refer to the Appendix L for a list of all executable statements available to the ELSE statements.

Various*

(executable statement number column)

The number of the executable statement element*. Example: “1” when “HOLD PHASE” is the executable statement represents setting or resetting Phase one Hold.

Various*

(executable statement value column)

The condition that the executable statement will set or the time in 1/10-second increments that the following statements will be delayed.

ON, OFF 0-65535*

Refer to Appendix L for further definitions


��

: �� $ � � � **� � �� + # � $ � �

Programming Summary

SCREEN MM-2

6. OPTION DATA

Access the Option submenu with two data groups that allow programming of controller phase and extended options.

7. ACT PRE-TIMED Assign phase(s) that are to time as pre-timed.

Enable the free input to disable pre-timed operation.

8. RECALL DATA Provides ability to select options that include: Lock Detector, Vehicle Recall, Pedestrian Recall, MX (Max) Recall, SF (Soft) Recall, No Rest, and AI (Added Initial) Calculation for phases 1 thru 16.

The Controller Submenu has eight data groups as shown in the figure at the right. To view or enter data press the keyboard number (1 through 8) corresponding to desired data group.

1. TIMING PLANS Enter phase timing values for each of sixteen phases and four timing plans.

2. VEHICLE OVERLAP Assign phase(s) to each of sixteen (Included, Protected, Modifier, Pedestrian Protect, and not Overlap) overlaps.

Enter timing values for trailing and advance green overlaps.

Enable trailing, leading and overlap flash during phase green.

3. PED OVERLAP (Reserved for Future Release.)

4. GUAR MIN TIME Enter guaranteed minimum times (Minimum Green, Walk, Pedestrian Clearance, Yellow and Red Clearance) for each of sixteen phases.

Enter guaranteed minimum Green times for each of sixteen overlaps.

5. START/FLASH DATA Select active phase(s), overlap(s) and interval at power start.

Select entry remote (automatic) flash phase(s).

Select exit remote (automatic) flash phase(s) overlap(s) and colors.

Set power start timing for All Red and Flash.

Enable minimum vehicle recall before entering remote (automatic) flash.

Enable flash through the load switches.

Set minimum remote (automatic) flash time.

Enable cycle through phases before going into remote (automatic) flash.

CONTROLLER SUBMENU 1.TIMING PLANS 5. START/FLASH 2.VEHICLE OVERLAP 6. OPTION DATA 3.PED OVERLAP 7. ACT PRE-TIMED 4 GUAR MIN TIME 8. RECALL DATA PRESS 1..7 TO SELECT


: �� # $ ) ��*& $ � �

General Information

The Phase Timing Plans establish which phase intervals will time and their time. The interval time entries that require additional enabling are described in the paragraphs following the screen illustrations. Those that do not require additional enabling are described in the table that follows those paragraphs.

Enter data using keyboard number, cursor, and ENTER keys. Move cursor up/down to desired parameter then right/left to desired phase number. Enter timing value then press ENTER or any other keyboard key to store the data.

SCREEN MM-2-1 SCREEN MM-2-1 (Scroll) TIMING PLAN [1] PHASE DATA MORE � ��

PHASE......1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8 MIN GRN 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 BK MGRN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DLY GRN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WALK 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WALK2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WLK MAX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PED CLR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PD CLR2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PC MAX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PED CO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 VEH EXT 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 VH EXT2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 MAX 1 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 PRESS 0..9 TO CHANGE

TIMING PLAN [1] PHASE DATA MORE � � PHASE......9..10..11..12..13..14..15..16 MIN GRN 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 BK MGRN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DLY GRN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WALK 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WALK2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WLK MAX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PED CLR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PD CLR2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PC MAX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PED CO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 VEH EXT 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 VH EXT2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 MAX 1 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 PRESS 0..9 TO CHANGE

MAX 2 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 MAX 3 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 DYM MAX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Note: MAX 2, 3 & DYM MAX scrolls through the screen when the PHASE DATA screen is at the bottom)

MAX 2 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 MAX 3 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 DYM MAX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Note: MAX 2, 3 & DYM MAX scrolls through the screen when the PHASE DATA screen is at the bottom)

SCREEN MM-2-1 (Scroll) SCREEN MM-2-1 (Scroll) TIMING PLAN [1] PHASE DATA MORE � � PHASE......1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8. DYM STP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 YELLOW 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 RED CLR 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 RED MAX 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 RED RVT 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 ACT B4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SEC/ACT 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 MAX INT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TIME B4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CARS WT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 STPTDUC 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 TTREDUC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MIN GAP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PRESS 0..9 TO CHANGE

TIMING PLAN [1] PHASE DATA MORE � � PHASE......9..10..11..12..13..14..15..16 DYM STP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 YELLOW 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 RED CLR 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 RED MAX 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 RED RVT 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 ACT B4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SEC/ACT 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 MAX INT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TIME B4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CARS WT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 STPTRDC 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 TTREDUC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MIN GAP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PRESS 0..9 TO CHANGE


TIMING PLAN Selects the timing plan to edit or view. 1-4

MIN GRN Minimum Green (initial green).

The shortest possible vehicle green time, before any added initial or vehicle extensions.

NOTE: Actual minimum green indication will be the longest of the minimum green plus any added initial, vehicle extension, bike minimum green, ped walk plus ped clearance, or guaranteed minimum green*.

0-255 sec.



BIKE MGRN Bike Minimum Green.

The minimum green due to a bike detector call. Bike minimum green has no effect if the phase has no bike detector input.

0-255 sec.

DLY GRN Delayed Green.

The time that the vehicle green indication will be delayed from the start of the walk interval. The delay is ignored if there is no pedestrian service call when the phase is started. If the delay time is greater than the Walk time, the walk is extended to the end of delay green.

0-255 sec.

WALK Pedestrian Walk.

Time during which WALK or walking person symbol is displayed when servicing a ped call.

WALK or PED CLR timing cannot be programmed to zero if the phase is the ped carryover start phase or part of a ped overlap.

NOTE: Actual walk time will be the longest of the walk time in effect or guaranteed* walk.

0-255 sec. 0 disables

WALK 2 Pedestrian Walk 2.

Walk 2 time that is in effect when WALK 2 is enabled by a time base Action Plan (MM-5-4). Time during which WALK or walking person symbol is displayed when servicing a ped call.

NOTE: Actual walk time will be the longest of the walk time in effect or guaranteed* walk.

0-255 sec.

WLK MAX Walk Maximum.

Once the walk in effect has been timed; if the phase’s Ped Extend Detector is TRUE, the walk will be extended until 1) its total length reaches Walk Maximum, or 2) the elapsed length of the walk extension plus the ped clear equal the max in effect, or 3) the Ped Extend Detector input goes false. Walk maximum time has no effect when there isn’t a pedestrian extend detector for the phase.

0-255 sec.

PED CLR

Pedestrian Clearance.

Time during which DON'T WALK or hand symbol is flashing following pedestrian WALK time.

WALK or PED CLR timing cannot be programmed to zero if the phase is the ped carryover start phase or part of a ped carryover.

NOTE: Actual pedestrian clearance time will be the longest of the pedestrian clearance in effect or guaranteed* pedestrian clearance.

0-255 sec.

PD CLR 2 Pedestrian Clearance 2.

Pedestrian clearance time that is to be in effect when WALK 2 is enabled by a time base Action Plan (MM-5-4). This is the time during which DON'T WALK or the hand symbol is flashing following ped WALK time.

NOTE: Actual pedestrian clearance time will be the longest of the pedestrian clearance in effect or guaranteed* pedestrian clearance.

0-255 sec.



PED CO Pedestrian Carryover

If phase’s pedestrian service can be carried over into another phase in the same ring when that phase times next, enter the phase that is allowed to time next while the pedestrian service (pedestrian carryover) is completed. If the phase identified as the pedestrian carryover phase doesn’t have a vehicle call or won’t to be serviced next, the pedestrian service will be completed before the initiating phase is allowed to terminate. This option allows two vehicle movements while pedestrians are crossing wide streets.

NOTE: A pedestrian carryover service is not permitted to be part of a Pedestrian Overlap.

0-16

VEH EXT

Phase Vehicle Extension (Preset gap, Passage Time).

When minimum green finishes timing, the green interval is allowed to extend for a length of time equal to maximum time in effect. Actual length of extension period depends on this phase vehicle extension time, frequency of vehicle actuations and minimum gap setting.

NOTE: Detector-by-Detector extension time can be set in the vehicle detector setup screen (MM-6-2).

0-25.5 sec.

VEH EXT2

Phase Vehicle Extension 2.

Vehicle Extension period 2 operates like VEH EXT. VEH EXT2 replaces VEH EXT when its usage is enabled by the selected time base Action Plan (MM-5-4).

0-25.5 sec.

MAX 1, 2, 3 Maximum Green (1, 2, 3).

Maximum green time allowed in the presence of an opposing call.

NOTE: The higher numbered maximum green selected will be in effect.

0-255 sec.

DYM MAX Dynamic Maximum.

Determines the upper or lower limit of the running max time. The max in effect (*MAX 1, 2, or 3) determines the other limit.

When a phase maxes out twice in a row, and on each successive max out thereafter, the running max is incremented one dynamic max step until it reaches the dynamic maximum upper limit.

When a phase gaps out twice in a row, and on each successive gap out thereafter, the running max is decremented one dynamic max step until it reaches the dynamic maximum lower limit.

If a phase gaps out in one cycle and maxes out in the next cycle, or vice versa, the running max is not changed.

See Phase Dynamic Max Limit described in NTCIP 1202 paragraph 2.2.2.17 for a more complete explanation.

NOTE: When DYM MAX is not used (DYM MAX = 0), the maximum green time is equal to the selected max timer (MAX 1, 2 or 3).




DYM STP Dynamic Step.

The amount of time that the running max time is increased or decreased by max or gap out.

See Phase Dynamic Max Step described in NTCIP 1202 paragraph 2.2.2.18 for a more complete explanation.

0-25.5 sec.

YELLOW Yellow Change.

The time that the phase yellow indication is displayed following a green interval.

NOTE: Actual yellow change in effect will be the longest of yellow change or guaranteed* yellow.

0-25.5 sec.

RED CLR Red Clearance.

The time that the phase red indication is displayed following a yellow change interval when terminating the phase.

NOTE: Actual red clearance time in effect will be the longest of the red clearance or guaranteed* red clearance.

0-25.5 sec.

RED MAX Red Maximum.

Once the red clearance in effect has been timed if the phase’s Red Extend Detector is TRUE, red clearance will be extended until its total length reaches Red Maximum or the Red Extend Detector input goes FALSE. Red Maximum has no effect when there isn’t a red extend detector for the phase.

0-25.5 sec.

RED RVT Red Revert.

Minimum red time before a phase can be re-serviced. Red revert begins timing at the start of red clearance.

2.0-25.0 sec.

ACT B4 Actuations Before.

Number of actuations that must be received during the phase’s yellow and red intervals before seconds per actuation time is added to initial green.

0-255 actuations

SEC/ACT Seconds per actuation (Added Initial).

Time by which the phase’s added initial time period is increased from zero for each vehicle actuation received during the phase’s yellow and red intervals that exceed the Actuations Before limit.

0-25.5 sec.

MAX INI Maximum Added Initial.

Maximum time that added initial green can attain. The number of vehicle actuations received during a phase’s yellow and red intervals multiplied by the seconds per actuation time cannot exceed this time.

0-255 sec.

TIME B4 Time Before (Reduction).

Length of time before start of gap reduction. Begins timing when phase is green and there is a conflicting serviceable call. NOTE: Start of gap reduction (time to reduce or step to reduce) is initiated by TIME B4 or CARS WT, whichever reaches its programmed value first.




CARS WT Cars Waiting before reduction

Number of vehicle detections that have been recorded on all conflicting phases during their yellow and red intervals.

NOTE: Start of gap reduction (time to reduce or step to reduce) is initiated by TIME B4 or CARS WT, whichever reaches its programmed value first.

1-255 cars 0 disables

STPTDUC Step To Reduce.

Step reduction: When gap reduction starts and STPTDUC isn’t zero, TTREDUC multiplied by 10 is divided by STPTDUC to calculate the number of 1/10 second cycles timed between each reduction step. By the time the TTREDUC interval has completed its timing, vehicle extension in effect will have been reduced the MIN GAP.

Linear reduction: When gap reduction starts and STPTDUC is zero, MIN GAP is subtracted from the vehicle extension in effect and that value is divided by the product of TTREDUC multiplied by 10. The result is subtracted from vehicle extension in effect every 1/10 second until vehicle extension in effect is reduced to the MIN GAP.

0.1-25.5 sec. / step 0 = linear

TTREDUC Time To Reduce.

Length of time between the start and end of gap reduction. During the Time to Reduce interval, the vehicle extension in effect is reduced from its initial time down to the specified MIN GAP time.

0-255 sec.

MIN GAP Minimum Gap

Minimum vehicle extension to be timed for each vehicle actuation. If the minimum vehicle extension times out before a vehicle actuation is received and the timer is restarted, gap out occurs.

0-25.5 sec.

* Guaranteed minimum values are programmed in MM-2-4


: �� % � �� " *� ��, � � *& � �

Overlap Data

SCREEN MM-2-2 VEHICLE OVERLAP [ A]

TYPE..... OTHER 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 INCLUDED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROTECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MODIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PED PRTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NOT OLP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAILING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEAD.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLSH GRN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAILING GRN 0.0 YELLOW 0.0 RED 0.0 ADVANCE GREEN.. 0.0 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

Three types of overlaps can be programmed: Normal, Minus Green Yellow, and Other. Normal and Minus Green Yellow operate in accordance with requirement specified in NTCIP 1202 paragraph 2.10.2.2. The type Other identifies overlaps that supplement the Normal overlap with the Econolite specific options.

Normal overlap programming is restricted to the Included and Trailing Green, Yellow, and Red options.

Minus Green Yellow overlap programming is restricted to the Included and Modifier options.

All overlap options except the Modifier option are available for programming a Type Other overlap.

PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE VEHICLE OVERLAP Enter the desired overlap A – P to edit or view that overlap. A-P

TYPE Type: Selects NTCIP overlap type.

Overlap Type is selected by placing the cursor over the type selection field and repeatedly pressing the “0” key until the desired type identifier is displayed. The overlap type selections are:

Normal: The overlap output is derived from the state of the overlap’s Included phases when this type is selected.

The overlap output shall be green when an overlap included phase is green and when an overlap included phase is yellow change or red clearance and an overlap included phase is next.

The overlap output shall be yellow when an included phase is yellow and an overlap included phase is not green and not next.

The overlap output shall be red whenever the overlap green and yellow are not ON.

Minus Green Yellow: The overlap output is derived from the state of the overlap’s Included phases and overlap’s Modifier phase assignments.

The overlap output will be green when an overlap-included phase is green and an overlap-modifier phase is NOT green or a phase next selection. It is will also be green when an overlap included phase is in yellow change or red clearance and an overlap included phase is next and an overlap modifier phase is NOT green or a phase next selection.

The overlap output will be yellow when an overlap included phase is yellow and an overlap modifier phase is NOT yellow and an overlap included phase is not next.

(Continued next page.)


PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE TYPE (Continued)

The overlap output will be red whenever the overlap green and yellow are not ON.

Other: The overlap Normal type is altered by the selected usage of the Protect, Pedestrian Protect, Not Overlap, Trailing, Lead, Advance Green, and Flash Overlap Green options described below.

INCLUDED Overlap Included Phases:

The Included Phases specify the phases whose timing state will be used to derive the state of the overlap.

In general terms, when any included phase is timing its green interval or the controller is advancing from one included phase to another included phase, the overlap will be green. If no included phase is green, then the overlap will be yellow when any included phase is yellow. If no included phase is green or yellow, the overlap will be red. The normal derivation or the overlap’s state can be altered by using any of the programming option described below.

‘X’ selects

PROTECT Protected Overlap:

A movement having a protected green arrow (no conflicting phases timing).

NOTE: This option is only valid when overlap type is “OTHER.” When a phase has protected overlap phase assignments, Modifier, Lead, and Trailing assignments are ignored (inhibited).

‘X’ selects

MODIFIER Modifier Phases:

Used when the overlap type is MINUS GREEN YELLOW to provide an overlap that will terminate to red during a modifier phase green and yellow.

NOTE: When Modifier phases are assigned, only it and the Included Phases option are used to derive the state of the overlap. All other overlap programming options are ignored.

‘X’ selects

PED PRTC Pedestrian Protect:

The Pedestrian Protect option provides for the specification of phase pedestrian movements that can't be serviced while the overlap is active. If a pedestrian call is present on a pedestrian protected phase when that phase becomes the phase next selection, the overlap is terminated while the ring transitions from the timing phase to the phase with the protected pedestrian service. If a pedestrian call isn't present when the pedestrian protected phase becomes the phase next selection, the overlap remains active if an included phase is timing or a phase next selection. Should a pedestrian call be input while the ring is in yellow change or red clear on the way to the pedestrian protected phase, the overlap isn't terminated until the pedestrian protected phase starts and then only if there is enough time to terminate the overlap and time the pedestrian movement before the phase will max out.

NOTE: This option is only valid when overlap type is “OTHER.”

‘X’ selects


PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE NOT OLP Not Overlap:

The Not Overlap option is provided to inhibit the activation of an overlap when selected non-included phases are timing. If an overlap is active when a call is placed on a not overlap phase, the phase is not allowed to time until the overlap is terminated. If the order of rotation would normally allow the not overlap phase to time, overlap termination will be initiated even if an overlap included phase is timing or a phase next selection.

To select a not overlap inhibit phase, position the cursor on the desired NOT OLP phase and toggle the “0” key.


‘X’ selects

TRAILING Trailing Overlap Phases:

This option identifies which phases are to time programmed trailing green, yellow, and red. If Trailing phases are defined, only those phases will time trailing green, yellow, and red when they advance to yellow change and no other included phase is timing or a phase next selection. If no Trailing phases are defined, then trailing green, yellow, and red are timed when any included phase advances to yellow change and no other included phase is timing or a phase next selection.


‘X’ selects

LEAD Lead Overlap Phases:

When the overlap is active, the last timing overlap included phase is advancing to yellow, no included phase is a phase next selection, and a Lead phase (that isn’t an included phase) is next, trailing green, yellow, and red will be timed.

When the overlap isn’t active and a Lead phase that is an included phase is a phase next selection, overlap advance green will be displayed. Overlap advance green output starts when the phase of the ring that is transitioning to the included Lead phase begins its yellow service.


‘X’ selects

FLSH GRN

Flash Overlap Green:

Flash Overlap Green is specified for each included phase of an overlap and defines the rate at which the overlap green interval is to flash when the included phase is timing. To select a flash rate, position the cursor on the appropriate FLSH GRN phase entry and toggle the “0” key to cycle to the desired rate. The allowable flash settings are as follows:

“.” = no flash or phase isn't an included phase for the overlap. 1 = flash at 1 pps. 2 = flash at 2.5 pps. 5 = flash at 5 pps.

The flash is extended across the transition from one included phase to another included phase if their flash rates are the same. (Continued next page)

“.”, 1, 2, and 5


PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE FLSH GRN (Continued)

Overlap green will be solid when transitioning between included phases that have different flash rates. NOTE: This option is only valid when overlap type is “OTHER.”

“.”, 1, 2, and 5

TRAILING GRN, YELLOW, RED

Trailing Green, Yellow and Red times:

Normally, if an included phase is terminating and no other included phase is timing or a phase next selection, the terminating included phase’s yellow and red are also output to the overlap. Trailing Green, Yellow, and Red provide a means of extending the overlap’s green and then timing a specified yellow and red. When the last timing overlap included phase begins its yellow change, the overlap’s green interval is extended by the specified Trailing Green time. After Trailing Green has timed, Trailing Yellow and Trailing Red times are used to time the overlap’s yellow change and red clearance intervals.

NOTE: Trailing Green, Yellow, and Red times are only valid when the overlap type is Normal or Other.

0-25.5 sec.

ADVANCE GREEN

Advance Green:

Advance Green specifies the minimum amount of overlap advance green to be displayed before a phase next selected included lead phase is started. If the amount of advance green is less than the yellow change time and red clear timed by a ring before its phase next included lead phase can be started, the overlap advance green is extended. If the amount of advance green is greater than the yellow change and red clear timed by the ring before the overlap lead phase next selection would normally start, the terminating ring phase's red clearance is extended until the advance green time is satisfied.

Overlap advance green output starts when the phase of the ring that is transitioning to the included Lead phase begins its yellow service.


0-25.5 sec.


: �� ! � � � � & $ ��, � � *& � � �

SCREEN MM-2-3 (Scroll Removed) TOGGLE to include (X) or exclude (".") each pedestrian movement from the overlap.

A pedestrian overlap (1-16) overrides the ped service output of the phase having the same number (1-16). This provides for a total of 16 possible pedestrian overlaps.

A pedestrian overlap is programmed by specifying phases with pedestrian service whose ped movements are to be used to derive the overlap’s outputs. Whenever a pedestrian overlap included phase is timing a walk or the controller is transitioning from a walk end condition on a timing phase to a walk service on another overlap included ped phase, the ped overlap will display walk.

PEDESTRIAN OVERLAPS MORE � PED INCLUDED PHASES: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 OVERLAP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

When no ped included phase is timing a walk and isn’t a phase next selection with a ped call, the overlap will display pedestrian clearance as long as any included ped phase is timing a ped clearance. When all included ped phases are in don’t walk, the ped overlap will display don’t walk.

A preemptor can terminate a pedestrian overlap at any time. The preemption can override a preempted phase’s ped walk and clearance time and those override times will be used to terminate the overlap. See the Preemptor Walk and Pedestrian Clearance program options (MM-4-1). The pedestrian overlap will terminate even if the phase is halted in red transfer.

PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE OVERLAP NUMBER – 1 thru 16

Use the cursor arrows (right, left, up, down) to position the cursor to the appropriate OVERLAP NUMBER and INCLUDED PHASES coordinates, then use the TOGGLE (0) key include (X) or exclude (".") each pedestrian movement from the overlap.

“X” selects, “.” excludes.


: �� . � �� & � & $ � � � ! �� $ # � # � # � � �

Guaranteed minimum time for phase or overlap intervals. These entries establish the lower limit that the phase or overlap intervals must time.

NOTE: The circumstances that can cause guaranteed minimum times to be ignored include: Manual advance input, Preemptor timing, and External Start input

SCREEN MM-2-4 SCREEN MM-2-4 (Scroll) GUARANTEED MINIMUM TIME DATA MORE ��

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MIN GRN. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WALK.... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PED CLR. 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 YELLOW.. 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 RED CLR 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 OVERLAP A B C D E F G H OVLP GRN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PRESS 0..9 TO CHANGE

GUARANTEED MINIMUM TIME DATA MORE � PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 MIN GRN. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WALK.... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PED CLR. 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 YELLOW 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 RED CLR 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 OVERLAP I J K L M N O P OVLP GRN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PRESS 0..9 TO CHANGE

PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE MIN GRN Guaranteed Minimum Green: The shortest possible vehicle green

time, before any added initial or vehicle extensions.

NOTE: Actual minimum green time will be the longest of the following: minimum green plus any added initial, vehicle extension, bike minimum green, ped walk plus ped clearance and guaranteed minimum green.

0-255 sec.

WALK Guaranteed Pedestrian Walk: The shortest possible pedestrian walk time.

NOTE: Actual minimum walk time will be the longer of the Walk time in effect or guaranteed* walk.

0-255 sec.

PED CLR Guaranteed Pedestrian Clearance: The shortest possible pedestrian clearance time.

NOTE: Actual minimum pedestrian clearance time will be the longer of the Pedestrian Clearance in effect or guaranteed* pedestrian clearance.

0-25.5 sec.

YELLOW Guaranteed Yellow Change: The shortest possible phase yellow indication following a green interval.

NOTE: Actual minimum yellow change time will be the longer of the Yellow time or guaranteed* yellow.

0-25.5 sec.

RED CLR Guaranteed Red Clearance: The shortest possible red indication following a yellow change interval when terminating the phase

NOTE: Actual minimum red clearance time will be the longer of the Red Clearance time in effect or guaranteed* red clearance.

0-25.5 sec.

OVLP GRN Guaranteed Overlap Green: Minimum overlap green that must be timed before the overlap is allowed to terminate.

NOTE: If an overlap’s guaranteed green has not been satisfied by the time the overlap initiating included phase is ready to terminate its green interval, the phase’s green interval is extended until the overlap guaranteed green has been timed.

0-255 sec.

• Circumstances that can alter this minimum time include: Manual Advance input, Preemptor timing, and External Start input.


: �� 8 � �� & � � � / *& � � ��& � & �

SCREEN MM-2-5 The Start/Flash Data screen (MM-2-4) is divided into Power Start and Remote Flash sections.

In the Power Start section, the phase and overlaps selections, power start red time, and power on flash time are specified.

The Remote Flash section provides for the selection of entry phases and exit phases and overlaps, a minimum flash time, and the enabling of options used during remote (automatic) flash.

START/FLASH DATA POWER START 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 PHASE... . W . . . W . . . . . . . . . . OVERLAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PWR START RED.. 0s FLASH TIME.... 0s REMOTE FLASH 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 ENTRY... . X . . . X . . . . . . . . . . EXIT.... . X . . . X . . . . . . . . . . OVERLAP A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P EXIT.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXIT REM FL.... W MIN AUTO FLASH. 5 MINIMUM RECALL..NO CYCLE THRU PHASE. NO PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

Power Startup

The Power-On Start Phases begin timing after the flash and power start red times have been satisfied or after an external start input.

1. Use the Toggle (0) key to select the start phases and their start interval. Only one phase selection is allowed for each ring and it must not conflict with any other ring phase selections.

2. Enter the Power Start all Red time. This interval times after flash time. Zero entry disables the all red timing function.

3. Enter the Power Start Flash Time. This interval times before all red time. Zero entry disables the controller flash timing function.

Remote (automatic) Flash

1. Select the last non-conflicting active phase(s) that are to be timed before entry to remote (automatic) flash.

2. Select non-conflicting phase(s) that are to be active when remote (automatic) flash is exited.

3. Select overlap(s) that will be active when exiting remote (automatic) flash. The overlap(s) follow the normal overlap programming. This programming has no effect on the normal overlap operation except when exiting remote (automatic) flash.

4. Select “Flash through Load Switches” option (NTCIP standard is “X”).

5. Select “Minimum Recall” option to apply min recall to all phases when remote (automatic) flash is requested.

6. Select “Cycle through Phase” option to allow cycling of all intervening phases when going into remote (automatic) flash. When both Minimum recall and “Cycle through Phases” are selected. The controller will time every phase for the minimum green time before entering remote (automatic) flash.

7. Select the minimum remote (automatic) flash time. The controller will not exit remote (automatic) flash until this time has expired.

8. Select the Exit Remote Flash interval.


Start/Flash Data (Continued)

PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE POWER START PHASE

Power Start Phases.

Phase(s) and intervals selected to begin timing when controller power is first applied to the controller after an interruption greater than 0.6 seconds, or an external start input is applied.

".": Indicates the phase indication is red and the phase is not timing.

G: The phase indication is green without walk and MIN GRN is timing.

W: The phase indication is green with walk and WALK is timing.

Y: The phase indication is yellow and YELLOW CHANGE is timing.

R: The phase indication is red and RED CLEARANCE is timing.

NOTE: If no phase is programmed (All phases programmed "."), the controller will start in the first phase in ring one and the first phase in each ring that is compatible with it.

G, W, Y, R enables phase and interval. "." disables phase

POWER START OVERLAPS

Power Start Overlaps.

“X”: Enable overlaps that will be:

Green if it would normally be green during the Power Start phase indication.

Yellow if it would normally have been yellow during the Power Start phase indication.

Red if it would normally have been red during the Power Start phase indication.

".": Disables the overlap during power start. The overlap will start in Red and follow the overlap programming when the next phase starts timing.

‘X’ enables

POWER START ALL RED TIME

Time during which all phases are red at power start following a power interruption greater than 750 plus or minus 250 milliseconds.

NOTE: If the intersection cabinet is equipped with a MMU or CMU that latches Fault Monitor (FM) or Controller Voltage Monitor (CVM), the monitor power-on flash time must be set to nine seconds or larger.

0-255 sec.

POWER START FLASH TIME

Time during which all phases are in Flash at power start following a power interruption greater than 750 plus or minus 250 milliseconds. If START FLASH time is non-zero, the Controller sets all outputs FALSE for 2 seconds prior to timing START FLASH period.

NOTES: - If the intersection cabinet is equipped with a MMU or CMU that latches Fault Monitor (FM) or Controller Voltage Monitor (CVM), the monitor power-on flash time must be set to nine seconds or larger. - FLASH interval times first when both RED and FLASH times are entered. If FLASH timing is non-zero, the controller sets all outputs FALSE for 2 seconds prior to timing the FLASH period.

0-255 sec.


PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE REMOTE FLASH PHASE ENTRY

Entry into Remote (automatic) Flash Phase(s).

Phase(s) active last before flash. The phase controller enters and times minimum green, yellow, and red clearance before initiating remote (automatic) flash.

NOTE: All overlaps will terminate normally to all red with the remote flash entry phases.

‘X’ enables

REMOTE FLASH PHASE EXIT

Exit Remote (automatic) Flash Phase(s) and Indications.

Phases and indications that the controller times first when exiting remote (automatic) flash;

".": Indicates the phase indication is red and the phase is not timing.

G: The phase indication is green without walk and MIN GRN is timing.

W: The phase indication is green with walk and WALK is timing.

Y: The phase indication is yellow and YELLOW CHANGE is timing.

R: The phase indication is red and RED CLEARANCE is timing.

NOTE: If no phase is programmed (All phases programmed "."), the controller will start in the first phase in ring one and the first phase in each ring that is compatible with it.

G, W, Y, R enables phase and interval. "." disables phase

REMOTE FLASH OVERLAP EXIT

Exit Remote (automatic) Flash Overlap(s) and Indications. X: The overlap indication will be:

Green if it would normally be green during the exit remote (automatic) flash phase indication.

Yellow if it would normally have been during the exit remote (automatic) flash phase indication.

Red if it would normally have been red during the exit remote (automatic) flash phase indication.

".": The overlap will be start in Red and follow the overlap programming when the next phase starts timing.

‘X’ enables

EXIT REMOTE FLASH

The Controller will start timing the exit remote flash phases in:

G: Green without Walk.

W: Green-Walk if Walk is programmed. Green if Walk is not programmed.

Y: Yellow change.

R: Red Clearance.

G, W, Y, R

MIN AUTO FLASH

Minimum automatic Flash Time:

The minimum time in seconds that the controller must remain in Automatic or remote flash before it is allowed to exit.

0-255 Seconds


PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE MINIMUM RECALL

Minimum Recall:

X: Enables, Appling a minimum vehicle recall to all phases while remote or automatic flash is being requested. The phases will time only minimum green before advancing to the remote flash entry phase(s).

“.”: Disables and the controller does not apply minimum vehicle recall while remote or automatic flash is requested.

NOTE: When enabled and cycle through phases is enabled, the controller will service every phase for a minimum time and then advance to the remote flash entry phases.

‘X’ enables

CYCLE THROUGH PHASE

Cycle Through Phases:

X: Enables, allowing the controller to service phases with a demand that are between the active phase(s) and remote flash entry phase(s).

“.”: Disables and the controller goes directly to the remote flash entry phase(s).

NOTE: When enabled and minimum recall is enabled, the controller will service every phase for a minimum time and then advance to the remote flash entry phases.

‘X’ enables


: �� 9 � �� $ ��& � & �

From the Controller Submenu screen (MM-2), press the #6 key and the Option Data Submenu screen (MM-2-6) appears. This submenu lists two data groups:

1. Controller Options and 2. Extended Options.

To view or edit data, press the #1 or #2 key to select the desired data group.

SCREEN MM-2-6 OPTION DATA SUBMENU 1. CONTROLLER OPTIONS 2. EXTENDED OPTIONS PRESS 1..2 TO SELECT

Controller Options

From the Option Data Submenu screen (MM-2-6), press the #1 key and the Controller Options screen (MM-2-6-1) appears. This screen scrolls both down and to the right. The illustration below shows the entire screen as if scrolling was not required.

SCREEN MM-2-6-1 SCREEN MM-2-6-1 (Scroll) CONTROLLER OPTIONS MORE ��

PED CLEAR PROTECT.................. OFF�UNIT RED REVERT.................... 2.0 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 GUAR PASSAGE.... . . . . . . . . NON-ACT I....... . . . . . . . . NON-ACT II...... . . . . . . . . DUAL ENTRY...... . . . . . . . . PED RESERVICE... . . . . . . . . REST IN WALK.... . . . . . . . . FLASHING WALK... . . . . . . . . PED CLR>YELLOW.. . . . . . . . . PED CLR>RED..... . . . . . . . . IGRN + VEH EXT.. . . . . . . . . PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

CONTROLLER OPTIONS MORE � PED CLEAR PROTECT.................. OFF UNIT RED REVERT.................... 2.0

PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 GUAR PASSAGE.... . . . . . . . . NON-ACT I....... . . . . . . . . NON-ACT II...... . . . . . . . . DUAL ENTRY...... . . . . . . . . PED RESERVICE... . . . . . . . . REST IN WALK.... . . . . . . . . FLASHING WALK... . . . . . . . . PED CLR>YELLOW.. . . . . . . . . PED CLR>RED..... . . . . . . . . IGRN + VEH EXT.. . . . . . . . . PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE



PED CLEAR PROTECT

Pedestrian Clear Protect.

Use the Toggle (0) key to turn this function ON or OFF.

Pedestrian clearance protection requires the controller to time pedestrian clearance on all phases with pedestrian clearance settings when manual control is enabled. Manual advance inputs are ignored during the pedestrian clearance interval.

ON enables OFF disables

UNIT RED REVERT

Unit Red Revert.

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to enter the minimum red revert time (0.0 – 25.5 sec.) for all phases.

Provides the minimum red revert time for all phases.

NOTE: Red Revert is the minimum phase red indication to be timed after the yellow change interval before a phase can once again display green. The greater of the Unit Red Revert or the phase’s Red Revert is timed.

0.0-25.5 sec.

GUAR PASSAGE

Guaranteed Passage.

Position the cursor at the desired column and row and use the Toggle (0) key to enable (X) or disable (“.”) the phase for Guaranteed Passage.

If a phase’s vehicle extension times out while timing a reduced vehicle extension and guaranteed passage is selected, the difference between the reduced interval and the initial vehicle extension is timed before a vehicle extension time out is reported. This option guarantees the timing of a full vehicle extension for the last detected vehicle.


NON-ACT I NON-ACT II

Call-to-Non-Actuated (CNA) Mode Inputs I and II.

Position the cursor at the desired column and row and use the Toggle (0) key to enable (X) or disable (“.”) Non-Actuated service for the phase.

CNA I and II mode inputs are used to enable and disable the NON-ACT I and NON-ACT I settings. In Dual Coordination, the phases programmed as call-to-nonactuated II are the crossing artery phases. NOTE: Non-actuated phases normally have pedestrian time settings.


DUAL ENTRY Dual Entry:

Position the cursor at the desired column and row and use the Toggle (0) key to enable (X) or disable (“.”) a phase’s Dual Entry assignment. Dual entry is a mode of operation in which one phase in each ring must be in operation. If there is no call on a ring when the controller crosses a barrier, a call is automatically placed on a compatible dual entry phase in that ring.




PED RESERVICE

Pedestrian Re-service:

Position the cursor at the desired column and row and use the Toggle (0) key to enable (X) or disable (“.”) the phase for Pedestrian Re-service.

This option enables the phase’s pedestrian movement to be serviced or re-serviced any time if there is adequate time for its walk and pedestrian clearance intervals to be completed before a Max out or coordinated force off. If re-service is enabled for a pedestrian service that is already in walk or pedestrian clearance when a call for service is input, the pedestrian movement returns to start of walk.

X enables “.”disables

REST IN WALK

Actuated Rest in Walk:

Position the cursor at the desired column and row and use the Toggle (0) key to enable (X) or disable (“.”) the Actuated Rest In Walk option for a phase’s pedestrian service.

Allows a phase with an actuated pedestrian call to rest at end of the pedestrian walk interval until a serviceable conflicting call is received.


FLASHING WALK

Flashing Walk:

Position the cursor at the desired column and row and use the Toggle (0) key to enable (X) or disable (“.”) the phase’s pedestrian service for flashing walk.

Pedestrian walk output is turned on for half a second and then off for half a second. The on and off flash is repeated for the duration of the walk interval.


PED CLR> YELLOW

Pedestrian Clearance through Yellow Change:

Position the cursor at the desired column and row and use the Toggle (0) key to enable (X) or disable (“.”) the phase’s pedestrian clearance interval from being extended to the end of the Yellow Change interval.

Enables a phase pedestrian clearance indication to time through the yellow change interval. The pedestrian clearance time remains the same but the last portion is timed during the Yellow Change interval.


PED CLR>RED

Pedestrian Clearance through Red Clearance:

Position the cursor at the desired column and row and use the Toggle (0) key to enable (X) or disable (“.”) the phase’s pedestrian clearance interval from being extended to the end of the Red Clearance.

Enables a phase pedestrian clearance indication to time through the Yellow Change and Red Clearance intervals. The pedestrian clearance time remains the same but the last portion is timed during the Yellow Change and Red Clearance intervals.



IGRN + VEH EXT

Initial Green times then Vehicle Extension Starts:

Position the cursor at the desired column and row and use the Toggle (0) key to enable (X) or disable (“.”) this phase timing option.

This option requires a phase time in its initial green interval before starting vehicle extension timing. During normal operation, the initial green and vehicle extension intervals both begin timing at the start of the phase’s green interval.


Extended Options

(Reserved for Future Release) SCREEN MM-2-6-2

Custom Screen not ready


: �� : � �" � � & � � ! �� 3 # � ! �� ! � �

SCREEN MM-2-7 ACTUATED PRE-TIMED MODE

ENABLE PRE-TIMED OPERATION......... NO FREE INPUT DISABLED PRE-TIMED...... NO PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PRE-TIMED. . . . . . . . . PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 PRE-TIMED. . . . . . . . . PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

Provides "fixed time" capability on selected (X) phases. The phases not selected (“.”) will operate as programmed. Press the Toggle (0) key to X (enable) or “.” (disable) phase(s) to be operated in the Pre-Timed mode.

Fixed time means:

1. The phase is placed on Max vehicle and pedestrian recall.

2. The Walk interval is expanded to make walk plus ped clearance equal to the phase max in effect time. If the programmed Walk plus Pedestrian Clearance intervals are longer than the max in effect time, the phase will time the programmed Walk and Pedestrian clearance.

3. Phases programmed as Rest in Walk (MM-2-6-1) are commanded to fixed time.

NOTE: Pre-timed operation can be disabled by:

1. External input by mapping an input (MM-1-8-1)

2. Time Base 3. Logic Processor (MM-1-9)

activating the "INHIBIT PRE-TIME" input.


: �� < � � " & **��& � & �

Phase Detector Options

SCREEN MM-2-8 PHASE DETECTOR OPTIONS

PHASE DETECTOR OPTION PLAN NUMBER [1] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASE.. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 LOCK DET X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X VE RCALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PD RCALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MX RCALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SF RCALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO REST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI CALC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

This screen provides the ability to select options that include: Lock Detector, Vehicle Recall, Pedestrian Recall, Max Recall, Soft Recall, No Rest, and Added Initial Calculation for phases 1 thru 16.

To set options: 1. Press the #1…#4 key to set the Phase Detector

Option Plan Number value.

2. Use the cursor arrow keys (right, left, up, and down) to position the cursor at the appropriate option/phase location, then

3. Use the Toggle (0) key to an X (enable) or “.” (disable) the selected option for the selected phase.

Screen above is repeated for plans 2-4

PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE PHASE DETECTOR OPTION PLAN NUMBER

Phase Detector Option Plan Number.

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to specify the detector plan (1-4) to be viewed or edited.

1-4

LOCK DET Phase Locking of Vehicle Detector.

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (".") the phase locking of detector inputs.

When locking memory is enabled, an actuation on any detector input assigned to the associated phase during yellow or red is "remembered" as a vehicle call and is not reset when the vehicle call is no longer present. Reset occurs during green.

NOTE: Locking memory function can be assigned per detector for each detector associated with a phase. (MM-6-2).


VE RCALL Phase Vehicle Recall.

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (".") phase vehicle recall.

Vehicle recall places a demand for vehicle service on a phase by registering a call while the phase is not in the green interval.


PD RCALL Phase Pedestrian Recall.

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (".") phase pedestrian recall.

Pedestrian recall places a demand for pedestrian service on a phase by registering a call while the phase is not in the walk interval.



PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE MX RCALL Phase Recall To Maximum Time.

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (".") recall to max.

Places a continuous vehicle call on the phase.

The phase times to the maximum green time.

Maximum green timer begins timing as though an opposing call was present, but the phase does not terminate unless there is an actual opposing call.


SF RCALL Soft Recall (Rest in these Phases).

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (".") soft recall.

Soft recall places a call on these enabled phase(s) when the controller goes to rest in other phases.

NOTE: Typical Soft Recall phases are through-phases such as 2 and 6.


NO REST Do Not Rest In These Phases.

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (".") phases that the controller may not rest in.

Absence of detector calls, the controller automatically goes to the next phase that is allowed to rest.

NOTE: Soft Recall overrides the No Rest entry.


AI CALC Added Initial Calculation by Phase.

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (".") the added initial calculation to include all detector inputs to the phase.

NOTE: This overrides individual detector option (MM-6-2) where the added initial calculation includes only the most active detector.



��

< �� ! $ & � � � �� + # � $ � �

Programming Summary

SCREEN MM-3

Select a time-base action plan. Enable actuated coordination. Select a timing plan. Enable actuated walk rest. Enable phase re-service. Select ring split extension value. Select split demand pattern. Enter ring displacement value. Enable directed split preference phases. Enable special function outputs.

3. SPLIT PATTERN DATA Split pattern data has three data groups as

follows: Select coordinated phases. Enter phase splits. Select mode for each phase.

4. AUTO PERMISSIVE MINIMUM GREEN Enter auto permissive minimum green time.

5. SPLIT DEMAND Split Demand data has four groups as follows: Select split demand phases Select split demand detectors Enter split demand call time. Enter split demand cycle count.

The Coordinator Submenu (select option #3 from the Main Menu) has five data groups as shown in the figure at the right. To view or enter data, press the keyboard number (1-5) corresponding to desired data group. A brief description of the programming functions that can be viewed and/or modified at each of the menu options follows.

1. OPTIONS Accesses a data entry screen that allows you to

specify eighteen different coordinator option values as follows: Enable manual pattern. Select source of interconnect commands. Select format of interconnect commands. Select transition method. Enable ECPI coordination operations. Select offset reference point. Enter dwell / add time. Enable Walk delayed to Local Zero. Select floating or fixed force-off. Enable Force-off added initial green. Enable the use of pedestrian time in determining

smooth transition direction. Enable pedestrian recall. Enable pedestrian re-service. Enable manual sync input. Enable local zero override. Enter re-sync count. Select max or inhibit during coordination. Enable multi-sync operation.

2. COORDINATOR PATTERN DATA Accesses a data entry screen that includes

eighteen coordinator pattern data groups as follows:

Enter cycle length. Select split pattern. Enter offset value. Select controller sequence. Select split and offset timing in sec. or %. Select crossing artery pattern. Enter vehicle permissive periods 1 and 2. Enter vehicle permissive 2 displacement.

COORDINATOR SUBMENU 1. OPTIONS 2. COORDINATOR PATTERN DATA 3. SPLIT PATTERN DATA 4. AUTO PERM MIN GREEN 5. SPLIT DEMAND PRESS 1..5 TO SELECT


< �% � �� ! $ & � � � �� $ � ��

Programming Summary

SCREEN MM-3-1

From the Coordinator Submenu screen (MM-3), press the #1 key to access the Coordinator Options screen (MM-3-1) shown at the right. This screen allows you to specify eighteen different coordinator option values as follows:

1. Manual Pattern Any non-zero entry selects that coordination pattern. If the pattern selected is not programmed correctly, coordinator is set free.

2. Interconnect Source Determines the source of the coordination pattern.

3. Interconnect Format Determines the format that the source is presenting the coordination pattern selection in.

4. Transition Selects the method that the coordinator uses to get into coordination.

5. ECPI Coord Allows ECPI coordination operation and parameters.

6. Offset Reference Selects the reference point for the programmed offset.

7. Dwell or Add Time Enters the maximum time that the coordinator can dwell or add when transitioning.

8. Delay Coordinate Phase Walk Until Local Zero

Enable the coordinated phase walk to be prevented from starting until the local zero. Normally, the coordinated phase walk starts as soon as it is able to after the last permissive is closed.

9. Force Off Selects the method of determining the position of the phase force off.

10. Force Off Added Initial Green Allows the coordinator to terminate the phase green when added initial is timing. This only has an effect when added initial is programmed during volume-density operation (MM-2-1).

11. Use Pedestrian Time Allows the smooth transition algorithm to use or not to use the pedestrian times in determining the smooth transition direction.

12. Ped Recall Allows the programmed pedestrian recall (MM-6-3) to recycle the pedestrian movement when the Coordinator Pattern has Actuated Walk programmed.

13. Ped Re-Service Allows pedestrian movement when walk plus ped clearance can time before force-off point..

14. Enable Manual Synchronization When a manual pattern is enabled and the Interconnect Source is NIC the “CLEAR” key to set:

• Local Master Dial to zero. • Local dial to the offset value of the pattern. • Sets the internal sync reference point to the

present time. 15. Local Zero Override Allows the non-coordinated phase/s to use a portion of the coordinated phase split before the coordinated phase becomes green. The movement continues to run and remain in sync with the Local Master Dial until the coordinated phase would violate the Yield point. At that time, the Local Dial stops until the coordinated phase is green and reports a local zero error.

NOTE: Typically used on short cycles that have seldom used non-coordinated movements.

COORDINATOR OPTIONS MANUAL PATTERN.AUTO 0 INTCONT SRC... NIC INTCONT FORMAT PTN TRANSITION.. SMOOTH ECPI COORD......YES OFFSET REF.... LEAD DWELL/ADD TIME 0 DLY COORD WK-LZ. NO FORCE OFF.... FLOAT FO ADD INI GRN.. NO USE PED TIME... NO PED RECALL...... NO PED RESV........ NO ENABLE MAN SYNC. NO LOCAL ZERO OVRD. NO RE-SYNC COUNT.... 0 MAX SELECT. MAXINH MULTISYNC....... NO PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE


Coordinator Options (Continued) 16. Re-Sync Count Selects the number of missed syncs allowed from an external source before reverting to tome-base.

17. Max Select Allow maximum split time in coordination to be either the phase split or selected Max 1, 2, or 3.

18. Multisync Allows the coordinator to receive multiple sync pulses. The coordinator will synchronize to the pulse that represents cycle in effect.


MANUAL PATTERN

Manual Pattern Selection.

0: Selects automatic selection of coordination pattern, free, or flash by other sources.

1-120: Selects that pattern for coordination operation. This selection overrides all other pattern selections.

254: Selects free operation and overrides any pattern or flash from any other source other than preemption.

255: Selects flash operation and overrides any coordination pattern or free from any other source.

0-120, 254, or 255

INTCONT SRC Interconnect (Coordination) Source.

Press the Toggle (0) key to select HDW, NIC, COMM 2, COMM 3A, or COMM 3B as the source of coordination commands.

HDW: The source of coordination data is the NEMA TS2 inputs.

NIC: The source of coordination data is Non-Interconnected Coordination.

SYS: The source of coordination data is Port 2, Port 3A or Port 3B respectively. Port 3B requires an optional telemetry module.

HDW, NIC, or SYS

INTCONT FORMAT

Interconnect (Coordination) Format.

Use the Toggle (0) key to select PTN, STD, or TS2 interconnect format.

PTN: The coordination pattern is selected directly by number.

1-120: Selects the coordination pattern. 254: Sets the coordinator free. 255: Commands automatic flash.

STD: The coordination patterns are selected by Econolite-Standard cycle/offset/split commands. The pattern selected is determined by the following:

(((Cycle - 1) * 20) + ((Split - 1) * 5) + Offset)) = pattern number.

The coordinator is free if the cycle or split are zero.

TS2: The coordination patterns are selected by TS2 timing plans and offset. The pattern selected is determined by the following:

(((Timing plan) * 3) + offset) = pattern number.

The coordinator is free if the offset is zero. Flash is by a separate command.

PTN, STD, or TS2

TRANSITION Use the Toggle (0) key to select SMOOTH, ADD ONLY or DWELL to select method of offset change.

SMOOTH: Change is by adding a maximum of 20% or subtracting a maximum of 17% of cycle length per cycle (Ref. NTCIP 1202 2.5.2 Integer 3). This time is modified by the (ECPI feature) of "DWELL / ADD TIME" when it is non-zero.

SMOOTH, ADD ONLY or DWELL



TRANSITION (Continued)

ADD ONLY: Change is by adding a maximum of 20% of cycle length per cycle, moving into next cycle if necessary. Ref. NTCIP 1202 2.5.2 integer 4). This time is modified by the (ECPI feature) of "DWELL / ADD TIME" when it is non-zero. DWELL: Change is by holding in the coordinated phases for a specified dwell period (Ref NTCIP 1202 2.5.2 Integer 1). NOTE: Snap offset correction is active at all times. The general operation performs as follows: "If a local cycle can be in sync, make it in sync."

SMOOTH, ADD ONLY or DWELL

ECPI COORD Toggle to enable (YES) or disable (NO).

YES: The coordinator WILL:

• Not be set free if the critical phase (Minimum time to service the phase) time is greater than the split.

• Not be set free if the critical path (Minimum time to service all phases with minimum recall applied) through the phase diagram is greater than the cycle length.

• Will time 20 seconds of dwell with zero programmed in the DWELL / ADD time parameter.

• Will time the Smooth transitions add time if the DWELL / ADD time is greater than zero. If equal to zero, it will time 17%.

NO (default): The coordinator WILL:

• Be set free if the critical phase (Minimum time to service the phase) time is greater than the split (Reference NTCIP 1202-2.5.9.3).

• Be set free if the critical path (Minimum time to service all phases with minimum recall applied) through the phase diagram is greater than the cycle length (Reference NTCIP 1202-2.5.9.3).

• Will time max dwell regardless of what is programmed in the DWELL / ADD time parameter (Reference NTCIP 1202-2.5.2).

• Will time the Smooth transitions add time if the DWELL / ADD time is greater than zero. If equal to zero, it will time 17% (Reference NTCIP 1202-2.5.2).

• Force the coordinator to MAX INHIBIT when MAX SELECT is set to MAX3.

• Force the coordinator free when the Cycle is greater than 255.

YES/NO

OFFSET REF Offset Reference.

Press the Toggle (0) key to select LEAD, LAG, YIELD, or YELLOW as the offset reference.

LEAD: References the start of the Local Dial to the start of the first coordinated phase green.

LAG: References the start of the Local Dial to the start of the last coordinated phase green.

YIELD: References the start of the Local Dial to the start of the yield of the first coordinated phase.

YELLOW: References the start of the Local Dial to the start of the first coordinated phase yellow.

LEAD, LAG, YIELD, or YELLOW



DWELL / ADD TIME

Use the numeric keys (0-9) to enter the maximum time that Dwell or Add can add to a cycle.

When the Offset Correction is Dwell:

0 (zero): NTCIP maximum dwell (Ref NTCIP 1202 2.5.2 Integer 2).

1-99: Percentage if offset is in percent, seconds if the offset is in seconds.

100-255: Seconds if the offset is in percent or seconds.

When the Offset Correction is Add Only or Smooth Transition:

0 (zero): Maximum 17% of the cycle to add during Add Only or Smooth Transition (Ref NTCIP 1202 2.5.2 Integers 3 and 4).

1-99: Maximum percentage if the offset is in percent or seconds if the offset is in seconds to add during Add Only or Smooth Transition.

100-255: maximum seconds to add during Add Only or Smooth Transition regardless if the offset is in seconds or percent.

NOTE: During Smooth Transition, the coordinator subtracts a maximum of 17% of the cycle.

0-255

DLY COORD WK -LZ

Delay the Coordinated Walk to Local Zero.

Press the Toggle (0) key to enable (YES) or disable (NO) delaying the start of the coordinated phase walks.

YES: Delays the start of walk of the coordinated phases until the start of local zero.

NO: Allows the coordinated phase walk to start after the end of the last permissive period is closed.

YES/NO

FORCE OFF Determines position of the phase force off:

FIXED: The phase will force off at the fixed position in the cycle regardless of when it started. FLOAT: The phase will force off after it has serviced its split regardless of when it started.

FIXED FLOAT

FO ADD INI GRN

Force Off Added Initial Green.

Press the Toggle (0) key to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the Force Off of Added Initial Green by the Coordinator.

NOTE: This option allows the use of the Added Initial calculations while maintaining coordination.

YES: Allows the coordinator to force off the Added portion of Initial Green that was generated by volume density.

NO: Prevents the coordinator from Forcing off the Added portion of Initial Green that was generated by volume density.

YES/NO



USE PED TIME Use Pedestrian Times When Calculating Minimum Cycle.

Press the Toggle (0) key to enable (YES) or disable (NO) using pedestrian times for minimum cycle calculations.

NOTE: The minimum cycle value has effect only on subtraction during SMOOTH TRANSITION.

YES: Includes pedestrian times in minimum cycle calculation for offset correction.

NO: Omits pedestrian times from the minimum cycle calculation for offset correction.

NOTE: NO is typically used at intersections that have little or no pedestrian movements.

YES/NO

PED RECALL Coordinated Phase Pedestrian Re-service.

Press the Toggle (0) key to enable (YES) or disable (NO) pedestrian recall (MM-6-3) during coordination.

YES: Allows the programmed pedestrian recall (MM-6-3) to recycle the pedestrian movement when the Coordinator Pattern has Actuated Walk programmed. The pedestrian actuations will have no effect

NO: Allows only pedestrian actuations to recycle the pedestrian movement during coordination. The programmed pedestrian recall (MM-6-3) will not recycle the pedestrian movement when the Coordinator Pattern has actuated Walk programmed.

YES/NO

PED RESV Pedestrian Re-service.

Press the Toggle (0) key to enable (YES) or disable (NO) re-serviced the Walk during coordination.

YES: Allows the pedestrian movements to be re-serviced in any interval.

NO: Prevents the pedestrian movements from being re-serviced during a coordination cycle.

NOTE: When pedestrian phases are re-serviced, they will return to the start of the Walk interval. Any pedestrian phase can be re-serviced when there is a pedestrian call and Walk plus Pedestrian Clear can be timed in full before the force-off point.

YES/NO

ENABLE MAN SYNC

Enable Manual Coordination Synchronization.

Press the Toggle (0) key to enable (X) or disable (".") manual synchronization of the coordinator during manual pattern selection when Manual Pattern is enabled and the Interconnect Source is NIC.

X: Enables the CLEAR key to set: • Local Master Dial to zero. • Local dial to the offset value of the pattern before zero. • The internal sync reference point to the present time. This allows the

local dial to continue cycling without transition until manual operation ceases.

• Reset the X to ".".

NOTE: Any power interruption will disrupt manual coordination.

X enable “.” disable



LOCAL ZERO OVRD

Local Zero Override.

YES: Allows the coordinator local dial to continue running and remain in synchronization with the Local Master Dial until the coordinated phase would violate the Yield point. At that time, the Local Dial stops until the coordinated phase is green and reports a local zero error.

NO: Normal coordinator operation. The Local Dial stops at Local Zero until the coordinated phase is green and reports a local zero error.

NOTE: Typically used on short cycles that have seldom used non-coordinated movements. Allows the non-coordinated phase(s) to use a portion of the coordinated phase split before the coordinated phase becomes green. The seldom used movement has a phase split that violated the coordinated cycle or phase split because of a pedestrian movement, density, full phase demand, or guaranteed minimum times. There will be “not reported” or “logged errors” if the coordinated phase is “can yield” by the yield point.

YES/NO

RE-SYNC COUNT

Allows the coordinator to self sync when a sync pulse does not occur at Local Master Zero.

0: Defaults to "1" self-sync cycle.

1-254: Self-sync cycles that will be completed if a sync pulse does not occur. After which, Coordination reverts to Time Base operation.

255: Allows the coordinator to continue to re-sync until a sync pulse is detected.

NOTE: This option is used when the interconnect sync pulses are an even multiple of the local cycle.

EXAMPLE: Set the re-sync count to 3 when:

The interconnect sync pulse every 180 seconds. The local cycle is 60 seconds.

0-255

MAX SELECT Press the Toggle (0) key to select INHIBIT, MAX 1, MAX 2 or MAX 3.

INHIBIT: Allows the coordinator phase split to control the time a phase is allowed to be green in any Coordination Pattern.

MAX 1, MAX 2 or MAX 3: Allows the shorter of the MAX timing (MM-2-1) or the coordinator phase split to control the time a phase is allowed to be green in any Coordination Pattern.

INHIBIT, MAX 1, MAX 2, MAX 3

MULTISYNC Press the Toggle (0) key to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the MULTISYNC Operation.

YES: Allows the coordinator to receive sync pulses that represent multiple cycle lengths and synchronize to the sync pulse that represents cycle in effect.

NO: Resets the local master dial on every sync pulse.

YES/NO


< �� ! $ & � � � ��& � � � � $ ��& � & ��

Programming Summary

MM-3-2 (Scroll removed) COORDINATOR PATTERN [ 1} MORE �

TS2 (PAT-OFF).. 1-2 STD (COS)...... 151 CYCLE.......... 80s SPLIT PATTERN... 20 OFFSET VAL..... 0 SEQUENCE....... 0 SPLITS IN.. SECONDS OFFSET IN.. PERCENT XART PATTERN... 0 VEH PERM 1..... 0% VEH PERM 2..... 0% VEH PERM 2 DISP 0% ACTION PLAN.... 0 ACTUATED COORD... . TIMING PLAN.... 0 ACT WALK REST.... . PHASE RESERVICE.. . 1 2 3 4 RING SPLIT EXT (SEC) 0% 0% 0% 0% SPLIT DEMAND PATTERN. 0 0 RING DISPLACEMENT.... 0% 0% 0% DIRECTED SPLIT PREFERENCE PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PREFERENCE 1.... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PREFERENCE 2.... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 PREFERENCE 1.... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PREFERENCE 2.... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SPECIAL FUNCTION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OUTPUTS . . . . . . .

From the Coordinator Submenu screen (MM-3), press the #2 key to access the Coordinator Pattern screen (MM-3-2) shown at right. This screen, when scrolled, allows you to specify all coordinator pattern data values.

Coordination is controlled with patterns. Each pattern is defined by the associated coordination parameters programmed by the user. The pattern consists of independent cycle time, offset value, split pattern and units for offset and split values. Each pattern allows independent selection of controller sequence, vehicle permissive operations, phase re-service, split extension, split demand pattern, crossing artery pattern, phase sequences, actuated coordination/walk rest, timing plan, ring displacement, split preference phases, spare outputs and time-base action plan for by-phase selection of vehicle recall, max recall, ped recall, and phase omits.

COORDINATOR PATTERN To advance to a desired pattern, enter the desired pattern number and press the ENTER function key.

TS2 (PAT-OFF) Displays the TS2 pattern and offset that will select this pattern.

STD (COS) Displays the standard interconnect cycle, offset, and split that will select this pattern.

CYCLE Enters the cycle length in seconds that the coordinator will use when this pattern is active. To coordinate the cycle length must be greater than 30 seconds.

SPLIT PATTERN Selects the split pattern that this pattern will use. The split pattern has the coordinated phases selection, phase splits and modes.

OFFSET VALUE Enters the value in seconds or percent that the local cycle zero will lag the system sync. This value must be consistent with the offset in selection.

SEQUENCE Selects the controller sequence that this pattern will command if the sequence select is programmed for “COORD.”

Screen above repeats for coordinator patterns 2 through 120.

SPLITS IN/OFFSETS IN Split and offset related data may be entered in percents or seconds. Values entered for split or offset parameters must be consistent with units specified.

XART PATTERN Select the coordination pattern to be used when dual coordination is selected.

PERMISSIVES Automatic: Enter zero for vehicle permissives 1 and 2 and vehicle permissive 2 displacement.

Single: Enter desired single permissive period for VEH PERM 1 and zero for VEH PERM 2 and VEH PERM 2 DISP.

Dual: Enter desired values for VEH PERM 1, VEH PERM 2 and VEH PERM 2 DISP.

(Continued next page)


COORDINATOR Coordinator Pattern Data (Continued)

ACTION PLAN Selects the time base action plan that will be active during this coordination pattern. The properties of the selected action plan will be "OR'ed" with those in effect. The pattern, flash, red rest and timing plan in this action plan will not be in effect.

ACTUATED COORD Makes the coordinated phases non-actuated until the yield point then actuated thereafter. Required when ring split extensions, actuated walk rest or phase re-service is programmed.

TIMING PLAN Selects the TIMING PLAN that is in effect when this coordination pattern is selected.

ACT WALK REST Makes the coordinated phase(s) rest in walk when actuated coordination is programmed.

PHASE RESERVICE Allows the coordinator to respond to demands on any phase that has an open permissive. For phase reservice to function, the controller must be fully actuated, including coordinated phases, actuated coordination programmed and automatic permissives enabled.

RING SPLIT EXT Allows the coordinated phase in each ring to extend by actuations from the split extension time before coordinated phase split termination. Once gapped, the ring can service any open permissive phase.

SPLIT DEMAND PATTERN 1/2 Enter the pattern to be in effect that is used in the split demand screen. (MM-3-5) enables split demand 1 or 2.

RING DISPLACEMENT Select the displacement or offset from ring one that an independent ring coordinated phase will start. When two or more rings have a barrier in common, the higher numbered ring is forced to use the value of the lower numbered ring.

PREFERENCE 1/2 PHASES Select the phases to receive any non-coordinated phase unused split time. Preference 1 phases have precedence over preference 2 phases when unused split time is being allocated.

SPECIAL FUNCTION OUTPUTS Select the special function outputs to be active when this coordination pattern is in effect.


COORDINATION PATTERN

Use the numeric keys (0-9) to select the number of the desired Coordination Pattern.

0 (zero): Selects the first Coordination Pattern that is not programmed.

1-120: Selects the pattern having the number entered.

0-120

TS2 (PAT-OFF) STD (COS)

The TS2 pattern (Timing Plan – Offset) and STD (COS) that represent this pattern are displayed for information only.



CYCLE LENGTH Coordination Cycle Length

Use the numeric keys (0-9) to enter the length of the coordination cycle in seconds.

0 (Zero): Forces Free and replaces the phase Max in effect with the split time as the Max for the phase.

1-29: Forces Free. This is a result of the coordinator not being able to function below 30 seconds.

30-255: Programs the cycle length. NOTE: The Offset and Split values (MM-3-1) can be in seconds or percent with cycle length between 30 and 255.

256-999: Programs the cycle length.

NOTE: The Offset and Split values will be in percents with cycle length greater than 255 regardless of what is programmed (MM-3-1).

0-999

SPLIT PATTERN Coordination Split Pattern

Use the numeric keys (0-9) to select the number of the desired Split Pattern.

1-120 is the SPLIT PATTERN that represents the phase split values, coordinated phases, vehicle and pedestrian recalls, and phase omits that are to be used when this coordination pattern is in effect.

1-120 - selects pattern 0 – sets Coordinator free

OFFSET VAL Offset from the System Sync

Use the numeric keys (0-9) to enter the Offset value seconds or percent depending on the programming of OFFSETS IN parameter.

0 to (CYCLE minus 1): Time or percent that the Local Dial lags the Local Master Dial (synchronization pulse).

CYCLE to 255: Results on the coordinator going free.

NOTE: When the cycle length is greater than 255, the acceptable offset value is 0-255 seconds or 0-99%.

Depending on the programmed offset reference (MM-3-1) this offset may be referenced to the start of the first coordinated phase green, the start of the last coordinated phase green, start of the first coordinated phase yield or the start of the first coordinated phase yellow.

0-255

SEQUENCE Pattern Sequence.

Use the numeric keys (0-9) to enter the number (0-16) that will select the sequence the controller will be in during this Coordination Pattern if SEQ SELECT is COORD.

NOTE: Only controller 1 has sequences 1-16. Other controllers only have sequence 1.

1-16 – selects Controller 1 sequence 0- allows sequence selection by others

SPLITS IN Splits are in:

Use the Toggle (0) key to select SECONDS or PERCENT.

SECONDS: Defines the units programmed in the Split Pattern (MM-3-3) as seconds

PERCENT: Defines the units programmed in the Split Pattern (MM-3-3) as percentage of the cycle time.

SECONDS or PERCENT



OFFSETS IN Offsets are in:

Use the Toggle (0) key to select SECONDS or PERCENT.

SECONDS: Defines the units programmed in the Offset Value (MM-3-2) as seconds.

PERCENT: Defines the units programmed in the Offset Value (MM-3-2) as percentage of the cycle time.

SECONDS or PERCENT

XART PATTERN Crossing Artery Pattern.

Use the numeric keys (0-9) to select and enable the crossing artery operation when the Dual Coordination input is TRUE.

0 (Zero): Disables the crossing artery coordination.

1-120: Selects the Split Pattern to be used when crossing artery operation is requested.

NOTE: Crossing artery coordination takes precedence over Split demand. The crossing artery coordinated phases are programmed as CNA2 phases.

0-120

VEH PERM 1 Vehicle Permissive Period 1 (VPP1).

Portion of the cycle length during which phases other than the coordinated phases may be serviced. This period begins timing at the coordinated phase yield point. If VEH PERM 2 DISP or VEH PERM 2 are equal to zero, all non-coordinated phases may be serviced during this period. If VEH PERM 2 DISP or VEH PERM 2 are not equal to zero (dual permissive operation), then only the first phase(s) following the coordinated phase(s) (first permissive phases) are serviced during this period.

Use numeric keys (0-9) to enter 0 to (CYCLE minus 1). The units of measure are the same as for the SPLIT units (seconds or percentage).

1 to (CYCLE minus 1) enables the VEHICLE PERMISSIVE PERIOD 1 (VPP1) that is the portion of the cycle following Yield in which phase(s) following a coordinated phase may be serviced.

NOTE: If VEHICLE PERMISSIVE PERIOD 2 (VPP2) or VEHICLE PERMISSIVE 2 DISPLACEMENT (VPP2D) is zero, all phases will be serviced during VPP1.

0 (zero) enables the coordinator to calculate an "AUTO PERMISSIVE" for each phase when VPP2 is also zero.

0-99% 0-255 sec.



VEH PERM 2 Vehicle Permissive Period 2 (VPP2).

Portion of the cycle length during which phases other than the coordinated phases and those directly following may be serviced. This period begins timing immediately after the vehicle permissive 2 displacement period. Only phases other than those serviced during the first permissive period can be serviced as phase omits are applied to the first permissive phase(s).


1 to (CYCLE minus 1) enables VPP2 that starts after VPP2D has timed out following the Coordinator Yield. It is the portion of the cycle following that phase(s) other than those directly following coordinated phase(s) may be serviced.

NOTE: If VPP2 or VPP2D is zero, all phases will be serviced during VPP1.

0 (zero) enables the coordinator to calculate an "AUTO PERMISSIVE" for each phase when VPP1 is also zero.

0-99% 0-255 sec.

VEH PERM 2 DISP Vehicle Permissive Period 2 Displacement (VPP2D).

Begins timing at the coordinated phase yield point. At the end of this displacement period the second permissive period begins timing.


1 to (CYCLE minus 1) is the portion of cycle between the YIELD POINT and the beginning of VPP2.

0 (zero) enables all phases to be serviced during the first permissive period when VPP 1 is non-zero.

0-99% 0-255 sec.

ACTION PLAN Action Plan During Coordination Pattern.

Selects the time base action plan that will be active during this coordination pattern. The properties of the selected action plan will be "ORed" with those in effect. The pattern, flash, red rest and timing plan in this action plan will not be in effect.

Use the numeric keys (0-9) to select the Time Base Action Plan (1-100) to be in effect or enter 0 (zero) to disable selection.

0 (zero) disables any selection of a Time Base Action Plan by this Coordination Pattern.

1-100 selects the Time Base Action Plan that will be in effect when this Coordinator Pattern is in effect.

NOTE: The properties of this Time Base Action Plan and any other that may be in effect will be "ORed" with the exception of Pattern, Flash, Red Rest and Timing Plan.

0 disables 1-100 selects plan


PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE ACTUATED COORD Actuated Coordinated Phase

Enables the coordinated phase(s) to respond to vehicle demand(s) and extend the coordinated phase between the ring split extension time before the yield point. When enabled, allows actuated walk rest to be enabled.

Use the Toggle (0) key to select X (enable) or “.” (disable) for the coordinated phases to be actuated.

X: enables the coordinated phases to respond to vehicle detector inputs and to extend the coordinated phase split after the yield point to a maximum of the RING SPLIT EXT entry.

NOTE: When Actuated Coordinated phase is enabled, it also allows for Actuated Walk / Rest if enabled.

".": disables the coordinated phase from responding to any vehicle or pedestrian detector inputs and forces Vehicle and Pedestrian Recall.


TIMING PLAN Coordination Timing Plan.

1-4: Selects the Phase TIMING PLAN that is in effect when this coordination pattern is in effect.

0 (Zero): Allows the phase timing plan in effect to be active.

NOTE: The timing plan in effect may be selected by input or by Time Base Action Plan (MM-5-4), Coordinator Pattern (MM-3-3), Preemptor (MM-4-1), or Start/Flash (MM-2-5).

0-4

ACT WALK REST Actuated Rest in Walk.

Use the Toggle (0) key to select X (enable) or “.” (disable) the coordinated phase Actuated Walk to rest in walk.

YES: Allows actuated coordinated phase walk to rest in WALK and begin pedestrian clearance at the Yield Point.

NO: Allows the actuated coordinated phase to time walk and pedestrian clearance in response to a demand.


PHASE RESERVICE Allows all phases (including the coordinated phases) to cycle between those that have open permissives and to rest in any phase. Automatic calls are only placed on the coordinated phases when it is time to return.

Use the Toggle (0) key to select X (enable) or “.” (disable) the re-servicing of phases during a single coordination cycle.

YES: Enables the coordinator to allow the controller to respond to demands on any phase that has an open.

NO: Disallows re-servicing of phases during a single coordination cycle. Once the controller has exited and returned to the coordinated phases, it will not service any demand until the next cycle.

NOTE: For phase re-service to function, the controller must be fully actuated, including coordinated phases, actuated coordination programmed and automatic permissive enabled.




RING SPLIT EXT Coordinated Phase Split Extension.

Vehicle extension time for an actuated coordinated phase.

0 to (CYCLE minus 1) seconds or 0-99% allows the coordinated phase in each ring to extend by actuations from the SPLIT EXTENSION time before coordinated phase split termination. Once gapped, the ring can service any open permissive phase.

NOTE: Requires ACTUATED COORDINATION. Units of measure will be same as the SPLIT option.

0-99% 0-255 sec.

SPLIT DEMAND PATTERN

Enter the pattern to be in effect when enabled by split demand screen (MM-3-5) programming.

The coordinator uses these phase splits in place of those in the SPLIT PATTERN when the SPLIT DEMAND PATTERN is in effect. The coordinated phase(s) and modes are still taken from the SPLIT PATTERN.

Use the numeric keys (0-9) to enter the number of the SPLIT DEMAND pattern to be in effect when enabled.(MM-3-5).

1-120 selects the SPLIT PATTERN that will be in effect when SPLIT DEMAND 1 or 2 is in effect. If both are in effect, SPLIT DEMAND PATTERN 2 is selected.

0 (ZERO) disables that split demand operation.

NOTE: Crossing artery coordination takes precedence over Split demand.

0 disables 1-120 selects

RING DISPLACEMENT Ring Displacement From Ring 1.

Use the numeric keys (0-9) to select the displacement (Offset) from Ring Offset One that independent ring coordinated phase(s) will start.

0 to (CYCLE minus 1) seconds or 0-99% is the displacement Ring 1 for Rings 2, 3 and 4.

Cycle to 255 seconds or 100-255% results in no displacement.

The Offset for the rings are as follows: The Offset for the rings are as follows:

Ring 1 offset is the programmed offset. Ring 2 offset is the programmed offset plus the Ring 1-2 Offset. Ring 3 offset is the programmed offset plus the Ring 1-3 Offset. Ring 4 offset is the programmed offset plus the Ring 1-4 Offset.

NOTE: When two or more rings (1-4) have a barrier in common, the higher numbered ring is forced to use the value of the lower numbered ring.

EXAMPLE: Rings 1 and 3 have a barrier in common. The Ring Displacement 1-3 will be ignored and Ring 3 will use the offset of Ring 1.

0-255 seconds (0 to CYCLE minus 1) or (0-99%)



DIRECTED SPLIT PREFERENCE PHASES

Preference 1 and 2 Phase Unused Split Allocation.

Use the Toggle (0) key to select (X) or deselect (".") a phase for allocation of unused split time.

X: Preference 1 phases have precedence over Preference 2 phases when unused split time is being allocated as follows.

Unused split allocation calculation for each concurrent group:

• The amount of time that the barriers surrounding the phase(s) could be contracted to accommodate any unused split time.

• The amount that the barriers can be increased if the excess time (split - split usage) is added to the designated phases.

• PREFERENCE 1 phase(s) shall be used unless they are unavailable or have gapped out during the last Cycle.

• PREFERENCE 2 phases if available and maxed out during the last cycle shall be used if PREFERENCE 1 phase is unavailable.

• PREFERENCE 1 and 2 phases are both not available or have gapped during the last cycle, the excess time is assigned to the beginning of the coordinated phases.

X select “.” deselect

SPECIAL FUNCTION OUTPUTS

Coordinator Pattern Special Function Outputs.

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) up to eight special function outputs when this Coordination Pattern is in effect.

These outputs are typically Mapped to a controller output, input, or used by a Logic Processor (MM-1-8-2) statement.



< �. � �! ! � ! �� $ � � $ � �

The following definitions do not appear on any of the data entry screens. They are included here because they are necessary in understanding the data entry parameters for this section.


PERMISSIVE OPERATION

The coordinator is programmed to calculate permissive periods by one of three operations: Automatic, Dual and Single.

-

AUTO PERMISSIVE Automatically computed permissive period. Each sequential phase is automatically assigned a vehicle and pedestrian permissive period. The length of the vehicle permissive period is determined by the phase split interval and phase minimum time. Phase minimum time is equal to auto permissive minimum green, bike minimum green, or phase minimum green, whichever is larger, plus the yellow and red clearance time. Auto permissive green time allows the phase minimum green to be set to a low value, yet still ensures that the auto permissive period provides sufficient green time if the controller yields to the phase at the end of the permissive.

-

DUAL PERMISSIVE A permissive operation that requires operator data entry of three parameter values: VEH PERM 1, VEH PERM 2 and VEH PERM 2 DISP. During this permissive operation, the Vehicle permissive period 1 times first. This period begins at the yield point. Vehicle permissive period 2 begins timing immediately after an adjustable time period (Vehicle Permissive Period 2 Displacement). During the vehicle permissive period 1, only those phases immediately following the coordinated phases are serviced. If the controller yields during the first permissive, all remaining calls are serviced in normal sequence and the second permissive period is not used.

-

SINGLE PERMISSIVE Single permissive operation is selected by setting the Vehicle Permissive 2 displacement to zero. Only the Vehicle Permissive Period 1 and its associated pedestrian permissive period are timed and begin timing at the yield point. During the Single Permissive period, the controller yields to any phase.

-

PERMISSIVE PERIOD END POINT

End Point = (Split Sum) - (K Phase Clear) - (Perm Phase Min Green and Clear)

Where:

• Split Sum = Sum of splits from coordinated through permissive phases, inclusive.

• K Phase Clear = Coordinated phase Yellow + All Red (If Walk Rest Modifier input = TRUE).

• K Phase Clear = Coordinated phase Ped Clear + Yellow + All Red (If Walk Rest Modifier input = FALSE).

• Perm Phase Min Green and Clear = Permissive phases minimum green + Yellow + All Red.

• Perm Phase Min Green = Permissive Phase minimum green or (Walk + Ped Clear), whichever is greater.

-

YIELD POINT Yield Point = Coordinated phase split interval - Coordinated phase clearance time (Pedestrian and vehicle clearance times).

-

ACTUATED YIELD POINT

Actuated Yield Point = Coordinated phase split interval - Coordinated phase clearance time(s) – Ring split extension time.

-



OFFSET POINT The offset entry establishes the offset point to the

LEAD: Referenced the start of the Local Dial to the start of the first coordinated phase green.

LAG: Referenced the start of the Local Dial to the start of the last coordinated phase green.

YIELD: Referenced the start of the Local Dial to the start of the first coordinated phase yield.

YELLOW: Referenced the start of the Local Dial to the start of the first coordinated phase yellow.

-

YIELD POINTS The coordinator uses multiple yield points, one yield point is computed per ring. There may be four distinct yield points. Hold and Yield are independent calculations based on offset, coordinated phase splits and coordinated phase timing.

-

MINIMUM CONTROLLER CYCLE TIME

The shortest possible cycle length allowing all phases to time their minimum vehicle and pedestrian interval times.

-

DUAL COORDINATION

Dual coordination is established when the dual coordination input is TRUE. This forces the crossing artery (XARTY PATTERN) phase splits to be used and places a continuous vehicle demand on the call-to-non-actuated 2 (CNA II) phases.

-


< �8 � �� * � ��& � � � � $ ��

SCREEN MM-3-3 (Scroll removed) SPLIT PATTERN [ 1]

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 COORD PH . X . . . X . . . . . . . . . . PHASE 1 2 3 4 SPLIT.... 20 30 20 30 MODE.... MAX+PED NONE PED MAX+PED PHASE 5 6 7 8 SPLIT.... 20 30 20 30 MODE.... MAX+PED NONE PED MIN PHASE 9 10 11 12 SPLIT.... 0 0 0 0 MODE.... OMIT OMIT OMIT OMIT PHASE 13 14 15 16 SPLIT.... 0 0 0 0 MODE.... OMIT OMIT OMIT OMIT

PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

The split patterns are selected by the coordination patterns and identify coordinated phase, split value and recall / omit selection. From the Coordinator Submenu screen (MM-3), press the #3 key to access the Split Pattern screen (MM-3-3) shown at right. This screen, when scrolled, allows you to specify all coordinator split pattern data values.

SPLIT PATTERN: To advance to desired pattern, enter desired pattern number after SPLIT PATTERN then depress “ENTER.”

COORDINATED PHASE(S): Select the phase(s) that will be coordinated when the Split Pattern is operational.

PHASE SPLIT: Enter the split value for active each phase.

MODE: Select the recall mode or omit for all active phases.

Screen above repeats for Split Patterns 2 through 120.


SPLIT PATTERN

Select the desired Split Pattern to edit or view as follows:

1-120 will display the programming for the specified Split Pattern.

1-120

COORD PH Coordinated Phases.

Use the Toggle (0) key to select (X) or deselect (".") phases for coordination.

NOTES:

• All coordinated phases must be compatible (in the same concurrent group).

• There must be a Coordinated phase entered for each ring in that concurrent group.

• It is permissible to have only one ring in the concurrent group.

X select “.” deselect

PHASE SPLIT Division of cycle time into sections (split intervals) establishes the maximum amount of time that is allocated to each timing phase during coordination.

CAUTION:

ECPI COORD = NO, the coordinator will go free when: • Entering zero for any active phase-split. • Entering phase-splits that are smaller than the minimum phase time • Entering splits that exceed the cycle length.

ECPI COORD = YES, then: • Entering zero for any active phase-split will omit that phase. • Entering phase-split(s) that are smaller than the minimum phase time(s)

or that exceed the cycle length may cause loss of coordination.

NOTE: PHASE SPLIT is the maximum amount of time available to a phase during coordination. The maximum time available can only be lowered by selecting MAX SELECT (MM-3-1).

0-255 sec. or 0-99%



PHASE MODE

Split Pattern Phase Mode.

Use the Toggle (0) key to select the phase mode (NONE, MIN, MAX, PED, MAX+PED, or OMIT) that the phase is commanded to adopt during this Split Pattern.

NONE: The phase is allowed to respond to other recall and omit programming.

MIN: Registers a vehicle call while the phase is in yellow or red intervals.

MAX: Registers a constant vehicle call on the phase during green, yellow and red intervals.

PED: Registers a pedestrian call while the phase is in Pedestrian Clearance or DON'T Walk intervals.

MAX+PED: Registers a constant vehicle call on the phase during green, yellow and red intervals and a pedestrian call while the phase is in Pedestrian Clearance or DON'T WALK intervals.

OMIT: Applies PHASE OMIT to this phase.

NONE, MIN, MAX, PED, MAX+PED or OMIT

< �9 � �� # & � " �� # � � , � �� $ # � # �� $ �� SCREEN MM-3-4 AUTO PERM MINIMUM GREEN (SECONDS)

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MIN GRN. . . . . . . . . PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 MIN GRN. . . . . . . . . PRESS 0..9 TO CHANGE

From the Coordinator Submenu screen (MM-3), press the #4 key to access the Auto Perm Minimum Green screen (MM-3-4) shown to the right. This screen allows you to specify all Auto Perm Minimum Green data values.

Enter desired automatic permissive minimum green times for each phase 1-16. This time is only used in the auto-permissive calculations and has no effect on the actual phase minimum green. Zero entry disables the function for that phase.

To enable automatic permissive operation, set vehicle permissive periods (1) and (2) and vehicle permissive displacement to zero.


AUTO PERM MINIMUM GREEN

Select the phase minimum green time (in seconds) to be used by the coordinator. 0-255 seconds or the phase INITIAL GREEN (MM-2-1) time, whichever is larger, is used by the auto permissive algorithm in determining the permissive for each phase.

NOTE: This entry is only in effect when the VEHICLE PERMISSIVE 1 and 2 are zero.

0-255 seconds


< �9 �� * � �� # & $ ! ��

SCREEN MM-3-5 From the Coordinator Submenu screen (MM-3), press the #5 key to access the Split Demand screen (MM-3-5) shown to the right. This screen allows you to specify all Split Demand data values.

Enter desired phase(s) timing, detectors and continuous detector activity to enable split demand 1 or 2. Select the number of coordinator cycles that split demand will be in operation.

SPLIT DEMAND 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 DEMAND 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DEMAND 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DEMAND 1 2 DETECTOR......... 0 0 CALL TIME (SEC).. 0 0 CYCLE COUNT...... 0 0 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE


DEMAND 1 & 2 PHASES

Split Demand 1 & 2 Phase(s).

Use the Toggle (0) key to select X (enable) or “.” (disable) phases for SPLIT DEMAND 1 and 2 operation.

The coordinator uses the split values in SPLIT DEMAND PATTERN 1 or 2, as specified in COORDINATOR PATTERN (MM-3-2) when the:

• DEMAND phase(s) are timing and • DEMAND DETECTOR is continuously actuated and • DEMAND CALL TIME has been exceeded.

Once SPLIT DEMAND PATTERN has been selected, it remains in effect for the number of cycles set in CYCLE COUNT after the above conditions are no longer met.

NOTE: Split demand operation allows the intersection to call a different SPLIT PATTERN (MM-3-2) to service local traffic demand.


DETECTOR Split Demand Detector Assignment.

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to select the detector to enable the coordinator SPLIT DEMAND 1 or 2.

1-64: Selects the “RAW” detector input to be used. This detector need not be assigned or programmed (MM-6-2).

0 (Zero): Disables SPLIT DEMAND operation.

NOTE: A failed detector disables the SPLIT DEMAND 1 or 2 selections.

0-64

CALL TIME (sec) Split Demand Call Time.

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to enter a number (1-255) to specify a call time or enter 0 (zero) to disable the split demand operation.

1-255: Specifies the number of seconds of continuous detector activity while the demand phase(s) are timing. Enables SPLIT DEMAND operation.

0 (Zero) disables the split demand operation.

0 disables 1-255 selects time



DEMAND CYCLE COUNT

Split Demand Cycle Count

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to specify 1-255 cycles that SPLIT DEMAND operation remains in effect after DEMAND CALL TIME conditions are no longer met.

The coordinator uses the split values in SPLIT DEMAND PATTERN 1 or 2, as specified in COORDINATOR PATTERN (MM-3-2) when the:

• DEMAND phase/s are timing and • DEMAND DETECTOR is continuously actuated and • DEMAND CALL TIME has been exceeded.

1-255


!!��

> �� # � � � � �� + # � $ � �

Programming Summary

SCREEN MM-4 The Preemptor Submenu (select option #4 from the Main Menu) has two data groups as shown in the figure at the right. To view or enter data, press the keypad number corresponding to desired data group. Data group 1 corresponds to preemptors 1 through 10. Data group 2 corresponds to preemptors that require or use a filtered input.

PREEMPT SUBMENU 1. PREEMPTOR 1-10 2. LOW PRIORITY PREEMPTOR SELECTION

PRESS 1..2 TO SELECT

1. PREEMPTOR 1-10

Designate track clearance phases and overlaps. Designate dwell and cycling phase(s), pedestrian(s) and overlap(s). Designate exit phases. Select phases to have calls placed at end of preemption. Enable preemptors. Enable priority of preemptors. Designate preemption input as lock or non-lock. Enable dwell flash phases. Select dwell flash exit color Terminate overlaps ASAP. Specify vehicle, pedestrian and overlap indications to be as solid, flash and fast flash depending on the interval. Enable pedestrian indications to be dark. Select pedestrian clearance to time through yellow. Program preemptor/remote flash priority. Enable preemptor interlock input. Enable track clearance re-service. Set max presence in dwell interval time. Set preemptor re-service time. Set input extend time. Enable track phase red clearance to go to green. Enable rings to be free during preemption. Enable preemptor active output.

(PREEMPTOR 1-10 Continued)

Enable preemptor active output only during dwell. Set preemptor active output condition of other priority preemptors that are not active. Set preemptor active output condition of other non-priority preemptors that are not active. Enter preemptor minimum dwell interval time. Enter preemptor exit timing plan. Enable preemption to coordination. Enter minimum preemption duration time. Enter delay time between preemptor call and start of preemption. Enter phase inhibit time. Enter min walk, pedestrian clearance, green, yellow, red entrance interval times. Enter track clearance interval times. Enter dwell exit, yellow and red interval times. Enable preemptor linking. Select spare outputs to be active during preemption.

2. LOW PRIORITY PREEMPTOR SELECTION

Select preemptor inputs that require filtering to separate a pulsing from a constant input. Assign preemptors to use those filtered inputs.


> �� # � � � � �� 3� 4 �

SCREEN MM-4-1

SCREEN MM-4-1 (Scroll)


From the Preemptor Submenu screen (MM-4), press the #1 key and the Preemptor 1-10 screen (MM-4-1) appears. This screen scrolls down.

Up to ten preemptors may be programmed. Preemptors may be programmed and remain unused until the ACTIVE parameter is programmed as YES. Service is prioritized so that the lowest number preemptor with No Preemption Override enabled has the highest priority or can be programmed as first come, first served.

There are several data entry screens per preemptor. The screens allow selection of preemption phases, options and timing values. Priority preemptor # 1 screens are shown as examples.

Phases/Overlaps - Use the toggle key “0” to select track clearance, dwell, cycling overlaps, pedestrians and spare outputs.

Options - Use the toggle key “0” to select desired preemption option(s). YES and ‘X’ indicate the option is enabled.

Timing Values - Use keypad number keys to enter timing values for delay, duration, input extension, inhibit, max presence, re-service, and minimum intervals times. Entering the desired value after the parameter enables various timing options. A zero (0) entry typically disables the function. For detailed explanations of these timers, reference their individual sections in the following table.

Linked Preemptors - Preemptors two through ten can be linked to a higher order priority preemptor. Preemptor #1 cannot be linked to any other preemptor since it is the highest priority preemptor.

Screen above is repeated for preemptors 2 through 10.

PREEMPTOR [ 1] MORE � ��

SP FUNC. . . . . . . . . PMT TO COORD.... NO EXIT TIMING PLAN 0 LINKED PMT....... 0 ........PREEMPT ACTIVE OUTPUTS.......... PMT ACTIVE OUT..OFF PMT ACT DWELL... NO OTHER - PRI PMT.OFF NON-PRI PMT.....OFF OVERLAP A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P TRK CLR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWELL... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CYCLING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

PREEMPTOR [ 1] MORE �� DWELL FLASH.... NO FL EXIT COLOR.. YEL 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 TRK CLR. . X . . . X . . . . . . . . . . DWLL PH. . . . X . . . X . . . . . . . . DWLL PED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CYC PH.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CYC PED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXT PH.. . . . X . . . X . . . . . . . . EXT CLLS X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X SP FUNC. . . . . . . . . PMT TO COORD.... NO EXIT TIMING PLAN 0 LINKED PMT....... 0 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

PREEMPTOR [ 1] MORE �� ACTIVE.......... YES NON-LOCK........ NO PMT OVERRIDE... NO INTERLOCK ENABL. NO DELAY........ 0 INHIBIT......... 0 EXTEND INPUT.. 0.0 MAX PRESENCE.. 1200 DURATION...... 10 TRK CLR RSRV.... NO PED DARK........ NO RESERVICE....... 0 AUTO FL PRI..... NO RED CLR > GREEN. NO TERM OVLP ASAP.. NO PC THROUGH YEL.. NO RING 1 2 3 4 FREE DURING PMT.... NO NO YES YES WK PC GRN YEL RED ENTRANCE TIMES... 3 30 3 3.0 4.0 TRACK CLEARANCE TIMES...... 15 0.5 0.5 MIN DWELL-CYC G / EXIT Y/R. 10 2.0 3.0 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE



PREEMPTOR (PMT)

Use the numeric keys (0-9) to select the desired PMT to edit or view as follows: 1-10: Will display programming for the specified PMT.

1-10 – goes to specified PMT

ACTIVE Preemptor Active

Use the Toggle (0) key to activate preemptors to be in use. YES (Active): The preemptor is active and may be in use depending on other programming. NO (Not active): The preemptor is not active regardless of the other programming.

YES/NO

NON-LOCK Detector Non-Lock.

A preemptor may have either locked (NO) or non-locked (YES) detector inputs. The non-lock parameter is in effect only during delay time. YES (Non-Locked): If preemptor call is dropped during delay time, the preemptor is not serviced. NO (Locked Detector): If preemptor call is dropped during delay time, the preemptor is serviced. Locks call until preemptor is serviced.

YES/NO

NO PMT OVERRIDE

Preemptor Overrides Higher Numbered Preemptor Disable

YES: Disables this preemptor from overriding the next active higher numbered preemptor. NO: Allows this preemptor to override the next active higher numbered preemptor. EXAMPLE: Preemptor 1 is the highest priority preemptor. Preemptor 2 has priority over all other active preemptions except preemptor 1. Preemptors 3-6 are equal and are serviced on a first-come, first-served basis. They all override preemptors 7-10. Preemptors 7- 10 are equal and are serviced on a first-come, first-served basis. NO PREEMPTOR OVERRIDE programming example: 1 = NO; 2 = NO; 3 = YES; 4 = YES; 5 = YES; 6 = NO; 7 = YES; 8 = YES; 9 = YES; 10 = (do not care).

YES/NO



INTERLOCK ENABLE

Preemptor Interlock Enable

YES: Enables Preemptor Interlock. The PMT Interlock input must remain at logic ground or TRUE state until that preemptor has an active input and at logic high or FALSE state when that preemptor input is active. If this condition is not met for at least 1 second and the preemptor is programmed, the controller will revert to flash.

NO: Disables PREEMPTOR INTERLOCK. The PMT interlock input has no effect on controller operation.

EXAMPLE: Preemptor 1-2 Interlock enabled.

Preemptor 1 or 2 are not active or timing Initial/Track Clearance:

• Activate preemptors 1 and 2. • Clear to all red after Track Clearance. • Go to a latched flash condition by forcing Voltage Monitor/ Fault Monitor

FALSE.

Preemptor 1 is active after termination of Track Clearance:

• Clear to all red • Go to a latched flash condition by forcing Voltage Monitor/ Fault Monitor

FALSE. . Preemptor 2 is active and after termination of Track Clearance and Preemptor 1 is not programmed: • Clear to all red

Go to a latched flash condition by forcing Voltage/Fault Monitor false.

Preemptor 2 is active and after termination of Track Clearance and Preemptor 1 is programmed:

• Activate preemptor 1 and 2 inputs. • Clear to all red after Track Clearance. • Go to a latched flash condition by forcing Voltage Monitor/ Fault Monitor

FASLE.

Any preemptor is terminating (Going to Exit phase(s) or exiting Preemptor Flash):

• Restart the Preemptor 1 or 2 if either is timing • Activate preemptor 1 and 2 inputs • Clear to all red after Track Clearance. • Go to a latched flash condition by forcing Voltage Monitor/ Fault Monitor

FALSE.

YES/NO

DELAY Delay Time.

The time between receipt of preemptor call and initialization of preemption movements. If preemption is not active when the call is not locked, then preemption is removed before the delay timing period expires. Zero entry causes no delay before the preempt input is acknowledged.

0-65535 sec.

INHIBIT Inhibit Time

The last portion of delay time, during which phases that are not scheduled for service at the beginning of the preemption sequence, and all pedestrian movements are inhibited. Inhibit time must be less than or equal to delay time. Zero entry causes no inhibit time at the beginning of the preemption sequence.

0-255 sec.



EXTEND INPUT Preemption Input Extension time.

Preemptor remains in dwell interval for EXTEND INPUT time when preempt call is removed. If preempt call is reapplied during this time, the preemptor reverts to start of dwell interval. Zero entry causes no input extension time and dwell interval ends when the preempt call is removed.

0.0-25.5 sec.

MAX PRESENCE

Preemptor Maximum Presence Interval

The maximum time that a preemption call can be active and be recognized by the controller. Once failed, the input must return to inactive state to be recognized again. Zero entry disables the function for the associated preempt run.

NOTE: The Max Presence programming is ignored for HIGH priority (non-bus) preempts.

0-65535 sec.

DURATION Duration Time

Required minimum time that the preempt run must be active. It begins timing at the end of the Delay Interval. A preempt run MAY NOT EXIT until this timer has expired. Zero entry allows preempt to exit immediately following the Track Clearance interval if the preempt input is no longer present.

0-65535 sec.

TRK CLR RSRV Track Clearance Re-Service

YES: Allows the preemptor to re-service the track clearance phases when the preemption call goes away and returns before the preemption sequences terminate. With this option enabled, the PREEMPTION EXTEND option is disabled.

NO: Disables re-servicing the preemption track clearance phases while in the preemption sequence.

YES/NO

PED DARK Pedestrian Indications Dark

YES: Turns OFF all pedestrian output indications while the preemptor is ACTIVE.

NO: Allows pedestrian indications to follow other preemptor programming

YES/NO

RESERVICE Preemption Re-service Time

0 (zero): Requires all active phases with calls, when the preemptor exits, to be serviced before preemption can be serviced. If the phase call is dropped or the phase is omitted by input, the phase is considered to be serviced.

1 – 255: Specifies the minimum time allowed between Bus PMT calls. Calls received during the Re-Service Time are not serviced.

NOTE: This feature is disabled if the preemptor is not called by a low priority pulsing input (MM-4-2)

0-255 sec.

AUTO FL PRI Remote (Automatic) Flash has Priority Over this Preemption

YES: Allows remote (automatic) flash to continue. Automatic flash will terminate until after the preemption input is removed.

NO: Allows the preemptor to override automatic flash and time the preemptor sequence. The preemptor forces the exit from automatic flash, times the complete preemption sequence and then allows the controller to return to remote (automatic) flash.

YES/NO



RED CLR > GREEN

Red Clearance Reverts to Green

YES: Allows a Track Clearance phase to go immediately to green if it has been timing red clearance interval when entering preemption.

NO: Forces the phase and will precede through red revert in the normal sequence.

YES/NO

TERM OVLP ASAP

Terminate Overlaps As Soon As Possible.

YES: Forces overlaps with two or more included phases to terminate with the first included phase to reach the preemptor minimum yellow interval.

NO: Allows overlaps to terminate nominally when the last overlap included phase reaches the preemptor minimum yellow interval.

YES/NO

PC THROUGH YEL

Pedestrian Clearance Through Yellow

YES: Allows the Yellow Change indication to time with the completion of Pedestrian Clearance interval when entering preemption.

NO: Provides normal pedestrian termination when entering preemption. The Yellow Change interval is after the completion of Pedestrian Clearance.

YES/NO

FREE DURING PMT

Free During Preemption

YES: Enables an independent ring to time nominally during preemption if the ring has no phases or barriers in common with any phase programmed in the preemptor.

NO: Forces all phases in the ring to be red unless the phases are programmed in the preemptor to be active.

NOTE: The user may only select those rings to go FREE that are NOT part of the logical controller in preempt. Example: If the unit is programmed to use 3 rings for one intersection, the user may NOT select IN PREEMPT for rings 1 and 2, but FREE for ring 3.

YES/NO

ENTRANCE TIME

Preemption Entrance Minimum Times.

Enter the minimum times for the phases that are active when the preemptor becomes active.

WK (WALK): 0 - 255 sec. PC (PEDESTRIAN CLEARANCE): 0 - 255 sec. GRN (GREEN): 0 - 255 sec. YEL (YELLOW CHANGE): 0.0-25.5 sec. RED (RED CLEARANCE): 0.0-25.5 sec.

NOTE: Programming these values to 255 and 25.5 respectively, allows the phase minimum times to be used. There is no way for the phase indication time to be larger than their programming when entering preemption.

CAUTION: If these values are set to zero and the GUARANTEED MINIMUM TIMES are also zero, the indication will terminate immediately when entering preemption regardless if the time on the phase. This can result in a clearance indication being omitted or shorter than the MMU minimum clearance time resulting in a LATCHED MMU Minimum Clearance failure.

0,0-25.5 sec. or 0-255 sec



TRACK CLEARANCE (time)

Track Clearance Times

0-255 sec. TC Green, The preemptor times this setting regardless of the phase timing. In any case, the indications will not time less than the GUARANTEED MINIMUM TIMES (MM-2-4).

NOTE: 0 (Zero): Track clearance green time omits the track clearance interval regardless of programming.

0.0-25.5 sec TC Yellow or Red also times the programmed value unless a value of 25.5 is used. In that case, the controller uses the phase’s programmed time (MM-2-1). In any case, the indications will not time less than the GUARANTEED MINIMUM TIMES (MM-2-4).

25.5: Allows the phase minimum times to be used for yellow change and red clearance. There is no way for the phase yellow and red indication time to be larger than their programming when exiting track clearance.

CAUTION: If the setting of these clearance values is zero and the GUARANTEED MINIMUM TIMES is also zero, the indication will terminate immediately when exiting track clearance regardless of the time on the phase. This can result in a clearance indication being omitted or shorter than the MMU minimum clearance time resulting in a LATCHED MMU Minimum Clearance failure.

0,0-25.5 sec. or 0-255 sec

MIN DWELL – CYC G (time)

Preemptor Minimum Dwell Time

0 – 255: The minimum time (in seconds) for the DWELL and CYCLING Phases. After this time the preemptor waits for the duration time to be complete and the preemption input to go FALSE before exiting.

0-255 sec

EXIT Y/R (times) Exit Yellow Change and Red Clearance times when Exiting Preemption

Depends on exit phase and automatic flash priority programming.

0.0 – 25.5: The preemptor times (in seconds) the smaller of these settings or the phase programmed times (MM-2-1). In any case, the indications will not time less than the GUARANTEED MINIMUM TIMES MM-2-5).

CAUTION: If the setting of these values is zero and the GUARANTEED MINIMUM TIMES is also zero, the indication will terminate immediately when exiting preemption regardless of the time on the phase. This can result in a clearance indication being omitted or shorter than the MMU minimum clearance time resulting in a LATCHED MMU Minimum Clearance failure.

0,0-25.5 sec.

DWELL FLASH Dwell Phases Flash During the Dwell Interval

YES: Causes the preemption DWELL phases to flash yellow while all other phases that are controlled by the preemptor flash red. DWELL FLASH operation is limited to one permissive phase per ring.

NO: Allows normal preemption phase indications during the DWELL interval.

YES/NO

FL EXIT COLOR Dwell Flash Exit Color

Press Toggle to select RED, YEL or GRN. The controller will exit from DWELL phase flash to the selected color indication.

NOTE: For this option to work, the user must also select either DWELL PHASES and/or EXIT PHASES.

RED, YELLOW, GREEN



TRK CLR (phases)

Track Clearance Phase(s)

Phases serviced first following Initial Clearance. Each ring will time according to the Track Clearance Green, Yellow Change and Red Clearance intervals. Each ring then holds in Red transfer until all have finished their TRACK CLEARANCE timing. All rings then advance to the preemptor DWELL interval together. The Yellow and Red indication will be solid but the green will be as follows:

X; Solid Green when the phase is green. F1: Flashing Green at 1 PPS when the phase is green F2: Flashing Green at 2.5 PPS when the phase is green. F5: Flashing Green at 5 PPS. when the phase is green.

NOTE: Changes in flashing rate will take place when the phase green starts to time. All TRACK CLEARANCE vehicle movements must be permissive and compatible with each other (Reference MM- 1-1-2). TRACK CLEARANCE vehicle movements cannot be DWELL or CYCLING vehicle movements.

X, F1, F2 or F5

DWLL PH Dwell Phase(s)

Phases that will be first served following the TRACK CLEARANCE interval. The Yellow and Red indication will be solid but the green will be as follows:

X; Solid Green when the phase is green. F1: Flashing Green at 1 PPS when the phase is green F2: Flashing Green at 2.5 PPS when the phase is green. F5: Flashing Green at 5 PPS. when the phase is green.

NOTE: Changes in flashing rate will take place when the phase green starts to time. All DWELL vehicle movements must be permissive and compatible with each other (Reference MM-1-1-2). DWELL vehicle movements cannot be TRACK CLEARANCE vehicle movements.

X, F1, F2 or F5

DWLL PED Dwell Pedestrian(s)

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) dwell phase pedestrian movements to be served. NOTE: If DWELL FLASH option is enabled, no pedestrian indications can be serviced.


CYC PH Cycling Phase(s)

Phase(s) that will be served after the DWELL phase(s). The Yellow and Red indication will be solid but the green will be as follows: X; Solid Green when the phase is green. F1: Flashing Green at 1 PPS when the phase is green F2: Flashing Green at 2.5 PPS when the phase is green. F5: Flashing Green at 5 PPS. when the phase is green.

NOTE: Changes in flashing rate will take place when the phase green starts to time. CYCLING vehicle movements cannot be TRACK CLEARANCE vehicle movements.

X, F1, F2 or F5 enables



CYC PED Cycling Pedestrian(s)

Enables cycling phase pedestrian movements to be served.

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (".") pedestrian movements that will be served with the CYCLING phase.

X: Enables pedestrian movements that can time with the CYCLING phase. “.”: Disables pedestrian movements with the CYCLING phases.

NOTE: If DWELL FLASH option is enabled, no pedestrian indications can be serviced.


EXT PH Preemption Exit Phase(s)

With exit phase(s) enabled, the preemption sequence terminates when all exit phases are timing.

When no exit phase is enabled and the PMT TO COORD option is not active, the preemptor terminates immediately and exits from the CYCLING interval directly to normal controller operation.

When no exit phase is enabled and the PMT TO COORD option is active, the preemptor will terminate and exit from the CYCLING interval directly to the lowest priority phase(s) that have an open coordination permissive window. This allows the preemptor to exit directly into coordination without requiring a pickup cycle or transition.

NOTE: EXIT phases must be permissive and compatible with each other (Reference MM-1-1-2).

X enables

EXT CLLS Preemption Exit Phase Vehicle Calls

The phase(s) that the preemptor enters a vehicle call when exiting preemption.

X enables

SP FUNC Preemptor Special Function Outputs

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) up to eight Special Function outputs when this preemptor is in effect.

These outputs are typically Mapped (MM-1-8) to a controller output, input, or used by a Logic Processor (MM-1-8) statement.


PMT TO COORD

Preemption Exits to Coordinator Selected Phases

YES: Allows the preemptor to exit directly into the coordination sequence and not require a pickup cycle when:

No EXIT PHASE is programmed and the coordinator is active. NO: Allows the preemptor to exit to a FREE condition.

YES: enables NO: Exit to free

EXIT TIMING PLAN

Preemption Exit Timing Plan

Select the controller timing plan (MM-2-1) that will be in effect when exiting preemption.

1-4: Forces the controller to use selected timing plan for the first controller cycle following preemption. That controller cycle will be complete when all phases that had demand when exiting preemption have been served. Phases that are omitted by any means are considered served.

0 (Zero): Allows the timing plan to be selected by normal controller operation.

NOTE: If the preemptor exits directly to coordination (Preemption to Coordination), the timing plan selected by the Coordination Pattern will be in effect.

0-4



LINKED PMT Preemptor to be Linked to this Preemptor

Select a higher priority (lower numbered) preemptor to be linked to this preemptor. The linked preemptor will be called when this preemptor completes the programmed minimum dwell time. The call to the linked preemptor will be maintained as long as demand for this preemptor is present. Calls to any lower priority or not valid preemption sequence will be ignored.

The linking preemptor feature allows multiple track clearances or complex preemption sequences with one preemptor calling another.

Example: Preemptor 3 is linked to 2, it will go through its TRACK CLEARANCE interval and start the DWELL interval.

When the MIN DWELL-CYC GRN time is elapsed, a call is then placed on preemptor 2. This transfers control to preemptor 2. Preemptor 2, in turn, can then be linked to preemptor 1.

This example creates a possibility of five phase clearance prior to getting to the preemptor 1 DWELL interval and timing its phases.

CAUTION: The MAX PRESENCE time for each preemptor must be taken into account when this feature is used to insure the desired operation.

0-9

PMT ACTIVE OUT

Preemption Active Output

Toggle to enable/disable the preemptor status output while the preemptor is active.

ON: Enable solid. F1: Enable flash at 1pps. F2: Enable flash at 2.5pps. F5: Enable flash at 5pps. OFF: Disable.

Depending on the PMT ACT DWELL programming, it may be output only during the dwell interval.

ON, enable F1, F2, F5= flash at 1, 2.5, or 5 pps OFF, disable

PMT ACT DWELL

Preemption Active Output Only In Dwell.

Toggle to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the Preemptor Status output only during the DWELL/CYCLIC interval. When disabled, the Preemptor Status is output as long as the preemptor is active.

YES, enable NO, disable

OTHER – PRI PMT

Other Priority Preemptor Active Output(s)

Toggle to enable/disable the preemptor status outputs of the other priority preemptors:

ON: Enable solid. F1: Enable flash at 1pps. F2: Enable flash at 2.5pps. F5: Enable flash at 5pps. OFF: Disable

NOTE: The status output will be OFF if the preemptor is not programmed.

ON=enable F1, F2, F5= flash at 1, 2.5, or 5pps OFF=disable



NON-PRI PMT Other (non-active) Non-Priority Preemptor Active Output(s) Toggle to enable/disable the preemptor status outputs of the other non-priority preemptors:

ON: Enable solid. F1: Enable flash at 1pps. F2: Enable flash at 2.5pps. F5: Enable flash at 5pps. OFF: Disable.

NOTE: The status output will be OFF if the preemptor is not programmed.

ON=enable F1, F2, F5= flash at 1, 2.5, or 5pps OFF=disable

TRK CLR OVERLAP

Track Clearance Overlap(s)

Press Toggle to enable (X, F1, F2, F5) or disable (“.”) overlaps during Track Clearance. The Yellow and Red indication will be solid, but the Green will be as follows:

X: Display a solid Green when the overlap is green or timing between two included phases. F1: Display a flashing Green at 1 PPS when the phase is green or is timing between two included phases. F2: Display a flashing Green at 2.5 PPS when the phase is green or is timing between two included phases. F5: Display a flashing Green at 5 PPS when the phase is green or is timing between two included phases.

NOTES: • Changes in flashing rate will take place when the phase green starts to

time. • All Track Clearance vehicle movements must be permissive and

compatible with each other (Reference MM-1-1-2). • Track Clearance vehicle movements cannot be dwell or cycling

movements. • Track Clearance overlap indications will only be active if they have an

included phase (MM-2-6) programmed as a Track Clearance vehicle movement.

• All overlap operations (including lead/lag timing, protect, modified and not-overlap) will be active coming to, during, and exiting Track Clearance.

X, F1, F2, F5 enable “.” disables



DWELL OVERLAP

Dwell Overlap(s)

Press Toggle to enable (X, F1, F2, F5) or disable (“.”) overlaps to be first served following Track Clearance. Dwell overlap yellow and red indication will be solid, but the green will be as follows:

X: Solid Green when the Overlap phase is green. F1: Flashing Green at 1 PPS when the phase is green. F2: Flashing Green at 2.5 PPS when the phase is green. F5: Flashing Green at 5 PPS when the phase is green.

NOTES:

• All Dwell vehicle movements must be permissive and compatible with each other (Reference MM-1-1-2).

• Dwell vehicle movements cannot be Track Clearance vehicle movements.

• Dwell overlap indications will only be active if they have an included phase (MM-2-6) programmed as a Dwell vehicle movement.

• All overlap operations (including lead/lag timing, protect, modified, and not-overlap) will be active coming to, during, and exiting Dwell interval.

X, F1, F2, F5

CYCLING OVERLAP

Cycling Overlaps

Press Toggle to enable (X, F1, F2, F5) or disable (“.”) overlaps to be first served following DWELL vehicle movements. Dwell overlap yellow and red indication will be solid, but the green will be as follows: X: Solid Green when the Overlap phase is green. F1: Flashing Green at 1 PPS when the phase is green. F2: Flashing Green at 2.5 PPS when the phase is green. F5: Flashing Green at 5 PPS when the phase is green.

NOTES: • Cycling vehicle movements cannot be Track Clearance vehicle

movements. • Cycling overlap indications will only be active if they have an included

phase (MM-2-6) programmed as a Cycling movement. • All overlap operations (including lead/lag timing, protect, modified, and

not-overlap) will be active coming to, during, and exiting DWELL and Cycling phases.

X, F1, F2, F5


> �� % � �� - �� ' �� # � � � � �� *� " � � $ �

SCREEN MM-4-2

LOW PRIORITY PREEMPTOR SELECTION FILTERED SOLID PULSING INPUT 1 ............ ............ 2 PREEMPTION 2 PREEMPTION 3 3 PREEMPTION 4 PREEMPTION 5 4 ............ ............ 6 ............ ............ 7 ............ ............ 8 PREEMPTION 8 9 ............ ............ 10 ............ ............ PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

From the Preemptor Submenu screen (MM-4), press the #2 key and the Low Priority Preemptor Selection screen (MM-4-2) shown at the right appears.

Use the Toggle (0) key to select active low priority preemptors that will respond to a delayed pulsing or solid input. The delay is caused by the input filtering required to discriminate between a solid and a 6.25 Hz input on the same input. Solid is typically used for emergency vehicle preemptors (EVP) and pulsing for bus preemptors.

NOTE: The screen illustrates preemptor inputs for two RR (1/2), four EVP (3-6) and four Bus (7-10) preemptors.


FILTERED INPUT

Physical Preemptor 1-10 inputs

SOLID Solid Filtered Input.

Toggle to select the type of filtering and input to be used for a preemptor.

".": In SOLID and PULSING columns, directs the normal double scanned preemptor input directly to that preemptor. This is typically used for priority railroad (RR) preemptors.

Toggle to select PREEMPTION 1-10. In the SOLID column will: • Disconnect the normal preemptor input. • Direct the solid output of the filtered input to that preemptor when it

is not pulsing between 0.8 and 1.25pps. Typically used for EVP.

“.” PREEMPTION 1-10

PULSING Pulsing Filtered Input

Selects the conditioning of the preemptor input and the preemptor called when it is conditioned.

".": In SOLID and PULSING columns, directs the normal double scanned preemptor input directly to that preemptor. This is typically used for priority RR preemptors.

Toggle to select PREEMPTION 1-10. In the PULSING column will: • Disconnect the normal preemptor input. • Direct the solid output of the filtered input to that preemptor when it

is pulsing between 0.8 and 1.25 PPS. Typically used for Bus preemptors.

“.” PREEMPTION 1-10


��""��

� 4 �� # � �6 & � � �� + # � $ � �

Programming Summary

SCREEN MM-5 The Time Base Submenu (select option #5 from the Main Menu) has five data groups as shown in the figure at the right. To view or enter data, press the keyboard number (1-5) corresponding to desired data group.

A brief description of the programming functions that can be viewed and/or modified at each of the menu options follows.

TIME BASE SUBMENU

1. CLOCK CALENDAR

2. SCHEDULE

3. DAY PLAN EVENT

4. ACTION PLAN

5. EXCEPTION DAYS

PRESS 1..5 TO SELECT

1. CLOCK CALENDAR Allows you to: View current day of week, time, day and date. Enter current date and time. Enter manual Action Plan to override other action plans. Enter synchronization reference time. Select the synchronization reference type Enable/Disable Daylight Savings time correction. Select the time that the “Time Reset” input will set the clock to. Enter the number of hours that local standard time is behind GMT.

2. SCHEDULE Allows you to set up Day Plan schedules: Set up a schedule of 200 entries of:

a. One of sixteen day plans. b. Month(s) in effect. c. Day(s) of month(s) in effect.

d. Day(s) or the week in effect.

3. DAY PLAN EVENT Allows you to: Select the start time for one of 100 action plans for one of 50 day plans that comprise each of 16 day plans.

4. ACTION PLAN Allows you to: Define up to 100 Action Plans.

Assign: a. Coordination pattern number. b. Vehicle detector plan number. c. Controller sequence d. Timing plan e. Vehicle detector diagnostic plan f. Pedestrian detector diagnostic plan

Enable: a. Automatic flash b. System override c. Detector log d. Dimming e. Special functions f. Auxiliary functions g. Phase functions

• Pedestrian recall • Walk 2 enable • Vehicle extension 2 enable • Vehicle recall • Vehicle max recall • Max 2 enable • Max 3 enable • Conditional service inhibit • Phase omit

5. EXCEPTION DAYS Allows you to: Select unique day plan for up to 36 exception days. Select fixed or floating holidays. Identify holidays by date, day of week or week of month


� 4 �� *� " ( � �& *� $ ! & � ��& � & �

SCREEN MM-5-1

Daylight Savings - Toggle to enable or disable

automatic daylight savings time compensation.

Time Reset Input Set Time - Enter the time that the clock will be set to when the time set input is TRUE.

Standard Time Behind GMT - Toggle to select the number of hours that the local time is behind (-) or ahead (+) of GMT.

From the Time Base Submenu screen (MM-5), press the #1 key and the Clock/Calendar Data screen (MM-5-1) appears.

Date/Time Set - Enter or change date and time. Correct date and time as necessary for accurate controller operation in non-interconnected mode.

Pressing the ENTER key at any time when the cursor is at a time or date field causes the time or date to be updated to whatever is shown on the screen in the date and time fields.

Manual Action Plan - Manually select an action plan. Go to ACTION PLAN screen (MM-5-4) and create desired program to be in effect when the manual program is selected.

Manually selected action plans go into effect on the minute’s boundaries.

Sync Reference - Enter the desired sync reference time and Toggle to select the desired sync reference (REFERENCE TIME, LAST EVENT, LAST SYNC) used to generate the synchronization point.


DATE SET Use the numeric keys (0-9) to enter the current date in MM/DD/YY format.

NOTE: The display of the day of the week (DOW) is automatically generated from this entry.

01/01/1970 – 12/31/2105

TIME SET Use the numeric keys (0-9) to enter the current time of day (TOD) in the 24-hour format (00:00:00 to 23:59:59),

This time is used for all time-based functions and logging.

00:00:00 – 23:59:59

MANUAL ACTION PLAN

Use the numeric keys (0-9) to select an Action Plan (ref. MM-5-4) that specifies a coordination pattern. The Action Plan remains in effect until another Action Plan is selected or until zero is entered.

0 (Zero): Allows the automatic selection of Time Base Action Plans by time of day.

1-100: Manually selects that Action Plan to be in effect. The selected Action Plan remains in effect until another is selected.

0-100

CLOCK/CALENDAR DATA 01/01/00 SAT 00:00:01 MANUAL ACTION PLAN.................. 0 SYNC REFERENCE TIME .............. 00:00 SYNC REFERENCE........... REFERENCE TIME DAY LIGHT SAVINGS................... NO TIME RESET INPUT SET TIME...... 03:30:00 STANDARD TIME FROM GMT ............. -04 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE



SYNC REFERENCE TIME

Synchronization Reference Time.

Use the numeric keys (0-9) to enter the time (in 24-hour format) that is a user-specified time marking the beginning of all cycles. Reference time is used for sync point calculation for a cycle called by the coordination pattern. Sync point is computed using present time, sync reference time, and current cycle length.

This sync reference time is used when: • Reference Time is selected as Synchronization Reference. • Time Base is the interconnect source, either by default or by

selection.

NOTE: A sync pulse is generated when the present time minus this time is an even multiple of the coordinator cycle length.

00:00 – 23:59

SYNC REFERENCE

Synchronization Reference.

Use the Toggle (0) key to select the type of reference (LAST EVENT, LAST SYNC, or REFERENCE TIME) to be used as the reference point for the sync generation.

REFERENCE TIME: Sync point is the sync reference time entered by user.

LAST EVENT: Sync point is referenced to the time of the action plan that initiated the current cycle.

LAST SYNC: Sync point is referenced to the point in time that represents the end of the last complete cycle of the cycle length in effect prior to selecting the current cycle length.

NOTE: A sync pulse is generated when the present time minus the SYNCHRONIZATION REFERENCE time is an even multiple of the coordinator cycle length.

Last Event, Last Sync, Reference Time

DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

Toggle to enable (USDLS) or disable (NO) United States Daylight Savings time adjustment.

Enables daylight savings to be enabled from the first week in April to the last week in October.

USDLS enable NO disable

TIME RESET INPUT SET TIME

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to enter a time of day value (00:00:00 to 23:59:59).

The controller internal time will be set to this value when the TIME RESET input is TRUE. The internal time starts when the TIME RESET input is removed.

00:00:00 to 23:59:59

STANDARD TIME FROM GMT

Toggle to specify the number of hours (–12 to +12) that the local standard (non daylight savings time) is ahead (+) or behind (-) Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).

The Eastern hemisphere is ahead (+) and the Western hemisphere is behind (-).

NOTE: For Non Day Time Saving USA Eastern Time Zone is GMT –5 hours. USA Central Time Zone is GMT –6 hours. USA Mountain Time Zone is GMT –7 hours. USA Pacific Time Zone is GMT –8 hours.

-12 to +12


� 4 �� % � �& ' ��*& $ ��" � � ! � *� �

SCREEN MM-5-2 (Scroll removed) From the Time Base Submenu screen (MM-5), press the #2 key and the Schedule screen (MM-5-2) appears. As shown below, this screen (with scrolling) allows you to create up to 200 Day Plan Schedule entries that assign the days and months that a specified Day Plan can be in effect.

1. Create day plan schedule entries.

2. Enter desired daily program number (1-16).

3. Enter the month(s) of the year that the day program will be in effect.

4. Enter the day(s) of the week that the day program will be in effect.

5. Enter the day(s) of the month that the day program will be in effect.

SCHEDULE NUMBER [ 1] MORE � DAY PLAN NO ....[ 1] JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN MONTH .... . X . . . . JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC . . X . . . DAY (DOW): SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT X . . . . X . DAY(DOM): 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 . . . X . . . . . . 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 . . . . X . . . . . 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 . . . . . X . . . . 31 . PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

NOTE: A day plan will only be in effect the months that the day of week (DOW) corresponds to the day of month (DOM). However, HOLIDAY programming (MM-5-5) overrides this selection.

EXAMPLE: Day Plan 15 is to be in effect during summer break from June 15 to September 3 on Monday through Friday. Program the following:

Schedule 1: Day plan 15 with the month of June (JUN), days of the week Monday through Friday (MON – FRI) and days of the month 15 – 30 enabled. Schedule 2: Day plan 15 with the months of July and August (JUL - AUG), days of the week Monday through Friday (MON – FRI) and days of the month 1 – 31 enabled. Schedule 3: Day plan 15 with the month of September (SEP), days of the week Monday through Friday (MON – FRI) and days of the month 1 – 3 enabled.


SCHEDULE NO. Time Base Schedule Program Number.

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to enter number of the Time Base Schedule program to be viewed and/or edited.

0 (Zero): Selects the next open Time Base Schedule program.

1-200: Specifies the Time Base Schedule Program Number to be viewed or edited.

0-200

DAY PLAN NO. Use the numeric (0-9) keys to enter the Day Plan Number.

0 (Zero): Clears all programming of this Time Base Schedule Program.

1-16: Selects the Day Plan to be in effect when this Time Base Schedule program is in effect.

0 clears schedule 1-16 selects Day Plan

MONTH Month(s) This Schedule is in Effect.

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (“.”) the months that the Schedule program shall be allowed. NOTE: A Time Base Schedule program will be in effect, when it is allowed under the Month, DOW and DOM programming. HOLIDAY programming (MM-5-5) overrides this selection.




DAY (DOW) Days of Week (DOW) this Program is in Effect.

Use the Toggle (0) key to enable (X) or disable (“.”) the day(s) of the week that the Time Base Schedule program shall be allowed.


DAY (DOM) Days of Month (DOM) this Program is in Effect.

Use the Toggle (0) key to enable (X) or disable (".") the date(s) of the month that the Time Base Schedule program shall be allowed.


� 4 �� & ' ��*& $ �� & � � $ �


DAY PLAN MORE � DAY PLAN IN EFFECT [ 0] DAY PLAN.......... [ 1] EVENT ACTION PLAN START TIME 1 0 00:00 2 0 00:00 3 0 00:00 4 0 00:00 5 0 00:00 6 0 00:00 7 0 00:00 8 0 00:00 9 0 00:00 10 0 00:00 11 0 00:00 12 0 00:00 . . . . . . 49 0 00:00 50 0 00:00 PRESS 0..9 TO CHANGE

From the Time Base Submenu screen (MM-5), press the #3 key (DAY PLAN EVENT) and the Day Plan screen (MM-5-3) appears.

This screen allows you to create up to 16 Day Plan events that select Action Plans during different times of the day.

To create daily programs in the time base:

1. Enter desired Day Plan number (1-16) to be in effect for this time of day.

2. Position cursor in the ACTION PLAN column opposite the EVENT number (1-50) to be programmed.

3. Enter the Action Plan number (1-100) that is to be in effect. 4. Enter the desired start time (00:00 to 23:59) for this Day

Plan Event. PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE

DAY PLAN IN EFFECT

This is not a data entry field. This field displays a number (0-16) indicating the number of the Day Plan that is currently in effect, if any. Zero (0) indicates no Day Plan is in effect.

0-16 display

DAY PLAN Use the numeric keys (0-9) to enter the number (1-16) of the Day Plan to be created.

NOTE: If an invalid number is entered (not within 1-16 range), an INVALID DATA notice appears when the cursor leaves the field. Use the UP cursor key to return to the Day Plan field and enter a valid number.

1-16

DAY PLAN EVENT

Day Plan Event.

With the cursor in the ACTION PLAN column, scroll DOWN as needed until the cursor is directly opposite the Day Plan EVENT number (1-50) to be viewed or edited.

The day event is activated when:

1-50: Selects that Day Plan Event to view or edit. A day event is activated when:

• The Day Plan is in effect; • The current time matches with the programmed start time or; • The programmed start time is between the day plan previously

selected and the current time.

1-50 selects specified event



START TIME Day Plan Event Start Time.

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to enter the Start Time (00:00 to 23:59) for the Day Plan. Once selected, the Day Plan will stay in effect until another Day Plan Event is selected.

00:00 to 23:59

ACTION PLAN Action Plan Number.

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to enter an Action Plan Number (1-100). 1-100: Assigns the action plan to be commanded when this day plan event is in effect.

1-100 selects specified plan

� 4 �� . � �" � � $ ��*& $ �� & � � $ �

From the Time Base Submenu screen (MM-5), press the #4 key (ACTION PLAN) and the Action Plan screen (MM-5-4) appears. This screen allows you (with vertical scrolling) to select an Action plan for viewing or editing and provides data entry fields to program the plan for appropriate actions.

Action plans are created to select the coordination pattern, and to enable various functions by time of day. Up to 100 action plans are available. Daily programs may contain any number of action plan steps up to available limit.

SCREEN MM-5-4 (Scroll removed) ACTION PLAN ...[ 1] MORE �� PATTERN.........AUTO SYS OVERRIDE.... NO VEH DETECTOR PLAN 1 DET LOG........NONE FLASH.......... NO RED REST....... NO VEH DET DIAG PLN 0 CONTROLLER SEQ... 0 PED DET DIAG PLN 0 TIMING PLAN ..... 0 DIMMING ENABLE.. NO FUNCTION OR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 PED RCL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WALK 2.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VEX 2... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VEH RCL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAX RCL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAX 2... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAX 3... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CS INH.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OMIT.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPC FCT. . . . . . . . . (1-8) AUX FCT. . . . (1-3) LP 1-10 . . . . . . . . . . LP 11-20 . . . . . . . . . . LP 21-30 . . . . . . . . . . LP 31-40 . . . . . . . . . . LP 41-50 . . . . . . . . . . LP 51-60 . . . . . . . . . . LP 61-70 . . . . . . . . . . LP 71-80 . . . . . . . . . . LP 81-90 . . . . . . . . . . LP91-100 . . . . . . . . . . PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

Action Plan Functions Assign:

a. Coordination pattern number. b. Vehicle detector plan number. c. Controller sequence d. Timing plan e. Vehicle detector diagnostic plan f. Pedestrian detector diagnostic plan

Enable: a. Automatic flash b. System override c. Detector log d. Dimming e. Special function outputs f. Auxiliary function outputs g. By-Phase functions • Pedestrian recall • Walk 2 enable • Vehicle extension 2 enable • Vehicle recall • Vehicle max recall • Max 2 enable • Max 3 enable • Conditional service inhibit • Phase omit

h. Logic Processor (LP) Statements (1-100)



ACTION PLAN Action Plan Number.

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to specify the Action Plan (1-100) to be viewed or edited.

1-100 selects plan

PATTERN Coordination Pattern Selected by the Action Plan.

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to enter the Coordination Pattern number used by this Action Plan.

0 (Zero): Indicates that no pattern is being selected. The Time Base relinquishes control and allows lower priority control (i.e; hardware interconnect if available).

1-120: Selects the coordination pattern for this Action Plan.

254: Selects FREE operation.

255: Selects automatic FLASH operation.

NOTE: Selecting a pattern that does not exist or does not meet the timing parameters will set the controller FREE.

0, 1-120, 254, 255

VEH DETECTOR PLAN

Vehicle Detector Recall Plan.

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to enter the Vehicle Detector Recall Plan number (0-4) to be applied by this Action Plan.

0 (Zero): Allows the Day Plan Event to use the Vehicle Detector Plan already in effect.

1-4: Selects the vehicle detector plan when a higher priority routine has not selected one.

NOTE: The priorities (from highest to lowest) are: Manual, Preemptor, System, Coordinator, Hardware, and Time Base.

0-4

SYS OVERRIDE

System Override.

Toggle to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the Time Base Coordination Pattern to override system commands.

YES: Coordination Pattern selected by the Action Plan overrides the pattern selected by current telemetry or hardwired system commands.

NO: Coordination Pattern selected by the Day Plan Event does not override the pattern selected by telemetry or hardwired system commands.

YES enable NO disable

FLASH Automatic Flash.

Toggle to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the request for Automatic Flash by this Action Plan.

NOTE: This request is “ORed” with all other requests for automatic flash.


DET LOG Internal Detector Log Enable

Toggle to select NONE, 5, 15, 30, or 60 minutes detector logging.

NOTE: This selection is only in effect when the ECPILOG Period in Log-Speed Detector Setup (MM-6-5) is set to TBAP

NONE, 5, 15, 30, 60

RED REST Red Rest (Call Away).

Toggle (0) enable (YES) or disable (NO) the request for Red Rest (Call Away) operation by this Action Plan.

NOTE: This request is “ORed” with all other requests for Red Rest.




VEH DET DIAG PLN

Vehicle Detector Diagnostic Plan.

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to select the vehicle detector diagnostic plan by this Action Plan if one has not selected.

0 (Zero): No vehicle detector diagnostic is selected.

1-4: Selects the vehicle detector diagnostic plan if a higher priority routine has not already selected one.

NOTE: The priorities (from highest to lowest) are: Manual, Hardware, and Time Base.

0 no diagnostic selected 1-4 selects by priority.

CONTROLLER SEQUENCE

Controller Sequence.

Selects the controller sequence to operate when this Action Plan is selected.

0 (Zero): Allows the controller sequence in effect to be used.

1-16: Selects controller sequence variations based on controller "0.”

17-20: (Future release) Selects "Canned" Controllers "1-4," respectively. These do not have sequence variation capability. NOTE: These "Canned" sequences (i.e. TXDOT Diamond) are for user specific requirements that exceed NEMA or NTCIP specifications.

0-20

PED DET DIAG PLN

Pedestrian Detector Diagnostic Plan.

Selects the Pedestrian Detector Diagnostic Plan if one has not been selected. Use the numeric (0-9) keys to enter the number (0-4) of the diagnostic plan.

0 (Zero): No pedestrian detector diagnostic is selected.

1-4: Selects the pedestrian detector diagnostic plan when a higher priority routine has not been selected one.

NOTE: The priorities (from highest to lowest) are: Manual, Hardware, and Time Base.

0-4

TIMING PLAN Timing Plan.

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to select the Timing Plan (1-4) when a higher priority routine has not selected one.

0 (Zero): Allows the Timing Plan in effect to be used.

1-4: Selects the timing plan.

NOTE: The priorities (from highest to lowest) are: Manual, Preemptor, System, Coordinator, Hardware, and Time Base.

0-4

DIMMING ENABLE

Dimming Enable.

Toggle to enable (YES) or disable (NO) dimming by this Action Plan. Dimming of the signals also requires:

• Dimming input is TRUE. • Dimming polarity is programmed (MM-1-3).

YES/NO

PED RCL Pedestrian Recall.

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (".") application of Pedestrian Recall by this Action Plan.

X: Enables, but is “ORd” with other Pedestrian Recall programming and inputs.

“.”: Disables pedestrian recall by this Action Plan.




WALK 2 Walk 2.

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (".") application of Walk 2 by this Action Plan.

X: Enables, but is “ORd” with other Walk 2 selections and inputs. “.”: Disables Walk 2 by this Action Plan.


VEX 2 Vehicle Extension 2.

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (".") application of Vehicle Extension 2 by this Action Plan.

X: Enables, but is “ORd” with other Vehicle Extension 2 selections and inputs.

“.”: Disables Vehicle Extension 2 by this Action Plan.


VEH RCL Vehicle Recall.

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (".") application of Vehicle Recall by this Action Plan.

X: Enables, but is “ORd” with other Vehicle Recall selections and inputs.

“.”: Disables Vehicle Recall by this Action Plan.


MAX RCL Maximum Recall.

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (".") application of Max Recall by this Action Plan.

X: Enables, but is “ORd” with other Max Recall selections and inputs.

“.”: Disables Max Recall by this Action Plan.


MAX 2 Max 2.

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (".") application of Max 2 by this Action Plan.

X: Enables, but is “ORd” with other Max selections and inputs.

“.”: Disables Max 2 by this Action Plan. NOTE: MAX 2 selection overrides MAX 1. MAX 3 selection overrides MAX 1 & 2.


MAX 3 Max 3.

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (".") application of Max 3 by this Action Plan.

X: Enables, but is “OR’d” with other Max selections and inputs.

“.”: Disables Max 2 by this Action Plan.

NOTE: MAX 3 selection overrides MAX 1 or 2.


CS INH Conditional Service Inhibit.

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (".") application of Conditional Inhibit by this Action Plan.

X: Enables, but is “ORd” with other Conditional Service Inhibit selections and inputs.

“.”: Disables Conditional Inhibiting by this Action Plan.


OMIT Phase Omit.

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (".") application of Phase Omit by this Action Plan.

X: Enables, but is “ORd” with other Phase Omit selections and inputs.

“.”: Disables Phase Omit by this Action Plan.




SPC FCT(1-8) Special Function 1-8.

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (".") Time Base Special Function 1-8 outputs by this Action Plan.


AUX FCT(1-3) Auxiliary Function 1-3.

Toggle to enable (X) or disable (".") Time Base Auxiliary Function 1-3 outputs by this Action Plan.


LP 1-100 Action Plan Logic Processor Statements

Toggle to enable (E), disable (D), or allow others (".") to determine.

E: Allows the logic processor statement to be evaluated unless a higher priority command is in effect.

D: Disallows the logic processor statement from being evaluated unless a higher priority command is in effect.

".": Allows the evaluation of a logic processor statement to be determined by lower priority command.

E enables D disables “.” others


� 4 �� 8 � �A " � � � � $ ��& ' � �

From the Time Base Submenu screen (MM-5), press the #5 key and the Exception Days screen (MM-5-5) appears. As shown below, this screen allows you (with scrolling) to view or edit the control parameters for up to 36 Exception Days or any day having special traffic demands.

Exception Day Programming


1. Create a Day Plan (1-16) to be used on an Exception Day.

2. Move the cursor up or down the Exception Day column or use the numeric (0-9) keys to select a specific Exception Day number (1-36) to program or edit.

3. In the FLOAT/FIXED column, use the Toggle (0) key to select the FLOAT or FIXED parameter for the Exception Day. Refer to definitions for more information.

4. In the MON/MON column, enter the number of the month (0 disables or 1-12) in which the Exception Day occurs.

5. For a Floating Exception Day, enter the DOW (day of week, 1-7, Sunday = 1, or 0 disables) and WOM (week of month, 1-5 or 0 disables) on which the Exception Day occurs.

6. For a Fixed Exception Day, enter the DOM (day of month –1-31 or 0 disables) and the Year (2000-2099 or 0 for annually) on which the Exception Day occurs. Once active, the exception day programming will be cleared.

7. Enter the number of the Day Plan (1-16 or 0 disables) to be selected on Exception Day specified.

NOTES: The Exception Day program is effective only if Time Base is the command source.

DOW = 1 = Sunday.

DOW, DOM, WOM, or Day Plan = 0 disables the Exception Day.

YEAR = 0 = repeat Exception Day annually.

FLOAT/FIXED EXAMPLES:

Thanksgiving is a floating Exception Day. It always occurs on the third Thursday in November. It is programmed as follows: FLOAT/FIXED is set to FLOAT, MON/MON is set to 11 for the month of November, DOW/DOM is set to day of the week 5 for Thursday, and WOM/YEAR is set to 3 for the third week of the month.

Independence Day is a fixed Exception Day. It always occurs on July 4th regardless of the day of the week. It is programmed as follows: FLOAT/FIXED is set to FIXED, MON/MON is set to 7 for July, DOW/DOM is set to 4 for the 4th day of the month, and WOM/YEAR is set to 0 for annually.

EXCEPTION DAY PROGRAM MORE � EXCEPTION FLOAT/ MON/ DOW/ WOM/ DAY DAY FIXED MON DOM YEAR PLAN 1 FIXED 0 0 0 0 2 FIXED 0 0 0 0 3 FIXED 0 0 0 0 4 FIXED 0 0 0 0 5 FIXED 0 0 0 0 6 FIXED 0 0 0 0 7 FIXED 0 0 0 0 8 FIXED 0 0 0 0 9 FIXED 0 0 0 0 10 FIXED 0 0 0 0 11 FIXED 0 0 0 0 . . . 36 FIXED 0 0 0 0 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE



EXCEPTION DAY

Move the cursor up and down the Exception Day column to select a specific Exception Day (1-36) to view or edit.

NOTES: • Up to 36 different Exception Days programs can be created. • The Exception Day program is effective only if Time Base is the

command source. • An Exception Day program overrides the Day Plan program normally

used on that specific day.

1-36

FLOAT/FIXED Floating or Fixed Exception Day.

Use the Toggle (0) key to select FIXED or FLOAT.

FLOAT: Exception Day occurs on a specific day of the week (1-7) in a specific month (1-12) and in a specific week of month (1-5). Thanksgiving is the third Thursday in November and Labor Day is the first Monday in September.

FIXED: Occurs on a specific “date” of the year. Christmas is December 25th and Independence Day in July 4th.

FLOAT or FIXED

MON/MON Month in which Exception Day occurs.

1-12: Selects the month in which the Exception Day occurs.

0 (zero): Disables the Exception Day.

1-12 = Jan-Dec 0 disables

DOW/DOM Day of the Week or Day of the Month.

1-7: Selects the day of the week (Sunday – Saturday, respectively) for a FLOAT Exception Day.

1-31: Selects the day of the month for a FIXED Exception Day.


1-7 = Sun-Sat 1-31 = DOM 0 disables day

WOM/YEAR Week of the Month or Year.

1-5: Selects the week of the month for a FLOAT Exception Day.

1970-2105: Selects the year for the FIXED Exception day.

0 (Zero): Repeats the Exception Day year after year.

NOTE: Week of Month (WOM) greater than 5 or Years less than 1970 disable the Exception Day.

1-5 = WOM 2000-2099 = Year 0 (zero) makes annual

DAY PLAN Exception Day Plan.

1-16: Selects Day Plan for this Exception Day.


1-16 0 disables


��

� � �� " � � � � �� + # � $ � �

Programming Summary

SCREEN MM-6 The Detector Submenu (select option #6 from the Main Menu) has seven data groups as shown in the figure at the right. To view or enter data, press the keyboard number (1-7) corresponding to desired data group.


DETECTOR SUBMENU 1. VEH DET TYPE / TS1 DET SELECT 2. VEHICLE DETECTOR SETUP 3. RESERVED 4. PED AND SYSTEM DET ASSIGNMENTS 5. LOG INTERVALS / SPEED DETECTORS 6. VEHICLE DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS 7. PEDESTRIAN DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS PRESS KEYS 1..7 TO SELECT

1. VEH DET TYPE/TS1 DET SELECT Accesses a data entry screen (MM-6-1) that allows you to specify Vehicle Detector Type and TS1 Detector Select for all detectors (1-64).

Assign one of three detector types (NTCIP and two Stop-bar) for up to 64 detectors. Select TS1 detectors installed in the detector rack.

2. VEHICLE DETECTOR SETUP Accesses a data entry screen (MM-6-2) that allows you to view or edit Detector Setup for all detectors (1-64).

Select: • Assigned phase • Switch phase • Called phase(s)

Enable options: • Added initial • Call • Passage • Queue • NTCIP volume and occupancy • ECPI log • Yellow and red lock

Enter times for: • Extension • Delay • Queue limit • Fail extension • Fail delay

3. RESERVED Reserved for future release.

4. PED AND SYSTEM DETECTOR ASSIGNMENTS

Accesses a data entry screen (MM-6-4) that allows you to assign Pedestrian Detectors to phases and assign Vehicle Detectors as local system detectors.

5. LOG INTERVALS/SPEED DETECTORS

Accesses a data entry screen (MM-6-5) that allows you to set NTCIP and ECPI log periods and set six different parameters related to speed detection.

Enter interval times for NTCIP and ECPI detector logging. Assign local detectors to up to 16 speed detectors. Select one or two detector speed calculations. Specify length for Vehicle and Trap length. Enable logging of vehicle speeds. Specify English or Metric units.


6. VEHICLE DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS Accesses a data entry screen (MM-6-6) that allows you to view and edit the four Vehicle Detector Diagnostic Plans.

Enter: • Erratic count limit. • No activity time • Maximum presence time • Multiplier for no-activity and max-

presence time.

7. PEDESTRIAN DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS

Accesses a data entry screen (MM-6-7) that allows you to view and edit the four Pedestrian Detector Diagnostic Plans.

Enter: • Erratic count limit. • No activity time • Maximum presence time • Multiplier for no-activity and max-

presence time

� � �% � �� " *� �� " � � � � ' � � � �� " � � � �� *� " � �

SCREEN MM-6-1 (Scroll removed) VEH DET TYPE / TS1 DET SELECT MORE ��

DET NUMBER DET TYPE TS1 DET 1 0 X 2 0 . 3 0 . 4 0 . 5 0 . 6 0 . 7 0 . 8 0 . 9 0 . . . . 64 0 . PRESS 0.. OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

From the Detector Submenu screen (MM-6), press the #1 key and the Vehicle Detector Type/TS1 Detector Select screen (MM-6-1) appears. This screen allows you (with scrolling) to view or edit the Detector Type (DET TYPE column) and TS1 Detector selection (TS1 DET column) for all detectors (1-64).


DETECTOR NUMBER

Entries for each of 64 detectors:

NEMA TS1 or TS2 Type controller detectors: 1-8 are available on the A, B, C connectors 9-16 are available on the D connector 17 – 24 are available on the optional 25-pin telemetry module.

NEMA TS2 Type 1 and 2 controller detectors; 1-16 are available through DET BIU 1 17-32 are available through DET BIU 2 33-48 are available through DET BIU 3 49-64 are available through DET BIU 4

DETECTOR TYPE

Select NTCIP or ECPI added feature detector type.

0 (zero): supports all NTCIP functionality.

1: GREEN DELAY The first detection received when the phase goes green, whether present when green starts or received later, is recognized immediately. Detections received before the first timeout of the extension interval are also recognized immediately. Once the detector extension interval (not the phase extension interval) times out, all further detector inputs are recognized only if continuously present for a period equal to the programmed delay time and the delayed signal is not extended. The first detection received when the phase goes green, whether present when green starts or received later, is recognized immediately. (Continued next page)

0-2



DETECTOR TYPE (Continued)

Detections received before the first timeout of the extension interval are also recognized immediately. Once the detector extension interval (not the phase extension interval) times out, all further detector inputs are recognized only if continuously present for a period equal to the programmed delay time AND the delayed signal is NOT extended.

2: STOP BAR WITH EXTEND TIME AND RESET The detector input must be TRUE when assigned phase green starts or else the detector is disconnected for the balance of phase green. If the detector input is TRUE when phase green starts the extension timer is reset while the input remains TRUE. When the detector input is removed, the extension timer begins running. If another detector input is received before extension time expires, the extension timer is reset for the duration of the input and once again begins timing when the input goes FALSE. This action is repeated until the extension timer times out, at which time it is disconnected for the balance of phase green.

0-2

TS1 DET NEMA TS1 Rack Detector

Allows a NEMA TS1 rack detector to be installed in the TS2 detector rack without failing because of a failed detector processor. The TS1 rack detector did not have this signal.

X: The installed detector is not a TS2 detector. The enabled detector and its companion output will not be forced TRUE when a detector process monitor failure is reported. This allows the use of NEMA TS1 detectors in the NEMA TS2 detector rack.

“.”: The installed detector is a TS2 detector. This and its companion output must comply with the NEMA TS2 specification.

NOTE: Detectors are companions (occupy the same detector rack slot) if they are odd-even pair (i.e. 5-6 are companions).

Non-NEMA TS2 detectors do not supply Processor Monitor, Shorted Loop, Open Loop or Excessive Inductance change information.



� � �� " *� �� " � � � ��

SCREEN MM-6-2

VEHICLE DETECTOR SETUP VEHICLE PLAN NUMBER [ 1] DET NUMBER.... [ 1] ASSIGNED PHASE.. 1 ADDED OPTION... NO SWITCH PHASE.... 0 CALL OPTION.... YES EXTEND TIME.... 0.0 PASSAGE OPTION. YES DELAY TIME... 0.0 QUEUE OPTION... NO QUEUE LIMIT.... 0 NTCIP OCCUPANCY NO FAIL TIME...... 0 NTCIP VOLUME... NO FAIL CALL DELAY 0 ECPI LOG...... YES YELLOW LOCK.... NO RED LOCK...... NO 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASE.. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 CALLED. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

From the Detector Submenu screen (MM-6), press the #2 key and the Vehicle Detector Setup screen (MM-6-2) appears. As shown at the right, this screen allows you to view or edit all of the parameters listed for four Vehicle Plans.

Detectors are identified by numbers 1 through 64. These are assigned various functions, times, and phases. Detectors must be defined at this data entry page for use to phases and/or logging.

1. Select the vehicle plan number. 2. Select the detector options. 3. Assign the phase, switch phase, and called phase(s). 4. Enter times or extend, delay fail call, fail delay, and

queue limit.

Screen above is repeated for plans 2-4 and detectors 2-64


VEHICLE PLAN NUMBER

Vehicle Detector Plan Number.

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to specify the detector plan (1-4) to be viewed or edited.

1-4

DET NUMBER Vehicle Detector Number.

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to specify the detector (1-64) to be viewed or edited or specify 0 (Zero) to select the next non-programmed detector.

1-64: Selects the detector to be viewed or edited.

1-64

ASSIGNED PHASE

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to enable (1-16) or inhibit (0) the phase this detector is assigned to.

1-16: Enables the detector to call and/or extend that phase depending on programming.

0 (ZERO): Inhibits the detector from calling or extending any phase. This is used when the detector is an NTCIP system detector logging or ECPI system (MM-6-4) detector exclusively.

1-16 enables 0 inhibits

ADDED OPTION

Added Initial Option.

Use the Toggle (0) key to enable (YES) or disable (NO) this detector from accumulating counts used in the added initial calculation by the assigned or called phase(s). Counts are accumulated for a phase from the beginning of the yellow interval, through red, the beginning of the next green interval.

NOTE: The phase uses the most active detector unless the Added Initial Calculation by Phase option (AI CALC MM-6-3) is enabled for the phase. It allows this detection to extend a concurrent timing phase.




SWITCH PHASE

Vehicle Detector Switch Phase.

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to enable (1-16) or disable (0) switching of this detector output.

1-16: Switches the detector output to this phase when the assigned phase is not green and the switch phase is green.

0 (Zero): Disables any switching of the detector output.

NOTE: This operation is typically used when a backup is prevented or conditional service phase is a permissive movement. It allows this detection to extend a concurrent timing phase.

1-16 enable 0 disable

CALL OPTION Detector Phase Call Option.

Toggle to enable (YES) or disable (NO) this detector to call the assigned phase when it is not green.

YES: Enables detector to place a call to the assigned and called phase(s) while they are not green.

NO: Disables the detector from calling.


EXTEND TIME Detector Extend Time.

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to specify the extend time (0.0 to 25.5 seconds) that a passage detector extends the assigned phase after termination of the input. NOTE: The assigned phase may also be extended additionally by the phase extension time (MM-2-1).

0.0 – 25.5 sec

PASSAGE OPTION

Detector Phase Passage Option.

Toggle to enable (YES) or disable (NO) this detector to extend the assigned phase during green.

YES: Enables Phase Passage extension.

NO: Disables Phase Passage extension.


DELAY TIME Detector Delay Time.

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to define the time (0.0 – 255.0 seconds) that the raw detector input is ignored or delayed when the assigned or called phase(s) is not green.

0.0 – 255.0 seconds

QUEUE OPTION

Queue (Q) Detector Option.

Toggle to enable (YES) or disable (NO) this detector for “Q” detector operation.

YES: Enables the detector to extend the green interval of the assigned or called phase(s) until the input is removed or the phase has been green for a period equal to the Queue Limit Time, whichever occurs first

NOTE: “Q” detector operation allows the extension of the green interval on the assigned phase until the input is removed or the phase has been green for a period equal to the Queue Limit time, whichever occurs first. Once disconnected, the assigned phase must terminate green to reset the "Q" detector operation.




QUEUE LIMIT Queue Detector Limit Time.

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to define the time (0 – 255 seconds) after the phase becomes green that “Q” detection can continue to extend the assigned green phase.

NOTE: “Q” detector operation allows the extension the green interval on the assigned phase until the input is removed or the phase has been green for a period equal to the Queue Limit time, whichever occurs first. Phase green may be shorter due to other overriding parameters (i.e., Maximum time, Force Offs, etc.). Once disconnected, the assigned phase must terminate green to reset the "Q" detector operation.

0 – 255 seconds

NTCIP OCCUPANCY

NTCIP Occupancy Detector.

Toggle to enable (YES) or disable (NO) this detector.

YES: Enables this detector to accumulate occupancy data according to NTCIP.

NOTE: The occupancy count is in .05% counts over the NTCIP LOG PERIOD (MM-6-5).


FAIL TIME Failed Detector Extend Time.

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to specify the time (0-255 seconds) the failed detector can extend the assigned phase.

1-254: Allows the failed detector to call and extend the assigned phase for the programmed time.

255: Places a max recall on the phase.

0 (Zero): Disables the failed detector from calling or extending the assigned phase.

NOTE: NTCIP 1202 2.3.2.12 Bits 0-3 defines an NTCIP failed detector. Bit 7 defines a detector that failed the internal detector diagnostics (MM-6-6).

0-255 seconds

NTCIP VOLUME NTCIP Volume Detector.

Toggle to enable (YES) or disable (NO) this detector.

YES: Enables this detector to accumulate volume counts according to NTCIP.

NOTE: This is the volume count over the NTCIP LOG PERIOD (MM-6-5).


FAIL CALL DELAY

Failed Detector Delay Time.

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to specify the time (0-255 seconds) that a failed detector will be delayed.

1-255: Defines the time that a failed detector will not put a call on the assigned phase after it terminated green.

0 (Zero): Disables the delay.

0-255 seconds

ECPI LOG Log of Detector Activity.

YES: Enables the local logging of this detector’s volume and occupancy activity.

NO: Disables.

NOTE: The period of the log is ECPI LOG PERIOD (MM-6-5) and DET LOG (MM-5-4) in the Action Plan in effect.




YELLOW LOCK Lock Detector During Phase Yellow or Red.

YES: Enables a locked call to be placed on the assigned phase while the phase is not green.

NO: Disables.


REDLOCK Lock Detector During Phase Red.

YES: Enables a locked call to be placed on the assigned phase while the phase is not green or yellow.

NO: Disables.


PHASE CALLED

Phases Called By This Detector.

Toggle to select (X) the phase(s) to which a detector is assigned.

X: Assigns the detector to call and extend phases in addition to the assigned phase.

“.”: Disables.

X assigns “.” disables

Reserved

This screen is reserved for future release. SCREEN MM-6-3

RESERVED FOR FUTURE RELEASE.


� � �. � �� ! � � � � & $ �& $ ! ��' � � � # �� " � � � �� $ � �

SCREEN MM-6-4 From the Detector Submenu screen (MM-6), press the #4 key and the Pedestrian and System Detector Options screen (MM-6-4) appears.

1. Assign pedestrian detectors 1-16 to any of the 16 phases.

2. Assign vehicle detectors 1-64 to any of the 16 system detectors.

PED AND SYSTEM DETECTOR OPTIONS LOCAL ------PHASE PED DETECTOR----- PED DET 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NUMBER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PED DET 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 NUMBER 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 LOCAL ----LOCAL SYSTEM DETECTOR---- SYSTEM DET 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NUMBER 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM DET 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 NUMBER 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE


LOCAL PED DET NUMBER

Phase For Pedestrian Detector.

1-16: Position the cursor under a Phase Number (1-16) and then enter the pedestrian detector input number (1-16) for that phase. 0 (zero): Disables any pedestrian detector input to that phase. NOTE: The same pedestrian detector can be assigned to multiple phases.

1-16 0 disables

LOCAL SYSTEM DET

Local System Detector.

1-64: Position the cursor under local system detector number (1-16), then assign a vehicle detector (1-64). 0 (zero): Disables any detector input to that local system detector. NOTE: Detectors assigned to a phase may also be assigned as local system detector for reporting to a Zone Master or Aries system.

1-64 0 disables


� � �8 � �� ) �3�� ! �� " � � � ��

SCREEN MM-6-5 (Scroll removed) From the Detector Submenu screen (MM-6), press the #5 key and the Log-Speed Detector Setup screen (MM-6-5) appears. As shown at the right, this screen allows you to view or edit the NTCIP and ECPI Log Period settings and, with horizontal scrolling, view or edit the settings for six different parameters on 16 Speed Detectors.

LOG - SPEED DETECTOR SETUP MORE ��

NTCIP LOG PERIOD.................... 0 ECPI LOG PERIOD..................... TBAP LENGTH UNIT....................... INCH SPEED DET 1 2 3 4 . . 15 16 LOCAL DET....... 0 0 0 0 . . 0 0 ONE/TWO DET..... 1 1 1 1 . . 1 1 VEH LENGTH...... 0 0 0 0 . . 0 0 TRAP LENGTH..... 0 0 0 0 . . 0 0 ENABLE LOG...... . . . . . . . . PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

NTCIP/ECPI Log Period Enter the log period time.

Local Detector Select the local detector (1-64) that will be used for speed calculations.

One/Two Detector Speed Measurement Enables the speed detector to use one or two detector measurements.

One-Detector Speed Measurement. 1. Assign any of 64 detectors as speed

detectors 1-16. 2. Select units of inches or centimeters after

the LENGTH UNITS parameter. 3. Enter average vehicle length (in selected

units) for each speed detector used. 4. Enter detector trap length (in selected

units) for each speed detector used.

Two-Detector Speed Measurement 1. Assign any odd number of the 64 detectors as

speed detectors 1-16. The Speed measurement automatically uses the next (even) detector. If detector 15 is assigned to a speed detector, then detector 15 is the leading detector and 16 is the lagging.

2. Enter the distance (trap length) between the two detectors.

Enable Log Enable speed detector logging. Only speed detector on and two are reported to the arterial master.

Length Unit Select the units for the speed calculations. Inches: Calculates speed in miles per hour. Centimeters: Calculates speed in kilometers per hour


NTCIP LOG PERIOD

Period for Logging of NTCIP Detectors.

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to select the number of seconds in each period of volume and occupancy data collection.

NOTES: • Changing this entry resets the data collection period and deletes any

accumulated data. • Only NTCIP Volume or Occupancy enabled detectors (MM-6-2) will be

logged. • Only the last complete sample is maintained in memory.

0-255 seconds



ECPI LOG PERIOD

Period for Logging of ECPI Log Detectors.

Toggle to select the number of minutes (5, 15, 30, or 60) for local logging of detector data or select TBAP to allow the Time Base Action Plan (TBAP) to select the log interval.

NOTES: • Changing of this entry will take place when the present log interval is

complete. (Continued next page) • Only ECPI LOG enabled detectors (MM-6-2) will have volume and

occupancy logged. • Only enabled speed detectors will have their speed logged. • The logs are maintained until the log buffer is full. When full, the log

buffer deletes the oldest entry to make space for the newest.

TBAP = Time Base Action Plan or 5, 15, 30, 60 minutes

LENGTH UNIT Selects units of inches or centimeters for all parameters related to distance. This affects the calculations display and logging of speed.

Toggle to select INCH or CM (centimeter), as appropriate.

NOTE: Inches, calculates speed in miles per hour. Centimeters, calculates speed in kilometers per hour.

INCH, CM

SPEED DETECTOR NUMBER

Sixteen (1-16) detectors can be used for vehicle speed. 1-16

LOCAL DET Speed Detector Local Detector Number.

Position the cursor beneath the number (0-16) of the Speed Detector to be edited, then use the numeric (0-9) keys to enter the number (1-64) of the Vehicle Detector to be assigned or enter 0 to disable that Speed Detector.

NOTES: • Detectors assigned to a phase may be used as a speed detector. • One-detector speed calculation can use even or odd-numbered

detectors. • Two-detector speed calculation requires an odd-numbered detector to be

assigned. The next even-numbered detector is the second detector for the speed calculations.

1-64 0 = not active

ONE/TWO DET Use the Toggle (0) key to enable one (1) or two (2) speed calculations for Speed Detectors 1-16.

1. 1: One-detector Speed. The detector encountering a passing vehicle starts a counter by an actuation and stops the counter when it is deactivated. Speed is calculated using the vehicle travel time over the detection zone and the vehicle length.

2. 2: Two-detector speed calculation. The first detector encountered by a passing vehicle is the Start Detector and the second is the End Detector. A travel time counter is started by an actuation of the Start Detector and stopped by an actuation of the End Detector. Speed is calculated using the vehicle travel time and distance between detectors.

NOTES: • The LENGTH UNIT entry INCH calculates speed in miles per hour. CM

(centimeter) calculates speed in kilometers per hour. • Speed that reads back to the arterial master is used to generate a log of

speed readings in low, nominal, and high speed bands.

1 or 2



VEH LENGTH Average Vehicle Length.

0-999: Enter the average vehicle length in centimeters or inches encountered in the traffic lane for one-detector speed calculations.

NOTE: This length is used in conjunction with the effective length of the detection zone (TRAP LENGTH) and the time that the detector is occupied to determine the one-detector speed.

0-999 in. 0-999 cm.

TRAP LENGTH 0-999: The effective Trap Length distance.

• For one-detector speed trap calculation, it is the effective detection distance from start edge to stop edge of detection.

• For two-detector speed trap calculation it is the effective detection distance between two detectors from start edge to start edge of detection.

NOTE: The effective detection zone will differ from physical length due to a variety of electrical and magnetic factors. Enter the length that produces the most representative speeds.

0-999 in. 0-999 cm.

ENABLE LOG Enable Speed Trap Log.

X: Enables local logging of speed data.

“.”: Disables logging.



� � �9 � �� " *� �� " � � � �� & ) $ � � � " � ��

SCREEN MM-6-6 (Scroll removed) VEHICLE DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS MORE ��

VEH DIAGNOSTIC PLAN NUMBER [ 1] DET COUNTS ACT PRES MULTIPLIER 1 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 1 4 0 0 0 1 5 0 0 0 1 6 0 0 0 1 7 0 0 0 1 8 0 0 0 1 . . . 64 0 0 0 1 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

From the Detector Submenu screen (MM-6), press the #6 key and the Vehicle Detector Diagnostics screen (MM-6-6) appears.

1. Enter Vehicle Diagnostic Plan Number to be viewed or edited.

2. For each of 64 detectors (DET column) enter desired diagnostic parameters in the Counts, Act, Pres, and Multiplier columns.

NOTE: The Detector Diagnostic Plans are enabled by the Time Base Action Plan.

Screen above is repeated for plans 2-4 PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE

VEH DIAGNOSTIC PLAN NUMBER

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to enter the number (1-4) of the Vehicle Diagnostics Plan that you wish to view or edit.

1-4

DET column Vehicle Detector Number.

Go to the desired detector number by using the cursor or enter the desired detector number (1-64) and press the ENTER key.

1-64

COUNTS column

Vehicle Erratic Counts.

1-255: Specifies the vehicle detector Counts Per Minute (CPM) that, when exceeded, logs a failed vehicle detector if logging is enabled.

0 (Zero): Disables this diagnostic calculation for that vehicle detector.

1-255 CPM 0 disables

ACT column Vehicle No-Activity.

1-255: Time interval between vehicle detections that, when exceeded, logs a failed vehicle detector if logging is enabled.

0 (zero): Disables the No Activity diagnostic.

1-255 sec.

PRES column Vehicle Maximum Presence.

1-255: Time for continuous vehicle detection that when exceeded, logs a failed vehicle detector if logging is enabled.

0 (zero): Disables maximum presence diagnostic.

0-255 sec.

MULTIPLIER Multiplier (Scaling Factor).

Determines length of the No-Activity and Maximum Presence periods.

1, 2, 15, 60: No-Activity and Maximum Presence periods that have values between 1 and 255 will be multiplied by these values resulting in desired period length.

EXAMPLES: • No Activity period = 60 sec, Multiplier = 2. Result: No Activity is reported

if detector is inactive for (60x2) or 120 seconds. • Maximum Presence period = 50 sec, Multiplier = 15. Result: Max

presence failure is reported if detector is active for (50x15) or 750 seconds.

1, 2,10, 15, 60


� � �: � �� ! � � � � & $ �� " � � � �� & ) $ � � � " � ��


PED DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS ��MORE � PED DIAGNOSTIC PLAN NUMBER [1] DET COUNTS ACT PRES MULTIPLIER 1 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 1 4 0 0 0 1 5 0 0 0 1 6 0 0 0 1 7 0 0 0 1 8 0 0 0 1 9 0 0 0 1 10 0 0 0 1 11 0 0 0 1 12 0 0 0 1 13 0 0 0 1 14 0 0 0 1 15 0 0 0 1 16 0 0 0 1 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

From the Detector Submenu screen (MM-6), press the #7 key and the Pedestrian Detector Diagnostics screen (MM-6-7) appears. 1. Enter the Pedestrian Diagnostic Plan Number (1-4) to

be viewed or edited. 2. For each of 16 detectors (DET column) enter desired

diagnostic parameters in the Counts, Act, Pres, and Multiplier columns.

NOTE: The Detector Diagnostic Plans are enabled by the Time Base Action Plan.

Screen above is repeated for plans 2-4 PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE PED DIAGNOSTIC PLAN NUMBER

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to enter the number (1-4) of the Pedestrian Diagnostic Plan that you wish to view or edit.

1-4

DET column Pedestrian Detector Number.

Go to the desired detector number by using the cursor or enter the desired detector number (1-16) and press the ENTER key.

1-16

COUNTS column Pedestrian Erratic Counts.

1-255: Specifies the pedestrian detector Counts Per Minute (CPM) that, when exceeded, logs a failed pedestrian detector if log is enabled.

0 (zero): Disables this diagnostic calculation for the pedestrian detector.

0-255 CPM

ACT column Pedestrian No-Activity.

1-255: Time interval between pedestrian detections that, when exceeded, logs a failed pedestrian detector if logging is enabled

0 (zero): Disables the No Activity diagnostic.

0-255 sec.

PRES column Pedestrian Maximum Presence.

1-255: Time for continuous pedestrian detection, that when exceeded, logs a failed pedestrian detector if logging is enabled

0 (zero): Disables maximum presence diagnostic.

0-255 sec.

MULTIPLIER column

Multiplier (Scaling Factor).

Determines the length of the No-Activity and Maximum Presence periods.

1, 2, 15, 60: No-Activity and Maximum Presence periods that have values between 1 and 255 are multiplied by these values resulting in period length.

EXAMPLES: • No Activity period = 60 sec, Multiplier = 2. Result: No Activity is reported

if detector is inactive for (60x2) or 120 seconds. • Maximum Presence period = 50 sec, Multiplier = 15. Result: Max

presence failure is reported if detector is active for (50x15) or 750 seconds.

1, 2, 15, and 60


��

� % �� & � � � �� *& ' �� + # � $ � �

Programming Summary

SCREEN MM-7 The Status Display Submenu (select option #7 from the Main Menu) has nine data groups as shown in the figure at the right. To view or enter data, press the keyboard number (1-9) corresponding to desired data group.


STATUS DISPLAY SUBMENU 1. CONTROLLER 6. DETECTORS 2. COORDINATOR 7. FLASH/MMU STATUS 3. PREEMPTOR 8. INPUTS / OUTPUTS 4. TIME BASE 9. MMU COMPATIBILITY 5. COMMUNICATIONS PRESS 1...9 TO SELECT

1. CONTROLLER Accesses a data display screen (MM-7-1) that

allows you to view the following Controller Status Display parameters:

View current controller status. View phase and interval currently timing and

time remaining. View phases to time next. View phases with vehicle and pedestrian calls. View density and maximum timers. View overlap signal timing and time remaining. View output signal colors. View max extension.

2. COORDINATOR Accesses a data display screen (MM-7-2) that

allows you to view the following Coordinator Status Display parameters:

Displays status messages including background error, free, interconnect error, and warning.

Displays coordination command source, commanded and local cycle, commanded and actual offset.

Indicates use of actuated coordinated phases and actuated rest in walk.

Indicates per ring direction, hold, force off, permissive, and split extension.

Indicates use of phase re-service and inhibit max.

View coordination pattern in effect.

Displays vehicle permissive periods. Indicates cycle/offset/split match. Displays split demand 1 and 2 patterns in effect. Displays split crossing artery pattern in effect. Indicates active coordination phases, phases with

vehicle recall, max recall, ped recall, and phase omit.

Indicates alternate sequence in effect.

3. PREEMPTOR Accesses a data display screen (MM-7-3) that

allows you to view the following Preemptor Status Display parameters:

View current controller status. View phase and interval currently timing and time

remaining. View phases to time next. View phases with vehicle and pedestrian calls. View density and maximum timers. View output signal colors. Displays preemption step in effect, interval, and

time remaining. Indicators show calls present, timer inhibit, re-

service period, active preemptor, and delay period.

Bus preemption duration time remaining is displayed.

Flash message appears when preemptor using flash condition.

View preemptor programming.


4. TIME BASE Accesses a data display screen (MM-7-4) that

allows you to view the following Time Base Status Display parameters:

Displays pattern number in effect. Indicates system override status. Command source. Indicates program step number in effect. Indicates program step start time. Displays day and week program in effect. Indicates next step and step time. Indicates number of highest program step. Indicates alternate sequence in effect. View Action Plan in effect.

5. COMMUNICATIONS Accesses a submenu screen (MM-7-5) that

allows you to access the following communications display screens:

Port 1(SDLC), Screen MM-7-5-1 Port 2, Screen MM-7-5-2 Port 3A, Screen MM-7-5-3 Port 3B, Screen MM-7-5-4 Ethernet, Screen MM-7-5-5 NTCIP, Screen MM-7-5-6

6. DETECTORS Accesses a data display screen (MM-7-6) that

allows you to view the Detectors Status Display parameters.

To view status, move the cursor to a programmed detector. A buzzer indicates when the raw detector is active. When the detector is being delayed, extending, or is a speed detector, a time value is displayed:

0/0-255.0: Delay countdown 0.0-25.5: Extend countdown 0-99: The last speed recorded Other detector status indicators are: F: Failed diagnostics D: Delay is timing E: Extend is timing A: Active with no delay or extend S: Speed detector(s) “.”: No activity “-“: Not programmed

7. FLASH/MMU STATUS Accesses a data display screen (MM-7-7) that

allows you to view the Flash/MMU Status Display parameters. This screen displays the cause of a cabinet Flash condition. The various Flash displays are:

If there is no flash, it displays a NO FLASH CONDITION indicator.

Emergency Flash Conditions. Both Emergency and MMU Flash Conditions. Controller Flash Conditions including Automatic

Flash Conditions.

8. INPUTS/OUTPUTS Accesses a data display screen (MM-7-8) that

allows you to view the real time status of the inputs and outputs.

9. MMU COMPATIBILITY Accesses a data display screen (MM-7-9) that

allows you to view the MMU Inputs/Outputs Status Display parameters. Indicates the reason(s) for flash conditions at the controller and/or at the intersection installation.

Shows status for malfunction management unit (MMU) response frames 129 and 131 read-back


� % �% � �� $ � � � **� � �� & � � � �� *& ' ��

SCREEN MM-7-1 (PAGE 1) CONTROLLER STATUS: 1 OF 3 ��

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T/N..... . T . . . T . . . . . . . T . . VEH..... . C R N X S . . . . . . . O I D PED..... . C R N 2 A . . . . . . . O I D R1/PH 2 R2/PH 6 R3/PH 12 R4/PH 16 GRN REST VEXT 25.5 RED REST YEL 25.5 MAX3 255 GAP OUT CMD SRC NIC COS 654 ACTION PLAN 100 SYS CYC 7s PTN 64 START TIME 11:11 LOC CYC 15s FLASH STOP TIME 23:59 TLM ADD 65535 OK PATTERN 64 PREEMPTOR 1 NEXT PLAN 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 C D - I R A . - - 01/01/01 23:50:59

SCREEN MM-7-1 (PAGE 2) CONTROLLER STATUS: 2 OF 3

OVERLAP STATUS OVERLAP A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P COLOR R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R T/N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OL A (space for OL B (space for OL C interval OL D interval OL E and time) OL F and time) OL G OL H OL I OL J OL K OL L OL M OL N OL O OL P

SCREEN MM-7-1 (PAGE 3)

CONTROLLER STATUS: 3 OF 3 DENSITY TIMING RING [1] [2] [3] [4] TIME B4 REDUCE 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 CARS B4 REDUCE 0 0 0 0 ADDED INIT 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 GAP IN EFFECT 5.0 5.0 0.0 0.0 MAX IN EFFECT 35.0 35.0 0.0 0.0

From the Status Display Submenu screen (MM-7), press the #1 key and the Controller Status Display screen (MM-7-1) appears. As shown at the right, this screen has three pages that can be accessed by pressing the NEXT PAGE function key (lower right of the function keypad).

Screen Descriptions

Page 1 - This page has five sections that display a large variety of status indications.

Section 1 has three rows that show phase timing (T/N), vehicle calls (VEH), and pedestrian calls (PED) for phases 1-16.

Section 2 is the three middle rows that include vertical columns for Rings 1-4 with phase timing by ring in top row, second row has phase interval and timing by ring, and third row documents opposing calls.

Section 3 includes the next three rows at the left side of the screen that covers indications for Command Source (CMD SRC), System Cycle (SYS CYC), Local Cycle (LOC CYC), Cycle Offset (COS), Pattern (PTN), and Coordinator Condition (showing FLASH).

Section 4 includes the entire lower right side of the screen and covers Time Base status indicators.

Section 5 takes in the lower left corner of the screen and covers Telemetry and Preemptor status indicators.

Page 2 - Covers Overlap status indicators and timing for Overlaps A thru P.

Page 3 - Covers Density Timing status indicators.


Controller Status Display, Page 1 PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE PAGE 1, 1st Section

This section includes Phases 1-16 columns with three rows (T/N, VEH, and PED) below.

T/N (row 1) Phase Timing Status Indicators.

Toggle to select the appropriate indicator. Shows phase timing status indications as follows:

T = Phase that is Timing now.

N = Phase that is Next to time.

“.” = Phase that is not timing or next.

“-“ = Phase is not enabled.

T, N, “.” , “-“

VEH (row 2) Vehicle Call Status Indicators. (in order of precedence.) “blank” = Phase not part of sequence.

D = Call placed by detector diagnostic.

E = Exclusive pedestrian movement.

N = Phase is non-actuated (CNA1, 2, - Pretimed).

M = Max recall programmed for the phase.

R = Vehicle Recall programmed for the phase.

X = Call placed by Max out.

I = Call placed by internal application (Power up, Preemptor, or Keyboard input).

B = Bike call

C = Active vehicle detector call or min call input.

S = Call placed by Soft recall or do not rest here.

"." = No vehicle demand.

Varied, see list.

PED (row 3) Pedestrian Call Status Indicators. (in order of precedence) “blank“ = Phase not part of sequence or ped not programmed

D = Call placed by detector diagnostic.

N = Phase is non-actuated (CNA1, 2, Pre-timed).

R = PED recall applied to the phase.

I = Call placed by internal application (Power up, Keyboard input).

2 = Ped 2 call.

A = There is an active ped detection.

C = Locked pedestrian detector call.

“.” = No pedestrian demand.

E = Walk or Ped Clear is being extended.

Varied, see list.

PAGE 1, 2nd Section

This section includes vertical columns for Rings 1-4 with phase timing by ring in top row, second row has phase interval and timing by ring, and third row documents opposing calls.


PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE Row 1 R1/PH #, R2/PH #, R3/PH #, R4/PH #.

Phase Timing by Ring.

R1-R4 = Rings 1 through 4.

# = 1 thru 16. Phases that are being timed by the ring.

EXAMPLE: Screen MM-7-1 shows: Ring 1/Phase 2, Ring 2/Phase 6, Ring 3/Phase 12, and Ring 4/Phase 16.

1-16

PAGE 1, 2nd Section (Continued) Row 2 Phase Interval & Timing

Phase Interval and Timing by Ring.

RED: Vehicle red.

YEL: Vehicle yellow.

MGRN: Minimum green.

ADDI: Additional Initial green.

VEXT: Green vehicle extension.

REST: Phase rests in absence of calls.

HOLD: Phase is in HOLD interval.

XFER: Phase awaits timeout of another phase.

EXAMPLE: Screen MM-7-1 shows Ring 1-GRN REST, Ring 2-VEXT 25.5, Ring 3-RED REST, Ring 4-YEL 25.5. The numbers following VEXT and YEL indicate interval time remaining.

Row 3 Opposing Calls

When opposing calls exist, this row shows the MAX in effect (MAX1, MAX2, MAX3, or DMAX) and the time remaining. During Yellow Change and Red Clearance, this row shows the reason for termination of the green interval.

PREEMPT: Terminated by preemption.

MAN ADV: Terminated by manual advance.

FORCE OFF: Terminated by command or force-off signal.

MAX OUT: Green extension time has reached its maximum limit.

GUAR PASS: Green extension time has reached its maximum limit plus guaranteed last vehicle extension.

GAP OUT: Actual time gap between vehicles has exceeded gap-out limit in effect in volume density operation.

MIN GAP: Gap-out limit in effect has reached MIN GAP limit.

PAGE 1, 3rd Section

Left Side of Screen. Includes Command Source (CMD SRC), System Cycle (SYS CYC), Local Cycle (LOC CYC), Cycle Offset (COS), Pattern (PTN), and Coordinator Condition (FLASH shown).

CMD SRC Command Source.

NIC: Non-Interconnected Coordination

TLM: Telemetry

HDW: Hardware

SYS: System

MAN: Manual

NIC, TLM, HDW, SYS, MAN


PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE SYS CYC System Cycle.

Displays percent (%) or seconds (s) remaining in system cycle.

% or seconds

LOC CYC Local Cycle.

Displays percent (%) or seconds (s) remaining in local cycle.

%, seconds, or FREE

COS Cycle Offset and Split.

Commanded by Zone Master or Aries. The pattern selected is equal to Cycle times 20 plus Split times 5 plus Offset. If none is selected, the COS will be blank.

PTN Pattern Number of the active coordination pattern.

Coordinator Condition Section (beneath PTN)

Five conditions (including FLASH) can be displayed here.

ADD: Coordinator is adding time to the transition between the actual offset to the commanded offset.

SUB: Coordinator is subtracting time to smooth transitioning between the actual offset to the commanded offset.

DWELL: Coordinator is dwelling between the actual offset to the commanded offset.

FLASH: Controller is in Flash.

FREE: Controller is Free.

PAGE 1, 4th Section

Lower Right Side of Screen. Includes Time Base parameters.

ACTION PLAN Displays the Action Plan number (Plan 100 shown) that is in effect.

START TIME Displays the time (00:00 – 23:59) that the Action Plan was started (11:11am shown).

00:00 to 23:59

STOP TIME Displays the time that this Action Plan will stop and the next plan will start (23:59pm shown).

PATTERN Displays the pattern number (64 shown) selected by the Action Plan.

NEXT PLAN Displays Action Plan number for the next Action Plan for today (Plan 1 shown). Blank = no additional plan for today.

Date & Time Gives date and time of day (01/01/01 23 : 50 :59 shown).

PAGE 1, 5th Section

Lower Left Side of Screen. Includes Telemetry Section and Preemptor.

TLM ADD Displays the Telemetry Address (65535 shown).

OK/ERR/NO Displays the present Telemetry interconnect condition:

OK: Interconnect is functioning properly.

ERR: Interconnect has an error.

NO: Telemetry module is not installed or programmed.

STB: Valid NTCIP or AB3418 command is allowing the controller commanded pattern.

OK, ERR, NO, STB


PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE PREEMPTOR 1-10

Preemption indicators appear below priority preemptors 1-10 to show current preemption activity in order of precedence.

“-“ : Preemptor not programmed.

R; Re-service period, bus preemptor.

A: Active preemptor.

I: Inhibit timer currently timing.

D: Delay period currently timing.

C: Call present.

“.” : No preemptor activity.

Page 2, 1st Section

This section displays indicators for Overlaps A through P that include COLOR (G=green, Y=yellow, and R=red), T/N (T=timing, N=not timing), and OMIT (X=omit).

COLOR Indicates green (G), yellow (Y), or red (R) for each overlap.

T/N T: Indicates overlap is timing.

N: Indicates overlap is not timing and an included phase is next.

“.” : Indicates no overlap included phase is timing or next.

“-“ : Indicates overlap is not programmed.

OMIT X: Indicates the overlap is omitted.

“.” : Indicates the overlap is allowed to time (not omitted).

PAGE 2, 2nd Section

Overlap Timing.

This section displays the status of overlap type and time remaining for Overlaps A through P as follows:

(blank): There is no overlap timed interval in effect. LEAD GRN: Time remaining on the leading overlap green. LAG GRN: Time remaining on the lagging overlap green. LAG YEL: Time remaining on the lagging overlap yellow. LAG RED: Time remaining on the lagging overlap red.

PAGE 3 Density Timing.

Density Timing shows the parameters applicable to Max Extension and Volume-Density operation for Rings 1-4.

TIME B4 REDUCE: Time before reduction.

CARS B4 REDUCE: Cars before reduction.

ADDED INIT: Initial time added to initial green of the phase timing.

GAP IN EFFECT: The reduced vehicle extension interval in effect.

MAX IN EFFECT: MAX including extensions.


� % �� ! $ & � � � �� & � � � �� *& ' ��

SCREEN MM-7-2 COORDINATOR STATUS: 1 OF 3

01/01/01 00:00:00 STATUS....... FREE PATTERN........ 254 COMMAND SOURCE. NIC COMMAND CYCLE.. 0s SYSTEM CYCLE.. 0s LOCAL CYCLE.... 0S LOCAL OFFSET... 0% CORRECTION. ACTUAL OFFSET.. 0% SPLIT DEMAND... / 0 RING 1 2 3 4 HOLD APPLIED TO PHASE. . . . . FORCE OFF PHASE....... . . . . VEHICLE PERMISSIVE.... . . . . PEDESTRIAN PERMISSIVE. . . . . SPLIT COUNT DOWN...... 0s 0s 0s 0s SPLIT EXTENSION TIME.. 0s 0s 0s 0s OFFSET FROM RING 1.... 0s 0s 0s RING IN GREEN BAND.... . . . .

SCREEN MM-7-2

(Next Page, w Scroll) COORD PATTERN [ 1} 2 OF 3 MORE �

TS2 (PAT-OFF).. 0-1 STD (COS)...... 111 CYCLE.......... 80s SPLIT PATTERN... 1 OFFSET VAL..... 0s SEQUENCE....... 0 SPLITS IN.. SECONDS OFFSET IN..PERCENT XART PATTERN... 0 SEQ SELECT...COORD VEH PERM 1..... 0s VEH PERM 2..... 0s VEH PERM 2 DISP 0s ACTION PLAN.... 0 ACTUATED COORD... NO TIMING PLAN.... 0 ACT WALK REST.... NO PHASE RESRVCE.. NO 1 2 3 4 RING SPLIT EXT 0s 0s 0s 0s SPLIT DEMAND PATTERN 0 0 RING DISPLACEMENT... 0% 0% 0% DIRECTED SPLIT PREFERENCE PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PREFERENCE 1.... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PREFERENCE 2.... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 PREFERENCE 1.... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PREFERENCE 2.... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SPARE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OUTPUTS . . . . . . . .

SCREEN MM-7-2

(Next Page, w Scroll)

From the Status Display Submenu screen (MM-7), press the #2 key and the Coordinator Status Display screen (MM-7-2) appears. As shown to the right, this screen has three pages.

The first page (Coordinator Status) displays a wide variety of Coordinator status parameters as shown in the table that follows.

When finished viewing Page 1, press the NEXT PAGE function key (lower right of the function keypad) to access Page 2 (Coordinator Pattern). This page, unlike the first page, is longer than the screen can hold as indicated by the MORE arrow at the top of the screen. Use the DOWN cursor key to view the remainder of Page 2. When you have viewed all of Page 2, press NEXT PAGE to view Page 3.

Page 3 (titled Split Pattern) also requires vertical scrolling to view all the data presented. When you have viewed all of the data, you may press NEXT PAGE to return to Page 1, press the SUBMENU key to return to Status Display Submenu (Screen MM-7), or press the MAIN MENU key to return to the Main Menu screen.

SPLIT PATTERN [ 1] 3 OF 3 MORE � 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 COORD PH . X . . . X . . . . . . . . . . PHASE 1 2 3 4 SPLIT.... 20 30 20 30 MODE.... NONE NONE NONE NONE PHASE 5 6 7 8 SPLIT.... 20 30 20 30 MODE.... NONE NONE NONE NONE PHASE 9 10 11 12 SPLIT.... 0 0 0 0 MODE.... NONE NONE NONE NONE PHASE 13 14 15 16 SPLIT.... 0 0 0 0 MODE.... NONE NONE NONE NONE


Coordinator Status Display, Page 1 PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE

PAGE 1 COORDINATOR STATUS

STATUS In order of precedence, the coordinator status indicators are: FREE: Free is being commanded when a coordination pattern is in effect. SYNC: A sync pulse is received by the coordinator. PICKUP: The coordinator is in pickup waiting to get to the coordinated phases. COORD: The coordinator is operating.

FREE, SYNC, PICKUP, COORD.

PATTERN Displays the number of the pattern presently in effect.

COMMAND SOURCE

Displays the source of the coordination commands as follows:

NIC: Non-interconnected coordination. TLM: Telemetry interconnect. HDW: Hardwire interconnect. MAN: Manual commands from keyboard. SYS: NTCIP or AB3418 system command.

NIC, TLM, HDW, MAN, SYS.

COMMAND CYCLE

Displays the commanded cycle length in seconds.

SYSTEM CYCLE Displays the master dial position in percent (%) or in seconds (s) of the cycle.

LOCAL CYCLE Displays the local dial position in percent (%) or in seconds (s) of the cycle.

LOCAL OFFSET Displays the programmed offset between local and master cycles in percent (%) or seconds (s) of the cycle.

CORRECTION Displays the ongoing transition from the actual offset to the commanded offset as follows:

(blank): The local offset equals the commanded offset. ADD: The local dial is adding time to get into sync. SUB: The local dial is subtracting time to get into sync. DWELL: The local dial is dwelling to get into sync.

ACTUAL OFFSET

Displays the actual offset between local and master cycles in percent (%) or seconds (S) of the cycle.

SPLIT DEMAND When in effect, the status line displays text in the format "N/P", where N is “X” (crossing artery) or “1 or 2” (split demand 1 or 2) or in effect and P is the pattern “1-120” from which the splits are obtained.

HOLD APPLIED TO PHASE

X: Indicates that hold is applied to the coordinated phase in the ring.

FORCE OFF PHASE

X: Indicates that force-off is applied to the phase now timing in the ring.

VEHICLE PERMISSIVE

Displays the Permissive number (P1 or P2) or lowest priority phase (1-16) whose vehicle permissive is open in each ring.



PEDESTRIAN PERMISSIVE

Displays the Permissive number (P1 or P2) or lowest priority phase (1-16) whose pedestrian permissive is open in each ring.

SPLIT COUNTDOWN

Displays the count down of the programmed split for the phase that is timing.

SPLIT EXTENSION TIME

Displays the count down of the split extension time for the coordinated phase.

OFFSET FROM RING 1

Displays the actual offset between Ring 1 and Rings 2, 3, and 4.

RING IN GREEN BAND

Indicates that the coordinated phase split is timing and the coordinated phase is green.

Coordinator Pattern Display, Page 2


PAGE 2 COORDINATOR PATTERN Scroll to access additional pattern entries. NEXT PAGE to access Page 3.

COORDINATOR PATTERN

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to specify the coordinator pattern (1-120) to be viewed. Press ENTER to view.

NOTE: Entry of any values greater than 120 (also including 0, 254, and 255) result in an INVALID DATA indicator.

1-120

ALL OTHER PARAMETERS

This screen is identical to Coordinator Pattern Screen MM-3-2 used to program the Pattern data; however, only the Coordinator Pattern number can be entered on this screen. All other values may just be viewed. Refer to the Coordinator Pattern Data Screen (MM-3-2) at pages 8-8 through 8-14 of this manual for information regarding the parameters being viewed.


Split Pattern Display, Page 3 PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE

PAGE 3 SPLIT PATTERN

Scroll to access additional pattern entries. NEXT PAGE to return to Page 1 or press the SUBMENU key to return to the Status Display Submenu screen (MM-7).

COORDINATOR PATTERN

Use the numeric (0-9) keys to specify the coordinator pattern (1-120) to be viewed. Press ENTER to view.

NOTE: Entry of any values greater than 120 result in an INVALID DATA indicator.

1-120

ALL OTHER PARAMETERS

This screen is identical to Split Pattern Screen MM-3-3 used to program the Split Pattern data; however, only the Coordinator Pattern number above can be entered on this screen. All other values may just be viewed. Refer to the Split Pattern Data Screen (MM-3-3) at pages 8-18 and 8-19 of this manual for information regarding the parameters being viewed.


� % �� # � � � � �� & � � � �� *& ' ��

From the Status Display Submenu screen (MM-7), press the #3 key and the Preemptor Status Display screen (MM-7-3) appears. As shown below, this screen has two pages. Press the NEXT PAGE function key (lower right of the function keypad) to access the second page. SCREEN MM-7-3 (Page 1) (Data field titles added) PREEMPTOR STATUS: 1 OF 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T/N: T T T VEH: PED: V SIG R R R R R R R R - - - - R R R R P SIG R W R R R R R R - - - - R R R R RING 1 GRST XX.X RING 2 GRST XX.X RING 3 - RING 4 GRST XX.X RING 1 HOLD FLASH RING 2 DURATION FLASH XXX RING 3 - RING 4 HOLD PED CLEAR XXX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1O . . - . . . . . . .

SCREEN MM-7-3 (Page 2) (Data field titles added) PREEMPTOR STATUS 2 OF 3 OVERLAP A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P COLOR... G Y R - - - - - - - - - - - - R T/N..... T . . - - - - - - - - - - - - N OMITTED. . X . - - - - - - - - - - - - X OL A R (space for OL B R (space for OL C R interval OL D interval OL E OL F OL G OL H OL I OL J OL K OL L OL M OL N OL O OL P R

SCREEN MM-7-3 (Page3) (Scroll Removed) PREEMPTOR [ 1] 3 OF 3 MORE � ACTIVE.......... NO NON-LOCK........ NO PMT OVERRIDE.... NO INTERLOCK ENABL. NO DELAY........ 0 INHIBIT......... 0 EXTEND INPUT.. 0.0 MAX PRESENCE.. 0 DURATION...... 0 TRK CLR RSRV.... NO PED DARK........ NO RESERVICE....... 0 AUTO FL PRI..... YES RED CLR > GREEN. NO TERM OVLP ASAP.. NO PC THROUGH YEL.. NO RING 1 2 3 4 FREE DURING PMT.... NO NO NO NO WK PC GRN YEL RED ENTRANCE TIME.... 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 TRK CRL.................... 0 0.0 0.0 MIN DWELL-CYC G / EXIT Y/R. 0 0.0 0.0 PREEMPTOR [ 1] MORE � � � DWELL FLASH.... NO FL EXIT COLOR.. YEL 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 TRK CLR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWLL PH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWLL PED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CYC PH.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CYC PED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXT PH.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXT CLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP FUNC. . . . . . . . . PMT TO COORD.... NO EXIT TIMING PLAN 0 LINKED PMT....... 0 ........PREEMPT ACTIVE OUTPUTS.......... PMT ACTIVE OUT.. ON PMT ACT DWELL...YES OTHER - PRI PMT.OFF NON-PRI PMT.....OFF OVERLAP A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P TRK CLR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWELL... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CYCLING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Call / Status Indicators

Preemption Interval

Ring / Phase Interval and Timing

Phase Color

Phase Indicators

Overlap Interval and Timing

Overlap Color - Indicators



PAGE 1 Phase Indicators Section. Shows the Phase Timing/Next and the Vehicle and Pedestrian Calls.

T/N In order of precedence, Phase Timing indicators are: “-“ : Phase is not enabled. T: Phase is Timing now. N: Phase is Next to time. (blank): Phase is not timing or next.

VEH In order of precedence, the Vehicle Timing indicators are: “blank” = Phase not part of sequence. D = Call placed by detector diagnostic. E = Exclusive pedestrian movement. N = Phase is non-actuated (CNA1, 2, or Pretimed). M = Max recall programmed for phase. R = Vehicle Recall programmed for phase. X = Call placed by Max out. I = Call placed by internal application (Power up, Preemptor, or

Keyboard input). B = Bike call. C = Active vehicle detector call or min recall input. S = Call placed by Soft Recall or Do Not Rest here. “.” = No vehicle demand.

PED In order of precedence, the Pedestrian Timing indicators are: “blank” = Phase not part of sequence or ped not programmed. D = Call placed by detector diagnostic. N = Phase is non-actuated (CNA1, 2, Pre-timed). R = Ped recall applied to the phase. I = Call placed by internal application (Power up, Keyboard

input) 2 = Ped 2 call. A = There is an active ped detection. C = Locked pedestrian detector call. “.” = No pedestrian demand. E = Walk or Ped Clear is being extended.

Phase Color Section. Shows vehicle (V SIG) and pedestrian (P SIG) color indications.

V SIG G: Vehicle green. Y: Vehicle yellow. R: Vehicle red.



P SIG W: Pedestrian walk. R (F1): Pedestrian clearance. R: Pedestrian don’t walk.

Ring/Phase Interval and Timing Section. Shows phase interval and timing by Ring as follows:

RED: Vehicle red YEL: Vehicle yellow MGRN: Minimum green. ADDI: Additional Initial green. VEXT: Green vehicle extension. GRST: Green rest in absence of calls. RRST: Red rest in absence of calls or no phase timing in ring. HOLD: Phase is in HOLD interval. XFER: Phase awaits timeout of another phase.


Preemptor Overlap Status Display, Page 2 PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE Call/Status Indicators Section. Indicators appear below

Preemptors 1-10 numbers for current activity or status in order of precedence as follows:

“-“ : Preemptor not programmed. R: Re-service period, bus preemptor. A: Active preemptor. I: Inhibit timer currently timing. D: Delay period currently timing. C: Call present. “.” : No preemptor activity.

PAGE 2 PREEMPTOR OVERLAP STATUS

Overlap Color – Indicators Section. Shows overlap indications for Overlaps A through P as follows:

COLOR G: Indicates the overlap is green. Y: Indicates the overlap is yellow. R: Indicates the overlap is red.

T/N T: Indicates the overlap is timing. N: Indicates the overlap is not timing and an included phase is next. “.”: Indicates no overlap included phase is timing or next. “-“ : Indicates overlap is not programmed.

OMITTED X: Indicates the overlap is omitted. “.” : Indicates the overlap is allowed.

Overlap Interval and Timing Section. This section displays the status of overlap type and time remaining for Overlaps A through P as follows:

(blank): There is no overlap timed interval in effect. LEAD GRN: Time remaining on the leading overlap green. LAG GRN: Time remaining on the lagging overlap green. LAG YEL: Time remaining on the lagging overlap yellow. LAG RED: Time remaining on the lagging overlap red.


� % �. � # � �6 & � � �� & � � � �� *& ' ��

SCREEN MM-7-4 (Page 2, Scroll Removed) From the Status Display Submenu screen (MM-7), press the #4 key and the Time Base Status display screen (MM-7-4) appears. Although this is shown as a single screen at the right, this screen actually has two pages. Press the NEXT PAGE function key (lower right of the function keypad) to access the second page.

SCREEN MM-7-4 (Page 1, Data field titles added)

TIME BASE STATUS 00:00:00 01/01/2005 THU DAY PLAN..... 0 DAY PLAN EVENT. 0 START TIME..00:00 ACTION PLAN.... 0 SOURCE... MANUAL NEXT ACT PLAN.. 0 HIGHEST PLAN... 0

ACTION PLAN ...[ 1] MORE � PATTERN.........AUTO SYS OVERRIDE.... NO VEH DETECTOR PLAN 1 DET LOG........NONE FLASH.......... NO RED REST....... NO VEH DET DIAG PLN 0 CONTROLLER SEQ... 0 PED DET DIAG PLN 0 TIMING PLAN ..... 0 DIMMING ENABLE.. NO 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 PED RCL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WALK 2.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VEX 2... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VEH RCL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAX RCL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAX 2... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAX 3... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CS INH.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OMIT.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPC FCT. . . . . . . . . (1-8) AUX FCT. . . . (1-3) LP 1-10 . . . . . . . . . . LP 11-20 . . . . . . . . . . LP 21-30 . . . . . . . . . . LP 31-40 . . . . . . . . . . LP 41-50 . . . . . . . . . . LP 51-60 . . . . . . . . . . LP 61-70 . . . . . . . . . . LP 71-80 . . . . . . . . . . LP 81-90 . . . . . . . . . . LP 91-100. . . . . . . . . .


Page 1 Time & Date Section

Displays the present time (hours, minutes, seconds as HH:MM:SS = 00:00:00 to 23:59:59) and date (month, day, year as MM/DD/YYYY = 01/01/2000 to 12/31/2099).

00:00:00 to 23:59:59 and 01/01/2000 to 12/31/2099

Day Of Week (DOW) Section

Displays days of week as: SUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT.

SUN -SAT

Day-Action Plan Pattern Start Time Section

DAY PLAN Displays Day Plan number (1-16) that is presently in effect. 1-16 0=none

DAY PLAN EVENT

Displays Day Plan Event number (1-50) presently in effect. 1-50 0=none

START TIME Displays the Event start time. 00:00 to 23:59

ACTION PLAN Displays the Action Plan number (1-100) requested by the Day Plan Event.

1-100 0=none

SOURCE Displays source (in order of precedence): MANUAL: Manual selection HOLIDAY: Holiday program in effect TIMEBASE: Time Base selection

NEXT ACT PLAN

Displays number of next action plan to be requested by the Day Plan Event.

1-100 0=none

HIGHEST PLAN Displays number of highest action plan in the Day Plan Event. 1-100 0=none

Time-Day-Date

Day-Action Plan Pattern Start Time

Day Of Week


Time Base Status, Page 2 PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE

Page 2 Action Plan. Displays programming of the Action Plan.

PATTERN AUTO = the pattern is automatically selected by the interconnect source. MANUAL = the pattern is manually selected.

SYS OVERRIDE Displays the present state of System Override. YES = enabled. NO = disabled.

YES enabled NO disabled

VEH DETECTOR PLAN

Displays the number of the Vehicle Detector Plan that is presently in effect. 1 to 4 = selected plan number. 0 = none selected.

1-4 0=none

DET LOG Displays the period for logging of ECPI log detectors. TBAP for Time Base Action Plan log interval or 5, 15, 30, or 60 minute local logging interval.

TBAP or 5, 15, 30, 60 minutes

FLASH Displays the present state of Flash. YES = enabled. NO = disabled.


RED REST Displays the present state of Red Rest (Call Away). YES = enabled. NO = disabled.


VEH DET DIAG PLN

Displays the number of the Vehicle Detector Diagnostic Plan that is presently in effect. 1 to 4 = selected plan number. 0 = none selected.

1-4 0=none

CONTROLLER SEQ

Displays the number of the Controller Sequence that is presently in effect. 1 to 16 = selected sequence number. 0 = none selected.

1–16 0=none

PED DET DIAG PLN

Displays the number of the Pedestrian Detector Diagnostic Plan that is presently in effect. 1 to 4 = selected plan number. 0 = none selected.

1-4 0 = none

TIMING PLAN Displays the number of the Timing Plan that is presently in effect. 1 to 4 = selected plan number. 0 = none selected.

1-4 0 = none

DIMMING ENABLE

Displays the present state of Dimming Enable. YES = enabled. NO = disabled.


Phase Enables Section

PED RCL Displays the present state of Pedestrian Recall. X = enabled. “.” = disabled.

X = enabled “.” = disabled

WALK 2 Displays the present state of Walk 2. X = enabled. “.” = disabled.


VEX 2 Displays the present state of Vehicle Extension 2. X = enabled. “.” = disabled.


VEH RCL Displays the present state of Vehicle Recall. X = enabled. “.” = disabled.




MAX RCL Displays the present state of Maximum Recall. X = enabled. “.” = disabled.


MAX 2 Displays the present state of MAX 2. X = enabled. “.” = disabled.


MAX 3 Displays the present state of MAX 3. X = enabled. “.” = disabled.


CS INH Displays the present state of Conditional Service Inhibit.. X = inhibiting is enabled. “.” = inhibiting is disabled.


OMIT Displays the present state of Phase Omit. X = omit is enabled. “.” = omit is disabled.


SPC FCT (1-8) Displays the present state of Special Functions 1 through 8. X = enabled. “.” = disabled.


AUX FCT (1-3) Displays the present state of Auxiliary Functions 1 through 3. X = enabled. “.” = disabled.


LP 1-100 Action Plan Logic Processor Statements

Use Toggle to enable (E), disable (D), or allow others (".") to determine.

E: Allows the logic processor statement to be evaluated unless a higher priority command is in effect.

D: Disallows the logic processor statement from being evaluated unless a higher priority command is in effect.

".": Allows the evaluation of a logic processor statement to be determined by lower priority command.

E enables D disables “.” others


� % �8 � �� # # � $ " & � � $ � �� + # � $ � ��

SCREEN MM-7-5 From the Status Display Submenu screen (MM-7), press the #5 key and the Communications Submenu screen (MM-7-5) appears. As shown at the right, this screen lists six communications status data display groups that are briefly described below.

COMMUNICATIONS SUBMENU 1. PORT 1 (SDLC) 2. PORT 2 3. PORT 3A 4. PORT 3B 5. ETHERNET 6. NTCIP PRESS 1..6 TO SELECT

� % �8 �� 1��2�� & � � � ��

SCREEN MM-7-5-1 (Page 1)

SCREEN MM-7-5-1 (Page 2, scroll removed)

From the Communications Submenu Screen (MM-7-5), press the #1 key and the Port 1 (SDLC) screen (MM-7-5-1) appears. As shown at the right, this screen displays the real time status for each SDLC response frame.

0-5: There has been the indicated number of Response Frame Errors in the past 10 commands.

6-10: There has been the indicated number of Response Frame Errors in the past 10 commands. The SDLC command response is failed.

DISABLED: The Command is not enabled.

*********SCREEN 2 ***********

This screen displays the MMU response frame information.

MMU STATUS: MMU Disabled 2 OF 2 MORE � ----------- MMU RF129 Readback---------- FIELD CHK FAULT. . EXT WD FLT.... . DUAL IND FAULT.. . Y+R CLR FAIL.. . BND FAULT....... . ----------- MMU RF131 Readback---------- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CHANNEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 MIN CLR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIN FLASH TIME............ 0seconds +24 VOLT LATCH............ . CVM/FAULT NON-LATCH....... . ----------- MMU RF129 Readback---------- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CHANNEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 RED..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YELLOW.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GREEN... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FAIL-OUT RLY. . CONFLICT....... . FAIL-IMM RES. . RED FAILURE.... . +24 V MON I.. . MIN CLR FAILURE . +24 V MON II. . PORT 1 TIMEOUT. . +24 V MON INH . SPARE.......... . RESET........ . SPARE.......... . RED ENABLE... . SPARE.......... .

SDLC RESPONSE 1 OF 2 MMU 128 DISABLED TF 148 DISABLED 129 DISABLED 149 DISABLED DISABLED 150 DISABLED 151 DISABLED TF 138 DISABLED 152 DISABLED DISABLED 153 DISABLED DISABLED 154 DISABLED DISABLED 155 DISABLED TEST 158 0 COLUMN FOLLOWING RESPONSE FRAME NUMBER INDICATES NUMBER OF ERRORS IN LAST 10 TRANSMISSIONS.


� % �8 �% � �� % �& $ ! �� & � � � ��

From the Communications Submenu Screen (MM-7-5), press the #2 key and the Port 2 (SDLC) screen (MM-7-5-2) appears or press the #3 key and the Port 3A screen (MM-7-5-3) appears. As shown below, both of these screens are almost identical.

General

In general, except for the configuration of their front panel connectors, the functional aspects of Port 2 and Port 3A are very similar. Each can operate in the same four interconnect formats (ECPIP, TERMINAL, NTCIP, and AB3418) and in each of their status display screens the information is presented in the same screen layouts.

The interconnect format is selected as part of the Configuration programming (on Screen MM-1-5-2 for Port 2 and Screen MM-1-5-3 for Port 3A) by toggling the PROTOCOL parameter through the four options. Telemetry is the default protocol for Port 3A and TELEM is printed beside the Port 3A connector to indicate that telemetry default.

The display presented when either Port 2 or Port 3A status is viewed (Screens MM-7-5-2 or MM-7-5-3) depends upon the protocol selected during controller configuration at Screen MM-1-5-2. Each protocol displays its status on a 2-page screen that has scrolling on the second page. Page 1 of the ECPIP and TERMINAL protocol displays are different as shown below. The NTCIP and AB3418 protocols share a Page 1 display that is a third variation shown in lower row. All four protocols share the same Page 2 display that is also shown in the lower row.

The following pages individually describe the three Page 1 variations followed by a single description of the common Page 2. In all cases, Port 2 screens are shown, but Port 3A screens are virtually the same except they have Port 3B in the first line of each screen.

Port 2, Screen MM-7-5-2 orPort 3A, Screen MM-7-5-3 Page 1, ECPIP Protocol Page 1, TERMINAL Protocol

Page 1, NTCIP / AB3418 Protocols Page 2, All protocols, Scroll removed

PORT 2 (TERMINAL) MORE �� PROTOCOL....................... TERMINAL ENABLE........................ NO DATA RATE (BPS)............... 9600 DATA, PARITY, STOP............ 8 N 1 MODEM SETUP STRING............ 56K USER STRING. COMM. PORT ADDRESS................. 0 SYSTEM DETECTOR 9-16 ADDRESS....... 0 TELEMETRY RESPONSE DELAY (in ms)... 0.0 DUPLEX – HALF OR FULL.............. FULL AB3418 / NTCIP GROUP ADDRESS....... 0 AB3418 / NTCIP SINGLE FLAG ENABLE.. NO RTS TO CTS DELAY (in ms)........... 0.0 RTS TURN OFF DELAY (in ms)......... 0.0 DROP-OUT TIME (in seconds) ......... 10 EARLY RTS........................... NO

COMM PORT 2 STATUS 1 OF 2 INTERCONNECT FORMAT ............TERMINAL TRANSMIT......... . VALID DATA....... . DATA ERROR....... X CLEAR TO SEND.... . CARRIER DETECT... . REQUEST TO SEND.. . LAST VALID CMD. 0

COMM PORT 2 STATUS 1 OF 2 ADDRESS...... [ 0] INTERCONNECT FORMAT ........... NTCIP TRANSMIT......... . VALID DATA....... . DATA ERROR....... . CLEAR TO SEND.... . CARRIER DETECT... . REQUEST TO SEND.. . DROP OUT TIME. 10 LAST VALID CMD. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS...... . . . . . . . . RECEIVE COUNT 0 TRANSMIT COUNT 0

COMM PORT 2 STATUS 1 OF 2 ADDRESS....... [0] INTERCONNECT FORMAT ........... ECPIP TRANSMIT......... X VALID DATA....... X DATA ERROR....... X CLEAR TO SEND.... X CARRIER DETECT... X DATA SET READY... X DROP OUT TIME. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TELEMETRY MODE . . . . . . . SPECIAL FUNCTIONS . . . . SYSTEM DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 . X . . . . . . SYSTEM DETECTOR 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 . . . . . . . .


Communications Ports 2 and 3A (Continued) Page 1, ECPIP Protocol

Screens MM-7-5-2 and MM-7-5-3 Page 1, ECPIP Protocol

Page 1 of the Communications Status screen for the ECPIP protocol provides Activity, Timing, Mode, and Special Functions information. Further information about this screen is provided in the following table.

COMM PORT 2 STATUS 1 OF 2 ADDRESS....... [ 0] INTERCONNECT FORMAT ........... ECPIP TRANSMIT......... X VALID DATA....... X DATA ERROR....... X CLEAR TO SEND.... X CARRIER DETECT... X DATA SET READY... X DROP OUT TIME.... 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TELEMETRY MODE . . . . . . . SPECIAL FUNCTIONS . . . . SYSTEM DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 . X . . . . . . SYSTEM DETECTOR 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 . . . . . . . .


ADDRESS Displays the port number (1-24) for this controller. 0 (Zero) disables communication.

0 disables 1-24 addr.

INTERCONNECT FORMAT

Displays the interconnect format indicator: ECPIP ECPIP

TRANSMIT Data being transmitted: X = YES or “.” = NO. X or “.”

VALID DATA Last data received for address was valid: X = YES or “.” = NO. X or “.”

DATA ERROR Data error within the last 5 seconds: X = YES or “.” = NO. X or “.”

CLEAR TO SEND External device cleared port to transmit: X = YES or “.” = NO. X or “.”

CARRIER DETECT

A carrier is detected by this port: X = YES or “.” = NO. X or “.”

DATA SET READY Is data set ready to transmit to this port: X = YES or “.” = NO. X or “.”

DROP OUT TIME 0 - 65535: Specifies seconds before this port is considered to be failed.

0 – 65535 seconds

TELEMETRY MODE

X: Indicates these Telemetry Modes have been downloaded to this controller: 1 = Dual Coordination, 2 = Flash, 3 = Free, 4 = Max Recall, 5, 6, and 7 = Spare.

X enabled “.” disabled

SPECIAL FUNCTIONS

X: Indicates these Special Functions have been downloaded to all addresses: 1 = System Flash, 2, 3, and 4 = Spare.

X enabled “.” disabled

SYSTEM DETECTORS 1-16

X: Indicates that the system detector transmitted to the master is active.

X activated “.” disabled

(See page 12-25 for Page 2 parameter definitions)


Communications Ports 2 and 3A (Continued) Page 1, TERMINAL Protocol

Screens MM-7-5-2 and MM-7-5-3 Page 1, TERMINAL Protocol

Page 1 of the Communications Status screen for the Terminal protocol provides Format and Activity information. Further information about this screen is provided in the following table.

COMM PORT 2 STATUS 1 OF 2 INTERCONNECT FORMAT ............TERMINAL TRANSMIT......... . VALID DATA....... . DATA ERROR....... X CLEAR TO SEND.... . CARRIER DETECT... . REQUEST TO SEND.. . LAST VALID CMD. 0


INTERCONNECT FORMAT

Displays the interconnect format indicator: TERMINAL




CLEAR TO SEND External device cleared port to transmit: X = YES or “.” = NO. X or “.”

CARRIER DETECT


REQUEST TO SEND

Output requests external device to begin data transmit to this port: X = YES or “.” = NO.

X or “.”

LAST VALID CMD 0.0 – 25.5: Indicates seconds since the last valid command was received.

0.0 - 25.5

(See page 12-24 for Page 2 parameter definitions) Communications Ports 2 and 3A (Continued) Page 1, NTCIP/AB3418 Protocols

Screens MM-7-5-2 and MM-7-5-3 Page 1, NTCIP / AB3418 Protocols

Page 1 of the Communications Status screens for the NTCIP and AB3418 protocols are identical except for the INTERCONNECT FORMAT value displayed. The NTCIP version is shown below at the right. The AB3418 version is the same except that AB3418 is displayed as the INTERCONNECT FORMAT value. Further information about this screen is provided in the following table.

COMM PORT 2 STATUS 1 OF 2 ADDRESS...... [ 0] INTERCONNECT FORMAT ........... NTCIP TRANSMIT......... . VALID DATA....... . DATA ERROR....... . CLEAR TO SEND.... . CARRIER DETECT... . REQUEST TO SEND.. . DROP OUT TIME. 10 LAST VALID CMD. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS...... . . . . . . . . RECEIVE COUNT 0 TRANSMIT COUNT 0


ADDRESS Displays the port address number (1-65535) for this controller. 0 (zero) disables communication.

0 disables 1-65535 address

INTERCONNECT FORMAT

Displays the interconnect format indicator: NTCIP or AB3418






CLEAR TO SEND External device cleared this port to transmit: X = YES or “.” = NO. X or “.”

CARRIER DETECT


REQUEST TO SEND

Output requests external device to begin data transmit to this port: X = YES or “.” = NO.

X or “.”

DROP OUT TIME 0 - 65535: Specifies seconds before this port is considered to be failed.

0 – 65535 seconds

LAST VALID CMD 0 – 25: Indicates seconds since the last valid command was received.

0 – 25 seconds

SPECIAL FUNCTIONS

X: Indicates the Special Functions listed have been downloaded to all addresses: 1 = System Flash, 2 and 3 = Spare.

RECEIVE COUNT 0-65535: The number of valid commands that this port has received. This is a circular count.

0-65535

TRANSMIT COUNT

0-65535: The number of valid commands that this port has transmitted. This is a circular count.

0-65535

Page 2, All Four Protocols

Screens MM-7-5-2 and MM-7-5-3 Page 2, All protocols, Scroll removed

Page 2 of the Communications Status screens for the all four of the protocols (TERMINAL protocol shown at right) are identical except for the PROTOCOL value displayed. The other three versions display ECPIP, NTCIP, or AB3418 as their PROTOCOL value. Further information about this screen is provided in the following table.

PORT 2 (TERMINAL) MORE � PROTOCOL....................... TERMINAL ENABLE........................ NO DATA RATE (BPS)............... 9600 DATA, PARITY, STOP............ 8 N 1 MODEM SETUP STRING............ 56K USER STRING. COMM. PORT ADDRESS................. 0 SYSTEM DETECTOR 9-16 ADDRESS....... 0 TELEMETRY RESPONSE DELAY (in ms)... 0.0 DUPLEX – HALF OR FULL.............. FULL AB3418 / NTCIP GROUP ADDRESS....... 0 AB3418 / NTCIP SINGLE FLAG ENABLE.. NO RTS TO CTS DELAY (in ms)........... 0.0 RTS TURN OFF DELAY (in ms)......... 0.0 DROP-OUT TIME (in seconds) ......... 0 EARLY RTS........................... NO


PROTOCOL Displays active Interconnect Format protocol: ECPIP, TERMINAL (shown selected above), NTCIP, or AB3418.

ENABLE Toggle to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the port from communicating. NOTE: The port should NOT be enabled during setup or non-use.

YES/NO

DATA RATE (BPS) Displays the present data rate for the active protocol. Rates include: 1200, 4800, 9600, 19.2K, 38.4 K, 57.6K or 115.2K bps.



DATA, PARITY, STOP

Displays a 3-character code (8 N 1, 8 Z 1, 8 E 1, or 7 E 1) indicating the number of Data bits (7 or 8), Parity (E=Even, Z=Odd, N= None), and the number of Stop bits (1). ECPIP automatically selects 8 N 1 and AB3418 automatically selects 8 Z 1.

MODEM SETUP STRING

Displays present Modem Setup String value: NONE: The port does not output a modem setup string. 56K: The port uses the setup string for the Econolite 56K modem. USER: The port uses the setup string programmed in the USER STRING (see MM-1-5-2).

1-65535 0 - disables

USER STRING Active only if Modem Setup String is set to USER. Displays the modem setup string programmed into the USER STRING parameter (MM-1-5-2)

COMM. PORT ADDRESS

Displays the address this port will respond to. Non-ECPIP protocol: 1-65535 programs address this port responds to and 0 (zero) disables responses. ECPIP protocol: 1-24 programs address this port responds to and 0 & 25-65535 disables responses.


1-24: Displays address in Zone Master system that will allow access by the Zone Master to system detectors 9-16 when protocol is set to ECPIP. This address must be one of the 24 addresses available on the Zone Master system. 0 (zero): Disables access to system detectors 9-16. NOTE: System detectors 1-8 do not require an address separate from that of the controller.


0,0 – 25.5 msec.: Telemetry Response Delay (TRD) compensates response timing for overall communication delays. Decrease (start communication earlier) to compensate for longer delays and increase (start communication later) to compensate for shorter delays.

0.0 - 25.5 msec.

DUPLEX – HALF OR FULL

Display selected HALF or FULL duplex setting (MM-1-5-2). HALF: Can receive data only after transmission of response is complete. FULL: Can receive and transmit data simultaneously. NOTE: Consult factory before changing setting.

HALF or FULL

AB3418/ NTCIP – GROUP ADDRESS

Displays presently selected AB3418/NTCIP group address. For NTCIP, addresses 1-62 are allowed. For AB3418, addresses 1-62 and 64-255 are allowed. Address 63 is reserved as an “all stations” group address that allows the master station access to this station via group command. Address 0 (zero) excludes the station from any group.

1-62 and 64-255 63 = all stations 0 = No group



AB3418/NTCIP SINGLE FLAG ENABLE

Displays present setting for AB3418/NTCIP Single Flag Enable. YES: The frame flag is used as both the closing flag for one frame and the opening flag for the next frame. NO: Each response frame contains an opening and closing flag.

YES/NO

RTS TO CTS DELAY

0-680.9 msec.: Delay between Return to Send (RTS) and Clear to Send (CTS) is required by some communication devices.

0-680.9 msec.

RTS TURN OFF DELAY

RTS turn-off delay is required by some communication devices. P.L, E.F, G.H, or J.K msec

DROP OUT TIME (in seconds)

Displays presently selected drop-out time feature. 1-65535: Time from last valid command before returning to local control. 0 (zero): Disables drop-out feature.

0

EARLY RTS Displays enable/disable status of the Early RTS function. (MM-1-5-2). YES: Causes RTS turn-on when the Telemetry Response Delay (TRD) begins, minimizing RTS to CTS delay. RTS is not turned on early if TRD is zero. NO: RTS is turned off during TRD timing. This can be minimum TRD for half-duplex operation.

YES/NO


� % �8 �� 6 �� & � � � �

From the Communications Submenu screen (MM-7-5), press the #4 key and, depending upon the protocol specified during Configuration programming (on Screen MM-1-5-4), one of the two versions of Comm Port 3B Status screens (MM-7-5-4 shown below) appears.

General

The screen on the left appears if the controller is programmed for the ECPIP protocol and the screen on the right appears if either the NTCIP or AB3418 protocols are programmed. Regardless of the programmed protocol, the Port 3B status is shown on two pages. Page 2 is virtually the same for all protocols and is accessed by pressing the NEXT PAGE key. The basic screen that appears is shown at the lower right. Only the PROTOCOL value changes.

The following pages individually describe the two Page 1 variations. The screen used for Page 2 of the Port 3B Status is the same screen used for Port 2 and Port 3B. Please see pages 12-24 and 12-26 of this manual for descriptions of the status parameters shown on this screen.

Port 3B, Screen MM-7-5-4

Page 1, ECPIP Protocol (Data field titles added)

Page 1, NTCIP/AB3418 Protocols

COMM PORT 3B STATUS 1 OF 2 ADDRESS...... [ 0] INTERCONNECT FORMAT ........... NTCIP TRANSMIT......... . VALID DATA....... . DATA ERROR....... X CLEAR TO SEND.... . CARRIER DETECT... . REQUEST TO SEND.. . DROP OUT TIME. 0 LAST VALID CMD. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS...... . . . . . . . . RECEIVE COUNT . TRANSMIT COUNT . NEXT PAGE TO VIEW PORT 3B PROGRAMMED DATA

Page 2, Scroll removed, ECPIP, NTCIP, and AB3418 Protocols

COMM PORT 3B STATUS 1 OF 2 ADDRESS.........[ 0] INTERCONNECT FORMAT ........... ECPIP TRANSMIT......... . VALID DATA....... . DATA ERROR....... X CLEAR TO SEND.... . CARRIER DETECT... . DATA SET READY... . DROP OUT TIME. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TELEMETRY MODE . . . . . . . SPECIAL FUNCTIONS . . . . SYSTEM DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 . . . . . . . . SYSTEM DETECTOR 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 . . . . . . . .

COMM PORT 3B STATUS 2 OF 2 MORE �� PROTOCOL....................... ECPIP ENABLE........................ NO DATA RATE (BPS)............... 9600 DATA, PARITY, STOP............ 8 N 1 MODEM SETUP STRING............ 56K USER STRING. COMM. PORT ADDRESS................. 0 SYSTEM DETECTOR 9-16 ADDRESS....... 0 TELEMETRY RESPONSE DELAY........... 0.0 DUPLEX – HALF OR FULL.............. FULL AB3418 / NTCIP GROUP ADDRESS....... 0 RTS TO CTS DELAY.................... 0 RTS TURN OFF DELAY.................. 0 DROP-OUT TIME (in seconds) ......... 0 EARLY RTS........................... NO

Port Activity

Mode and Special Function

System Detectors

Address / Format

Port Timing


Page 1, ECPIP Protocol PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE

PORT NUMBER Displays the address number (1-24) for this controller. 0 (Zero) disables communication.

0 disables 1-24 addr.

INTERCONNECT FORMAT

Displays the interconnect format indicator: ECPIP, NTCIP, or AB3418

TRANSMIT X: Data is being transmitted. X or “.”

VALID DATA X: Last telemetry data received for this address was valid. X or “.”

DATA ERROR X: There has been a data error within the last 5 seconds. X or “.”

CLEAR TO SEND X: External device cleared this port to transmit. X or “.”

CARRIER DETECT

X: A carrier is detected by this port. X or “.”

DATA SET READY X: Input that informs the port that data transmission may begin. X or “.”

DROP OUT TIME 0-65535: Seconds before the port is considered failed. 0-65535 seconds

LAST VALID CMD Displays number of seconds (0.0 to 25.5) since the last valid command or data was received.

0.0-25.5 sec.

TELEMETRY MODE

X: Indicates the Telemetry Modes listed below have been downloaded to this controller:

Dual coordination. Flash Free Max recall Spare Spare Spare

X or “.”

SPECIAL FUNCTIONS

X: Indicates the Special Functions listed below have been downloaded to all addresses: System Flash Spare Spare

X or “.”

SYSTEM DETECTORS 1-16

X: Indicates that the system detector transmitted to the master is active.

X or “.”


Page 1, NTCIP/AB3418 Protocols PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE

ADDRESS 1-65535: Address of this controller. 0 (Zero): Communication disabled

1-65535 address 0 disables

INTERCONNECT FORMAT

ECPIP, NTCIP, or AB3418

TRANSMIT X: Indicates Data is being transmitted. X or “.”

VALID DATA X: Last telemetry data received was valid. X or “.”

DATA ERROR X: There has been a data error within the last 5 seconds. X or “.”

CLEAR TO SEND X: External device cleared this port to transmit. X or “.”

CARRIER DETECT

X: A carrier is detected by this port X or “.”

REQUEST TO SEND

X: The port has asserted a request to send data to the external device.

X or “.”

DROP OUT TIME 0-65535: Seconds before the port is considered failed. 0-65535 seconds

SPECIAL FUNCTIONS

X: Indicates the Special Functions listed below have been downloaded to all addresses:

System Flash Spare Spare

X or “.”

RECEIVE COUNT 0-65535: The number of valid commands that this port has received. This is a circular count.

0-65535

TRANSMIT COUNT

0-65535: The number of valid commands that this port has transmited. This is a circular count.

0-65535

Page 2, ECPIP, NTCIP, and AB3418 Protocols

The screen used for Page 2 of the Port 3B Status is the same screen used for Port 2 and Port 3B. Please see pages 12-24 - 12-26 of this manual for descriptions of the status parameters shown on this screen.


� % �8 �. � �� $ � � �� & � � � ��

SCREEN MM-7-5-5 From the Communications Submenu screen (MM-7-5), press the #5 key and the Communications Ethernet Status screen (MM-7-5-5) appears.

ETHERNET STATUS LINK SPEED : 0 TRANSMIT COUNT: 0 RECEIVE COUNT : 0 TX ERROR COUNT: 0 RX ERROR COUNT: 0

� % �8 �8 � � �� & � � � ��

SCREEN MM-7-5-6 From the Communications Submenu screen (MM-7-5), press the #6 key and the Communications NTCIP Status screen (MM-7-5-6) appears.

SNMP: Simple Network Management Protocol

STMP: Simple Transportation Management Protocol

NTCIP STATUS SNMP RECEIVE COUNT : 0 SNMP TRANSMIT COUNT: 0 STMP RECEIVE COUNT : 0 STMP TRANSMIT COUNT: 0


� % �9 � �� " � � � �� & � � � �� *& ' ��


DETECTOR STATUS: MORE � DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 F D E X S - . . DETECTOR 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 . . . . . . . . DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 . . . . . . . . DETECTOR 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 . . . . . . . . DETECTOR 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 - - - - - - - - DETECTOR 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 - - - - - - - - DETECTOR 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 - - - - - - - - DETECTOR 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 - - - - - - - -

From the Status Display Submenu screen (MM-7), press the #6 key and the Detector Status screen (MM-7-6) appears. As shown at the right, this screen has status display positions for all detectors (1-64).

Move the cursor to a programmed Detector.

(Buzzer): Indicates when the raw detector is active.

TIME: When the detector is being delayed, extending, or is a speed detector the value is displayed.

0.0-255.0: Delay countdown

0.0-25.5: Extend countdown

0-99: The last speed recorded

DETECTOR 1-64: F: Failed diagnostics D: Delay is timing E: Extend is timing X: Active with no delay or extend. S: Speed detector(s) ".": No activity. "-": Not programmed.

� % �9 �� / *& � � � � � �� & � � � �� *& ' �

SCREEN MM-7-7

FLASH STATUS: NO FLASH ACTIVE

From the Status Display Submenu screen (MM-7), press the #7 key and the Flash/MMU Status screen (MM-7-7) appears. As shown at the right, this screen displays messages concerning the Flash/ MMU present status.

Flash Status Messages

The list below shows the different types of FLASH STATUS messages that appear on screen:

“CONTROLLER FLASH” “PREEMPT FLASH” “POWER START FLASH” “LOCAL FLASH” “FLASH CONDITION UNKNOWN” “FLASH LOGIC ERROR” “POWER ON PREEMPT “ “EXTERNAL START PREEMPT FLASH”

The list below shows the types of inputs that appear on screen:

“AUTOMATIC FLASH INPUT” “TIME BASE PROGRAM” “TLM SPECIAL FUNCTION 1” “TLM MODE 2”

Abbreviations Used The following abbreviations are used in the FLASH STATUS messages:

CFM: Controller Fault Monitor CVM: Controller Voltage Monitor MIN: Minimum MON: Monitor MMU: Malfunction Management Unit PGM: Program SDLC: Synchronous Data Link

Control TF: Terminal and Facilities TLM: Telemetry


� % �9 �% � / *& � � �� $ ! � � $ �� *& ' � �

This screen (MM-7-7) displays the cause of a cabinet Flash condition. The various flash displays are described in the following paragraphs. If there is no flash condition, the MM-7-7 screen displays NO FLASH CONDITION.

� % �9 �� $ � � � **� � �1�# � � ) � $ " ' 2�/ *& � � �� / *& � � �

When the controller generates the flash condition, not the MMU, any of the following messages can be displayed. The messages are listed in order of priority (highest first, lowest last).

MMU/TF SDLC COMM FAULT - Indicates a Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) communications error. When a MMU or termi-nals and facilities (TF) communications error causes a flash condition, the status display lists the response frames that generated the initial error and the current response frames with errors.

(Example: TF: 138 139 MMU: 128 129 Indicates no communication with terminals and facilities response frames 138 and 139. No communication with MMU frames 128, 129.) Flash condition is cleared when these errors are no longer detected.

Possible causes: loose connections, SDLC disconnect, BIU, controller, or MMU failure.

COMPATIBILITY PGM FAULT - The program on the MMU program card and the MMU program entered at the controller do not match. The fault status display shows the channel number(s) where there is a mismatch, the controller state (0,1), and MMU state (0 or 1).

The MMU program card should be pulled from the cabinet to verify (using the Software Modules screen, MM-8-7) whether the controller program or the MMU program must be corrected, as appropriate.

COLOR MISMATCH - A color difference was detected between the colors generated by the controller and the channel colors returned by the MMU. The flash status display shows the controller readback of the MMU channels and phase colors. An X appears below each channel and next to its associated phase color. The conflict is summarized at the bottom of the screen where the channel numbers, mismatched output and MMU colors are indicated (Example: 13GN indicates channel 13, output color = Green, MMU color = No color).

Channel and phase relationships are determined by the phase to load switch assignment programmed at the controller. Keyboard reset clears flash condition.

CONFLICT DETECTED - There is a conflict detected by the controller that was not detected by the MMU. The display shows the colors, indicated by X, that the controller reads back from the MMU. Keyboard reset clears the flash condition. (This message will probably never appear.)

PHASE NEXT ERROR - The phase to time next and the present phase timing are displayed with the cause of the phase next error. Keyboard reset clears the flash condition.

CYCLE FAILURE - A cycle failure occurs when there are calls present on a phase that has not been serviced for 2 cycles. Keyboard reset clears the flash condition.

DEFAULT FLASH 1 - The flash display routine cannot determine the cause of the emergency flash.


� % �9 �. � �� $ � � � **� � �1�# � � ) � $ " ' 2�/ *& � � �& $ ! �� / *& � � ��

When the flash condition is cause by an Emergency flash and an MMU flash, any of the following messages can be displayed. The messages are listed in order (highest first, lowest last). When the MMU has caused the intersection to go into flash, you must reset the MMU to clear the flash condition.

FAILURE STATUS NOT REPORTED - The MMU has not communicated the reason for the emergency flash.

PORT 1 TIMEOUT - The MMU detected a failure from the controller. Possible causes for this failure include: interrupted communications between controller and MMU.

DIAGNOSTIC FAILURE - The MMU has detected that it has a diagnostic failure. Controller is alerted.

CVM/CFM - The MMU detected a Controller Voltage Monitor/Controller Fault Monitor failure.

+24 V MON I - The MMU detected a +24 Volt Monitor I failure.

+24 V MON II - The MMU detected a +24 Volt Monitor II failure.

MIN CLEAR FAIL - Minimum Clearance Failure. The minimum clearance time (yellow) was not long enough.

CONFLICT - Indicates that a color conflict at an intersection caused the flash condition. The flash status display indicates, with X, the status of all channels by phase color (red, yellow, green) at the time the conflict occurred.

An X is shown under each active channel and next to the corresponding color.

Conflicts can be observed by comparing the phases and colors. Channel and phase rela-tionships are determined by the phase to load switch assignment programmed at the controller.

RED FAIL - A red indication was not given when it should have been. The flash status display shows an X under each channel and next to the phase color. Identify red failure by checking for X on red on all movements that should indicate red.

UNKNOWN MMU FLASH CONDITION - Indicates unknown MMU flash condition. Depending on the MMU manufacturer, additional flash information may have been communicated that is not recognized

CHECK MMU STATUS DISPLAY - Prompts for user to view the MMU status display. Depending on the MMU manufacturer, additional flash information may have been communicated that is not recognized. The MMU status display may identify errors or failures.


� % �9 �8 � �� $ � � � **� � �/ *& � � �

When the flash condition is caused by a controller as part of its normal operation, one of the following messages can be displayed. The messages are listed in order of priority (highest first, lowest last).

POWER ON FLASH - The controller is timing Power On Flash that was previously programmed. Refer to the Controller Submenu, Start/Flash Data (MM-2-5).

EXTERNAL START PREEMPT FLASH - At power on, the external start input is TRUE and preempt is active. External start input is programmed in the Controller Submenu, Start/Flash Data (MM-2-5).

POWER ON PREEMPT FLASH - Flash occurs because the preemptor is active during power on.

PREEMPT FLASH - Preemptor program is calling for flash as part of the preemption sequence.

AUTOMATIC FLASH - The Automatic Flash Input is enabled.

LOCAL FLASH - The local flash input from the cabinet is active. Example: Police switch at the cabinet.

CVM/CFM - Controller Voltage Monitor/Controller Fault Monitor failure has caused the flash condition.

� % �9 �9 � �� # & � " �/ *& � � �1 � # � � � �/ *& � � 2�

When the flash condition is caused by automatic flash the following messages can be displayed. The messages are listed in order of priority (highest first, lowest last)

AUTOMATIC FLASH INPUT - The Automatic Flash (Remote Flash) input at the cabinet is enabled.

TEST A - The Test A input is enabled at the cabinet.

TEST B - The Test B input is enabled.

TIME OF DAY PROGRAM - A time-of-day program step is calling for flash. To disable flash, modify the time-of-day program step.

TLM SPECIAL FUNCTION 1 - Telemetry Special Function 1 message indicates that the system master has initiated a system flash.

TLM MODE 2 - Telemetry Mode 2 message indicates that the system master has initiated an intersection flash.

APPLICATION PROM - Application logic PROMS are calling for flash. This flash condition is specific to the particular application program

MMU Status Displays

Indicates Malfunction Management Unit (MMU) operating status: MMU ENABLED or MMU DISABLED.

Reference Frame Readback - Indicates status condition of MMU response frames 129 and 131. X indicates readback signal for RED, YELLOW, GREEN, MIN CLR (minimum clearance), and DISABLE per channel. X indicates readback bit TRUE for other parameters.

SCREEN MM-7-7 (NEXT PAGE) SCREEN MM-7-7 (NEXT PAGE) MMU STATUS: MMU DISABLED ---------- MMU RF129 READBACK ---------- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CHANNEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 RED.... YELLOW. GREEN.. OUTPUT RELAY. CONFLICT.......... IMM RESPONSE. RED FAILURE....... CONT VOLT MON DIAG FAILURE...... +24 V MON I.. MIN CLEAR FAILURE. +24 V MON II. PORT 1 TIMEOUT.... +24 V MON INH SPARE ............ RESET........ SPARE ............ RED ENABLE... SPARE ............

MMU STATUS: MMU DISABLED ---------- MMU RF129 READBACK -------- SPARE BIT 1... SPARE 4........... SPARE BIT 2... SPARE 5........... SPARE BIT 3... SPARE 6........... ---------- MMU RF131 READBACK -------- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CHANNEL1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 MIN CLR DISABLE MIN FLASH TIME........ SECONDS +24 VOLT LATCH........ CVM/FAULT MON LATCH...


� % �: � �$ � � � � �� & � � � �� *& ' �

SCREEN MM-7-8 From the Status Display Submenu screen (MM-7), press the #8 key and the Input/Output Submenu screen (MM-7-8) appears. This submenu has a list of three data entry groups that are accessed by pressing the associated number key (#1, #2, or #3) for the desired data group.

INPUT / OUTPUT SUBMENU 1. CONNECTOR A-E INPUTS 2. CONNECTOR A-E OUTPUTS 3. LOGIC PROCESSOR PRESS 1..3 TO SELECT

� % �: �� $ $ � " � � � ��3��$ � � � � �

While viewing the Input/Output Submenu Screen, press the #1 key and the Input Status screen (MM-7-8-1) appears. As shown at the right, this screen has three pages that are accessed by pressing the NEXT PAGE function key.

These screens show the real time status of the inputs for connectors A and B (page 1), C and D (page 2), and E (page 3).

SCREEN MM-7-8-1, Page 1 SCREEN MM-7-8-1, Page 2 INPUT STATUS 1 OF 3�� CONNECTOR [A] K L M N P R S T f g h i j . . . . . . . . . . . . . k l m n q v w x y z AA BB EE . . . . . . . . . . . . . FF GG HH . . . CONNECTOR [B] B L M N P R S T U V W X g . . . . . . . . . . . . . h i j k m n v x y z . . . . . . . . . .

CONNECTOR [C] 2 OF 3� N P R S T U V W X Y Z a b . . . . . . . . . . . . . k m n p q r s t u v EE . . . . . . . . . . . CONNECTOR [D] 3 4 6 9 10 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 . . . . . . . . . . . 25 26 30 31 35 36 37 38 39 40 47 49 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 56 57 58 60 61 . . . . .

SCREEN MM-7-8-1, Page 3 CONNECTOR [E] 3 OF 3�

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 14 15 16 17 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 20 21 . . .


� % �: �% � �� $ $ � " � � � ��3��

While viewing the Input/Output Submenu Screen, press the #2 key and the Output Status screen (MM-7-8-2) appears. As shown at the right, this screen has three pages that are accessed by pressing the NEXT PAGE function key.

These screens show the real time status of the outputs for connectors A and B (page 1), C and D (page 2) and E (page 3).

SCREEN MM-7-8-2, Page 1 SCREEN MM-7-8-2, Page 2 OUTPUT STATUS 1 OF 3�� CONNECTOR [A] A C D E F G H J W X Y Z a . . . . . . . . . . . . . b c d e r s t u CC DD . . . . . . . . . . CONNECTOR [B] A C D E F G H J K Y Z a b . . . . . . . . . . . . . c d e f p q r s t u w AA BB . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC DD EE FF GG HH . . . . . .

CONNECTOR [C] 2 OF 3� A B C D E F G H J K L M N . . . . . . . . . . . . . P c d e f g h i j k w x y . . . . . . . . . . . . . z AA BB CC DD FF GG HH JJ KK LL MM NN . . . . . . . . . . . . . PP . CONNECTOR [D] 1 2 5 8 11 15 21 22 23 24 27 28 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 33 34 41 42 43 44 45 46 48 51 52 53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 59 . .

SCREEN MM-7-8-2, Page 3 CONNECTOR [E] 3 OF 3�

9 10 22 23 . . . .


� % �: �� ) " �� " � � � � � �� & � � � �

SCREEN MM-7-8-3 While viewing the Input/Output Submenu Screen, press the #3 key and the Logic Processor Status screen (MM-7-8-3) appears. This screen allows you to view the status of up to 99 logic gates.

LOGIC #98 ACTIVE: Y RESULT: FALSE IF GREEN ON PHASE 10 IS ON F AND VEHICLE DET # 1 IS ON F OR MINGRN TMR ON PHASE 10 < 15.7 F THEN SET VEHICLE DET # 1 OFF SET GREEN OVERLAP B OFF SET YELLOW OVERLAP B ON ELSE DELAY FOR 15.7 SECONDS SET VEHICLE DET # 1 ON


LOGIC Displays number (1-100) of the logic gate presently being viewed. Use the Toggle (0) key to sequentially view the data for each logic gate (1-100) or use the numeric (0-9) keys to select individual gates to view.

1-100

ACTIVE Displays YES when the gate is performing an action and NO when it is not.

YES/NO

RESULT Displays the results of the IF statements. TRUE/FALSE

TIMER Displays the count down of the timer identified by SECONDS* at the lower right.

IF, AND, OR Statements

Indicates individual TRUE/FALSE results for each IF, AND, OR logic statement.

T = TRUE F = FALSE

THEN Indicates what will happen when the IF statement is TRUE.

ELSE Indicates what will happen when the IF statement is FALSE.


� % �< � � � �� # � & � + * � ' �� & � � � �

SCREEN MM-7-9 COMPATIBILITY STATUS INTERNAL MMU 1-9 ... 1-2 00000000 00000000 2-3 ... 1-10 00000000 00000000 2-11 ... 2-4 00000000 00000000 3-6 ... 2-12 00000000 00000000 3-14 ... 3-7 00000000 00000000 4-10 ... 3-15 00000000 00000000 5-7 ... 4-11 00000000 00000000 5-15 ... 5-8 00000000 00000000 6-13 ... 5-16 00000000 00000000 7-12 ... 6-14 00000000 00000000 8-12 ... 7-13 00000000 00000000 9-13 ... 8-13 00000000 00000000 10-15 ... 9-12 00000000 00000000 12-14 ... 10-16 00000000 00000000 15-16 ... 12-15 00000000 00000000

From the Status Display Submenu screen (MM-7), press the #9 key and the Compatibility Status screen (MM-7-9) appears. This screen shows the real-time comparison between the Controller Compatibility (MM-1-1-4-2) and the MMU programming card as reported by SDLC communications.

The left-most column identifies the channel pair permissive programming.

The INTERNAL column shows the controller programming (MM-1-4-2) or the internal calculated permissive programming.

The MMU column shows the MMU permissive programming as reported over the SDLC link.

NOTE: The left-most column reads from right to left. The channel pairs are continuous between 1-2 and 15-16 with the start and end of each row identified in the INTERNAL and MMU columns:

0 (Zero): Indicates that the channel-pair are not compatible. They will NOT allow their green or yellow inputs to be ON together.

1: Indicates that the channel-pair are compatible. They MAY HAVE their green and yellow inputs ON together.


��

� � �� * � � � �� + # � $ � �

Programming Summary

SCREEN MM-8 UTILITIES SUBMENU

1. COPY 5. SIGN ON 2. RESERVED 6. LOG BUFFERS 3. PRINT 7. SOFTWARE MODULES 4. TRANSFER PRESS 1..7 TO SELECT

5. SIGN ON

Accesses the System Sign On screen (MM-8-5) that allows you to edit the text on the line “Solutions that Move the World.”

6. LOG BUFFERS Accesses the Log Buffers Submenu screen (MM-8-6) that allows you to Display, Print, or Clear the log buffers for Controller Events, Detector Events, Detector Activity, MMU Events, or Select All.

7. SOFTWARE MODULES Accesses a data entry screen (MM-8-7) that displays the name, part number, and revision level for all installed software modules. This information can be viewed and/or edited as appropriate.

From the Main Menu (MM), select option #8 (Utilities) and the Utilities Submenu screen (MM-8) appears. This submenu lists seven data groups as shown in the figure at the right. To view or enter data, press the keyboard number (1-7) corresponding to desired data group.


1. COPY UTILITY The Copy Utility accesses a screen (MM-8-1) that facilitates the copying of nine different data groups: Phase Data, Timing Plan Data, Phase Detector Options Plan Data, Detector Plan Data, Pattern Data, Sequence Data, Datakey Data, Controller Data, and Default Database.

2. RESERVED Reserved for future expansion.

3. PRINT UTILITY Accesses a data entry screen (MM-8-3) that allows you to select either Port 2 or Port 3A as the printing port and enables (X) or disables (“.”) eight different options for printing.

4. TRANSFER UTILITY Accesses a data entry screen (MM-8-4) that allows you to transfer data between eight different areas: Data Module, Data Flash, Port, Extended Options, I/O Mapping, Logic Processor, and Access codes. Simply select one FROM and one TO, then press ENTER to transfer.


� � �� ' �� * � ' �

SCREEN MM-8-1 COPY UTILITY

FROM > TO PHASE TIMING.... . > PHASE TIMING.... . TIMING PLAN..... . > TIMING PLAN..... . PH DET OPT PLAN. . > PH DET OPT PLAN. . DETECTOR PLAN.. . > DETECTOR PLAN... . COORD PATTERN.. . > COORD PATTERN... . SEQUENCE....... . > SEQUENCE........ . DATA KEY....... . > CONTROLLER DATA. . CONTROLLER DATA . > DATA KEY........ . DEFAULT DATABASE . > CONTROLLER DATA. . MMU PROGRAM.... . > CONTROLLER...... . TOGGLE TO SELECT ONE FROM AND TO THEN PRESS ENTER

From the Utilities Submenu screen (MM-8), press the #1 key and the Copy Utility screen (MM-8-1) shown at the right appears. From this screen, you can copy nine different data groups as described in the following paragraphs.

As shown, this screen has two columns (labeled COPY and TO). To execute a copy function, simply position the cursor on the desired horizontal row, enter appropriate data in the COPY and TO data entry fields (as instructed in the following paragraphs) and press the ENTER key to perform the copy function.

NOTE: Where the number zero (0) is an allowed entry value in the TO column data entry fields, the zero causes the data copied from same data entry field in the COPY column to be sent to ALL possible recipients associated with that field rather than a single destination.


PHASE TIMING Copy Phase/Timing Data (MM-2-1).

Copies all data from the specified COPY column Phase number (1-16) and Timing Plan number (1-4) to the specified TO column Phase number (0-16) and Timing Plan number (0-4) when the ENTER key is pressed.

See the number zero note above.

Copy column: (1-16) (1-4) TO column: (0-16) (0-4)

TIMING PLAN Copy Timing Plan Data (MM-2-1).

Copies all data from the specified COPY column Timing Plan number (1-4) to the specified TO column Timing Plan number (0-4) when the ENTER key is pressed. See the number zero note above.

Copy column: (1-4) TO column: (0-4)

PH DET OPT PLAN

Copy Phase Detector Options Plan Data (MM-6-3).

Copies all phase level detector locking-recall, No Rest, and Added Initial data from the specified COPY column Phase Detector Option Plan (1-4) to the specified TO column Phase Detector Option Plan (0-4) when the ENTER key is pressed. See the number zero note above.


DETECTOR PLAN

Copy Detector Plan Data (MM-6-2).

Copies all data from the specified COPY column Vehicle Detector Plan number (1-4) to the specified TO column Vehicle Detector Plan number (0-4) when the ENTER key is pressed. See the number zero note above.


COORD PATTERN

Copy Coordination Pattern Data (MM-3-3-2).

Copies all data from the specified COPY column Coordination Pattern number (1-120) to the specified TO column Coordination Pattern number (0-120) when the ENTER key is pressed. See the number zero note above.



NOTE: Where the number zero (0) is an allowed entry value in the TO column data entry fields, the zero causes the data copied from same data entry field in the COPY column to be sent to ALL possible recipients associated with that field rather that a single destination. PARAMETER DEFINITION RANGE

SEQUENCE Copy Sequence Data (MM-1-1-3).

Copies all data from the specified COPY column Sequence Pattern number (1-16) to the specified TO column Sequence Pattern number (0-16) when the ENTER key is pressed.

Exception: Entry is ignored if either sequence 1 or the sequence in effect is entered.

See the number zero note above.

Copy column: (1-16) (1-4) TO column: (0-16) (0-4)

DATA KEY to CONTROLLER DATA

Copy Datakey Data to Controller.

Copies all Datakey data to the Controller when both the COPY and TO columns are enabled with an “X” and the ENTER key is pressed. “.” in either column disables the Copy function.


CONTROLLER DATA To DATA KEY

Copy Controller Data to Datakey.

Copies all Controller data to the Datakey when both the COPY and TO columns are enabled with an “X” and the ENTER key is pressed. “.” in either column disables the Copy function.


DEFAULT DATABASE To CONTROLLER DATA

Copy Default Database to Controller.

NOTE: Requires supervisor access code to be set.

Copies the Default Database to the Controller when both the COPY and TO columns are enabled with an “X” and the ENTER key is pressed. “.” in either column disables the Copy function.


RESERVED – Reserved for future release

SCREEN MM-8-2

Reserved for future release


� � �� % � �� $ � �� * � ' �

SCREEN MM-8-3 PRINT

PRINT TO PORT... 2 SELECT ALL..... . CONFIGURATION... . DETECTOR....... . CONTROLLER...... . TIME BASE...... . COORDINATOR..... . LOGIC PROCESSOR. . PREEMPTOR....... . TOGGLE TO SELECT AND THEN PREE ENTER TO BEGIN PRINTING

From the Utilities Submenu screen (MM-8), press the #3 key and the Print Utility screen (MM-8-3) shown at the right appears.

This utility allows you to select either Port 2 or Port 3A as the printing port and enables (X) or disables (“.”) ten different areas for printing. Use the Toggle (0) key to select PORT 2 or PORT 3A as the printing port.

Use the Toggle (0) key to enable (X) or disable (“.”) the ten areas for printing. Press ENTER and printing from the enabled areas will be output to the selected port (2 or 3A).

� � �� & $ � � � � �� * � ' �

SCREEN MM-8-4 From the Utilities Submenu screen (MM-8), press the #4 key and the Transfer Utility screen (MM-8-4) shown at the right appears.

This utility allows you to transfer data from between eight different areas. To transfer data from one area to another, simply enable one area as the FROM area and another as the TO area, then press ENTER and the transfer will be executed.

TRANSFER UTILITY PORT................. 2 DIRECTION.......TRANSMIT DATABASE............. . TOGGLE TO SELECT AND THEN PREE ENTER TO TRANSFER

� � �� . � � ) $ ��$ ��" � � � $ �� * � ' �

SCREEN MM-8-5 ****************************************

* ECONOLITE CONTROL PRODUCTS INC. * * * * ASC/3-2100 * * Copyright (C) 2004-2005 * * * * Solutions that Move the World * * * * * * STANDARD SOFTWARE.......100.0001.001 * * * * * * * * * * * * STANDARD CONFIGURATION..100.0002.001 *

From the Utilities Submenu screen (MM-8), press the #5 key and the Sign On Screen (MM-8-5) shown at the right appears. This utility allows you to use the numeric keyboard in alpha/numeric mode to edit two lines of the sign-on screen: “Solutions that Move the World” and the following blank line. To edit either line, position the cursor at the desired location on the line and repeatedly press the numeric keys (1-0) to obtain the desired character in circular fashion.

1. Enters (blank), *, -, #, =, &, 1 2. Enters A, B, C, a, b, c, 2 3. Enters D, E, F, d, e, f, 3 4. Enters G, H, I, g, h, i, 4 5. Enters J, K, L, j, k, l, 5 6. Enters M, N, O, m, n, o, 6 7. Enters P, Q, R, p, q, r, 7

8. Enters S, T, U, s, t, u, 8 9. Enters W, X, Y, Z, w, x, y, z, 9 10. Enters 0

CLEAR: Deletes the entire entry. Cursor Left: Clears the character in the right-most column


� � �% � �� ) �6 � � � � � � �� + # � $ � �

SCREEN MM-8-6

LOG BUFFERS SUBMENU

1. DISPLAY

2. PRINT 3. CLEAR PRESS 1..3 TO SELECT

From the Utilities Submenu screen (MM-8), press the #6 key and the Log Buffers Submenu Screen (MM-8-6) shown at the right appears. This utility allows you to display, print, or clear the log buffers for controller events, detector events, detector activity, or MMU events.

� � �% �� *& ' �� ) �6 � � � � � � �� + # � $ � �

SCREEN MM-8-6-1

DISPLAY LOG BUFFERS SUBMENU 1. CONTROLLER EVENTS 2. DETECTOR EVENTS 3. DETECTOR ACTIVITY 4. MMU EVENTS PRESS 1..7 TO SELECT

From the Log Buffers Submenu screen (MM-8-6), press the #1 key and the Display Log Buffers Submenu (MM-8-6-1) appears. Select options 1, 2, 3, or 4 from that submenus and a display of the associated controller events, detector events, detector activity, or MMU events will appear.

� � �% �% � �� $ � �� ) �6 � � � � � � �

SCREEN MM-8-6-2 PRINT LOG BUFFERS

PRINT TO PORT............... 2 NUMBER OF DAYS............ 1 CONTROLLER EVENTS.......... . DETECTOR EVENTS............ . DETECTOR ACTIVITY.......... . MMU EVENTS................. . SELECT ALL................. X PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO SELECT THEN ENTER TO PRINT

From the Log Buffers Submenu screen (MM-8-6), press the #2 key and the Print Log Buffers screen (MM-8-6-2) appears.

On this screen, you specify the print port (Port 2 or Port 3A), specify the number of log days to be printed, and then enable (X) or disable (“.”) printing of Controller Events, Detector Events, Detector Activity, MMU Events, or Select All. Press ENTER to begin printing of data from all enabled areas.


� � �% �� *� & � �� + # � $ � �

SCREEN MM-8-6-3

CLEAR SUBMENU 1. CONTROLLER EVENTS 2. DETECTOR EVENTS 3. DETECTOR ACTIVITY 4. MMU EVENTS 5. ALL LOGS PRESS KEYS 1...5 TO SELECT

From the Log Buffers Submenu screen (MM-8-6), press the #3 key and the Clear Submenu screen (MM-8-6-3) appears.

This utility allows the clearing of log buffers from memory. Press a numeric key (1-4) to select the log to be cleared or press 5 to clear all, then press ENTER to clear.

NOTE: If the buffers are not cleared, when the buffer fills, the newest data automatically overwrites the oldest data.

� � �� - & � � �� ! � *� � �

SCREEN MM-8-7

SOFTWARE MODULES NAME PART NUMBER VERSION BOOT 111.222.3333 V1.O1.01 APPLICATON 111.222.3333 V1.O1.01 CONFIGURATION 111.222.3333 N3000 HELP 111.222.3333 V1.O1.01 DEFINITIONS 111.222.3333 V1.O1.01 TEXT 111.222.3333 V1.O1.01

From the Utilities Submenu screen (MM-8), press the #7 key and the Software Modules screen (MM-8-7) shown at the right appears. This utility displays the name, part number, and revision level for all installed software modules.

NOTE: The Part Number and Version number on your screen should match the numbers appropriate for the software actually installed in your system.


��

SCREEN MM-9

DIAGNOSTICS INFORMATION

HARDWARE DIAGNOSTICS ARE PERFORMED WHILE

THE CONTROLLER IS NOT OPERATIONAL.

REFER TO APPENDIX F IN THE PROGRAMMING MANUAL FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON LOADING THE

DIAGNOSTIC FILE AND ITS OPERATION.


�� ##��$$�� %%��

��MM ASC/3 MAIN MENU MM-1 CONFIGURATION MM-1-1 CONTROLLER SEQ SUBMENU

MM-1-1-1 PHASE RING SEQUENCE & ASSIGNMENT

MM-1-1-2 PHASE COMPATIBILITY MM-1-1-3 RESERVED MM-1-1-4 BACKUP PREVENT PHASES MM-1-1-5 SIMULTANEOUS GAP PHASES MM-1-2 PHASES IN USE/EXCLUSIVE PED MM-1-3 LOAD SWITCH ASSIGNMENT (MMU CHANNEL) MM-1-4 PORT 1(SDLC) SUBMENU MM-1-4-1 SDLC OPTIONS MM-1-4-2 MMU PROGRAM MM-1-4-3 COLOR CHECK DISABLE MM-1-5 COMMUNICATION PORTS SUBMENU MM-1-5-1 GLOBAL PORT PARAMETERS MM-1-5-2 PORT 2(TERMINAL) MM-1-5-3 PORT 3A MM-1-5-4 PORT 3B MM-1-5-5 ETHERNET PORT CONFIGURATION MM-1-6 ENABLE LOGGING MM-1-6-1 EVENT LOGGING MM-1-7 DISPLAY/ACCESS MM-1-7-1 ADMINISTRATION MM-1-7-2 DISPLAY OPTIONS MM-1-8 LOGIC PROCESSOR MM-2 CONTROLLER SUBMENU MM-2-1 TIMING PLANS MM-2-2 VEHICLE OVERLAP MM-2-3 PEDESTRIAN OVERLAP MM-2-4 GUARANTEED MINIMUM TIME DATA MM-2-5 START/FLASH MM-2-6 OPTION DATA MM-2-6-1 CONTROLLER OPTIONS MM-2-6-2 EXTENDED OPTIONS MM-2-7 ACTUATED PRE-TIME MODE MM-2-8 PHASE DETECTOR OPTIONS MM-3 COORDINATOR SUBMENU MM-3-1 COORDINATOR OPTIONS MM-3-2 COORDINATOR PATTERNS MM-3-3 SPLIT PATTERNS MM-3-4 AUTO PERM MIN GREEN (SECONDS) MM-3-5 SPLIT DEMAND MM-4 PREEMPT0R SUBMENU MM-4-1 PREEMPTOR MM-4-2 LOW PRIORITY PREEMPTOR SELECTION

MM-5 TIME BASE SUBMENU MM-5-1 CLOCK/CALENDAR DATA MM-5-2 SCHEDULE NUMBER MM-5-3 DAY PLAN MM-5-4 ACTION PLAN MM-5-5 EXCEPTION DAY PROGRAM MM-6 DETECTOR SUBMENU MM-6-1 VEH DET TYPE/TS1 DET SELECT MM-6-2 VEHICLE DETECTOR SETUP MM-6-3 RESERVED MM-6-4 PED AND SYSTEM DETECTOR OPTIONS MM-6-5 LOG - SPEED DETECTOR SETUP MM-6-6 VEHICLE DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS MM-6-7 PEDESTRIAN DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS MM-7 STATUS DISPLAY SUBMENU MM-7-1 CONTROLLER STATUS MM-7-2 COORDINATOR STATUS MM-7-3 PREEMPTOR STATUS MM-7-4 TIME BASE STATUS MM-7-5 COMMUNICATIONS SUBMENU MM-7-5-1 PORT 1 (SDLC) STATUS MM-7-5-2 COMMUNICATION PORT 2 STATUS MM-7-5-3 COMMUNICATION PORT 3A STATUS MM-7-5-4 COMMUNICATION PORT 3B STATUS MM-7-5-5 ETHERNET STATUS MM-7-5-6 NTCIP STATUS MM-7-6 DETECTOR STATUS MM-7-7 FLASH/MMU STATUS: CONTROLLER FLASH MM-7-8 INPUT/OUTPUT SUBMENU MM-7-8-1 CONNECTOR A-E INPUTS MM-7-8-2 CONNECTOR A-E OUTPUTS MM-7-8-3 LOGIC PROCESSOR MM-7-9 MMU COMPATIBILITY MM-8 UTILITIES SUBMENU MM-8-1 COPY UTILITY MM-8-2 RESERVED MM-8-3 PRINT UTILITY MM-8-4 TRANSFER UTILITY MM-8-5 SIGN ON MM-8-6 LOG BUFFERS SUBMENU MM-8-6-1 DISPLAY LOG BUFFERS MM-8-6-2 PRINT LOG BUFFERS MM-8-6-3 CLEAR LOG BUFFERS MM-8-7 SOFTWARE MODULES MM-9 DIAGNOSTIC INFO


�� ##��$$��

�� The LCD display on the Econolite ASC/3 control is 16 lines vertical by 40 characters horizontal. In the screen descriptions that follow, some of the displays contain more that 16 lines and/or more than 40 characters in a line. In those cases, the user must use the cursor keys to scroll the display vertically and/or horizontally to move through the display.

Screen titles, which appear above the screen illustration (Example: MM-1-4-3), indicate the keys to press to navigate to that screen. In the example, to reach the screen MM-1-4-3, you would press the MAIN MENU function key (MM), followed by numeric keys #1, #4, and #3.

POWER ON will automatically display one of the three following screens: Power up flash corrupted file system MISSING APPLICATION FILES THE CONTROLLER HAS MISSING OR CORRUPTED APPLICATION FILES. REFER TO THE ASC/3 PROGRAMMING MANUAL FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON LOADING NEW OPERATIONAL FILES. PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.

*************************************** * ECONOLITE CONTROL PRODUCTS INC. * * * * ASC/3-2100 * * Copyright (C) 2004 * * * * Solutions that Move the World * * * * * * STANDARD SOFTWARE.......100.0001.001 * * * * * * * * * * STANDARD CONFIGURATION..100.0002.001 * * WARM START * ****************************************

CONTROLLER STATUS: MORE � 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T/N..... . T . . . T . . . . . . . T . . VEH..... . C R N X S . . . . . . . O I D PED..... . C R N 2 A . . . . . . . O I D R1/PH 2 R2/PH 6 R3/PH 12 R4/PH 16 GRN REST VEXT 25.5 RED REST YEL 25.5 MAX3 255 GAP OUT CMD SRC NIC COS 654 ACTION PLAN 100 SYS CYC 7s PTN 64 START TIME 11:11 LOC CYC 15s FLASH STOP TIME 23:59 TLM ADD 65535 OK PATTERN 64 PREEMPTOR 1 NEXT PLAN 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 C D I R A . . 01/01/01 23:50:59


SCREEN MM

ASC/3 MAIN MENU 1. CONFIGURATION 6. DETECTORS 2. CONTROLLER 7. STATUS DISPLAY 3. COORDINATOR 8. UTILITIES 4. PREEMPTOR 9. DIAGNOSTIC INFO 5. TIME BASE PRESS 1..9 TO SELECT

SCREEN MM-1 CONFIGURATION SUBMENU 1. CONTROLLER SEQ 2. PHASES IN USE / EXCLUSIVE PED 3. LOAD SWITCH ASSIGNMENT 4. PORT 1(SDLC) 5. COMMUNICATION PORTS 6. ENABLE LOGGING 7. DISPLAY/ACCESS 8. LOGIC PROCESSOR PRESS 1..8 TO SELECT

SCREEN MM-1-1 CONTROLLER SEQUENCE SUBMENU 1. PHASE RING SEQUENCE AND ASSIGNMENT 2. PHASE COMPATIBILITY 3. RESERVED 4. BACKUP PREVENT 5. SIMULTANEOUS GAP PRESS 1..5 TO SELECT

SCREEN MM-1-1-1 SCREEN MM-1-1-1 (Scroll)

PHASE RING SEQUENCE MORE � DATA FOR CONTROLLER[ 1]AND SEQUENCE[ 1] HARDWARE ALTERNATE SEQUENCE ENABLE.. NO COPY TO FOLLOWING SEQUENCES......... . RING 1 1 2 3 4 9 10 13 14 . . . RING 2 5 6 7 8 11 12 15 16 . . . RING 3 . . . . . . . . . . . RING 4 . . . . . . . . . . . INFORMATION ONLY PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RING............1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 RING........... 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 PRESS 0..9 TO CHANGE

PHASE RING SEQUENCE MORE � DATA FOR CONTROLLER[ 1]AND SEQUENCE[ 1] HARDWARE ALTERNATE SEQUENCE ENABLE.. NO COPY TO FOLLOWING SEQUENCES......... . RING 1 10 13 14 . . . . . . . . RING 2 12 15 16 . . . . . . . . RING 3 . . . . . . . . . . . RING 4 . . . . . . . . . . . INFORMATION ONLY PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RING............1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 RING........... 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 PRESS 0..9 TO CHANGE


SCREEN MM-1-1-2 SCREEN MM-1-1-4

PHASE COMPATIBILITY MORE � 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 . . . . X X . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . X X . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . X X . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . X X . . . . . . . . 5 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . X X . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . X X . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . X X . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . X X . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . X X . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . X X . . . . . . PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

BACKUP PREVENT PHASES MORE � BACKUP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 TIMING 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . C B . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . B . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . C B . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . X . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . X . . . . PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

SCREEN MM-1-1-2 (Scroll) SCREEN MM-1-1-4 (Scroll)

PHASE COMPATIBILITY MORE � 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 5 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . X X . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . X X . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . X X . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . X X . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . X X . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . X X . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X X 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X X 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . X X . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . X X . . PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

BACKUP PREVENT PHASES MORE � BACKUP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 TIMING 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . B . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . C B . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . X . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . X . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE



SIMULTANEOUS GAP PHASES MORE � PHASE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MUST 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 GAP 1 . . . . X X . . . . . . . . . . WITH 2 . . . . X X . . . . . . . . . PHASE 3 . . . . . . X X . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . X X . . . . . . . . 5 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . X X . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . X X . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . X X . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . X X . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . X X . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . X X . . . . . . PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE


SIMULTANEOUS GAP PHASES MORE � PHASE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MUST 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 X X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . X X . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . X X . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . X X . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . X X . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . X X . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . X X . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X X 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X X 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . X X . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . X X . . DISABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

SCREEN MM-1-2 SCREEN MM-1-4-1



SCREEN MM-1-3 (Scroll) SCREEN MM-1-4-2 (Scroll)



MMU PROGRAM MORE � CHANNEL CAN SERVE WITH 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CHANNEL 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . 11 . . . . . PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

COLOR CHECK DISABLE DISABLE ALL COLOR CHECKS........... NO Disable (X) / Enable (.) MMU CHANNEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 GRN/WLK.. . . . . . . . . YEL/PC... . . . . . . . . RED/DW... . . . . . . . . MMU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CHANNEL 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 GRN/WLK.. . . . . . . . . YEL/PC... . . . . . . . . RED/DW... . . . . . . . . PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

MMU PROGRAM MORE �� CHANNEL CAN SERVE WITH 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CHANNEL 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 6 . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . 11 . . . . . 12 . . . . 13 . . . 14 . . 15 . PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

MMU PROGRAM MORE � CHANNEL CAN SERVE WITH 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CHANNEL 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . 11 . . . . . PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

PORT 1 (SDLC) SUBMENU 1. SDLC OPTIONS 2. MMU PROGRAM 3. COLOR CHECK DISABLE PRESS 1..3 TO SELECT

LD SWITCH ASSIGN (MMU CHANNEL) MORE � PHASE DIMMING AUTO FLASH /OVLP TYPE R Y G P R Y TOGETHER 5 . . . . . + . . . 6 . . . . . + . . . 7 . . . . . + . . . 8 . . . . . + . . . 9 . . . . . + . . . 10 . . . . . + . . . 11 . . . . . + . . . 12 . . . . . + . . . 13 . . . . . + . . . 14 . . . . . + . . . 15 . . . . . + . . . 16 . . . . . + . . . PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

LD SWITCH ASSIGN (MMU CHANNEL) MORE � PHASE DIMMING AUTO FLASH /OVLP TYPE R Y G P R Y TOGETHER 1 1 V X . X + . . X 2 15 O X . X - . . . 3 1 P . . X + . . . 4 . . . . . + . . . 5 . . . . . + . . . 6 . . . . . + . . . 7 . . . . . + . . . 8 . . . . . + . . . 9 . . . . . + . . . 10 . . . . . + . . . 11 . . . . . + . . . 12 . . . . . + . . . PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

PHASES IN USE/EXCLUSIVE PEDESTRIAN PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 IN USE....... X X X X X X X X EXCLUSIVE PED . . . . . . . . 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASE 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 IN USE....... . . . . . . . . EXCLUSIVE PED . . . . . . . . PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE




SCREEN MM-1-5-2 (Scroll) SCREEN MM-1-5-4 (Scroll)

SCREEN MM-1-5-5 SCREEN MM-1-7

PORT 3B MORE � PROTOCOL........................ ECPIP ENABLE......................... NO DATA RATE (BPS)................ 1200 DATA, PARITY, STOP............. 8 Z 1 MODEM SETUP STRING............. NONE USER STRING. . TELEMETRY RESPONSE DELAY (in ms)... 0.0 DUPLEX – HALF OR FULL.............. FULL AB3418 / NTCIP GROUP ADDRESS....... 0 AB3418 / NTCIP SINGLE FLAG ENABLE.. NO RTS TO CTS DELAY (in ms)........... 0.0 RTS TURN OFF DELAY (in ms)......... 0.0 DROP-OUT TIME (in seconds)......... 10 EARLY RTS....................... NO PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

PORT 3B MORE � PROTOCOL....................... ECPIP ENABLE........................ NO DATA RATE (BPS)............... 1200 DATA, PARITY, STOP............ 8 Z 1 MODEM SETUP STRING............... NONE USER STRING. COMM PORT ADDRESS.................... 0 SYSTEM DETECTOR 9-16 ADDRESS......... 0 TELEMETRY RESPONSE DELAY (in ms).... 0.0 DUPLEX – HALF or FULL.............. FULL AB3418 / NTCIP GROUP ADDRESS.... 0 AB3418 / NTCIP SINGLE FLAG ENABLE.... NO RTS TO CTS DELAY (in ms)........... 0.0 RTS TURN OFF DELAY (in ms)......... 0.0 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

PORT 3A MORE � PROTOCOL....................... TERMINAL ENABLE......................... NO DATA RATE (BPS)................ 9600 DATA, PARITY, STOP............. 8 N 1 MODEM SETUP STRING............. NONE USER STRING. . TELEMETRY RESPONSE DELAY (in ms)... 0.0 DUPLEX – HALF OR FULL.............. HALF AB3418 / NTCIP GROUP ADDRESS....... 0 AB3418 / NTCIP SINGLE FLAG ENABLE.. NO RTS TO CTS DELAY (in ms)........... 0.0 RTS TURN OFF DELAY (in ms)......... 0.0 DROP OUT TIME (in seconds)......... 10 EARLY RTS....................... NO PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

PORT 3A MORE � PROTOCOL....................... TERMINAL ENABLE......................... NO DATA RATE (BPS)................ 9600 DATA, PARITY, STOP............. 8 N 1 MODEM SETUP STRING............. NONE USER STRING. COMM PORT ADDRESS.................... 0 SYSTEM DETECTOR 9-16 ADDRESS......... 0 TELEMETRY RESPONSE DELAY (in ms).... 0.0 DUPLEX – HALF or FULL.............. HALF AB3418 / NTCIP GROUP ADDRESS.... 0 AB3418 / NTCIP SINGLE FLAG ENABLE.... NO RTS TO CTS DELAY (in ms)........... 0.0 RTS TURN OFF DELAY (in ms)......... 0.0 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

PORT 2 (TERMINAL) MORE � PROTOCOL....................... TERMINAL ENABLE......................... NO DATA RATE (BPS)................ 9600 DATA, PARITY, STOP............. 8 N 1 MODEM SETUP STRING............. NONE USER STRING. . TELEMETRY RESPONSE DELAY (in ms).... 0.0 DUPLEX – HALF OR FULL.............. HALF AB3418 / NTCIP GROUP ADDRESS....... 0 AB3418 / NTCIP SINGLE FLAG ENABLE.. NO RTS TO CTS DELAY (in ms)........... 0.0 RTS TURN OFF DELAY (in ms)......... 0.0 DROP-OUT TIME (in seconds)......... 10 EARLY RTS....................... NO PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

PORT 2 (TERMINAL) MORE � PROTOCOL....................... TERMINAL ENABLE......................... NO DATA RATE (BPS)................ 9600 DATA, PARITY, STOP............. 8 N 1 MODEM SETUP STRING............. NONE USER STRING. COMM. PORT ADDRESS.................. 0 SYSTEM DETECTOR 9-16 ADDRESS......... 0 TELEMETRY RESPONSE DELAY (in ms).... 0.0 DUPLEX – HALF OR FULL.............. HALF AB3418 / NTCIP GROUP ADDRESS.... 0 AB3418 / NTCIP SINGLE FLAG ENABLE.... NO RTS TO CTS DELAY (in ms)........... 0.0 RTS TURN OFF DELAY (in ms)......... 0.0 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

GLOBAL PORT PARAMETERS NTCIP BACKUP TIME (in seconds).... 0 PORT 2 PRIORITY..................... 0 PORT 3A PRIORITY.................... 0 PORT 3B PRIORITY.................... 0 ETHERNET PRIORITY................... 0 PRESS 0..9 TO CHANGE

COMMUNICATION PORTS SUBMENU 1. GLOBAL PORT PARAMETERS 2. PORT 2 (TERMINAL) 3. PORT 3A (TELEMETRY) 4. PORT 3B 5. ETHERNET PORT PRESS 1..5 TO SELECT





SCREEN MM-1-8


ADMINISTRATION ENABLE CRC CHECK OF DATABASE........ NO CRC OF PGM DATA................... 5B0C REQUEST DOWNLOAD OF PROGRAM DATA.... NO SUPERVISORS ACCESS CODE REQUIRED TO ACCESS THIS SCREEN PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

DISPLAY/ACCESS SUBMENU 1. ADMINISTRATION 2. DISPLAY OPTIONS PRESS 1..2 TO SELECT

EVENT LOGGING MORE � LOW BATTERY. . . . . . . . . . . . . YES ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YES DATA CHANGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . YES CONTROLLER DOWNLOAD. . . . . . . . . YES ALARM 1........ NO ALARM 2........ NO ALARM 3........ NO ALARM 4........ NO ALARM 5........ NO ALARM 6........ NO ALARM 7........ NO ALARM 8........ NO ALARM 9........ NO ALARM 10....... NO ALARM 11....... NO ALARM 12....... NO ALARM 13....... NO ALARM 14....... NO ALARM 15....... NO ALARM 16....... NO PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

EVENT LOGGING MORE � CRITICAL RFE'S (MMU/TF). . . . . . . YES 3 CRITICAL RFE ERRORS IN 24 HOURS. . YES NON-CRITICAL RFE'S (DET/TEST). . . . YES DETECTOR ERRORS. . . . . . . . . . . YES COORDINATION ERRORS. . . . . . . . . YES MMU FLASH FAULTS . . . . . . . . . . YES LOCAL FLASH. . . . . . . . . . . . . YES PREEMPT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YES POWER ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . YES LOW BATTERY. . . . . . . . . . . . . YES ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YES DATA CHANGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . YES CONTROLLER DOWNLOAD. . . . . . . . . YES PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

ENABLE LOGGING SUBMENU 1 EVENT LOGGING PRESS 1..2 TO SELECT

ETHERNET PORT CONFIGURATION MAC ADDRESS.. 63:00:00:5a:00:00 IP ADDRESS...... . . . ADDRESS MASK.... . . . . FTP SERVER ADDR . . . DEFAULT GATEWAY IP ADD.. . . . PRESS 0..9 TO CHANGE


SCREEN MM-1-8-1

SCREEN MM-1-8-2

SCREEN MM-2

CONTROLLER SUBMENU 1.TIMING PLANS 5. START/FLASH 2.VEHICLE OVERLAP 6. OPTION DATA 3.PED OVERLAP 7. ACT PRE-TIMED 4 GUAR MIN TIME 8. RECALL DATA PRESS 1..7 TO SELECT

LOGIC # 98 ACTIVE: N IF GREEN ON PHASE 10 IS ON AND VEHICLE DET # 1 IS ON OR MINGRN TMR ON PHASE 10 < 15.7 THEN SET VEHICLE DET # 1 OFF SET GREEN OVERLAP B OFF SET YELLOW OVERLAP B ON ELSE DELAY FOR 15.7 SECONDS SET VEHICLE DET # 1 ON

LOGIC STATEMENT CONTROL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 LP 1-10 . . . . . . . . . . LP 11-20 . . . . . . . . . . LP 21-30 . . . . . . . . . . LP 31-40 . . . . . . . . . . LP 41-50 . . . . . . . . . . LP 51-60 . . . . . . . . . . LP 61-70 . . . . . . . . . . LP 71-80 . . . . . . . . . . LP 81-90 . . . . . . . . . . LP 91-100 . . . . . . . . . . D = DISABLED E = ENABLED “.” = ENABLED / DISABLED BY OTHER SOURCE PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

LOGIC PROCESSOR SUBMENU 1. LOGIC STATEMENT CONTROL 2. LOGIC STATEMENTS PRESS 1..2 TO SELECT


SCREEN MM-2-1 SCREEN MM-2-1 (Scroll)

SCREEN MM-2-1 (Scroll) SCREEN MM-2-1 (Scroll)

TIMING PLAN [1] PHASE DATA MORE ��

PHASE......1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8 MIN GRN 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 BK MGRN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DLY GRN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WALK 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WALK2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WLK MAX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PED CLR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PD CLR2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PC MAX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PED CO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 VEH EXT 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 VH EXT2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 MAX1 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 PRESS 0..9 TO CHANGE

TIMING PLAN [1] PHASE DATA MORE �� PHASE......9..10..11..12..13..14..15..16 MIN GRN 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 BK MGRN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DLY GRN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WALK 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WALK2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WLK MAX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PED CLR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PD CLR2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PC MAX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PED CO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 VEH EXT 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 VH EXT2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 MAX1 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35

PRESS 0..9 TO CHANGE

MAX2 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 MAX3 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 DYM MAX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Note: MAX 2, 3 & DYM MAX scrolls through the screen when the PHASE

MAX2 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 MAX3 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 DYM MAX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Note: MAX 2, 3 & DYM MAX scrolls through the screen when the PHASE DATA screen is at the bottom)

TIMING PLAN [1] PHASE DATA MORE � � PHASE......9..10..11..12..13..14..15..16 DYM STP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 YELLOW 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 RED CLR 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 RED MAX 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 RED RVT 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 ACT B4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SEC/ACT 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 MAX INT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TIME B4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CARS WT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 STPTRDC 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 TTREDUC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MIN GAP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PRESS 0..9 TO CHANGE

TIMING PLAN [1] PHASE DATA MORE �� PHASE......1...2...3...4...5...6...7...8. DYM STP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 YELLOW 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 RED CLR 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 RED MAX 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 RED RVT 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 ACT B4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SEC/ACT 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 MAX INT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TIME B4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CARS WT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 STPTDUC 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 TTREDUC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MIN GAP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PRESS 0..9 TO CHANGE


SCREEN MM-2-2 PROTECT PEDESTRIAN CALLS IN GREEN ONLY will be the standard operation of Release 1.

SCREEN MM-2-3 (Scroll Removed)


SCREEN MM-2-5

START/FLASH DATA POWER START 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 PHASE... . W . . . W . . . . . . . . . . OVERLAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PWR START RED.. 0s FLASH TIME.... 0s REMOTE FLASH 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 ENTRY... . X . . . X . . . . . . . . . . EXIT.... . X . . . X . . . . . . . . . . OVERLAP A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P EXIT.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXIT REM FL.... W MIN AUTO FLASH. 5 MINIMUM RECALL..NO CYCLE THRU PHASE. NO PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

GUARANTEED MINIMUM TIME DATA MORE � � PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MIN GRN. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WALK.... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PED CLR. 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 YELLOW.. 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 RED CLR. 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 3.0 OVERLAP A B C D E F G H OVLP GRN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PRESS 0..9 TO CHANGE

GUARANTEED MINIMUM TIME DATA MORE � PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 MIN GRN. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WALK.... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PED CLR. 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 YELLOW.. 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 RED CLR. 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 OVERLAP I J K L M N O P OVLP GRN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PRESS 0..9 TO CHANGE

PEDESTRIAN OVERLAPS MORE � OVERLAP INCLUDED PHASES: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 NUNBER: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TOGGLE “0” TO CHANGE

VEHICLE OVERLAP [ A] TYPE..... OTHER 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 INCLUDED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROTECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MODIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PED PRTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NOT OLP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAILING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEAD.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLSH GRN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRAILING GRN 0.0 YELLOW 0.0 RED 0.0 ADVANCE GREEN.. 0.0 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE


SCREEN MM-2-6


SCREEN MM-2-6-2

SCREEN MM-2-7 SCREEN MM-2-8

SCREEN MM-3 SCREEN MM-3-2 (Scroll)

PHASE DETECTOR OPTIONS PHASE DETECTOR OPTION PLAN NUMBER [ 1] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASE.. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 LOCK DET X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X . VE RCALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PD RCALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MX RCALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SF RCALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO REST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AI CALC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

ACTUATED PRE-TIMED MODE ENABLE PRE-TIMED OPERATION......... NO FREE INPUT DISABLED PRE-TIMED...... NO PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PRE-TIMED. . . . . . . . . PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 PRE-TIMED. . . . . . . . . PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

EXTENDED OPTIONS EXTENDED FEATURES [DEMO] LP FEATURE 1......................... ON LP FEATURE 2.........................OFF PRESS TOGGLE TO CHANGE

CONTROLLER OPTIONS MORE ��

PED CLEAR PROTECT................. OFF UNIT RED REVERT................... 2.0 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 GUAR PASSAGE.... . . . . . . . . NON-ACT I....... . . . . . . . . NON-ACT II...... . . . . . . . . DUAL ENTRY...... . . . . . . . . PED RESERVICE... . . . . . . . . REST IN WALK.... . . . . . . . . FLASHING WALK... . . . . . . . . PED CLR>YELLOW.. . . . . . . . . PED CLR>RED..... . . . . . . . . IGRN + VEH EXT.. . . . . . . . . PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

CONTROLLER OPTIONS MORE � PED CLEAR PROTECT................. OFF UNIT RED REVERT................... 2.0 PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 GUAR PASSAGE.... . . . . . . . . NON-ACT I....... . . . . . . . . NON-ACT II...... . . . . . . . . DUAL ENTRY...... . . . . . . . . PED RESERVICE... . . . . . . . . REST IN WALK.... . . . . . . . . FLASHING WALK... . . . . . . . . PED CLR>YELLOW.. . . . . . . . . PED CLR>RED..... . . . . . . . . IGRN + VEH EXT.. . . . . . . . . PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

OPTION DATA SUBMENU 1. CONTROLLER OPTIONS 2. EXTENDED OPTIONS




RING DISPLACEMENT... 0% 0% 0% (Note: RING DISPLACEMENT scrolls through the screen when the SPEC FUNC OUTPUTS are at the bottom)

COORDINATOR PATTERN [ 1} MORE � TS2 (PAT-OFF).. 1-2 STD (COS)...... 151 DIRECTED SPLIT PREFERENCE PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PREFERENCE 1.... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PREFERENCE 2.... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 PREFERENCE 1.... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PREFERENCE 2.... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SPECIAL FUNCTION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

SPLIT PATTERN [ 1] MORE v 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 COORD PH . X . . . X . . . . . . . . . . PHASE 1 2 3 4 SPLIT.... 20 30 20 30 MODE.... NONE NONE NONE NONE PHASE 5 6 7 8 SPLIT.... 20 30 20 30 MODE.... NONE NONE NONE NONE PHASE 9 10 11 12 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

SPLIT PATTERN [ 1] MORE � 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 COORD PH . X . . . X . . . . . . . . . . PHASE 9 10 11 12 SPLIT.... 0 0 0 0 MODE.... NONE NONE NONE NONE PHASE 13 14 15 16 SPLIT.... 0 0 0 0 MODE.... NONE NONE NONE NONE PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

COORDINATOR PATTERN [ 1} MORE � TS2 (PAT-OFF).. 1-2 STD (COS)...... 151 CYCLE.......... 80s SPLIT PATTERN... 20 OFFSET VAL..... 0s SEQUENCE....... 0 SPLITS IN.. SECONDS OFFSET IN..PERCENT XART PATTERN... 0 VEH PERM 1..... 0% VEH PERM 2..... 0% VEH PERM 2 DISP 0% ACTION PLAN.... 0 ACTUATED COORD... NO TIMING PLAN.... 0 ACT WALK REST.... NO PHASE RESRVCE.. NO 1 2 3 4 RING SPLIT EXT 0% 0% 0% 0% SPLIT DEMAND PATTERN 0 0 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

COORDINATOR OPTIONS MANUAL PATTERN.AUTO INTCONT SRC. NIC INTCONT FORMAT PTN TRANSITION.. SMOOTH ECPI COORD..... YES OFFSET REF.... LEAD DWELL/ADD TIME 0 DLY COORD WK-LZ. NO FORCE OFF.... FLOAT FO ADD INI GRN.. NO USE PED TIME... NO PED RECALL...... NO PED RESV........ NO ENABLE MAN SYNC. NO LOCAL ZERO OVRD. NO RE-SYNC COUNT.... 0 MAX SELECT. MAXINH MULTISYNC....... NO PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

COORDINATOR SUBMENU 1. OPTIONS 2. COORDINATOR PATTERN DATA 3. SPLIT PATTERN DATA 4. AUTO PERM MIN GREEN 5. SPLIT DEMAND PRESS 1..6 TO SELECT




SCREEN MM-4 SCREEN MM-4-2

SCREEN MM-4-1


LOW PRIORITY PREEMPTOR SELECTION FILTERED SOLID PULSING INPUT 1 ........... ..... 2 ........... ............ 3 PREEMPTION 3 PREEMPTION 7 4 PREEMPTION 4 PREEMPTION 8 5 PREEMPTION 5 PREEMPTION 9 6 PREEMPTION 6 PREEMPTION 10 7 ........... ............ 8 ........... ............ 9 ........... ............ 10 ........... ............ PRESS 0-9 TO SELECT

PREEMPTOR [ 1] MORE � SP FUNC. . . . . . . . . PMT TO COORD.... NO EXIT TIMING PLAN 0 LINKED PMT....... 0 ........PREEMPT ACTIVE OUTPUTS.......... PMT ACTIVE OUT.. NO PMT ACT DWELL...YES OTHER - PRI PMT.OFF NON-PRI PMT.....OFF OVERLAP A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P TRK CLR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWELL... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CYCLING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

PREEMPTOR [ 1] MORE �� DWELL FLASH.... NO FL EXIT COLOR.. YEL 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 TRK CLR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWLL PH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWLL PED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CYC PH.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CYC PED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXT PH.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXT CLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP FUNC. . . . . . . . . PMT TO COORD.... NO EXIT TIMING PLAN 0 LINKED PMT....... 0 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

PREEMPTOR [ 1] MORE � ACTIVE.......... NO NON-LOCK........ NO PMT OVERRIDE.... NO INTERLOCK ENABL. NO DELAY........ 0 INHIBIT......... 0 EXTEND INPUT.. 0.0 MAX PRESENCE.. 0 DURATION...... 0 TRK CLR RSRV.... NO PED DARK........ NO RESERVICE....... 0 AUTO FL PRI..... YES RED CLR > GREEN. NO TERM OVLP ASAP.. NO PC THROUGH YEL.. NO RING 1 2 3 4 FREE DURING PMT.... NO NO NO NO WK PC GRN YEL RED ENTRANCE TIMES... 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 TRACK CLEARANCE TIMES...... 0 0.0 0.0 MIN DWELL-CYC G / EXIT Y/R. 0 0.0 0.0 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

PREEMPT SUBMENU 1. PREEMPTOR 1-10 2. LOW PRIORITY PREEMPTOR SELECTION PRESS 1..2 TO SELECT

AUTO PERM MINIMUM GREEN (SECONDS) PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MIN GRN. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 MIN GRN. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PRESS 0..9 TO CHANGE

SPLIT DEMAND 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 DEMAND 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DEMAND 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DEMAND 1... 2 DETECTOR......... 0.. 0 CALL TIME (SEC).. 0.. 0 CYCLE COUNT...... 0.. 0 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE




SCREEN MM-5-2 (Scroll) SCREEN MM-5-4 (Scroll through LP 11-40)

ACTION PLAN ...[ 1] MORE � PATTERN.........AUTO SYS OVERRIDE.... NO VEH DETECTOR PLAN 1 DET LOG........NONE FLASH.......... NO RED REST....... NO VEH DET DIAG PLN 0 CONTROLLER SEQ... 0 PED DET DIAG PLN 0 TIMING PLAN ..... 0 DIMMING ENABLE.. NO 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 LP 41-50 . . . . . . . . . . LP 51-60 . . . . . . . . . . LP 61-70 . . . . . . . . . . LP 71-80 . . . . . . . . . . LP 81-90 . . . . . . . . . . LP91-100 . . . . . . . . . . PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

ACTION PLAN ...[ 1] MORE � PATTERN.........AUTO SYS OVERRIDE.... NO VEH DETECTOR PLAN 1 DET LOG........NONE FLASH.......... NO RED REST....... NO VEH DET DIAG PLN 0 CONTROLLER SEQ... 0 PED DET DIAG PLN 0 TIMING PLAN ..... 0 DIMMING ENABLE.. NO FUNCTION OR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 MAX 3... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CS INH.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OMIT.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPC FCT. . . . . . . . . (1-8) AUX FCT. . . . (1-3) LP 1-10 . . . . . . . . . . PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

ACTION PLAN ...[ 1] MORE � PATTERN.........AUTO SYS OVERRIDE.... NO VEH DETECTOR PLAN. 1 DET LOG........NONE FLASH.......... NO RED REST....... NO VEH DET DIAG PLN 0 CONTROLLER SEQ... 0 PED DET DIAG PLN 0 TIMING PLAN ..... 0 DIMMING ENABLE.. NO FUNCTION OR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 PED RCL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WALK 2.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VEX 2... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VEH RCL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAX RCL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAX 2... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

DAY PLAN MORE � DAY PLAN IN EFFECT [ 0] DAY PLAN........[ 1] EVENT ACTION PLAN START TIME 1 0 00:00 2 0 00:00 3 0 00:00 4 0 00:00 5 0 00:00 6 0 00:00 7 0 00:00 8 0 00:00 9 0 00:00 10 0 00:00 11 0 00:00 PRESS 0..9 TO CHANGE

SCHEDULE NUMBER [ 1] MORE � DAY PLAN NO ...... [ 1] JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN MONTH........ . . . . . . JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC . . . . . . DAY (DOW): SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT . . . . . . . 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 . . . . . . . . . . 31 . PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

SCHEDULE NUMBER [ 1] MORE � DAY PLAN NO ....[ 1] JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN MONTH........ . . . . . . JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC . . . . . . DAY (DOW): SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT . . . . . . . DAY(DOM): 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 . . . X . . . . . . 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 . . . . X . . . . . PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

CLOCK/CALENDAR DATA 01/01/00 SAT WEEK 1 00:00:01 MANUAL ACTION PLAN.................. 0 SYNC REFERENCE TIME .............. 00:00 SYNC REFERENCE........... REFERENCE TIME DAY LIGHT SAVINGS................... NO TIME RESET INPUT SET TIME...... 03:30:00 STANDARD TIME FROM GMT ............. -04 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

TIME BASE SUBMENU 1. CLOCK CALENDAR 2. SCHEDULE 3. DAY PLAN EVENT 4. ACTION PLAN 5. EXCEPTION DAYS PRESS 1..5 TO SELECT


SCREEN MM-5-5


EXCEPTION DAY PROGRAM MORE � EXCEPTION FLOAT/ MON/ DOW/ WOM/ DAY DAY FIXED MON DOM YEAR PLAN 26 FIXED 0 0 0 0 27 FIXED 0 0 0 0 28 FIXED 0 0 0 0 29 FIXED 0 0 0 0 30 FIXED 0 0 0 0 31 FIXED 0 0 0 0 32 FIXED 0 0 0 0 32 FIXED 0 0 0 0 34 FIXED 0 0 0 0 35 FIXED 0 0 0 0 36 FIXED 0 0 0 0 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

EXCEPTION DAY PROGRAM MORE � EXCEPTION FLOAT/ MON/ DOW/ WOM/ DAY DAY FIXED MON DOM YEAR PLAN 1 FIXED 0 0 0 0 2 FIXED 0 0 0 0 3 FIXED 0 0 0 0 4 FIXED 0 0 0 0 5 FIXED 0 0 0 0 6 FIXED 0 0 0 0 7 FIXED 0 0 0 0 8 FIXED 0 0 0 0 9 FIXED 0 0 0 0 10 FIXED 0 0 0 0 11 FIXED 0 0 0 0 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE




Screen MM-6-1 (Scroll through detector 14-51)

SCREEN MM-6-2


PED AND SYSTEM DETECTOR OPTIONS LOCAL ------PHASE PED DETECTOR----- PED DET 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NUMBER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PED DET 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 NUMBER 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 LOCAL ----LOCAL SYSTEM DETECTOR---- SYSTEM DET 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NUMBER 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SYSTEM DET 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 NUMBER 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PRESS 0..9 TO CHANGE


VEHICLE DETECTOR SETUP VEHICLE PLAN NUMBER [ 1] DET NUMBER.... [ 1] ASSIGNED PHASE.. 1 ADDED OPTION... NO SWITCH PHASE.... 0 CALL OPTION.... YES EXTEND TIME... 0.0 PASSAGE OPTION. YES DELAY TIME... 0.0 QUEUE OPTION... NO QUEUE LIMIT.... 0 NTCIP OCCUPANCY NO FAIL TIME...... 0 NTCIP VOLUME... NO FAIL CALL DELAY 0 ECPI LOG....... YES YELLOW LOCK.... NO RED LOCK....... NO 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASE.. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 CALLED.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

VEH DET TYPE / TS1 DET SELECT MORE � DET NUMBER DET TYPE TS1 DET 52 0 . 53 0 . 54 0 . 55 0 . 56 0 . 57 0 . 58 0 . 59 0 . 60 0 . 61 0 . 62 0 . 63 0 . 64 0 . PRESS 0..2 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

VEH DET TYPE / TS1 DET SELECT MORE � DET NUMBER DET TYPE TS1 DET 1 0 . 2 0 . 3 0 . 4 0 . 5 0 . 6 0 . 7 0 . 8 0 . 9 0 . 10 0 . 11 0 . 12 0 . 13 0 . PRESS 0..2 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

DETECTOR SUBMENU 1. VEH DET TYPE / TS1 DET SELECT 2. VEHICLE DETECTOR SETUP 3. RESERVED 4. PED AND SYSTEM DET ASSIGNMENTS 5. LOG INTERVALS / SPEED DETECTORS 6. VEHICLE DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS 7. PEDESTRIAN DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS PRESS KEYS 1..7 TO SELECT



SCREEN MM-6-6 (Scroll) SCREEN MM-6-7 (Scroll)

PED DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS MORE � PED DIAGNOSTIC PLAN NUMBER [1] DET COUNTS ACT PRES MULTIPLIER 5 0 0 0 1 6 0 0 0 1 7 0 0 0 1 8 0 0 0 1 9 0 0 0 1 10 0 0 0 1 11 0 0 0 1 12 0 0 0 1 13 0 0 0 1 14 0 0 0 1 15 0 0 0 1 16 0 0 0 1 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

PED DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS MORE � PED DIAGNOSTIC PLAN NUMBER [1] DET COUNTS ACT PRES MULTIPLIER 1 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 1 4 0 0 0 1 5 0 0 0 1 6 0 0 0 1 7 0 0 0 1 8 0 0 0 1 9 0 0 0 1 10 0 0 0 1 11 0 0 0 1 12 0 0 0 1 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

VEHICLE DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS MORE � VEH DIAGNOSTIC PLAN NUMBER [ 1] DET COUNTS ACT PRES MULTIPLIER 53 0 0 0 1 54 0 0 0 1 55 0 0 0 1 56 0 0 0 1 57 0 0 0 1 58 0 0 0 1 59 0 0 0 1 60 0 0 0 1 61 0 0 0 1 62 0 0 0 1 63 0 0 0 1 64 0 0 0 1 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

VEHICLE DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS MORE � VEH DIAGNOSTIC PLAN NUMBER [ 1] DET COUNTS ACT PRES MULTIPLIER 1 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 1 4 0 0 0 1 5 0 0 0 1 6 0 0 0 1 7 0 0 0 1 8 0 0 0 1 9 0 0 0 1 10 0 0 0 1 11 0 0 0 1 12 0 0 0 1 PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE

LOG - SPEED DETECTOR SETUP MORE �

NTCIP LOG PERIOD.................... 0 ECPI LOG PERIOD.....................TBAP LENGTH UNIT........................ INCH

SPEED DET 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 LOCAL DET....... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ONE/TWO DET..... 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 VEH LENGTH...... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TRAP LENGTH..... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ENABLE LOG...... . . . . . . . .

LOG - SPEED DETECTOR SETUP MORE ��

NTCIP LOG PERIOD.................... 0 ECPI LOG PERIOD.....................TBAP LENGTH UNIT........................ INCH SPEED DET 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 LOCAL DET....... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ONE/TWO DET..... 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 VEH LENGTH...... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TRAP LENGTH..... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ENABLE LOG...... . . . . . . . . PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE



SCREEN MM-7-1 SCREEN MM-7-2 (Use NEXT PAGE for Page 2)

(Scroll for More Page 2)

SCREEN MM-7-1 (Use NEXT PAGE for Page 2)




CONTROLLER STATUS: 3 OF 3� DENSITY TIMING RING [1] [2] [3] [4] TIME B4 REDUCE 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 CARS B4 REDUCE 0 0 0 0 ADDED INIT 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 GAP IN EFFECT 5.0 5.0 0.0 0.0 MAX IN EFFECT 35.0 35.0 0.0 0.0

SPLIT PATTERN [ 1] 3 OF 3 MORE � 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 COORD PH . X . . . X . . . . . . . . . . PHASE 1 2 3 4 SPLIT.... 20 30 20 30 MODE.... NONE NONE NONE NONE PHASE 5 6 7 8 SPLIT.... 20 30 20 30 MODE.... NONE NONE NONE NONE PHASE 9 10 11 12 SPLIT.... 0 0 0 0 MODE.... NONE NONE NONE NONE PHASE 13 14 15 16 SPLIT.... 0 0 0 0 MODE.... NONE NONE NONE NONE

CONTROLLER STATUS: 2 OF 3�� OVERLAP STATUS OVERLAP A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P COLOR R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R T/N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OL A (space for OL B (space for OL C interval OL D interval OL E and time) OL F and time) OL G OL H OL I OL J OL K OL L OL M OL N OL O OL P

COORD PATTERN [ 1} 2 OF 3 MORE � TS2 (PAT-OFF).. 1-2 STD (COS)...... 151 CYCLE.......... 80s SPLIT PATTERN... 1 OFFSET VAL..... 0s SEQUENCE....... 0 SPLITS IN.. SECONDS OFFSET IN..PERCENT XART PATTERN... 0 SEQ SELECT...COORD VEH PERM 1..... 0s VEH PERM 2..... 0s VEH PERM 2 DISP 0s ACTION PLAN.... 0 ACTUATED COORD... NO TIMING PLAN.... 0 ACT WALK REST.... NO PHASE RESRVCE.. NO 1 2 3 4 RING SPLIT EXT 0s 0s 0s 0s SPLIT DEMAND PATTERN 0 0 RING DISPLACEMENT... 0% 0% 0% DIRECTED SPLIT PREFERENCE PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PREFERENCE 1.... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PREFERENCE 2.... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 PREFERENCE 1.... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PREFERENCE 2.... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SPARE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OUTPUTS . . . . . . . .

CONTROLLER STATUS: 1 OF 3� 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T/N..... . T . . . T . . . . . . . T . . VEH..... . C R N X S . . . . . . . O I D PED..... . C R N 2 A . . . . . . . O I D R1/PH 2 R2/PH 6 R3/PH 12 R4/PH 16 GRN REST VEXT 25.5 RED REST YEL 25.5 MAX3 255 GAP OUT CMD SRC NIC COS 654 ACTION PLAN 100 SYS CYC 7s PTN 64 START TIME 11:11 LOC CYC 15s FLASH STOP TIME 23:59 TLM ADD 65535 OK PATTERN 64 PREEMPTOR 1 NEXT PLAN 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 C D - I R A . - - . 01/01/01 23:50:59

COORDINATOR STATUS: 1 OF 3 01/01/01 00:00:00 STATUS....... FREE PATTERN........ 254 COMMAND SOURCE. NIC COMMAND CYCLE.. 0s SYSTEM CYCLE.. 0s LOCAL CYCLE.... 0S LOCAL OFFSET... 0% CORRECTION. ACTUAL OFFSET.. 0% SPLIT DEMAND... / 0 RING 1 2 3 4 HOLD APPLIED TO PHASE. . . . . FORCE OFF PHASE....... . . . . VEHICLE PERMISSIVE.... . . . . PEDESTRIAN PERMISSIVE. . . . . SPLIT COUNT DOWN...... 0s 0s 0s 0s SPLIT EXTENSION TIME.. 0s 0s 0s 0s OFFSET FROM RING 1.... 0s 0s 0s RING IN GREEN BAND.... . . . .

STATUS DISPLAY SUBMENU 1. CONTROLLER 6. DETECTORS 2. COORDINATOR 7. FLASH/MMU STATUS 3. PREEMPTOR 8. INPUTS / OUTPUTS 4. TIME BASE 9. MMU COMPATIBILITY 5. COMMUNICATIONS PRESS 1...9 TO SELECT


SCREEN MM-7-3 (Data Field Labels Added)

SCREEN MM-7-3 (Use NEXT PAGE for Page3)

(Scroll for More Page 3) PREEMPTOR STATUS: 1 OF 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T/N: T T T VEH: PED: V SIG R R R R R R R R - - - - R R R R P SIG R W R R R R R R - - - - R R R R RING 1 G REST XX.X RING 2 GRN REST XX.X RING 3 - RING 4 GRN REST XX.X RING 1 HOLD FLASH RING 2 DURATION FLASH XXX RING 3 - RING 4 HOLD PED CLEAR XXX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1O . . - . . . . . . .

SCREEN MM-7-3

(Use NEXT PAGE for Page 2)

PREEMPTOR [ 1] 3 OF 3 MORE � ACTIVE.......... NO NON-LOCK........ NO PMT OVERRIDE.... NO INTERLOCK ENABL. NO DELAY........ 0 INHIBIT......... 0 EXTEND INPUT.. 0.0 MAX PRESENCE.. 0 DURATION...... 0 TRK CLR RSRV.... NO PED DARK........ NO RESERVICE....... 0 AUTO FL PRI..... YES RED CLR > GREEN. NO TERM OVLP ASAP.. NO PC THROUGH YEL.. NO RING 1 2 3 4 FREE DURING PMT.... NO NO NO NO WK PC GRN YEL RED ENTRANCE TIME.... 0 0 0 0.0 0.0 TRK CRL.................... 0 0.0 0.0 MIN DWELL-CYC G / EXIT Y/R. 0 0.0 0.0 PREEMPTOR [ 1] MORE � � � DWELL FLASH.... NO FL EXIT COLOR.. YEL 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 TRK CLR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWLL PH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWLL PED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CYC PH.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CYC PED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXT PH.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXT CLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SP FUNC. . . . . . . . . PMT TO COORD.... NO EXIT TIMING PLAN 0 LINKED PMT....... 0 ........PREEMPT ACTIVE OUTPUTS.......... PMT ACTIVE OUT.. ON PMT ACT DWELL...YES OTHER - PRI PMT.OFF NON-PRI PMT.....OFF OVERLAP A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P TRK CLR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWELL... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CYCLING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PREEMPTOR OVERLAP STATUS: 2 OF 3 OVERLAP A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P COLOR... G Y R - - - - - - - - - - - - R T/N..... T . . - - - - - - - - - - - - N OMITTED. . X . - - - - - - - - - - - - X OL A R (space for OL B R (space for OL C R interval OL D interval OL E OL F OL G OL H OL I OL J OL K OL L OL M OL N OL O OL P R



SCREEN MM-7-4 (Data Field Labels Added)

TIME BASE STATUS 1 OF 2 00:00:00 01/01/2005 THU DAY PLAN..... 0 DAY PLAN EVENT. 0 START TIME..00:00 ACTION PLAN.... 0 SOURCE... MANUAL NEXT ACT PLAN.. 0 HIGHEST PLAN... 0

ACTION PLAN ...[ 1] 2 OF 2 MORE � PATTERN.........AUTO SYS OVERRIDE.... NO VEH DETECTOR PLAN 1 DET LOG........NONE FLASH.......... NO RED REST....... NO VEH DET DIAG PLN 0 CONTROLLER SEQ... 0 PED DET DIAG PLN 0 TIMING PLAN ..... 0 DIMMING ENABLE.. NO 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 PED RCL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WALK 2.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VEX 2... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VEH RCL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAX RCL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAX 2... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAX 3... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CS INH.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OMIT.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPC FCT. . . . . . . . . ( 1-8 ) AUX FCT. . . . (1-3) LP 1-10 . . . . . . . . . . LP 11-20 . . . . . . . . . . LP 21-30 . . . . . . . . . . LP 31-40 . . . . . . . . . . LP 41-50 . . . . . . . . . . LP 51-60 . . . . . . . . . . LP 61-70 . . . . . . . . . . LP 71-80 . . . . . . . . . . LP 81-90 . . . . . . . . . . LP91-100 . . . . . . . . . .

Call / Status Indicators

Preemption Interval

Ring/Phase Interval and Timing

Phase Color

Phase Indicators

Overlap Interval and Timing

Overlap Color - Indicators

Time-Day-Date

Day-Action Plan Pattern Start Time

Day OF WEEK


SCREEN MM-7-5 SCREEN MM-7-5-2 (ECPIP)

(Data Field Labels Added)

SCREEN MM-7-5-1

COMM PORT 2 STATUS ADDRESS.... . . [ 0] INTERCONNECT FORMAT ........... ECPIP TRANSMIT......... X VALID DATA....... X DATA ERROR....... X CLEAR TO SEND.... X CARRIER DETECT... X DATA SET READY... X DROP OUT TIME. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TELEMETRY MODE . . . . . . . SPECIAL FUNCTIONS . . . . SYSTEM DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 . . . . . . . . SYSTEM DETECTOR 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 . . . . . . . .

SCREEN MM-7-5-2 (Terminal)

SCREEN MM-7-5-1 (Page 2, scroll removed)

SCREEN MM-7-5-2 (NTCIP/AB3418)

MMU STATUS: MMU Disabled 2 OF 2 MORE � ----------- MMU RF129 Readback---------- FIELD CHK FLT... . EXT WD FLT.... . DUAL IND FLT.... . Y+R CLR FAIL.. . BND DET FLT..... . ----------- MMU RF131 Readback---------- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CHANNEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 MIN CLR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIN FLASH TIME............ 0seconds +24 VOLT LATCH............ . CVM/FAULT NON-LATCH....... . ----------- MMU RF131 Readback---------- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CHANNEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 RED..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YELLOW.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GREEN... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FAIL-OUT RLY. . CONFLICT....... . FAIL-IMM RES. . RED FAILURE.... . +24 V MON I.. . MIN CLR FAILURE . +24 V MON II. . PORT 1 TIMEOUT. . +24 V MON INH . SPARE.......... . RESET........ . SPARE.......... .

COMM PORT 2 STATUS 1 OF 2 ADDRESS........[ 0] INTERCONNECT FORMAT ........... NTCIP TRANSMIT......... . VALID DATA....... . DATA ERROR....... . CLEAR TO SEND.... . CARRIER DETECT... . REQUEST TO SEND.. . DROP OUT TIME. 10 LAST VALID CMD. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS...... . . . . . . . . RECEIVE COUNT O TRANSMIT COUNT O

COMM PORT 2 STATUS INTERCONNECT FORMAT ............TERMINAL TRANSMIT......... . VALID DATA....... . DATA ERROR....... X CLEAR TO SEND.... . CARRIER DETECT... . REQUEST TO SEND.. . LAST VALID CMD. 0

SDLC RESPONSE 1 OF 2 MMU 128 DISABLED DET 148 DISABLED 129 DISABLED 149 DISABLED 131 DISABLED 150 DISABLED 151 DISABLED TF 138 DISABLED 149 DISABLED 139 DISABLED 149 DISABLED 140 DISABLED 149 DISABLED 141 DISABLED 149 DISABLED TEST 158 0 COLUM FOLLOWING RESPONSE FRAME NUMBER INDICATED NUMBER OF ERRORS IN LAST 10 TRANSMISSIONS.

COMMUNICATIONS SUBMENU 1. PORT 1 (SDLC) 2. PORT 2 3. PORT 3A 4. PORT 3B 5. ETHERNET 6. NTCIP PRESS 1..6 TO SELECT

Address

Port Activity


System Detectors

Format

Port Timing


SCREEN MM-7-5-3 (ECPIP) (Data Field Labels Added)

SCREEN MM-7-5-4 (ECPIP) (Data Field Labels Added)

COMM PORT 3A STATUS ADDRESS........ [ ] INTERCONNECT FORMAT ........... ECPIP TRANSMIT......... X VALID DATA....... X DATA ERROR....... X CLEAR TO SEND.... X CARRIER DETECT... X DATA SET READY... X DROP OUT TIME. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TELEMETRY MODE . . . . . . . SPECIAL FUNCTIONS . . . . SYSTEM DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 . . . . . . . . SYSTEM DETECTOR 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

. . . . . . . .

COMM PORT 3B STATUS ADDRESS.........[ 0] INTERCONNECT FORMAT ........... ECPIP TRANSMIT......... X VALID DATA....... X DATA ERROR....... X CLEAR TO SEND.... X CARRIER DETECT... X DATA SET READY... X DROP OUT TIME. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TELEMETRY MODE . . . . . . . SPECIAL FUNCTIONS . . . . SYSTEM DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 . . . . . . . . SYSTEM DETECTOR 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 . . . . . . . .

SCREEN MM-7-5-3 (Terminal) SCREEN MM-7-5-4 (NTCIP/AB3418)

SCREEN MM-7-5-3 (NTCIP/AB3418) SCREEN MM-7-5-5

SCREEN MM-7-5-6

NTCIP STATUS SNMP RECEIVE COUNT : 0 SNMP TRANSMIT COUNT: 0 STMP RECEIVE COUNT : 0 STMP TRANSMIT COUNT: 0

ETHERNET STATUS LINK SPEED : 0 TRANSMIT COUNT: 0 RECEIVE COUNT : 0 TX ERROR COUNT: 0 RX ERROR COUNT: 0

COMM PORT 3A STATUS 1 OF 2 ADDRESS........[ 0] INTERCONNECT FORMAT ........... NTCIP TRANSMIT......... . VALID DATA....... . DATA ERROR....... . CLEAR TO SEND.... . CARRIER DETECT... . REQUEST TO SEND.. . DROP OUT TIME. 10 LAST VALID CMD. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS...... . . . . . . . . RECEIVE COUNT O TRANSMIT COUNT O

COMM PORT 3B STATUS 1 OF 2 ADDRESS........[ 0] INTERCONNECT FORMAT ........... NTCIP TRANSMIT......... . VALID DATA....... DATA ERROR....... . CLEAR TO SEND... NO CARRIER DETECT... . REQUEST TO SEND. NO DROP OUT TIME. 10 LAST VALID CMD. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS...... . . . . . . . . RECEIVE COUNT O TRANSMIT COUNT O

COMM PORT 3A STATUS INTERCONNECT FORMAT............ TERMINAL TRANSMIT........ . VALID DATA....... . DATA ERROR...... X CLEAR TO SEND.... . CARRIER DETECT... . REQUEST TO SEND.. . LAST VALID CMD. 0 NEXT PAGE TO VIEW PORT 3A PROGRAMMED DATA

Address

Port Activity


System Detectors

Format

Port Timing

Port Activity


System Detectors

Address / Format

Port Timing


SCREEN MM-7-6 (Scroll removed) SCREEN MM-7-8

SCREEN MM-7-8-1

SCREEN MM-7-7

SCREEN MM-7-8-1


The list below shows the different types of FLASH STATUS messages that appear on screen:

SCREEN MM-7-8-1


“AUTOMATIC FLASH” . AUTOMATIC FLASH COMMAND INPUT . PREEMPTOR COMMANDED FLASH . COORDINATOR PATTERN FLASH . TIME BASE COMMANDED FLASH . RING 1 . RING 2 . RING 3 . RING 4 “POWER START FLASH” . TIMING POWER-ON FLASH . EXTERNAL START . PREEMPTOR CALL INPUT . PREEMPTOR CALL INPUT FROM KEYBOARD “EXTERNAL START DURING PREEMPT” . PREEMPT CALL INPUT . PREEMPT CALL INPUT FROM KEYBOARD

CONNECTOR [E] MORE �� 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 14 15 16 17 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 20 21 . . .

CONNECTOR [C] 2 OF 3� N P R S T U V W X Y Z a b . . . . . . . . . . . . . k m n p q r s t u v EE . . . . . . . . . . . CONNECTOR [D] 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 16 17 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 20 25 26 30 31 35 36 37 38 38 40 47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 50 53 55 56 57 58 60 61 . . . . . . . . .

FLASH STATUS: NO FLASH ACTIVE

INPUT STATUS 1 OF 3�� CONNECTOR [A] K L M N P R S T f g h i j . . . . . . . . . . . . . k l m n q v w x y z AA BB EE . . . . . . . . . . . . . FF GG HH . . . CONNECTOR [B] B L M N P R S T U V W X g . . . . . . . . . . . . . h i j k m n v x y z . . . . . . . . . .

INPUT / OUTPUT SUBMENU 1. CONNECTOR A-E INPUTS 2. CONNECTOR A-E OUTPUTS 3. LOGIC PROCESSOR PRESS 1...3 TO SELECT

DETECTOR STATUS: MORE � DETECTOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 F D E S X - . . DETECTOR 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 . . . . . . . . DETECTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 . . . . . . . . DETECTOR 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 . . . . . . . . DETECTOR 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 - - - - - - - - DETECTOR 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 - - - - - - - - DETECTOR 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 - - - - - - - - DETECTOR 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 - - - - - - - -



SCREEN MM-7-8-2

(Use NEXT PAGE for Page 2) SCREEN MM-7-9

SCREEN MM-7-8-2 (Use NEXT PAGE for Page 3)

COMPATIBILITY STATUS INTERNAL MMU 1-9 ... 1-2 00000000 00000000 2-3 ... 1-10 00000000 00000000 2-11 ... 2-4 00000000 00000000 3-6 ... 2-12 00000000 00000000 3-14 ... 3-7 00000000 00000000 4-10 ... 3-15 00000000 00000000 5-7 ... 4-11 00000000 00000000 5-15 ... 5-8 00000000 00000000 6-13 ... 5-16 00000000 00000000 7-12 ... 6-14 00000000 00000000 8-12 ... 7-13 00000000 00000000 9-13 ... 8-13 00000000 00000000 10-15 ... 9-12 00000000 00000000 12-14 ... 10-16 00000000 00000000 15-16 ... 12-15 00000000 00000000

LOGIC # 98 ACTIVE: Y RESULT: FALSE IF GREEN ON PHASE 10 IS ON F AND VEHICLE DET # 1 IS ON F OR MINGRN TMR ON PHASE 10 < 15.7 THEN SET VEHICLE DET # 1 OFF SET GREEN OVERLAP B OFF SET YELLOW OVERLAP B ON ELSE DELAY FOR 15.7 SECONDS SET VEHICLE DET # 1 ON

CONNECTOR [E] 3 OF 3 � 9 10 22 23 . . . .

CONNECTOR [C] 2 OF 3� A B C D E F G H J K L M N . . . . . . . . . . . . . P c d e f g h i j k k w x . . . . . . . . . . . . . y z AA BB CC DD FF GG HH JJ KK LL MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . NN PP . . CONNECTOR [D] 1 2 5 8 11 15 21 22 23 24 27 28 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 33 34 41 42 43 44 45 46 48 51 52 53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 59

OUTPUT STATUS 1 OF 3�� CONNECTOR [A] A C D E F G H J W X Y Z a . . . . . . . . . . . . . b c d e r s t u CC DD . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONNECTOR [B] A C D E F G H J K Y Z a b . . . . . . . . . . . . . c d e f p q r s t u w AA BB . . . . . . . . . . . . . CC DD EE FF GG HH . . . . . .






DISPLAY SUBMENU 1. CONTROLLER EVENTS 2. DETECTOR EVENTS 3. DETECTOR ACTIVITY 4. MMU EVENTS PRESS 1...4 TO SELECT

LOG BUFFERS SUBMENU 1. DISPLAY 2. PRINT 3. CLEAR PRESS 1...3 TO SELECT

**************************************** * ECONOLITE CONTROL PRODUCTS INC. * * * * ASC/3-2100 * * Copyright (C) 2004-2005 * * * * Solutions that Move the World * * * * * * STANDARD SOFTWARE...........V2.00.00 * * * * * * EXTENDED FEATURES...............DEMO * * STANDARD CONFIGURATION.........N3000 * **************************************** PRESS 0...9 TO CHANGE

TRANSFER UTILITY PORT................. 2 DIRECTION.......TRANSMIT DATABASE............. . TOGGLE TO SELECT AND THEN PRESS ENTER TO TRANSFER

PRINT PRINT TO PORT... 2 SELECT ALL..... . CONFIGURATION... . DETECTOR....... . CONTROLLER...... . TIME BASE...... . COORDINATOR..... . LOGIC PROCESSOR. . PREEMPTOR....... . TOGGLE TO SELECT AND THEN PRESS ENTER TO BEGIN PRINTING


COPY UTILITY FROM > TO PHASE:TIMING.... . > PHASE:TIMING.... . TIMING PLAN..... . > TIMING PLAN..... . PH DET OPT PLAN. . > PH DET OPT PLAN. . DETECTOR PLAN.. . > DETECTOR PLAN... . COORD PATTERN.. . > COORD PATTERN... . SEQUENCE....... . > SEQUENCE....... . DATA KEY....... . > CONTROLLER DATA . CONTROLLER DATA . > DATA KEY....... . BACKUP DATA.... . > CONTROLLER DATA . TOGGLE TO SELECT ONE FROM AND TO THEN PRESS ENTER

UTILITIES SUBMENU 1. COPY 5. SIGN ON 2. RESERVED 6. LOG BUFFERS 3. PRINT 7. SOFTWARE MODULES 4. TRANSFER PRESS 1..7 TO SELECT


SCREEN MM-8-6-2 SCREEN MM-8-7

SCREEN MM-8-6-3 SCREEN MM-9

DIAGNOSTICS INFORMATION HARDWARE DIAGNOSTICS ARE PERFORMED WHILE THE CONTROLLER IS NOT OPERATIONAL. REFER TO APPENDIX F IN THE PROGRAMMING MANUAL FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON LOADING THE DIAGNOSTIC FILE AND ITS OPERATION.

SOFTWARE MODULES NAME PART NUMBER VERSION BOOT 111.222.3333 V1.01.01 APPLICATION 111.222.3333 V1.01.01 CONFIGURATION 111.222.3333 N3000 HELP 111.222.3333 V1.01.01 DEFINITIONS 111.222.3333 V1.01.01 TEXT 111.222.3333 V1.01.01

CLEAR SUBMENU 1. CONTROLLER EVENTS 2. DETECTOR EVENTS 3. DETECTOR ACTIVITY 4. MMU EVENTS 5. ALL LOGS PRESS 1...5 TO SELECT

PRINT LOG BUFFERS PRINT TO PORT............... 2 NUMBER OF DAYS............ 0 CONTROLLER EVENTS.......... . DETECTOR EVENTS............ . DETECTOR ACTIVITY.......... . MMU EVENTS................. . SELECT ALL................. X PRESS 0...9 OR TOGGLE TO SELECT THEN ENTER TO PRINT


�� ##��$$��

��

��

PROGRAM REFERENCE CARD INTERSECTION______ECONOLITE____Standard Default Database____________________ CONTROLLER NUMBER___________ ENTERED BY:________________________ DATE_______________ BOOT: _______________ MAIN: _______________ HELP: ______________DATA BASE___________ CONFIGURATION SUBMENU

MM-1-1-1. PHASE RING ASSIGNMENT

SEQUENCE 1 RING 1

1

2

3

4

9

10

13

14

RING 2

5

6

7

8

11

12

15

16

SEQUENCE 2 RING 1

2

1

3

4

10

9

13

14

RING 2

5

6

7

8

11

12

15

16

SEQUENCE 3 RING 1

1

2

4

3

9

10

14

13

RING 2

5

6

7

8

11

12

15

16

SEQUENCE 4 RING 1

2

1

4

3

10

9

14

13

RING 2

5

6

7

8

11

12

15

16

SEQUENCE 5 RING 1

1

2

3

4

9

10

13

14

RING 2

6

5

7

8

12

11

15

16

SEQUENCE 6 RING 1

2

1

3

4

10

9

13

14

RING 2

6

5

7

8

12

11

15

16

SEQUENCE 7 RING 1

1

2

4

3

9

10

14

13

RING 2

6

5

7

8

12

11

15

16

SEQUENCE 8 RING 1

2

1

4

3

10

9

14

13

RING 2

6

5

7

8

12

11

15

16

SEQUENCE 9 RING 1

1

2

3

4

9

10

13

14

RING 2

5

6

8

7

11

12

16

15

SEQUENCE 10 RING 1

2

1

3

4

10

9

13

14

RING 2

5

6

8

7

11

12

16

15

SEQUENCE 11 RING 1

1

2

4

3

9

10

13

14

RING 2

5

6

8

7

11

12

16

15

SEQUENCE 12 RING 1

2

1

4

3

10

9

13

14

RING 2

5

6

8

7

11

12

16

15

SEQUENCE 13 RING 1

1

2

3

4

9

10

13

14

RING 2

6

5

8

7

12

11

16

15

SEQUENCE 14 RING 1

2

1

3

4

10

9

13

14

RING 2

6

5

8

7

12

11

16

15

SEQUENCE 15 RING 1

1

2

4

3

9

10

14

13

RING 2

6

5

8

7

12

11

16

15

SEQUENCE 16 RING 1

2

1

4

3

10

9

14

13

RING 2

6

5

8

7

12

11

16

15


1-2. PHASES IN USE / EXCLUSIVE PED

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

PHASE IN USE X X X X X X X X

EXCLUSIVE PED

1-1-2. PHASE COMPATIBILITY

PHASE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

1

X X

2

X X

3

X X

4

X X

5

X

X

6

X

X

7

X X

8

X X

9

X X

10

X X

11

X X

12

X X

13

X X

14

X X

15

X X

16

X X


1-3. PHASE TO LOAD SWITCH (MMU) ASSIGNMENT

1-6-1. ENABLE EVENT LOGS

CRITICAL RFE'S (MMU/TF)

X


X

NON-CRITICAL RFE'S (DET/TEST)

X

DETECTOR ERRORS

X

COORDINATION ERRORS

X

MMU FLASH FAULTS

X

LOCAL FLASH FAULTS

X

PREEMPT

X

POWER ON/OFF

X

LOW BATTERY

X

ACCESS

X

DATA CHANGE

X

CONTROLLER DOWNLOAD

X

LD SWITCH ASSIGN (MMU CHANNEL) PHASE DIMMING AUTO FLASH /OVLP TYPE R Y G D R Y TOGETHER 1 1 V . . . . X . . 2 2 V . . . . X . X 3 3 V . . . . X . . 4 4 V . . . . X . X 5 5 V . . . . X . . 6 6 V . . . . X . X 7 7 V . . . . X . . 8 8 V . . . . X . X 9 1 P . . . . . . . 10 2 P . . . . . . . 11 3 P . . . . . . . 12 4 P . . . . . . . 13 2 O . . . . X . . 14 4 O . . . . X . X 15 6 O . . . . X . . 16 8 O . . . . X . X PRESS 0..9 OR TOGGLE TO CHANGE


CONTROLLER SUBMENU 2-1. CONTROLLER TIMING DATA PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

MINIMUM GREEN 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

BICYCLE MINIMUM GREEN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

CONDITIONAL SERVICE MINIMUM GREEN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

DELAYED GREEN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

WALK 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 10

WALK 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

WALK MAX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

PEDESTRIAN CLEARANCE 0 16 0 16 0 16 0 16 0 16 0 16 0 16 0 16

PEDESTRIAN CLEARANCE 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

PEDESTRIAN CLEARANCE MAX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

PEDESTRIAN CARRY OVER 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

VEHICLE EXTENSION 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0

VEHICLE EXTENSION 2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

MAX1 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35

MAX2 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40

MAX3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

DYNAMIC MAX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

DYNAMIC MAX STEP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

YELLOW CHANGE 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0

RED CLRANCE 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

RED MAX 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

RED REVERT 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0

ACTUATIONS BEFORE GAP REDUCTION 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

SECONDS PER ACTIONS ADDED TO INITIAL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

MAXIMUM ADDED INITIAL GREEN 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30

TIME BEFORE GAP REDUCTION 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

CARS WAITING BEFORE GAP REDUCTION 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

TIME TO REDUCE TO MINIMUM GAP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

MININIMUM GAP 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

2-5 START / FLASH DATA POWER START

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

PHASE X X OVERLAP X X X X POWER START RED FLASH TIME

REMOTE (AUTOMATIC) FLASH

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

ENTRY X X EXIT X X

OVERLAP A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P

EXIT X X X X

EXIT REM FL W MINIMUM AUTOMATIC FLASH 8 MINIMUM RECALL NO CYCLE THROUGH PHASES NO


MM-2-6-1 CONTROLLER OPTIONS

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

GUARANTEED PASSAGE NON-ACT I X X NON ACT II X X DUAL ENTRY X X X X X X

MM-2-4 GUARANTEED MINIMUM TIMES

PHASE 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

MINIMUM GREEN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 WALK 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PEDESTRIAN CLEARANCE 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 YELLOW CHANGE 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 RED CLEARANCE

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

0.0

OVERLAP A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P MINIMUM GREEN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


COORDINATOR SUBMENU

3-1 COORDINATOR OPTIONS MANUAL PATTERN

INTCONT SRC NIC INTERCONNECT FORMAT STD TRANSITION SMOOTH ECPI COORD YES OFFSET REF LEAD DWELL/ADD TIME 0 DLY COORD WK-LZ NO FORCE OFF FLOAT FO ADD INI GRN NO USE PED TIME YES PED RECALL NO PED RESV NO ENABLE MAN SYNC NO LOCAL ZERO OVRD NO RE-SYNC COUNT 0 MAX SELECT MAXINH

MULTISYNC NO

PREEMPTOR SUBMENU

MM-4-2 LOW PRIORITY PREEMPTOR SELECTION FILTERED INPUT

SOLID PULSING

1 2 3 PREEMPTOR 3 PREEMPTOR 7 4 PREEMPTOR 4 PREEMPTOR 8 5 PREEMPTOR 5 PREEMPTOR 9 6 PREEMPTOR 6 PREEMPTOR 10 7 8 9 10

MM-4-1 (For Premptors 1-10) ACTIVE NO NON-LOCK NO PMT OVERRIDE NO INTERLOCK ENABL NO DELAY 0 INHIBIT 0 EXTEND INPUT 0.0 MAX PRESENCE 0 DURATION 0 TRK CLR RSRV NO PED DARK NO RESERVICE 0 AUTO FL PRI YES YEL-RED > GREEN NO TERM OVLP ASAP NO PC THROUGH YEL NO

RING 1 2 3 4

FREE DURING PMT NO NO NO NO

WALK PED CLR GREEN YELLOW RED

ENTER 0 255 255 25.5 25.5

TRK CRL 255 25.5 25.5 IN DWELL-CYC G / EXIT Y/R 0 25.5 25.5


DETECTORS��

6-2 VEHICLE DETECTOR SETUP VEHICLE PLAN NUMBER 1 DETECTOR NUMBER 1 ASSIGNED PHASE 1 ADDED INITIAL OPTION SWITCH PHASE CALL DETECTOR OPTION YES EXTEND TIME PASSAGE DETECTOR OPTION YES VEHICLE PLAN NUMBER 1 DETECTOR NUMBER 2 ASSIGNED PHASE 2 ADDED INITIAL OPTION SWITCH PHASE CALL DETECTOR OPTION YES EXTEND TIME PASSAGE DETECTOR OPTION YES VEHICLE PLAN NUMBER 1 DETECTOR NUMBER 3 ASSIGNED PHASE 3 ADDED INITIAL OPTION SWITCH PHASE CALL DETECTOR OPTION YES EXTEND TIME PASSAGE DETECTOR OPTION YES VEHICLE PLAN NUMBER 1 DETECTOR NUMBER 4 ASSIGNED PHASE 4 ADDED INITIAL OPTION SWITCH PHASE CALL DETECTOR OPTION YES EXTEND TIME PASSAGE DETECTOR OPTION YES VEHICLE PLAN NUMBER 1 DETECTOR NUMBER 5 ASSIGNED PHASE 5 ADDED INITIAL OPTION SWITCH PHASE CALL DETECTOR OPTION YES EXTEND TIME PASSAGE DETECTOR OPTION YES VEHICLE PLAN NUMBER 1 DETECTOR NUMBER 6 ASSIGNED PHASE 6 ADDED INITIAL OPTION SWITCH PHASE CALL DETECTOR OPTION YES EXTEND TIME PASSAGE DETECTOR OPTION YES VEHICLE PLAN NUMBER 1 DETECTOR NUMBER 7 ASSIGNED PHASE 7 ADDED INITIAL OPTION SWITCH PHASE CALL DETECTOR OPTION YES EXTEND TIME PASSAGE DETECTOR OPTION YES VEHICLE PLAN NUMBER 1 DETECTOR NUMBER 8 ASSIGNED PHASE 8 ADDED INITIAL OPTION SWITCH PHASE CALL DETECTOR OPTION YES EXTEND TIME PASSAGE DETECTOR OPTION YES VEHICLE PLAN NUMBER 1 DETECTOR NUMBER 9 ASSIGNED PHASE 9 ADDED INITIAL OPTION SWITCH PHASE CALL DETECTOR OPTION YES EXTEND TIME PASSAGE DETECTOR OPTION YES VEHICLE PLAN NUMBER 1 DETECTOR NUMBER 10 ASSIGNED PHASE 10 ADDED INITIAL OPTION SWITCH PHASE CALL DETECTOR OPTION YES EXTEND TIME PASSAGE DETECTOR OPTION YES

VEHICLE PLAN NUMBER 1 DETECTOR NUMBER 11 ASSIGNED PHASE 11 ADDED INITIAL OPTION SWITCH PHASE CALL DETECTOR OPTION YES EXTEND TIME PASSAGE DETECTOR OPTION YES VEHICLE PLAN NUMBER 1 DETECTOR NUMBER 12 ASSIGNED PHASE 12 ADDED INITIAL OPTION SWITCH PHASE CALL DETECTOR OPTION YES EXTEND TIME PASSAGE DETECTOR OPTION YES VEHICLE PLAN NUMBER 1 DETECTOR NUMBER 13 ASSIGNED PHASE 13 ADDED INITIAL OPTION SWITCH PHASE CALL DETECTOR OPTION YES EXTEND TIME PASSAGE DETECTOR OPTION YES VEHICLE PLAN NUMBER 1 DETECTOR NUMBER 14 ASSIGNED PHASE 14 ADDED INITIAL OPTION SWITCH PHASE CALL DETECTOR OPTION YES EXTEND TIME PASSAGE DETECTOR OPTION YES VEHICLE PLAN NUMBER 1 DETECTOR NUMBER 15 ASSIGNED PHASE 15 ADDED INITIAL OPTION SWITCH PHASE CALL DETECTOR OPTION YES EXTEND TIME PASSAGE DETECTOR OPTION YES VEHICLE PLAN NUMBER 1 DETECTOR NUMBER 16 ASSIGNED PHASE 16 ADDED INITIAL OPTION YES SWITCH PHASE CALL DETECTOR OPTION YES

6-4 PEDESTRIAN AND SYSTEM DETECTOR OPTIONS PHASE PEDESTRIAN DETECTOR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PED DET INPUT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

PED DET INPUT

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

LOCAL SYSTEM DETECTOR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

VEH DET INPUT

17 18 19 20 21 21 23 24

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

VEH DET INPUT


�� ##��$$��

��

� �� PROGRAM REFERENCE CARD INTERSECTION ___________________________________________________________________ CONTROLLER NUMBER___________ ENTERED BY:__________________ DATE___/___/___ BOOT: ______________ MAIN: ______________ HELP: _____________ DATA BASE_________


CONFIGURATION SUBMENU �

1-1-1. PHASE RING ASSIGNMENT PHASE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

RING

1-1-2. PHASE COMPATIBILITY PHASE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

1-2. PHASES IN USE / EXCLUSIVE PED PHASE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

PHASES IN USE

EXCLUSIVE PED

1-1-4. BACKUP PREVENT PHASES PHASE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

1-1-5 SIMULTANEOUS GAP PHASE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

1-1-3. PHASE RING SEQUENCE


CONTROLLER 1 SEQUENCE 1

RING 1

RING 2

RING 3

RING 4


RING 1

RING 2

RING 3

RING 4


RING 1

RING 2

RING 3

RING 4


RING 1

RING 2

RING 3

RING 4


RING 1

RING 2

RING 3

RING 4


RING 1

RING 2

RING 3

RING 4


RING 1

RING 2

RING 3

RING 4


RING 1

RING 2

RING 3

RING 4


1-1-3. PHASE RING SEQUENCE (CONT) CONTROLLER 1 SEQUENCE 9

RING 1

RING 2

RING 3

RING 4


RING 1

RING 2

RING 3

RING 4


RING 1

RING 2

RING 3

RING 4


RING 1

RING 2

RING 3

RING 4


RING 1

RING 2

RING 3

RING 4


RING 1

RING 2

RING 3

RING 4


RING 1

RING 2

RING 3

RING 4


RING 1

RING 2

RING 3

RING 4


1-3. PHASE TO LOAD SWITCH (MMU) ASSIGNMENT

DIMMING AUTO FLASH LOAD SWITCH

PHASE / OVERLAP

TYPE

RED

YELLOW

GREEN

PHASE

COLOR

TOGE-THER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1-4-1. SDLC OPTIONS BIU NUMBER

TERM & FACIL

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ENABLE

PEER-PEER EN

DETECTOR RACK

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ENABLE

PEER-PEER EN

MMU ENABLE

MMU STOP TIME

DIAGNOSTIC ENABLE (TEST FIXTURE)

CONTROLLER PEER TO PEER ENABLE

DISABLE 3 CRITICAL RFEs LOCKUP

1-4-2. MMU PROGRAM PHASE

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

1-4-3. COLOR CHECK DISABLE DISABLE ALL COLOR CHECKS

MMU CHANNEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

GREEN / WALK

YELLOW / PC

RED / DW

MMU CHANNEL 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

GREEN / WALK

YELLOW / PC

RED / DW


1-5-1 GLOBAL PORT PARAMETERS NTCIP BACKUP TIME (SECONDS) PORT 2 PRIORITY PORT 3A PRIORITY PORT 3B PRIORITY ETHERNET PRIORITY

1-5-1 PORT 2 (TERMINAL) PROTOCOL

ENABLE

DATA RATE (BPS)

DATA, PARITY, STOP

MODEM SETUP STRING

USER STRING OMM. PORT ADDRESS SYSTEM DETECTOR 9 – 16 ADDRESS TELEMETRY RESPONSE DELAY

DUPLEX HALF - FULL



NTCIP PROTOCOL

RTS TO CTS DELAY

RTS TURN OFF DELAY


EARLY RTS

1-5-3 PORT 3A (TELEMETRY) PROTOCOL

ENABLE

DATA RATE (BPS)

DATA, PARITY, STOP

MODEM SETUP STRING

USER STRING

COMM. PORT ADDRESS

SYSTEM DETECTOR 9 – 16 ADDRESS

ELEMETRY RESPONSE DELAY

DUPLEX HALF - FULL



NTCIP PROTOCOL

RTS TO CTS DELAY

RTS TURN OFF DELAY


EARLY RTS

1-7-1 ADMINISTRATION SUPERVISOR ACCESS CODE

ENABLE CRC CHECK OF DATA BASE

CRC OF PROGRAM DATA BASE

REQUEST DOWNLOAD OF PROGRAMMED DATA

1-7-2 DISPLAY OPTIONS KEY CLICK ENABLE BACKLIGHT ENABLE

1-5-4. PORT 3B (TELEMETRY) PROTOCOL

ENABLE

DATA RATE (BPS)

DATA, PARITY, STOP

MODEM SETUP STRING

USER STRING

COMM. PORT ADDRESS

SYSTEM DETECTOR 9 – 16 ADDRESS


DUPLEX HALF - FULL



NTCIP PROTOCOL

RTS TO CTS DELAY

RTS TURN OFF DELAY


EARLY RTS

1-5-5 ETHERNET PORT CONFIGURATION IP ADDRESS ADDRESS MASK FTP SERVER ADDRESS

DEFAULT GATEWAY ADDRESS

1-6-1 ENABLE EVENT LOGS CRITICAL RFE’S (MMU/TE)


NON-CRITICAL RFE'S (DET/TEST)

DETECTOR ERRORS

COORDINATION ERRORS

MMU FLASH FAULTS

LOCAL FLASH FAULTS

PREEMPT

POWER ON/OFF

LOW BATTERY

ACCESS

DATA CHANGE

CONTROLLER DOWNLOAD

ALARM 1

ALARM 2

ALARM 3

ALARM 4

ALARM 5

ALARM 6

ALARM 7

ALARM 8

ALARM 9

ALARM 10

ALARM 11

ALARM 12

ALARM 13

ALARM 14

ALARM 15

ALARM 16


1-8-1 LOGIC STATEMENT CONTROL

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

LP 1-10

LP 11-20 LP 21-30 LP 31-40 LP 41-50 LP 51-60 LP 61-70 LP 71-80 LP 81-90 LP 91-10

1-8-1 LOGIC STATEMENT CONTROL

LOGIC GATE NUMBER IF THEN

ELSE

1-8-2 LOGIC PROCESSOR STATEMENTS


ELSE


LOGIC GATE NUMBER IF

THEN

ELSE


ELSE


ELSE


1-8-2 LOGIC PROCESSOR (CONTINUED) LOGIC GATE NUMBER IF THEN

ELSE


ELSE


ELSE


ELSE


ELSE


ELSE


ELSE


ELSE

1-8-2 LOGIC PROCESSOR (CONTINUED) LOGIC GATE NUMBER


IF THEN

ELSE


ELSE


ELSE


ELSE

LOGIC GATE NUMBER IF

THEN

ELSE


ELSE


ELSE


ELSE

1-8-2 LOGIC PROCESSOR (CONTINUED) LOGIC GATE NUMBER IF


THEN

ELSE


ELSE


CONTROLLER SUBMENU 2-1. CONTROLLER TIMING DATA

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

MINIMUM GREEN

BICYCLE MINIMUM GREEN

CONDITIONAL SERVICE MINIMUM GREEN

DELAYED GREEN

WALK

WALK 2

WALK MAX

PEDESTRIAN CLEARANCE

PEDESTRIAN CLEARANCE 2

PEDESTRIAN CLEARANCE MAX

PEDESTRIAN CARRY OVER

VEHICLE EXTENSION

VEHICLE EXTENSION 2

MAX1

MAX2

MAX3

DYNAMIC MAX

DYNAMIC MAX STEP

YELLOW CHANGE

RED CLRANCE

RED MAX

RED REVERT

ACTUATIONS BEFORE GAP REDUCTION

SECONDS PER ACTIONS ADDED TO INITIAL

MAXIMUM ADDED INITIAL GREEN

TIME BEFORE GAP REDUCTION

CARS WAITING BEFORE GAP REDUCTION

STEP TO REDUCE

TIME TO REDUCE TO MINIMUM

MININIMUM GAP


2-2 VEHICLE OVERLAP OVERLAP A PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

INCLUDED

PROTECTED

MODIFIER

PEDESTRIAN PROTECT

NOT OVERLAP

TRAILING GREEN

TRAILING YELLOW

TRAILING RED

PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

TRAILING LEADING ADVANCE GREEN

PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

FLASH GREEN

OVERLAP B PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

INCLUDED

PROTECTED

MODIFIER

PEDESTRIAN PROTECT

NOT OVERLAP

TRAILING GREEN

TRAILING YELLOW

TRAILING RED

PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6


PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

FLASH GREEN

OVERLAP C PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

INCLUDED

PROTECTED

MODIFIER

PEDESTRIAN PROTECT

NOT OVERLAP

TRAILING GREEN

TRAILING YELLOW

TRAILING RED

PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6


PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

FLASH GREEN

OVERLAP D PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

INCLUDED

PROTECTED

MODIFIER

PEDESTRIAN PROTECT

NOT OVERLAP

TRAILING GREEN

TRAILING YELLOW

TRAILING RED

PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6


PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

FLASH GREEN


2-2 VEHICLE OVERLAP (CONTINUED) OVERLAP E PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

INCLUDED

PROTECTED

MODIFIER

PEDESTRIAN PROTECT

NOT OVERLAP

TRAILING GREEN

TRAILING YELLOW

TRAILING RED

PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6


PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

FLASH GREEN

OVERLAP F PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

INCLUDED

PROTECTED

MODIFIER

PEDESTRIAN PROTECT

NOT OVERLAP

TRAILING GREEN

TRAILING YELLOW

TRAILING RED

PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6


PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

FLASH GREEN

OVERLAP G PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

INCLUDED

PROTECTED

MODIFIER

PEDESTRIAN PROTECT

NOT OVERLAP

TRAILING GREEN

TRAILING YELLOW

TRAILING RED

PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6


PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

FLASH GREEN

OVERLAP H PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

INCLUDED

PROTECTED

MODIFIER

PEDESTRIAN PROTECT

NOT OVERLAP

TRAILING GREEN

TRAILING YELLOW

TRAILING RED

PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6


PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

FLASH GREEN


2-2 VEHICLE OVERLAP (CONTINUED) OVERLAP I PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

INCLUDED

PROTECTED

MODIFIER

PEDESTRIAN PROTECT

NOT OVERLAP

TRAILING GREEN

TRAILING YELLOW

TRAILING RED

PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6


PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

FLASH GREEN

OVERLAP J PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

INCLUDED

PROTECTED

MODIFIER

PEDESTRIAN PROTECT

NOT OVERLAP

TRAILING GREEN

TRAILING YELLOW

TRAILING RED

PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6


PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

FLASH GREEN

OVERLAP K PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

INCLUDED

PROTECTED

MODIFIER

PEDESTRIAN PROTECT

NOT OVERLAP

TRAILING GREEN

TRAILING YELLOW

TRAILING RED

PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6


PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

FLASH GREEN

OVERLAP L PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

INCLUDED

PROTECTED

MODIFIER

PEDESTRIAN PROTECT

NOT OVERLAP

TRAILING GREEN

TRAILING YELLOW

TRAILING RED

PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6


PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

FLASH GREEN


2-2 VEHICLE OVERLAP (CONTINUED) OVERLAP M PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

INCLUDED

PROTECTED

MODIFIER

PEDESTRIAN PROTECT

NOT OVERLAP

TRAILING GREEN

TRAILING YELLOW

TRAILING RED

PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6


PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

FLASH GREEN

OVERLAP N PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

INCLUDED

PROTECTED

MODIFIER

PEDESTRIAN PROTECT

NOT OVERLAP

TRAILING GREEN

TRAILING YELLOW

TRAILING RED

PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6


PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

FLASH GREEN

OVERLAP O PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

INCLUDED

PROTECTED

MODIFIER

PEDESTRIAN PROTECT

NOT OVERLAP

TRAILING GREEN

TRAILING YELLOW

TRAILING RED

PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6


PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

FLASH GREEN

OVERLAP P PHASES

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

INCLUDED

PROTECTED

MODIFIER

PEDESTRIAN PROTECT

NOT OVERLAP

TRAILING GREEN

TRAILING YELLOW

TRAILING RED

PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6


PHASES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

FLASH GREEN


2-3 PEDESTRIAN OVERLAP PEDESTRIAN OVERLAP CONSISTS OF PHASES PEDESTRIAN OVERLAP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16


2-4 GUARANTEED MINIMUM TIMES PHASE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

MINIMUM GREEN

WALK

PEDESTRIAN CLEARANCE

YELLOW CHANGE

RED CLEARANCE

OVERLAP

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P

MINIMUM GREEN

2-5 START / FLASH DATA POWER START

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

PHASE

OVERLAP

POWER START RED FLASH TIME

REMOTE (AUTOMATIC) FLASH

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

ENTRY

EXIT

OVERLAP

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P

EXIT

EXIT REMOTE FLASH MINIMUM AUTOMATIC FLASH

MINIMUM RECALL CYCLE THROUGH PHASES

2-6-1 CONTROLLER OPTIONS PEDESTRIAN CLEARANCE PROTECT

UNIT RED REVERT

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

GUARANTEED PASSAGE

NON-ACT I

NON ACT II

DUAL ENTRY

PED RESERVICE

REST IN WALK

FLASHING WALK

PED CLEAR > YELLOW

PED CLEAR > ALL RED

INIT GREEN + VEHICLE EXIT

2-7 ACTUATED / PRE-TIMED MODE PHASES

ENABLE PRE-TIMED OPERATION FREE INPUT DISABLED PRE-TIMED

PHASE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

PRE - TIMED


COORDINATOR SUBMENU

3-1 COORDINATOR OPTIONS MANUAL PATTERN INTERCONNECT SOURCE

INTERCONNECT FORMAT

TRANSITION ECPI COORDINATION OFFSET REFERENCE DWELL / ADD TIME DELAY COORD WALK TO LOCAL ZERO

FORCE OFF

FORCE OFF ADDED INITIAL GREEN

USE PED TIME FOR SMOOTH TRANSITION

PEDESTRIAN RECALL PEDESTRIAN RESERVICE

ENABLE MANUAL SYNC INPUT

LOCAL ZERO OVERRIDE

RE-SYNC COUNT MAX SELECT MULTISYNC

3-2 COORDINATOR PATTERN COORDINATOR PATTERN CYCLE LENGTH (SECONDS)

SPLIT PATTERN

OFFSET VALUE SEQUENCE SPLITS IN OFFSETS IN . . . CROSSING ARTERY PATTERN

VEHICLE PERMISSIVE 1 LENGTH


VEHICLE PERMISSIVE 2 DISPLACEMENT

ACTION PLAN

ACTUATED COORDINATION

TIMING PLAN

ACTUATED REST IN WALK PHASE RESERVICE 1 2 3 4 RING SPLIT EXTENSION (SECONDS) SPLIT DEMAND PATTERN RING DISPLACEMENT 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 1

0 1 1

1 3

1 5

PREFERENCE 1 PHASES

PREFERENCE 2 PHASES

1 2 3 4 5 8 SPECIAL FUNCTION

COORDINATOR PATTERN CYCLE LENGTH (SECONDS)

SPLIT PATTERN

OFFSET VALUE SEQUENCE SPLITS IN OFFSETS IN CROSSING ARTERY PATTERN




ACTION PLAN


TIMING PLAN


0 1 1

1 3

1 5

PREFERENCE 1 PHASES

PREFERENCE 2 PHASES


SPLIT PATTERN





ACTION PLAN


TIMING PLAN


0 1 1

1 3

1 5

PREFERENCE 1 PHASES

PREFERENCE 2 PHASES


3-2 COORDINATOR PATTERN (CONTINUED) COORDINATOR PATTERN CYCLE LENGTH (SECONDS)

SPLIT PATTERN

OFFSET VALUE SPLITS IN OFFSETS IN CROSSING ARTERY PATTERN




ACTION PLAN


TIMING PLAN


0 1 1

1 3

1 5

PREFERENCE 1 PHASES

PREFERENCE 2 PHASES


SPLIT PATTERN





ACTION PLAN


TIMING PLAN


0 1 1

1 3

1 5

PREFERENCE 1 PHASES

PREFERENCE 2 PHASES


SPLIT PATTERN





ACTION PLAN


TIMING PLAN


0 1 1

1 3

1 5

PREFERENCE 1 PHASES

PREFERENCE 2 PHASES


SPLIT PATTERN





ACTION PLAN


TIMING PLAN


0 1 1

1 3

1 5

PREFERENCE 1 PHASES

PREFERENCE 2 PHASES



SPLIT PATTERN





ACTION PLAN


TIMING PLAN


0 1 1

1 3

1 5

PREFERENCE 1 PHASES

PREFERENCE 2 PHASES


SPLIT PATTERN





ACTION PLAN


TIMING PLAN


0 1 1

1 3

1 5

PREFERENCE 1 PHASES

PREFERENCE 2 PHASES


SPLIT PATTERN





ACTION PLAN


TIMING PLAN


0 1 1

1 3

1 5

PREFERENCE 1 PHASES

PREFERENCE 2 PHASES


SPLIT PATTERN




VEHICLE PERMISSIVE 2 SPLACEMENT

ACTION PLAN


TIMING PLAN


0 1 1

1 3

1 5

PREFERENCE 1 PHASES

PREFERENCE 2 PHASES



SPLIT PATTERN





ACTION PLAN


TIMING PLAN


0 1 1

1 3

1 5

PREFERENCE 1 PHASES

PREFERENCE 2 PHASES


SPLIT PATTERN





ACTION PLAN


TIMING PLAN


0 1 1

1 3

1 5

PREFERENCE 1 PHASES

PREFERENCE 2 PHASES


SPLIT PATTERN





ACTION PLAN


TIMING PLAN


0 1 1

1 3

1 5

PREFERENCE 1 PHASES

PREFERENCE 2 PHASES


SPLIT PATTERN





ACTION PLAN


TIMING PLAN


0 1 1

1 3

1 5

PREFERENCE 1 PHASES

PREFERENCE 2 PHASES



SPLIT PATTERN





ACTION PLAN


TIMING PLAN


0 1 1

1 3

1 5

PREFERENCE 1 PHASES

PREFERENCE 2 PHASES

COORDINATOR PATTERN CYCLE LENGTH (SECONDS) SPLIT PATTERN OFFSET VALUE SEQUENCE SPLITS IN OFFSETS IN CROSSING ARTERY PATTERN VEHICLE PERMISSIVE 1 LENGTH



ACTION PLAN

ACTUATED COORDINATION TIMING PLAN ACTUATED REST IN WALK PHASE RESERVICE 1 2 3 4 RING SPLIT EXTENSION (SECONDS) SPLIT DEMAND PATTERN RING DISPLACEMENT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1

0 1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

PREFERENCE 1 PHASES

PREFERENCE 2 PHASES


3-3 SPLIT PATTERN SPLIT PATTERN NUMBER

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

COORDINATED PHASE(S)

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SPLIT VALUE

MODE PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 SPLIT VALUE

MODE

SPLIT PATTERN NUMBER

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6




MODE


PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6




MODE


PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6




MODE


PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6




MODE


PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6




MODE


PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6




MODE


PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6




MODE


3-3 SPLIT PATTERN (CONTINUED) SPLIT PATTERN NUMBER

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6




MODE


PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6




MODE


PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6




MODE


PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6




MODE


PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6




MODE


PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6




MODE


PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6




MODE


PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6




MODE


3-3 SPLIT PATTERN (CONTINUED SPLIT PATTERN NUMBER

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6




MODE


PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6




MODE


PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6




MODE


PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6




MODE

3-4 AUTO PERMISSIVE MINIMUM GREEN TIME PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

MINIMUM GREEN

PHASE 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

MINIMUM GREEN

3-5 SPLIT DEMAND PHASE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

DEMAND 1

DEMAND 2

DEMAND 1 2 DETECTOR CALL TIME (SECONDS)

CYCLE COUNT


PREEMPTOR SUBMENU 4-1 PREEMPTOR PREEMPTOR NUMBER 1 ACTIVE NON-LOCK INPUT PREEMPTION OVERRIDE INTERLOCK ENABLE DELAY TIME (SECONDS) INHIBIT TIME (SECONDS) EXTEND INPUT (SECONDS) MAX PRESENCE TIME (SECONDS) DURATION TIME (SECONDS) TRACK CLEARANCE RESERVICE PED DARK RESERVICE TIME AUTOMATIC FLASH HAS PRIORITY RED CLEAR GOES GREEN TERMINATE OVERLAPS ASAP PED CLEAR THROUGH YELLOW RING 1 2 3 4 FREE DURING PREEMPTION

WALK PED CLEAR GREEN YELLOW RED

ENTERING MINIMUM TIME TRACK CLEARANCE TIME MIN DWELL – CYCLE GREEN/ EXIT YELLOW /RED DWELL FLASH FLASH EXIT COLOR PHASE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

TRACK CLEAR PHASE

DWELL PHASE

DWELL PEDESTRIAN

CYCLING PHASE

CYCLING PEDESTRIAN

EXIT PHASE

EXIT CALLS

SPECIAL FUNCTION

PREEMPTION TO COORDINATION EXIT TIMING PLAN LINKED PREEMPTOR PREEMPTOR ACTIVE OUTPUTS PREEMPTOR ACTIVE OUT PREEMPTOR ACTIVE OUT IN DWELL OTHER PRIORITY PREEMPTOR OUT

NON-PRIORITY PREEMPTOR OUT


TRACK CLEAR OVERLAP

DWELL OVERLAP

CYCLING OVERLAP

4-2 LOW PRIORITY PREEMPTOR SELECTION FILTERED INPUT SOLID PULSING 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PREEMPTOR NUMBER 2 ACTIVE NON-LOCK INPUT PREEMPTION OVERRIDE INTERLOCK ENABLE DELAY TIME (SECONDS) INHIBIT TIME (SECONDS) EXTEND INPUT (SECONDS) MAX PRESENCE TIME (SECONDS) DURATION TIME (SECONDS) TRACK CLEARANCE RESERVICE PED DARK RESERVICE TIME AUTOMATIC FLASH HAS PRIORITY RED CLEAR GOES GREEN TERMINATE OVERLAPS ASAP PED CLEAR THROUGH YELLOW RING 1 2 3 4 FREE DURING PREEMPTION


ENTERING MINIMUM TIME TRACK CLEARANCE TIME MIN DWELL – CYCLE GREEN/EXIT YELLOW/RED DWELL FLASH FLASH EXIT COLOR PHASE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

TRACK CLEAR PHASE

DWELL PHASE

DWELL PEDESTRIAN

CYCLING PHASE

CYCLING PEDESTRIAN

EXIT PHASE

EXIT CALLS

SPECIAL FUNCTION




TRACK CLEAR OVERLAP

DWELL OVERLAP

CYCLING OVERLAP


4-1 PREEMPTOR (CONTINUED) PREEMPTOR NUMBER 3 ACTIVE NON-LOCK INPUT PREEMPTION OVERRIDE INTERLOCK ENABLE DELAY TIME (SECONDS) INHIBIT TIME (SECONDS) EXTEND INPUT (SECONDS) MAX PRESENCE TIME (SECONDS) DURATION TIME (SECONDS) TRACK CLEARANCE RESERVICE PED DARK RESERVICE TIME AUTOMATIC FLASH HAS PRIORITY RED CLEAR GOES GREEN TERMINATE OVERLAPS ASAP PC THROUGH YELLOW RING 1 2 3 4 FREE DURING PREEMPTION



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

TRACK CLEAR PHASE

DWELL PHASE

DWELL PEDESTRIAN

CYCLING PHASE

CYCLING PEDESTRIAN

EXIT PHASE

EXIT CALLS

SPECIAL FUNCTION




TRACK CLEAR OVERLAP

DWELL OVERLAP

CYCLING OVERLAP

PREEMPTOR NUMBER 4 ACTIVE NON-LOCK INPUT PREEMPTION OVERRIDE INTERLOCK ENABLE DELAY TIME (SECONDS) INHIBIT TIME (SECONDS) EXTEND INPUT (SECONDS) MAX PRESENCE TIME (SECONDS) DURATION TIME (SECONDS) TRACK CLEARANCE RESERVICE PED DARK RESERVICE TIME AUTOMATIC FLASH HAS PRIORITY RED CLEAR GOES GREEN TERMINATE OVERLAPS ASAP PC THROUGH YELLOW RING 1 2 3 4 FREE DURING PREEMPTION



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

TRACK CLEAR PHASE

DWELL PHASE

DWELL PEDESTRIAN

CYCLING PHASE

CYCLING PEDESTRIAN

EXIT PHASE

EXIT CALLS

SPECIAL FUNCTION




TRACK CLEAR OVERLAP

DWELL OVERLAP

CYCLING OVERLAP




ENTERING MINIMUM TIME TRACK CLEARANCE TIME

MIN DWELL – CYCLE GREEN/ EXIT YELLOW /RED DWELL FLASH FLASH EXIT COLOR PHASE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

TRACK CLEAR PHASE

DWELL PHASE

DWELL PEDESTRIAN

CYCLING PHASE

CYCLING PEDESTRIAN

EXIT PHASE

EXIT CALLS

SPECIAL FUNCTION




TRACK CLEAR OVERLAP

DWELL OVERLAP

CYCLING OVERLAP




1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

TRACK CLEAR PHASE

DWELL PHASE

DWELL PEDESTRIAN

CYCLING PHASE

CYCLING PEDESTRIAN

EXIT PHASE

EXIT CALLS

SPECIAL FUNCTION




TRACK CLEAR OVERLAP

DWELL OVERLAP

CYCLING OVERLAP





1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

TRACK CLEAR PHASE

DWELL PHASE

DWELL PEDESTRIAN

CYCLING PHASE

CYCLING PEDESTRIAN

EXIT PHASE

EXIT CALLS

SPECIAL FUNCTION




TRACK CLEAR OVERLAP

DWELL OVERLAP

CYCLING OVERLAP




1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

TRACK CLEAR PHASE

DWELL PHASE

DWELL PEDESTRIAN

CYCLING PHASE

CYCLING PEDESTRIAN

EXIT PHASE

EXIT CALLS

SPECIAL FUNCTION




TRACK CLEAR OVERLAP

DWELL OVERLAP

CYCLING OVERLAP


TIME BASE SUBMENU

5-1 CLOCK/CALENDAR DATA DATE SET: TIME SET: MANUAL ACTION PLAN SYNC REFERENCE TIME SYNC REFERENCE DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME RESET INPUT TIME SET STANDARD TIME FROM GMT

5-2 SCHEDULE SCHEDULE NUMBER

DAY PLAN NUMBER

JANUARY FEBRUARY MARCH APRIL MAY JUNE JULY AUGUST SEPTEMBER OCTOBER NOVEMBER DECEMBER

MO

NTH

SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT DAY OF

WEEK (DOW)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1`9 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

DAY

OF

MO

NTH

(DO

M)

SCHEDULE NUMBER

DAY PLAN NUMBER


MO

NTH


WEEK (DOW)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1`9 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

DAY

OF

MO

NTH

(DO

M)

SCHEDULE NUMBER

DAY PLAN NUMBER


MO

NTH


WEEK (DOW)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1`9 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

DAY

OF

MO

NTH

(DO

M)

SCHEDULE NUMBER

DAY PLAN NUMBER


MO

NTH


WEEK (DOW)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1`9 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

DAY

OF

MO

NTH

(DO

M)

SCHEDULE NUMBER

DAY PLAN NUMBER


MO

NTH


WEEK (DOW)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1`9 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

DAY

OF

MO

NTH

(DO

M)


SCHEDULE NUMBER

DAY PLAN NUMBER


MO

NTH


WEEK (DOW)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1`9 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

DAY

OF

MO

NTH

(DO

M)

SCHEDULE NUMBER

DAY PLAN NUMBER


MO

NTH


WEEK (DOW)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1`9 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

DAY

OF

MO

NTH

(DO

M)

SCHEDULE NUMBER

DAY PLAN NUMBER


MO

NTH


WEEK (DOW)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1`9 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

DAY

OF

MO

NTH

(DO

M)

SCHEDULE NUMBER

DAY PLAN NUMBER


MO

NTH


WEEK (DOW)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1`9 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

DAY

OF

MO

NTH

(DO

M)

SCHEDULE NUMBER

DAY PLAN NUMBER


MO

NTH


WEEK (DOW)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1`9 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

DAY

OF

MO

NTH

(DO

M)

SCHEDULE NUMBER

DAY PLAN NUMBER


MO

NTH


WEEK (DOW)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1`9 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

DAY

OF

MO

NTH

(DO

M)


SCHEDULE NUMBER

DAY PLAN NUMBER


MO

NTH


WEEK (DOW)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1`9 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

DAY

OF

MO

NTH

(DO

M)

SCHEDULE NUMBER

DAY PLAN NUMBER


MO

NTH


WEEK (DOW)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1`9 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

DAY

OF

MO

NTH

(DO

M)

SCHEDULE NUMBER

DAY PLAN NUMBER


MO

NTH


WEEK (DOW)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1`9 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

DAY

OF

MO

NTH

(DO

M)


5-3 DAY PLAN DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME

DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME DAY PLAN EVENT DAY PLAN ACTION PLAN START TIME

5-4 ACTION PLAN ACTION PLAN EVENT


PATTERN SYSTEM OVERRIDE VEHICLE DETECTOR PLAN DETECTOR LOG FLASH RED REST VEHICLE DET DIAGNOSTIC PLAN CONTROLLER SEQUENCE PED DET DIAGNOSTIC PLAN TIMING PLAN DIMMING ENABLE PHASE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

PED RECALL WALK 2 VEH EXT 2 VEH RECALL MAX RECALL MAX 2 MAX 3 CS INHIBIT PHASE OMIT SPEC FUNCTION

(1-8)

AUX FUNCTION (1-3) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 LP 1-10 LP 11-20 LP 21-30 LP 31-40 LP 41-50 LP 51-60 LP 61-70 LP 71-80 LP 81-90 LP 91-100 ACTION PLAN EVENT


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6


(1-8)

AUX FUNCTION (1-3) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 LP 1-10 LP 11-20 LP 21-30 LP 31-40 LP 41-50 LP 51-60 LP 61-70 LP 71-80 LP 81-90 LP 91-100

ACTION PLAN EVENT


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6


(1-8)



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6


(1-8)



ACTION PLAN EVENT


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6


(1-8)



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6


(1-8)


ACTION PLAN EVENT


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6


(1-8)



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6


(1-8)



5-5 EXCEPTION DAY PROGRAM EXECEPTION DAY

FLOAT / FIXED

MON / MON DOW / DOM WOM / YEAR

DAY PLAN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36


DETECTORS �

6-1. DETECTOR TYPE AND TS SELECT DET TYPE TS1 DETECTOR DET TYPE TS1 DETECTOR 1 33 2 34

3 35

4 36

5 37

6 38

7 39

8 40

9 41

10 42

11 43

12 44

13 45

14 46

15 47

16 48

17 49

18 50

19 51

20 52

21 53

22 54

23 55

24 56

25 57

26 58

27 59

28 60

29 61

30 62

31 63

32 64

6-2 VEHICLE DETECTOR SETUP VEHICLE PLAN NUMBER DETECTOR NUMBER ASSIGNED PHASE ADDED INITIAL OPTION SWITCH PHASE CALL DETECTOR OPTION EXTEND TIME PASSAGE DETECTOR OPTION DELAY TIME QUEUE DETECTOR OPTION QUEUE LIMIT NTCIP OCCUPANCY LOG FAIL TIME NTCIP VOLUME LOG FAIL CALL DELAY ECPI LOG YELLOW LOCK RED LOCK

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

CALLED

VEHICLE PLAN NUMBER DETECTOR NUMBER ASSIGNED PHASE ADDED INITIAL OPTION SWITCH PHASE CALL DETECTOR OPTION EXTEND TIME PASSAGE DETECTOR OPTION DELAY TIME QUEUE DETECTOR OPTION QUEUE LIMIT NTCIP OCCUPANCY LOG FAIL TIME NTCIP VOLUME LOG FAIL CALL DELAY ECPI LOG YELLOW LOCK RED LOCK

PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

CALLED


PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

CALLED


PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

CALLED


PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

CALLED


PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

CALLED



PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

CALLED


PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

CALLED


PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

CALLED


PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

CALLED


PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

CALLED


PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

CALLED


PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

CALLED


PHASE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

CALLED


6-3 PHASE DETECTOR OPTIONS PHASE DETECTOR OPTION PLAN NUMBER 1 PHASE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

DETECTOR LOCK

VEH RECALL PED RECALL MAX RECALL SOFT RECALL NO REST ADD INIT CALC PHASE DETECTOR OPTION PLAN NUMBER 2 PHASE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

DETECTOR LOCK


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

DETECTOR LOCK


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0

1 1

1 2

1 3

1 4

1 5

1 6

DETECTOR LOCK

VEH RECALL PED RECALL MAX RECALL SOFT RECALL NO REST ADD INIT CALC

6-4 PEDESTRIAN AND SYSTEM DETECTOR OPTIONS PHASE PEDESTRIAN DETECTOR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PED DET INPUT

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

PED DET INPUT

LOCAL SYSTEM DETECTOR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

VEH DET INPUT

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

VEH DET INPUT

6-5 LOG – SPEED DETECTOR SET UP NTCIP LOG PERIOD

ECPI LOG PERIOD

LENGTH UNIT

SPEED DETECTOR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

LOCAL DETECTOR

ONE / TWO DET

VEH LENGTH

TRAP LENGTH

ENABLE LOG

SPEED DETECTOR

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

LOCAL DETECTOR

ONE / TWO DET

VEH LENGTH

TRAP LENGTH

ENABLE LOG


6-6 VEHICLE DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS VEHICLE DIAGNOSTIC PLAN NUMBER 1

DET

COUN

TS

ACTU

ATIO

NS

PRES

ENCE

MUL

TIPL

IER

DET

COUN

TS

ACTU

ATIO

NS

PRES

ENCE

MUL

TIPL

IER

1 33 2 34 3 35 4 36 5 37 6 38 7 39 8 40 9 41 10 42 11 43 12 44 13 45 14 46 15 47 16 48 17 49 18 50 19 51 20 52 21 53 22 54 23 55 24 56 25 57 26 58 27 59 28 60 29 61 30 62 31 63 32 64

VEHICLE DIAGNOSTIC PLAN NUMBER 2

DET

COUN

TS

ACTU

ATIO

NS

PRES

ENCE

MUL

TIPL

IER

DET

COUN

TS

ACTU

ATIO

NS

PRES

ENCE

MUL

TIPL

IER

1 33 2 34 3 35 4 36 5 37 6 38 7 39 8 40 9 41 10 42 11 43 12 44 13 45 14 46 15 47 16 48 17 49 18 50 19 51 20 52 21 53 22 54 23 55 24 56 25 57 26 58 27 59 28 60 29 61 30 62 31 63 32 64


6-6 VEHICLE DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS (CONTINUED)


DET

COUN

TS

ACTU

ATIO

NS

PRES

ENCE

MUL

TIPL

IER

DET

COUN

TS

ACTU

ATIO

NS

PRES

ENCE

MUL

TIPL

IER

1 33 2 34 3 35 4 36 5 37 6 38 7 39 8 40 9 41 10 42 11 43 12 44 13 45 14 46 15 47 16 48 17 49 18 50 19 51 20 52 21 53 22 54 23 55 24 56 25 57 26 58 27 59 28 60 29 61 30 62 31 63 32 64


DET

COUN

TS

ACTU

ATIO

NS

PRES

ENCE

MUL

TIPL

IER

DET

COUN

TS

ACTU

ATIO

NS

PRES

ENCE

MUL

TIPL

IER

1 33 2 34 3 35 4 36 5 37 6 38 7 39 8 40 9 41 10 42 11 43 12 44 13 45 14 46 15 47 16 48 17 49 18 50 19 51 20 52 21 53 22 54 23 55 24 56 25 57 26 58 27 59 28 60 29 61 30 62 31 63 32 64


6-7 PEDESTRIAN DETECTOR DIAGNOSTICS PED DIAGNOSTIC PLAN NUMBER 1 PED DIAGNOSTIC PLAN

NUMBER 2

DET

COUN

TS

ACTU

ATIO

NS

PRES

ENCE

MUL

TIPL

IER

DET

COUN

TS

ACTU

ATIO

NS

PRES

ENCE

MUL

TIPL

IER

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16

PED DIAGNOSTIC PLAN NUMBER 3 PED DIAGNOSTIC PLAN

NUMBER 4

DET

COUN

TS

ACTU

ATIO

NS

PRES

ENCE

MUL

TIPL

IER

DET

COUN

TS

ACTU

ATIO

NS

PRES

ENCE

MUL

TIPL

IER

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16


��!!�� ##��$$��

�� Free Messages I/O ERROR FLASH ACTIVE MMU/CMU STOP TIME ACTIVE MANUAL CONTROL ENABLE ACTIVE AUTOMATIC FLASH INPUT ACTIVE PREEMPTOR ACTIVE COORD FREE INPUT ACTIVE RING ½ STOP TIME ACTIVE TELEMETRY COMMANDING FREE COORD MANUAL FREE SELECTED COORD MANUAL PATTERN ERROR CLOCK NOT SET NO STEP ACTIVE TBC ON LINE ACTIVE STEP SELECTING FREE WAITING FOR DIAL SYNC COMMANDING FREE HDW ERROR OR CLOCK NOT SET ALL PHASE SPLITS ARE ZERO CRITICAL COORD DATA ERROR(S) PICKUP CYCLE FAULT COORD FAILURE CYCLE FAILURE MMU OR TF BIU RESPONSE FRAME FAULT(S) MMU PROGRAM COMPATIBILITY ERROR INTERNAL MMU COMPATIBILITY ERROR INTERNAL MMU I/O ERROR PHASE NEXT ERROR Background Error Messages CYCLE LENGTH LESS THAN 30 SECONDS NO VALID COORD PHASE(S) COORD PHASES NOT IN SAME CG COORD PHASES IN SAME RING SPLIT TIME > 327 SECONDS CYCLE LENGTH TOO SHORT COORD PHASE SPLIT TOO SHORT Interconnect Error Messages TELEMETRY NOT PRESENT TELEMETRY DATA INVALID CLOCK NOT SET (NO INTERNAL SYNC) PATTERN RANGE ERROR PATTERN CYCLE LENGTH < 30 SECONDS STD FORMAT - NO PATTERN MATCH SYNC TRUE > 15 SECONDS TLM/HDW: NO SYNC FOR RESYNC + 1 CYCLE, TS2 MULTIPLE OFFSETS > 15 SECONDS TLM/HDW: WAITING FOR FIRST SYNC Warning Messages WARNING: LOCAL ZERO ERROR WARNING: YIELD ERROR WARNING: FORCE OFF ERROR WARNING: ZERO SPLIT OMITTING PHASE(S) WARNING: CYCLE LENGTH < SPLIT SUM WARNING: PHASE SPLIT AT MINIMUM

Event Messages TF BIU #X ENABLED TF BIU #X DISABLED RESPONSE FAULT NNN (TF BIU X) RESPONSE FAULT NNN (TF BIU X) CLEARED MMU ENABLED MMU DISABLED RESPONSE FAULT NNN (MMU) RESPONSE FAULT NNN (MMU) CLEARED XFER OUTPUTS COMM ERROR (CF 18) XFER OUTPUTS COMM ERROR (CF 18) CLEARED 3 CRITICAL SDLC ERRORS IN 24 HRS 3 CRITICAL SDLC ERRORS IN 34 HRS CLEARED DET BIU #X ENABLED DET BIU #X DISABLED TEST ENABLED TEST DISABLED RESPONSE FAULT NNN (DET BIU #X) RESPONSE FAULT NNN (DET BIU #X) CLEARED RESPONSE FAULT NNN (TEST) RESPONSE FAULT NNN (TEST) CLEARED COORD ACTIVE CYCLE FAULT (FREE) COORD FAULT (FREE) COORD FAILURE (FREE) COORD LOCAL FREE COORD DATA ERRORS (FREE) COORD PROGRAM FREE COMPATIBILITY FAULT FLASH RESPONSE FRAME FAULT FLASH CONFLICT FAULT FLASH COLOR MISMATCH FAULT FLASH MMU FLASH CYCLE FAILURE FLASH PHASE NEXT ERROR FLASH MMU FLASH - CONFLICT MMU FLASH - RED FAILURE MMU FLASH - VOLTAGE MONITOR MMU FLASH - +24 VOLT MONITOR I MMU FLASH - +24 VOLT MONITOR II MMU FLASH - MINIMUM CLEARANCE FAILURE MMU FLASH - DIAGNOSTIC FAILURE MMU FLASH - PORT 1 TIMEOUT FAILURE AUTOMATIC FLASH LOCAL FLASH PRIORITY PREEMPTOR X ACTIVE BUS PREEMPTOR X ACTIVE BUS ADVANCE DETECTOR X PREEMPTOR INACTIVE POWER ON POWER OFF CONTROLLER ON LINE COORDINATOR ACTIVE CONTROLLER ON LINE - COORDINATOR ACTIVE BATTERY LOW ALARM X ACTIVE ALARM X INACTIVE


Log Coordination Errors COORD ACTIVE: No fault or conflict. CYCLE FAULT: A serviceable call has not been serviced for two cycles. COORD FAULT: A cycle fault is in effect, and a serviceable call has been serviced within two cycles. COORD LOCAL FREE: Controller taken out of coordination by a command. COORD PROGRAM FREE: Controller taken out of coordination by TOD program. COORD DATA ERRORS: Bad programming data. Flash Status Messages NO FLASH CONDITION MMU/TF SDLC COMM FAULT COMPATIBILITY PFM FAULT COLOR MISMATCH CONFLICT DETECTED PHASE NEXT FAULT CYCLE FAIL DEFAULT FLASH 1 FAILURE STATUS NOT REPORTED PORT 1 TIMEOUT DIAGNOSTIC FAILURE UNKNOWN MMU FLASH CONDITION CVM/CFM +24V MON I +24V MON II

MIN CLEAR FAIL CONFLICT RED FAILURE POWER START FLASH EXTERNAL START PREEMPT FLASH POWER ON PREEMPT FLASH PREEMPT FLASH AUTOMATIC FLASH LOCAL FLASH I/O Mode Change Status Screen

TS2 Type 2 has eight (four are defined) different I/O modes of unexpected operation, the controller was sent to flash. The controller must be powered down and up again to clear this error status. Check mode select wires and input buffers.

INTERSECTION SET TO FLASH BECAUSE THE TYPE 2 I/O MODE CHANGED WHILE THE CONTROLLER WAS IN OPERATION.


��""�� ##��$$�� %%��&&��''��

�� The ASC/3 Controller hardware diagnostics software is a part of the ASC/3 Boot software package and appears as Option #7 on the Boot Menu. To access the Boot Menu, proceed as follows:

1. While powering up the controller, simultaneously press the “1” and the “CLEAR” keys. The Boot Menu Screen (shown below) should appear.

2. Press the “7” key and the Hardware Diagnostic Menu (Screen HD, also shown below) should appear.

BOOT MENU SCREEN

SCREEN HD

SCREEN HD-1

SCREEN HD-2

SCREEN HD-3

SCREEN HD-4

HARDWARE DIAGNOSTIC MENU 1. DISPLAY 8. TELEMETRY I/O 2. KEYPAD 9. S-RAM 3. PORT1 0. ETHERNET 4. PORT2 A. RTC/OTHER 5. PORT3A B. DATA MODULE 6. PORT3B C. AUTO-LOOP 7. TS2 "ABCD" I/O D. TS2 SUITCASE PRESS 0..9 TO SELECT 0-9 SPEC FUNC 1-3 TO SELECT A-C

02/14/2005 BOOT MENU 00:00:00 1. DOWNLOAD FILES 6. SET WORKING DIR 2. UPLOAD OPTIONS 7. RUN H/W DIAGS 3. FILE SYSTEM 8. CLOCK/CALENDAR 4. SETUP NETWORK 9. SHOW BOOT CFG 5. SELECT APP 0. RESTART PRESS KEYS 1..9, OR 0 TO SELECT

LCD DISPLAY TEST ************* *TEST PASSED* ************* PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN

KEYPAD TEST / \ / \ / \ / \ \ / \ / \ / \ / / \ / \ / \ / \ \ / \ / \ / \ / / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / / \ / \ / \ / \ \ / \ / \ / \ / / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / LAST KEY PRESSED = [SUB] PRESS SUB MENU TWICE TO EXIT

PORT 1 TEST PACKET TESTING PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP No tx/rx failures! ************* *TEST PASSED* ************* PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN

PORT 2 TEST TESTING HANDSHAKE SIGNALS [PASS] PACKET TESTING PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP No tx/rx failures! ************* *TEST PASSED* ************* PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN


SCREEN HD-5

SCREEN HD-6

SCREEN HD-7

SCREEN HD-8

SCREEN HD-9

SCREEN HD-0

SCREEN HD-A

SCREEN HD-B

PORT 3A TEST TESTING HANDSHAKE SIGNALS [PASS] PACKET TESTING PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP No tx/rx failures! ************* *TEST PASSED* ************* PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN

TELEMETRY INTERFACE LOOPBACK TESTING CTRL SIGS [PASS] TESTING HANDSHAKE SIGNALS [PASS] PACKET TESTING P3B PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP No tx/rx failures! PACKET TESTING P3C PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP No tx/rx failures! ************* *TEST PASSED* ************* PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN

TS2 TYPE 2 LOOPBACK Testing output 118 Input 94 has failed with Output 118 3827 3830 3831 3832 391f 3a2b 3b25 3c33 3d41 3e42 3f44 4034 4133 4234 433a 443d 4446 4539 4638 4735 4843 4934 4a3d 4a46 4b40 4c3f 4d45 4e47 4f3c 5036 5133 5242 533e 543e 5537 5636 5735 5845 5938 5a44 5b65 5c62 5d61 5d67 5e68 5f63 6064 6166 624c 635d 64 ************* 4d 684b 694a 6a60 6b55 6c *TEST FAILED* 54 7053 7152 7256 7358 74 ************* 5a 765c 765e 2c2c 2c2e 2d1c 2e21 2f1e 2f2d 3048 313b PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN

TELEMETRY I/O LOOPBACK ************* *NO HARDWARE* ************* PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN ----------------------------------------

S-RAM TEST CURRENTLY TESTING LOCATION 207FFF0 512kb MEMORY TESTS GOOD ************* *TEST PASSED* ************* PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN

ETHERNET TEST PINGING 90.0.0.1 [PASSED] ************* *TEST PASSED* ************* PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN

RTC/OTHER TESTS GETTING TIME [PASSED] GETTING TIME [PASSED] CLOCK IS RUNNING [PASSED] TESTING LINE FREQ. [PASSED] TESTING CVM/FM SIGS. [PASSED] ************* *TEST PASSED* ************* PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN

DATA MODULE TEST FORMAT COMPLETE CHECKING ERASURE [PASSED] READING FLASH BLOCK [PASSED] ************* *TEST PASSED* ************* PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN


SCREEN HD-C

SCREEN HD-D

AUTOMATICALLY PERFORMS ENTIRE SEQUENCE OF 14 DIAGNOSTIC TESTS AND THEN DISPLAYS STATS OF THE RESULTS BEFORE REPEATING THE FULL SEQUENCE.

TS1 SUITCASE TEST Inputs 0123........ ........ ........ ........ 4567........ ........ ........ ........ 89AB........ ........ ........ ........ C ........ ........ ........ ........ Outputs 0123........ ........ ........ ........ 4567........ ........ ........ ........ 89AB........ ........ ........ ........ CDE ........ ........ ........ ........ 01234567 01234567 01234567 01234567 PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN


�� ##��$$�� ''��

�� There are several ways to upgrade ASC/3 SW. Easiest way is to use the ASC/3 SW Installation Utility. If this utility is not available, the Boot Mode Hyper Terminal Transfer process also discussed. Connecting cable required for both methods when using serial communications between the PC to ASC/3 Port 3A is described below.

PC ASC/3 9 Pin Female 9 Pin Female

Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 3 Pin 2 Pin 5 Pin 5

Software Installation Utility 1. Uncompress the SW Upgrade package in a convenient directory (Suggest that it reflect the name of

the software version)

2. Click on ASC3Installer.exe 3. Communication Setup: Go to “Comm Setting” tab


a. Ethernet (FTP)

WARNING: The below network setting steps assume basic level of network knowledge on the user’s side. An IT

professional might need to get involved to set up FTP capability over Ethernet.

i. Hook up the Controller to Ethernet port (either via a switch or direct connect with Ethernet cross-cable)

ii. Fill in Controller’s IP ADDRESS. This typically defaults to 90.0.0.99 (see app menu MM-1-5-5 or Boot menu 9).

iii. Make sure the PC’s IP is in the same subnet with the Controller. (e.g. Controller’s IP 128.12.x.x, PC’s IP connecting to the controller should also have 128.12.y.y, subnet mask should be the same 255.255.0.0)

iv. Click on ping test to make sure the 2 devices communicate by seeing reply messages.

v. Controller can be in app mode to download application and Database. vi. To allow the new Application to become effective, power the ASC/3 controller OFF

then ON to perform a warm start.


b. Serial (Serial Comm)

i. Select COMM port and appropriate baud rate ii. Hook up the Controller Port 3A to selected COMM port, using Female to Female Null

modem DB 9 cable iii. Controller must be in boot mode if serial connection is used. Boot mode is

accomplished by powering up the ASC/3 while simultaneously depressing the “1” and “CLEAR” keys.

iv. Select the appropriate baud rate in the controller (Boot mode-4-5)


These illustrations use directory F:\ASC3\Relase 2.5\ASC3v2.00.00 4. Software / Database Upgrade:

a. Application Download i. Make sure the app directory is where the application files (.bin, .defs, .help, .text) are.

If not, “Browse” to locate the correct directory.

ii. Click on Download App/Screens. This will download the application SW and

associated files. iii. If using serial, please follow the on-screen instruction. Click Finish when it is done. iv. If the File system has been reformatted in the ASC/3, N3000-*.db must be

downloaded prior to power up the system in application mode. See Download Other files for details on how to download the file.

v. The application file names are renamed to Asc3app, asc3screens.defs, asc3screens.text, and asc3screens.help, on the controller.


b. Database Download

i. Make sure the Database file exist in the indicated directory

ii. Click on Download DB. This will download the indicated DB file. iii. If using serial, please follow the on-screen instruction. Click Finish when it is done. iv. The Database download’s name is renamed to asc3.db on the controller

NOTE: The ASC/3 does not reset the “SRAM”. When downloading a database, the operator must first clear the “SRAM”, Boot-7-9-0 for the new Database to take effect


c. OS Download via COMM

i. Make sure the .OS file exists in the indicated directory. OS file has file extension “.os”

ii. Click on Download OS. This will download the indicated OS file. iii. Follow the on-screen instruction. Click Finish when done. iv. If the File system has been reformatted in the ASC/3:

1. Cycle the power to the ASC/3 (OFF and ON) 2. Load the Application files as described in 4.a above.

OS Download via ftp Server

WARNING: The below network setting steps assume basic level of network knowledge on the user’s side. An IT

professional might need to get involved to set up FTP capability over Ethernet.

v. Make sure ftp server is running with proper IP address vi. Copy the OS image to the root of the ftp directory (setup is ftp server application

dependent) vii. Rename the Os image to osimage viii. Put the Controller in boot mode (1-Clear keys pressed while powering up) ix. Make sure the ftp server IP address is the same as ftp server. Menu #4-3 x. Select 1-3-1 to get the OS image.


5. Other Downloads. This is used to download other specific applications

a. Make sure the file exist in the indicated directory

b. Click on Download Other c. If using serial, please follow the on-screen instruction. Click Finish when it is done.

The file’s name is retained on the controller 6. Database Log File Upload.

a. Database upload is used for documentation or transfer to another controller. b. The directory and name for storage of these files need not be selected at this time.


To upload the Database, depress Start Database Upload and follow the on screen instructions.

While that upload is in process, the ASC/3 SW Installation Utility will show the progress.

When instructed to, depress “Finished”


The ASC/3 SW Installation Utility will ask for the selection of a directory and a file name.


7. Log File Upload.

a. Log file Upload is used to retrieve the logs that are generated and stored in the ASC/3. b. The directory and name for storage of these files need not be selected at this time.

To upload the Database, depress Start Log Upload and follow the on screen instructions.


While that upload is in process, the ASC/3 SW Installation Utility will show the progress.

When instructed to, depress Finished The ASC/3 SW Installation Utility will ask for the selection of a directory and a file name.


Boot Mode HyperTerminal Transfer. ASC/3 application and osimage software installation using HyperTerminal and ASC/3 Boot mode.

Setup for Application and osimage installation.

PC Place controller files into a folder at an easy to find location on the root drive of your PC (ex. C:\ASC3files)

PC Launch HyperTerminal and select a name and icon for the connection then press OK.


PC Select COM1 or COM2 for the Connect using selection and press OK. (Normally this selection is COM1)

PC Set Bits per second to 115200 and Flow Control to NONE then press OK.


PC From the FILE drop down menu, select PROPERTIES then Settings and change EMULATION to Auto Detect

PC to ASC/3 Connect 9 pin female to 9 pin female connecting cable from the com port selected above (typically Com1) on your PC to Port 3A on the ASC/3. (The pin-out of the cable is pins 5 to 5, 2 to 3 and 3 to 2.) ASC3 Power up the controller while simultaneously pressing the CLEAR and 1 keys to access the boot menu.

Boot Menu SCREEN 02/14/2005 BOOT MENU 00:00:00 1. DOWNLOAD FILES 6. SET WORKING DIR 2. UPLOAD OPTIONS 7. RUN H/W DIAGS 3. FILE SYSTEM 8. CLOCK/CALENDAR 4. SETUP NETWORK 9. SHOW BOOT CFG 5. SELECT APP 0. RESTART PRESS KEYS 1..9, OR 0 TO SELECT


ASC3 From the Boot Menu Screen, select option 4 (Setup Network).

SETUP NETWORK SCREEN NETWORKING OPTIONS 1. SET LOCAL IP ADDRESS 2. SET LOCAL IP MASK 3. SET FTP SERVER/HOST IP ADDRESS 4. VIEW ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS 5. SET CONSOLE BAUD RATE PRESS KEYS 1..5 TO SELECT

ASC3 From the Setup Network Screen, select option 5 (Set Console Baud Rate) then 5 to select 115200.

NETWORKING OPTION 5 SCREEN

FRONT PANEL BAUD RATE OPTIONS CURRENT RATE: 115200 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 PRESS KEYS 1..5 TO SELECT


Transfer of osimage software ASC/3 Press the SUB MENU key twice to return to the Boot Menu Screen, and then press 1-3 and select option 2 from the Download Controller Application screen: “DOWNLOAD USING ZMODEM.” The ASC3 will wait for files to be downloaded.

DOWNLOAD OPERTING SYSTEM 1. DOWNLOAD USING FTP 2. DOWNLOAD USING ZMODEM PRESS KEYS 1..2 TO SELECT

PC In HyperTerminal, select Transfer then Send File. Browse to the C:\ASC3 files folder on the root drive.

PC Select the osimage file and click the Open button


PC Click the Send button.

The file will be downloaded.

ASC/3

DO NOT INTERRUPT THIS PROCESS UNTILL THE TRANSFER IS COMPLETE THEN FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS ON THE ASC/3 SCREEN.

Controller will need to transfer the Operating System Image to flash memory. During this time the writing of blocks of image data can be viewed on the ASC/3 screen.

Recycle power to the controller Controller may start by indicating it has missing or corrupt files. If it does, load the application software files

POWER UP FLASH MISING APLICATION FILES THE CONTROLLER HAS MISSING OR CORRUPTED APPLICATION FILES. REFER TO THE ASC/3 PROGRAMMING AMNUAL FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON LOADING NEW OPERATIONAL FILES. PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE


Transfer of Application Software ASC/3 Press the SUB MENU key twice to return to the Boot Menu Screen, then press 1-1 and select Option 2 from the Download Controller Application screen: “DOWNLOAD USING ZMODEM.” The ASC3 will wait for files to be downloaded.

DOWNLOAD CONTROLLER APPLICATION 1. DOWNLOAD USING FTP 2. DOWNLOAD USING ZMODEM PRESS KEYS 1..2 TO SELECT


PC Select a file and click the Open button

NOTE: Each of the 5 files (ASC3App.bin, ASC3Screens.help, ASC3Screens.test, ASC3Screens.defs and N3000.db) will have to be sent individually as HyperTerminal does not select multiple files to send)




ASC/3 Controller will beep once and indicate that the file was downloaded correctly. To send the additional files, press SUB MENU -2 on the ASC/3 then select the next file to be downloaded and proceed as in the previous three steps.

Once all files (ASC3App.bin, ASC3Screens.help, ASC3Screens.test, ASC3Screens.defs and N3000.db) are downloaded, the files that were transferred can be viewed by pressing SUB MENU to return to the Main Menu then pressing 3 – 3.

NOTE: If “ASC3DataBase.db” is not in the file list, it will automatically be created from the basic N3000.db file when the controller start operation is performed.

FILE LIST asc3App ASC3Screens.defs ASC3Screens.help ASC3Screens.text N3000.db ASC3DataBase.db osimage


Transfer of database file ASC/3 Press the SUB MENU key twice to return to the Boot Menu Screen, then press 1-1 and select Option 2 from the Download Controller Application screen: “DOWNLOAD USING ZMODEM.” The ASC3 will wait for files to be downloaded.

DOWNLOAD CONTROLLER APPLICATION 1. DOWNLOAD USING FTP 2. DOWNLOAD USING ZMODEM PRESS KEYS 1..2 TO SELECT


PC Select a file and click the Open button (NOTE: each of the 5 files will have to be sent individually as HyperTerminal does not select multiple files to send)




ASC/3 Controller will beep once and indicate that the file was downloaded correctly.

POWER UP FLASH MISING APLICATION FILES THE CONTROLLER HAS MISSING OR CORRUPTED APPLICATION FILES. REFER TO THE ASC/3 PROGRAMMING AMNUAL FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON LOADING NEW OPERATIONAL FILES. PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE

Press the SUB MENU key twice to return to the Boot Menu Screen and select 7-9 to run the S-RAM test to clear the old database and logging information after the new database file is downloaded. Recycle power to the controller to start the ASC3 application.


�� ##��&&$$��

�� Selected by STD or TS2 inputs.

Pattern STD

C-O-S

TS2 Plan - Offset

Pattern STD

C-O-S

TS2 Plan - Offset

Pattern STD

C-O-S

TS2 Plan - Offset

1 111 0-1 41 311 13-2 81 511 - 2 121 0-2 42 321 13-3 82 521 - 3 131 0-3 43 331 14-1 83 531 - 4 141 1-1 44 341 14-2 84 541 - 5 151 1-2 45 351 14-3 85 551 - 6 112 1-3 46 312 15-1 86 512 - 7 122 2-1 47 322 15-2 87 522 - 8 132 2-2 48 332 15-3 88 532 - 9 142 2-3 49 342 - 89 542 - 10 152 3-1 50 352 - 90 552 - 11 113 3-2 51 313 - 91 513 - 12 123 3-3 52 323 - 92 523 - 13 133 4-1 53 333 - 93 533 - 14 143 4-2 54 343 - 94 543 - 15 153 4-3 55 353 - 95 553 - 16 114 5-1 56 314 - 96 514 - 17 124 5-2 57 324 - 97 524 - 18 134 5-3 58 334 - 98 534 - 19 144 6-1 59 344 - 99 544 - 20 154 6-2 60 354 - 100 554 - 21 211 6-3 61 411 - 101 611 - 22 221 7-1 62 421 - 102 621 - 23 231 7-2 63 431 - 103 631 - 24 241 7-3 64 441 - 104 641 - 25 251 8-1 65 451 - 105 651 - 26 212 8-2 66 412 - 106 612 - 27 222 8-3 67 422 - 107 622 - 28 232 9-1 68 432 - 108 632 - 29 242 9-2 69 442 - 109 642 - 30 252 9-3 70 452 - 110 652 - 31 213 10-1 71 413 - 111 613 - 32 223 10-2 72 423 - 112 623 - 33 233 10-3 73 433 - 113 633 - 34 243 11-1 74 443 - 114 643 - 35 253 11-2 75 453 - 115 653 - 36 214 11-3 76 414 - 116 614 - 37 224 12-1 77 424 - 117 624 - 38 234 12-2 78 434 - 118 634 - 39 244 12-3 79 444 - 119 644 - 40 254 13-1 80 454 - 120 654 -


�� ##��$$�� %%�� To enter the Boot Menu, while powering up the controller, simultaneously press the “1” and the “CLEAR” keys. MM ASC/3 BOOT MENU MM-1 DOWNLOAD FILES • MM-1-1 DOWNLOAD CONTROLLER

IMAGE/SCREENS • MM-1-1-1 DOWNLOAD USING FTP • MM-1-1-2 DOWNLOAD USING ZMODEM • MM-1-2 DOWNLOAD SCREEN FILES ONLY • MM-1-2-1 DOWNLOAD USING FTP • MM-1-2-2 DOWNLOAD USING ZMODEM • MM-1-3 DOWNLOAD OPERATING SYSTEM IMAGE • MM-1-3-1 DOWNLOAD USING FTP • MM-1-3-2 DOWNLOAD USING ZMODEM • MM-1-4 DOWNLOAD AUX. APPLICATION • MM-1-4-1 DOWNLOAD USING FTP • MM-1-4-2 DOWNLOAD USING ZMODEM MM-2 UPLOAD OPTIONS • MM-2-1 UPLOAD CONTROLLER FILES • MM-2-2 UPLOAD DATABASE This is also in the main controller. MM-3 FILE SYSTEM • MM-3-1 FORMAT FILE SYSTEM • MM-3-2 REPAIR FILE SYSTEM • MM-3-3 SHOW FILE LIST

MM-4 SETUP NETWORK • MM-4-1 SET LOCAL IP ADDRESS • MM-4-2 SET LOCAL IP MASK • MM-4-3 SET FTP SERVER/HOST ADDRESS • MM-4-4 VIEW ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS • MM-4-5 SET CONSOLE (PORT 3A) BAUD RATE MM-4-5-1 9600 MM-4-5-2 19200 MM-4-5-3 38400 MM-4-5-4 57600 MM-4-5-5 115200 MM-5 SELECT APP • MM-5-1 asc3App MM-6 SET WORKING DIR • MM-6-1 set1 • MM-6-2 set2 MM-7 RUN H/W DIAGS • MM-7-1 DISPLAY • MM-7-2 KEYPAD • MM-7-3 PORT1 • MM-7-4 PORT2 • MM-7-5 PORT3A • MM-7-6 PORT3B • MM-7-7 TS2 “ABCD” I/O • MM-7-8 TELEMETRY I/O • MM-7-9 S-RAM • MM-7-0 ETHERNET • MM-7-A RTC/OTHER • MM-7-B DATA MODULE • MM-7-C AUTO-LOOP MM-8 CLOCK/CALENDAR MM-9 SHOW BOOT CONFIG MM-0 RESTART


�� ##��(($$��

��

CONNECTOR A 55 Pin (Plug) Type #22-55P PIN FUNCTION I/O A Fault Monitor [O] B +24 VDC External [O] C Voltage Monitor [O] D �1 Red [O] E �1 Don't Walk [O] F �2 Red [O] G �2 Don't Walk [O] H �2 Ped Clear [O] J �2 Walk [O] K Vehicle Detector 2 [I] L Ped Detector 2 [I] M �2 Hold [I] N Stop Time (Ring 1) [I] P Inhibit MaxTerm(Ring1) [I] R External Start [I] S Interval Advance [I] T Indicator Lamp Control [I] U AC-Common [I] V Chassis Ground [I] W Logic Ground [O] X Flashing Logic Out [O] Y Status Bit C (Ring1) [O] Z �1 Yellow [O] a �1 Ped Clear [O] b �2 Yellow [O] c �2 Green [O] d �2 Check [O] e �2 Phase On [O] f Vehicle Detector 1 [I] g Ped Detector 1 [I] h �1 Hold [I] i Force-Off (Ring 1) [I] j Ext Min Recall [I] k Manual Control Enable [I] m Call To Non Actuate I [I] n Test A [I] p AC+ (Control) [I] q I/O Mode Bit A [I] r Status Bit B (Ring 1) [O] s �1 Green [O] t �1 Walk [O] u �1 Check [O] v �2 Ped Omit [I] w Omit AllRed Clr(Ring1) [I] x Red Rest (Ring 1) [I] y I/O Mode Bit B [I] z Call To Non Act II [I] AA Test B [I] BB Walk Rest Modifier [I] CC Status Bit A (Ring 1) [O] DD �1 Phase On [O] EE �1 Ped Omit [I] FF Ped Recycle (Ring 1) [I] GG Max II Select(Ring 1) [I] HH I/O Mode Bit C [I]

CONNECTOR B 55 Pin (Socket) Type #22-55S PIN FUNCTION I/O A �1 Phase Next [O] B Preempt 2 Detector [I] C �2 Phase Next [O] D �3 Green [O] E �3 Yellow [O] F �3 Red [O] G �4 Red [O] H �4 Ped Clear [O] J �4 Don't Walk [O] K �4 Check [O] L Vehicle Detector 4 [I] M Ped Detector 4 [I] N Vehicle Detector 3 [I] P Ped Detector 3 [I] R �3 Phase Omit [I] S �2 Phase Omit [I] T �5 Ped Omit [I] U �1 Phase Omit [I] V Ped Recycle(Ring 2) [I] W Preempt 4 Detector [I] X Preempt 5 Detector [I] Y �3 Walk [O] Z �3 Ped Clear [O] a �3 Don't Walk [O] b �4 Green [O] c �4 Yellow [O] d �4 Walk [O] e �4 Phase On [O] f �4 Phase Next [O] g �4 Phase Omit [I] h �4 Hold [I] i �3 Hold [I] j �3 Ped Omit [I] k �6 Ped Omit [I] m �7 Ped Omit [I] n �8 Ped Omit [I] p Overlap A Yellow [O] q Overlap A Red [O] r �3 Check [O] s �3 Phase On [O] t �3 Phase Next [O] u Overlap D Red [O] v Preempt 6 Detector [I] w Overlap D Green [O] x �4 Ped Omit [I] y Free (No Coord) [I] z MaxII Select(Ring 2) [I] AA Overlap A Green [O] BB Overlap B Yellow [O] CC Overlap B Red [O] DD Overlap C Red [O] EE Overlap D Yellow [O] FF Overlap C Green [O] GG Overlap B Green [O] HH Overlap C Yellow [O]

CONNECTOR C 61 Pin (Socket) Type #24-61S PIN FUNCTION I/O A Status Bit A (Ring 2) [O] B Status Bit B (Ring 2) [O] C �8 Don't Walk [O] D �8 Red [O] E �7 Yellow [O] F �7 Red [O] G �6 Red [O] H �5 Red [O] J �5 Yellow [O] K �5 Ped Clear [O] L �5 Don't Walk [O] M �5 Phase Next [O] N �5 Phase On [O] P Vehicle Detector 5 [I] R Ped Detector 5 [I] S Vehicle Detector 6 [I] T Ped Detector 6 [I] U Ped Detector 7 [I] V Vehicle Detector 7 [I] W Ped Detector 8 [I] X �8 Hold Off [I] Y Force-Off (Ring 2) [I] Z Stop Time (Ring 2) [I] a Inhibit Max Term (Ring 2) [I] b Test C [I] c Status Bit C (Ring 2) [O] d �8 Walk [O] e �8 Yellow [O] f �7 Green [O] g �6 Green [O] h �6 Yellow [O] i �5 Green [O] j �5 Walk [O] k �5 Check [O] m �5 Hold [I] n �5 Phase Omit [I] p �6 Hold [I] q �6 Phase Omit [I] r �7 Phase Omit [I] s �8 Phase Omit [I] t Vehicle Detector 8 [I] u Red Rest Mode (Ring 2) [I] v Omit Red Clear (Ring 2) [I] w �8 Ped Clear [O] x �8 Green [O] y �7 Don't Walk [O] z �6 Don't Walk [O] AA �6 Ped Clear [O] BB �6 Check [O] CC �6 Phase On [O] DD �6 Phase Next [O] EE �7 Hold [I] FF �8 Check [O] GG �8 Phase On [O] HH �8 Phase Next [O] JJ �7 Walk [O] KK �7 Ped Clear [O] LL �6 Walk [O] MM �7 Check [O] NN �7 Phase On [O] PP �7 Phase Next [O]

INTERFACE CONNECTOR PIN LISTS I/O MODE BITS (3 PER UNIT)


Mode Bit States State # A B C Names 0 OFF OFF OFF TS 1 Compatible 1 ON OFF OFF Hardwire Interconnect 2 OFF ON OFF System Interface 3 ON ON OFF Reserved 4 OFF OFF ON Reserved 5 ON OFF ON Reserved 6 OFF ON ON Manufacturer Specific 7 ON ON ON Manufacturer Specific Voltage Levels: OFF = +24; ON = 0V

MODE 0 INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTIONS



Inputs: Pin Function A-h Phase 1 Hold A-M Phase 2 Hold B-i Phase 3 Hold B-h Phase 4 Hold C-m Phase 5 Hold C-p Phase 6 Hold C-EE Phase 7 Hold C-X Phase 8 Hold B-U Phase 1 Phase Omit B-S Phase 2 Phase Omit B-R Phase 3 Phase Omit B-g Phase 4 Phase Omit C-n Phase 5 Phase Omit C-q Phase 6 Phase Omit C-r Phase 7 Phase Omit C-s Phase 8 Phase Omit A-EE Phase 1 Ped Omit A-v Phase 2 Ped Omit B-j Phase 3 Ped Omit B-x Phase 4 Ped Omit B-T Phase 5 Ped Omit B-k Phase 6 Ped Omit B-m Phase 7 Ped Omit B-n Phase 8 Ped Omit Outputs: Pin Function A-DD Phase 1 Phase On A-e Phase 2 Phase On B-s Phase 3 Phase On B-e Phase 4 Phase On C-N Phase 5 Phase On C-CC Phase 6 Phase On C-NN Phase 7 Phase On C-GG Phase 8 Phase On B-A Phase 1 Phase Next B-C Phase 2 Phase Next B-t Phase 3 Phase Next B-f Phase 4 Phase Next C-M Phase 5 Phase Next C-DD Phase 6 Phase Next C-PP Phase 7 Phase Next C-HH Phase 8 Phase Next A-u Phase 1 Check A-d Phase 2 Check B-r Phase 3 Check B-K Phase 4 Check C-k Phase 5 Check C-BB Phase 6 Check C-MM Phase 7 Check C-FF Phase 8 Check

Inputs: Pin Function A-h Preempt 1 A-M Preempt 3 B-i Vehicle Detector 9 B-h Vehicle Detector 10 C-m Vehicle Detector 13 C-p Vehicle Detector 14 C-EE Vehicle Detector 15 C-X Vehicle Detector 16 B-U Vehicle Detector 11 B-S Vehicle Detector 12 B-R Timing Plan C B-g Timing Plan D C-n Alternate Sequence A C-q Alternate Sequence B C-r Alternate Sequence C C-s Alternate Sequence D A-EE Dimming Enable A-v Automatic Flash B-j Timing Plan A B-x Timing Plan B B-T Offset 1 B-k Offset 2 B-m Offset 3 B-n TBC On Line

Outputs: Pin Function A-DD Preempt 1 Status A-e Preempt 3 Status B-s TBC Auxiliary 1 B-e TBC Auxiliary 2 C-N Timing Plan A C-CC Timing Plan B C-NN Offset 1 C-GG Offset 2 B-A Preempt 2 Status B-C Preempt 4 Status B-t Preempt 5 Status B-f Preempt 6 Status C-M Offset 3 C-DD Timing Plan C C-PP Timing Plan D C-HH Reserved A-u Free/Coord Status A-d Automatic Flash B-r TBC Auxiliary 3 B-K Reserved C-k Reserved C-BB Reserved C-MM Reserved C-FF Reserved

Inputs: Pin Function A-h Preempt 1 A-M Preempt 3 B-i Vehicle Detector 9 B-h Vehicle Detector 10 C-m Vehicle Detector 13 C-p Vehicle Detector 14 C-EE Vehicle Detector 15 C-X Vehicle Detector 16 B-U Vehicle Detector 11 B-S Vehicle Detector 12 B-R Vehicle Detector 17 B-g Vehicle Detector 18 C-n Vehicle Detector 19 C-q Vehicle Detector 20 C-r Alarm 1 C-s Alarm 2 A-EE Dimming Enable A-v Local Flash Status B-j Address Bit 0 B-x Address Bit 1 B-T Address Bit 2 B-k Address Bit 3 B-m Address Bit 4 B-n MMU Flash Status

Outputs: Pin Function A-DD Preempt 1 Status A-e Preempt 3 Status B-s TBC Auxiliary 1 B-e TBC Auxiliary 2 C-N Timing Plan A C-CC Timing Plan B C-NN Offset 1 C-GG Offset 2 B-A Preempt 2 Status B-C Preempt 4 Status B-t Preempt 5 Status B-f Preempt 6 Status C-M Offset 3 C-DD Timing Plan C C-PP Timing Plan D C-HH Reserved A-u Free/Coord Status A-d Automatic Flash B-r TBC Auxiliary 3 B-K Reserved C-k System Special Function 1 C-BB System Special Function 2 C-MM System Special Function 3 C-FF System Special Function 4


INTERFACE CONNECTOR PIN LISTS CONNECTOR D PIN FUNCTION I/O 25 SYSTEM COMMAND CYCLE BIT 1 INPUT [I] 35 SYSTEM COMMAND CYCLE BIT 2 INPUT [I] 6 SYSTEM COMMAND CYCLE BIT 3 INPUT [I] 12 SYSTEM COMMAND OFFSET BIT 1 INPUT/ [I] EXTERNAL ADDRESS BIT 0 [I] 10 SYSTEM COMMAND OFFSET BIT 2 INPUT/ [I] EXTERNAL ADDRESS BIT 1 [I] 36 SYSTEM COMMAND OFFSET BIT 3 INPUT/ [I] EXTERNAL ADDRESS BIT 2 [I] 16 SYSTEM COMMAND SPLIT BIT 1 INPUT/ [I] EXTERNAL ADDRESS BIT 3 [I] 9 SYSTEM COMMAND SPLIT BIT 2 INPUT/ [I] EXTERNAL ADDRESS BIT 4 [I] 4 SYSTEM COMMAND COORD SYNC INPUT [I]

NOTE: Tx pins at the BIU are Rx pins at the controller. Rx pins at the BIU are Tx pins at the controller.

26 COORD FREE [I] 60 AUTOMATIC FLASH [I] 3 SPLIT DEMAND [I] 38 DUAL COORD [I] 14 TIME RESET [I] 20 TEST INPUT C [I] 37 TEST INPUT D [I] 19 TEST INPUT E [I] 57 PREEMPTOR CALL #1 [I] 49 PREEMPTOR CALL #2 [I] 50 PREEMPTOR CALL #3/BUS PREEMPTOR #1 [I] 55 PREEMPTOR CALL #4/BUS PREEMPTOR #2 [I] 56 PREEMPTOR CALL #5/BUS PREEMPTOR #3 [I] 61 PREEMPTOR CALL #6/BUS PREEMPTOR #4 [I] 58 CMU STOP TIME (CONFLICT FLASH) [I] 17 EXPANDED DETECTOR #1 [I] 47 EXPANDED DETECTOR #2 [I] 31 EXPANDED DETECTOR #3 [I] 18 EXPANDED DETECTOR #4 [I] 30 EXPANDED DETECTOR #5 [I] 39 EXPANDED DETECTOR #6 [I] 40 EXPANDED DETECTOR #7 [I] 13 EXPANDED DETECTOR #8 [I]

NOTE: Priority preemptors 1 & 2 respond to any NEMA defined input applied to Preemptor Call input 1 & 2, respectively.

Priority preemptors 3-6 respond to any NEMA defined input applied for at least 0.8 seconds to Preemptor Call inputs 3-6, respectively.

Bus Preemptors 1-4 respond to a pulsing (1pps at 50% duty cycle) NEMA defined input applied to Preemptor Call input 3-6, respectively.

PIN FUNCTION I/O 43 SYSTEM COMMAND CYCLE BIT 1 OUTPUT [O] 44 SYSTEM COMMAND CYCLE BIT 2 OUTPUT [O] 29 SYSTEM COMMAND CYCLE BIT 3 OUTPUT [O] 33 SYSTEM COMMAND OFFSET BIT 1 OUTPUT [O] 42 SYSTEM COMMAND OFFSET BIT 2 OUTPUT [O] 2 SYSTEM COMMAND OFFSET BIT 3 OUTPUT [O] 21 SYSTEM COMMAND SPLIT BIT 1 OUTPUT [O] 46 SYSTEM COMMAND SPLIT BIT 2 OUTPUT [O] 53 SYSTEM COMMAND SYNC OUT [O]


INTERFACE CONNECTOR PIN LISTS PIN FUNCTION I/O 23 PREEMPTOR #1 ACTIVE [O] 32 PREEMPTOR #2 ACTIVE [O] 22 PREEMPTOR #3 ACTIVE [O] 34 PREEMPTOR #4 ACTIVE [O] 1 PREEMPTOR #5 ACTIVE [O] 48 PREEMPTOR #6 ACTIVE [O] 59 PREEMPT CMU INTERLOCK [O] 15 PREEMPTOR FLASH CONTROL [O]

(1K PULL UP) [O] 27 COORD STATUS [O] 5 CROSS STREET SYNC [O] 28 NIC SPECIAL FUNCTION 1 [O] 8 NIC SPECIAL FUNCTION 2 [O] 24 NIC SPECIAL FUNCTION 3/ [O]

SPARE OUTPUT 1 [O] 11 NIC SPECIAL FUNCTION 4/ [O]

SPARE OUTPUT 2 [O] 41 SPARE OUTPUT 4 [O] 45 SPARE OUTPUT 5 [O] 51 SPARE OUTPUT 6 [O] 52 SPARE OUTPUT 7 [O] 54 SPARE OUTPUT 8 [O]

Port 3B 25 pin TELEMETRY CONNECTOR PIN FUNCTION I/O 3 SYSTEM DETECTOR A1 [I] 2 SYSTEM DETECTOR A2 [I] 5 SYSTEM DETECTOR B1 [I] 19 SYSTEM DETECTOR B2 [I] 4 SYSTEM DETECTOR C1 [I] 1 SYSTEM DETECTOR C2 [I] 7 SYSTEM DETECTOR D1 [I] 8 SYSTEM DETECTOR D2 [I] 18 LOCAL FLASH [I] 20 CONFLICT FLASH [I] 16 DOOR OPEN [I] (MAINTENANCE REQUIRED) [I] 17 ALARM 1 [I] 21 ALARM 2 [I] 14 TLM SPARE 1 [I] 6 TLM SPARE 2 [I] 15 EXTERNAL ADDRESS ENABLE [I] 24 RECEIVE 1 [O] 25 RECEIVE 2 [O] 12 TRANSMIT 1 [O] 13 TRANSMIT 2 [O] 9 TLM SPECIAL FUNCTION 1 [O] 22 TLM SPECIAL FUNCTION 2 [O] 10 TLM SPECIAL FUNCTION 3 [O] 23 TLM SPECIAL FUNCTION 4 [O]


PORT 1 SDLC PIN FUNCTION I/O 1 Tx Data + [O] 2 Logic Ground [-] 3 Tx Clock + [O] 4 Logic Ground [-] 5 Rx Data + [I] 6 Logic Ground [-] 7 Rx Clock + [I] 8 Logic Ground [-] 9 Tx Data - [O] 10 Port 1 Disable [I] (0VDC=disable) 11 Tx Clock - [O] 12 Chassis Ground [-] 13 Rx Data - [I] 14 Reserved 15 Rx Clock - [I]

NOTE: Tx pins at the BIU are Rx pins at the controller. Rx pins at the BIU are Tx pins at the controller.

TYPE 1 POWER PIN FUNCTION I/O A AC Neutral [I] B Not Used C AC Line [I] D Not Used E Not Used F Fault Monitor [O] G Logic Ground [O] H Chassis Ground [I] I Not Used

J Not Used

PORT 2 TERMINAL PIN FUNCTION I/O 1 Chassis Ground [-] 2 Transmit Data [O] 3 Receive Data [I] 4 Request To Send [O] 5 Clear To Send [I] 6 Not Used 7 Logic Ground [-] 8 Data Carrier Det [I] 9-19 Not Used 20 Data Termnl Ready [O] 21-25 Not Used

PORT 3A EIA-232 TELEMETRY PIN FUNCTION I/O 1 DXD 2 RXD 3 TXD 4 DTR 5 GND 6 DSR 7 RTS 8 NC 9 NC

PORT 3B 9-PIN TELEMETRY CONNECTOR PIN FUNCTION I/O 1 Transmit 1 [O] 2 Transmit 2 [O] 3 Reserved 4 Receive 1 [I] 5 Receive 2 [I] 6 Chassis Ground [-] 7 Reserved 8 Reserved 9 Chassis Ground [-]


�� ##��$$��

��

Pin Function 1a +24 VDC IN 1b +24 VDC IN 2a Output 1 2b Output 2 3a Output 3 3b Output 4 4a Output 5 4b Output 6 5a Output 7 5b Output 8 6a Output 9 6b Output 10 7a Output 11 7b Output 12 8a Output 13 8b Output 14 9a Output 15 9b Input/Output 1 10a Input/Output 2 10b Input/Output 3 11a Input/Output 4 11b Input/Output 5 12a Input/Output 6 12b Input/Output 7 13a Input/Output 8 13b Input/Output 9 14a Input/Output 10 14b Input/Output 11 15a Input/Output 12 15b Input/Output 13 16a Input/Output 14 16b Input/Output 15 17a Input/Output 16 17b Input/Output 17 18a Input/Output 18 18b Input/Output 19 19a Input/Output 20 19b Input/Output 21 20a Input/Output 22 20b Input/Output 23 21a Input/Output 24 21b Input 1 22a Input 2 22b Input 3 23a Input 4 23b Input 5 24a Input 6 24b Input 7 25a Input 8 25b Opto Input 1 26a Opto Input 2 26b Opto Input 3 27a Opto Input 4 27b Opto Common 28a Address Select 0 28b Address Select 1 29a Address Select 2 29b Address Select 3 30a 30b Data Transmit (reserved) 31b Data Receive (reserved) 31a Line Frequency Reference 32b Logic Ground

TF #1 Function Load Switch 1 Red Driver Load Switch 1 Yellow Driver Load Switch 1 Green Driver Load Switch 2 Red Driver Load Switch 2 Yellow Driver Load Switch 2 Green Driver Load Switch 3 Red Driver Load Switch 3 Yellow Driver Load Switch 3 Green Driver Load Switch 4 Red Driver Load Switch 4 Yellow Driver Load Switch 4 Green Driver Load Switch 5 Red Driver Load Switch 5 Yellow Driver Load Switch 5 Green Driver Load Switch 6 Red Driver [O] Load Switch 6 Yellow Driver [O] Load Switch 6 Green Driver [O] Load Switch 7 Red Driver [O] Load Switch 7 Yellow Driver [O] Load Switch 7 Green Driver [O] Load Switch 8 Red Driver [O] Load Switch 8 Yellow Driver [O] Load Switch 8 Green Driver [O] TBC Aux #1 Output [O] TBC Aux #2 Output [O] Preempt 1 Output [O] Preempt 2 Output [O] Preempt 1 Input [I} Preempt 2 Input [I] Test Input A [I] Test Input B [I] Automatic Flash [I] Dimming Enable [I] Manual Control Enable [I] Interval Advance [I] External Minimum Recall [I] External Start [I] TBC ON Line [I] Stop Time Ring 1 (Stop Time) Stop Time Ring 2 Max II Selection Ring 1 Max II Selection Ring 2 Force Off Ring 1 (Force Off) Force Off Ring 2 Call To Non Act I Walk Rest Modifier Phase 1 Ped Call Phase 2 Ped Call Phase 3 Ped Call Phase 4 Ped Call 12 VAC Open Open Open Open

TF #2 Function Load Switch 9 Red Driver Load Switch 9 Yellow Driver Load Switch 9 Green Driver Load Switch 10 Red Driver Load Switch 10 Yellow Driver Load Switch 10 Green Driver Load Switch 11 Red Driver Load Switch 11 Yellow Driver Load Switch 11 Green Driver Load Switch 12 Red Driver Load Switch 12 Yellow Driver Load Switch 12 Green Driver Load Switch 13 Red Driver Load Switch 13 Yellow Driver Load Switch 13 Green Driver Load Switch 14 Red Driver [O] Load Switch 14 Yellow Driver [O] Load Switch 14 Green Driver [O] Load Switch 15 Red Driver [O] Load Switch 15 Yellow Driver [O] Load Switch 15 Green Driver [O] Load Switch 16 Red Driver [O] Load Switch 16 Yellow Driver [O] Load Switch 16 Green Driver [O] TBC Aux #3 Output [O] Free/Coord Status [O] Preempt 3 Output [O] Preempt 4 Output [O] Preempt 5 Output [O] Preempt 6 Output [O] Preempt 3 Input [I] Preempt 4 Input [I] Preempt 5 Input [I] Preempt 6 Input [I] Call To Nonactuated II [I] Spare Spare Spare Spare Inhibit Max Ring 1 Inhibit Max Ring 2 Local Flash MMU Flash Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Free (No Coord) Test Input C Phase 5 Ped Call (Signal Plan A) Phase 6 Ped Call (Signal Plan B) Phase 7 Ped Call Phase 8 Ped Call 12 VAC Logic GND Open Open Open

TF #3 Function Timing Plan A Output Timing Plan B Output Timing Plan C Output Timing Plan D Output Offset 1 Output Offset 2 Output Offset 3 Output Automatic Flash System Special Func 1 System Special Func 2 System Special Func 3 System Special Func 4 Reserved Reserved Reserved Ring 1 Status Bit A [O] Ring 1 Status Bit B [O] Ring 1 Status Bit C [O] Ring 2 Status Bit A [O] Ring 2 Status Bit B [O] Ring 2 Status Bit C [O] Red Rest Ring 1 [I] Red Rest Ring 2 [I] Omit All Red Ring 1 [I] Omit All Red Ring 2 [I] Red Recycle Ring 1 [I] Red Recycle Ring 2 [I] Alternate Sequence A [I] Alternate Sequence B [I] Alternate Sequence C [I] Alternate Sequence D [I] Phase Omit 1 [I] Phase Omit 2 [I] Phase Omit 3 [I] Phase Omit 4 [I] Phase Omit 5 [I] Phase Omit 6 [I] Phase Omit 7 [I] Phase Omit 8 [I] Hold Phase 1 Hold Phase 2 Hold Phase 3 Hold Phase 4 Hold Phase 5 Hold Phase 6 Hold Phase 7 Hold Phase 8 Timing Plan A Input Timing Plan B Input Timing Plan C Input Timing Plan D Input Interconnect Common Open Logic GND Open Open

TF #4 Function Phase 1 On Phase 2 On Phase 3 On Phase 4 On Phase 5 On Phase 6 On Phase 7 On Phase 8 On Phase 1 Next Phase 2 Next Phase 3 Next Phase 4 Next Phase 5 Next Phase 6 Next Phase 7 Next Phase 8 Next [O] Phase 1 Check [O] Phase 2 Check [O] Phase 3 Check [O] Phase 4 Check [O] Phase 5 Check [O] Phase 6 Check [O] Phase 7 Check [O] Phase 8 Check [O] Address Bit 0 [I] Address Bit 1 [I] Address Bit 2 [I] Address Bit 3 [I] Address Bit 4 [I] Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Ped Omit 1 Ped Omit 2 Ped Omit 3 Ped Omit 4 Ped Omit 5 Ped Omit 6 Ped Omit 7 Ped Omit 8 Offset 1 Input Offset 2 Input Offset 3 Input Spare Interconnect Common Log GND Log GND Open Open


Pin Function 1a +24 VDC IN 1b +24 VDC IN 2a Output 1 2b Output 2 3a Output 3 3b Output 4 4a Output 5 4b Output 6 5a Output 7 5b Output 8 6a Output 9 6b Output 10 7a Output 11 7b Output 12 8a Output 13 8b Output 14 9a Output 15 9b Input/Output 1 10a Input/Output 2 10b Input/Output 3 11a Input/Output 4 11b Input/Output 5 12a Input/Output 6 12b Input/Output 7 13a Input/Output 8 13b Input/Output 9 14a Input/Output 10 14b Input/Output 11 15a Input/Output 12 15b Input/Output 13 16a Input/Output 14 16b Input/Output 15 17a Input/Output 16 17b Input/Output 17 18a Input/Output 18 18b Input/Output 19 19a Input/Output 20 19b Input/Output 21 20a Input/Output 22 20b Input/Output 23 21a Input/Output 24 21b Input 1 22a Input 2 22b Input 3 23b Input 4 23a Input 5 24b Input 6 24a Input 7 25a Input 8 25b Opto Input 1 26a Opto Input 2 26b Opto Input 3 27a Opto Input 4 27b Opto Common 28b Address Select 0 28a Address Select 1 29b Address Select 2 29a Address Select 3 30b Data Transmit (reserved) 30a Data Receive (reserved) 31b Earth Ground 31a Line Frequency Reference 32b Logic Ground

DET #1 Function Detector Reset Slot ½ Detector Reset Slot 3/4 Detector Reset Slot 5/6 Detector Reset Slot 7/8 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Channel 1 Call [I] Channel 2 Call [I] Channel 3 Call [I] Channel 4 Call [I] Channel 5 Call [I] Channel 6 Call [I] Channel 7 Call [I] Channel 8 Call [I] Channel 9 Call [I] Channel 10 Call [I] Channel 11 Call [I] Channel 12 Call [I] Channel 13 Call [I] Channel 14 Call [I] Channel 15 Call [I] Channel 16 Call [I] Channel 1 Fault Status [I] Channel 2 Fault Status [I] Channel 3 Fault Status [I] Channel 4 Fault Status [I] Channel 5 Fault Status [I] Channel 6 Fault Status [I] Channel 7 Fault Status [I] Channel 8 Fault Status [I] Channel 9 Fault Status Channel 10 Fault Status Channel 11 Fault Status Channel 12 Fault Status Channel 13 Fault Status Channel 14 Fault Status Channel 15 Fault Status Channel 16 Fault Status Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved - - - Logic GND

DET #2 Function Channel 17 Call [I] Channel 18 Call [I] Channel 19 Call [I] Channel 20 Call [I] Channel 21 Call [I] Channel 22 Call [I] Channel 23 Call [I] Channel 24 Call [I] Channel 25 Call [I] Channel 26 Call [I] Channel 27 Call [I] Channel 28 Call [I] Channel 29 Call [I] Channel 30 Call [I] Channel 31 Call [I] Channel 32 Call [I] Channel 17 Fault Status [I] Channel 18 Fault Status [I] Channel 19 Fault Status [I] Channel 20 Fault Status [I] Channel 21 Fault Status [I] Channel 22 Fault Status [I] Channel 23 Fault Status [I] Channel 24 Fault Status [I] Channel 25 Fault Status Channel 26 Fault Status Channel 27 Fault Status Channel 28 Fault Status Channel 29 Fault Status Channel 30 Fault Status Channel 31 Fault Status Channel 32 Fault Status Logic GND - - Logic GND

DET #3 Function Channel 33 Call [I] Channel 34 Call [I] Channel 35 Call [I] Channel 36 Call [I] Channel 37 Call [I] Channel 38 Call [I] Channel 39 Call [I] Channel 40 Call [I] Channel 41 Call [I] Channel 42 Call [I] Channel 43 Call [I] Channel 44 Call [I] Channel 45 Call [I] Channel 46 Call [I] Channel 47 Call [I] Channel 48 Call [I] Channel 33 Fault Status [I] Channel 34 Fault Status [I] Channel 35 Fault Status [I] Channel 36 Fault Status [I] Channel 37 Fault Status [I] Channel 38 Fault Status [I] Channel 39 Fault Status [I] Channel 40 Fault Status [I] Channel 41 Fault Status Channel 42 Fault Status Channel 43 Fault Status Channel 44 Fault Status Channel 45 Fault Status Channel 46 Fault Status Channel 47 Fault Status Channel 48 Fault Status - Logic GND - Logic GND

DET #4 Function Channel 49 Call [I] Channel 50 Call [I] Channel 51Call [I] Channel 52 Call [I] Channel 53 Call [I] Channel 54 Call [I] Channel 55 Call [I] Channel 56 Call [I] Channel 57 Call [I] Channel 58 Call [I] Channel 59 Call [I] Channel 60 Call [I] Channel 61 Call [I] Channel 62 Call [I] Channel 63 Call [I] Channel 64 Call [I] Channel 49 Fault Status [I] Channel 50 Fault Status [I] Channel 51 Fault Status [I] Channel 52 Fault Status [I] Channel 53 Fault Status [I] Channel 54 Fault Status [I] Channel 55 Fault Status [I] Channel 56 Fault Status [I] Channel 57 Fault Status Channel 58 Fault Status Channel 59 Fault Status Channel 60 Fault Status Channel 61 Fault Status Channel 62 Fault Status Channel 63 Fault Status Channel 64 Fault Status Logic GND Logic GND - Logic G


�� ##��$$��

�� SUMMARY

The Logic Processor provides a means to command the controller inputs and outputs based upon a set of logical statements. This increases the flexibility of the controller and allows the knowledgeable user to implement and verify modifications to the operation of the ASC/3.

Each statement can be controlled by manual data entry (MM-1-8-1) or Time base Action Plan (MM-5-4). It is recommended that the statements that are being developed be programmed in MM-1-8-1 as “D” (disabled). Once the complete operation is developed and ready for evaluation, the statements can be programmed as “E” (enabled). When the statements operate correctly, the statements can be left enabled (E) or put under Time Base action plan (MM-5-4) control (“.”).

Caution: The controller must be on the bench and not operating an intersection when the Logic Processor is

being programmed. If there is any question about the programming of the ASC/3 Logic Processor, contact your Econolite representative before allowing the controller to be installed in an intersection.

Logical Statements The format of the logic processor shall be based upon If-Then-Else conditional logic statements. The logic statements are divided into the following three parts:

• IF (conditional statement) • THEN (executable statement) • ELSE (executable statement)

Conditional Statements Each conditional statement is comprised of up to 10 testable elements. Testable elements are conditions within the controller that can be evaluated to be either true or false. Examples of testable elements include:

• Phase 2 green is on • Vehicle detector #1 is on • Preempt delay timer > 5 seconds. (“>” Means “Is greater than”) • Coordination plan is FREE

Testable elements can be linked together to form a conditional statement. Since each testable element results in either a true or false condition, linking of several testable elements into a conditional statement will also result in a true or false condition. Linking occurs through the following logical operators:

• AND • OR • NAND (not AND) • NOR (not OR) • XOR

The following table demonstrates the resultant condition for these logical operators:

Statement 1 Statement 2 Results TRUE Results FALSE TRUE TRUE AND, OR NAND, NOR, XOR TRUE FALSE OR, NAND, XOR AND, NOR FALSE TRUE OR, NAND, XOR AND, NOR FALSE FALSE NAND, NOR AND, OR, XOR


LOGIC PROCESSOR OPERATION Following the previous example, the testable elements could be linked into a conditional statement as:

1. IF Phase 2 Green is on 2. AND Vehicle detector #1 is on 3. OR Preempt delay timer > 5 seconds

Every one tenth of a second, this expression is evaluated to either true or false.

Conditional statements are evaluated from top to bottom. The first two elements are evaluated, the result of which will be evaluated against the third element. This result of this will be evaluated against the next element, and so on. This process continues for all testable elements in the IF statement. Continuing the previous example, assume that phase 2 is green. vehicle detector #1 is off and the preempt delay timer is at 10 seconds. The following is the result when each testable element is evaluated independently:

1. IF Phase 2 Green is on (TRUE) 2. AND Vehicle detector #1 is on (FALSE) 3. OR Preempt delay timer > 5 seconds (TRUE)

Evaluating the first two testable elements yields false:

TRUE (1) AND FALSE (2) = FALSE (1 and 2)

OR’ing this result to the third testable element yields the result for the complete conditional statement:

FALSE (1 and 2) OR TRUE (3) = TRUE (1-3)

IMPORTANT NOTE: The order of conditional statements is VERY important. In the above example if statement 2 and 3 are reversed, the following is the result.

1. IF Phase 2 Green is on (TRUE) 2. OR Preempt delay timer > 5 seconds (TRUE) 3. AND Vehicle detector #1 is on (FALSE)

Evaluating the first two testable elements yields false:

TRUE (1) AND TRUE (2) = TRUE (1 and 2)

AND’ing this result to the third testable element yields the result for the complete conditional statement:

TRUE (1 and 2) AND FALSE (3) = FALSE (1-3)

Executable Statements Once the result of the conditional statements is determined, the user specifies what the controller shall do when these statements are true (THEN) or false (ELSE). Each resultant action is comprised of up to 5 executable elements.

Examples of executable elements include:

• Set Vehicle Detector #2 ON • Delay 10 seconds • Set Phase 10 Green output OFF

Up to 5 executable elements shall be programmable when the conditional statement yields TRUE. These statements are categorized as THEN statements. When the conditional statement yields FALSE, up to 5 “ELSE” statements shall be executed.


LOGIC PROCESSOR OPERATION Adding these elements to the preceding example:

IF Phase 2 Green is on (TRUE) AND Vehicle detector #1 is on (FALSE) OR Preempt delay timer > 5 seconds (TRUE)

| | �Conditional Statement |

THEN Set Vehicle Detector #2 ON Set Phase 10 Green output OFF

| �Executable Statements | resulting from a TRUE | conditional.

ELSE Set Vehicle Detector #2 OFF Set Phase 10 Green output ON

| �Executable Statements | resulting from a FALSE | conditional.

For this example, when the conditional statement is true, the logic processor will set vehicle detector #2 ON and phase 10 green output off. When the conditional statement is false, the logic processor will set vehicle detector #2 off and phase 10 green output on.

CAUTION: When phase colors are being controlled, the complete set of phase indications needs to be considered.

In this example, the THEN statement turns Phase 10 Green off. If it was on, there will be no color output for that phase. The intersection would go to a Red Fail flash condition if the controller is operating in a TS2 environment.

Similarly, the ELSE statement turns Phase 10 Green on. If it was off, there will be two color outputs for that phase. The intersection would go to a Dual Indication flash condition if the controller is operating in a TS2 environment.

DELAY TIMERS Delay timers can be set as an executable statement to temporarily suspend execution of certain statements. When an executable statement that contains a delay interval is encountered, the delay timer shall begin timing down from its programmed value. All remaining executable elements shall be disregarded until the delay timer has expired. The delay timer will continue timing as long as the conditional statement remains in a constant state. If the resultant of the conditional statement changes, the delay timer shall be reset.

Adding a delay timer to the previous example illustrates this behavior:


| | <-Conditional Statement |

THEN Set Vehicle Detector #2 ON Delay 3 seconds

Set Phase 10 Green output OFF

| | <- Executable Statements | resulting from a TRUE | conditional.

ELSE Set Vehicle Detector #2 OFF Delay 5 seconds

Set Phase 10 Green output ON

| | <- Executable Statements | resulting from a FALSE | conditional.

In this example, when the conditional statement evaluates true, Vehicle detector #2 will turn on immediately. If this statement remains consistently true for 3 or more seconds, phase 10 green output will turn off. When the conditional statement evaluates false, vehicle detector #2 will turn off immediately. If the conditional statement remains false for 5 or more seconds, phase 10 green output will be turned on. When the conditional statement changes value, all delay timers are cleared and must be retimed.


Multiple delay timers can be placed within a single logical statement as shown in the following example.


THEN Set Vehicle Detector #2 ON Delay 3 seconds

Set Phase 10 Green output OFF Delay 3 seconds Set Phase 10 Green output ON

In this example when the conditional expression remains true, vehicle detector #2 will turn on. 3 seconds later phase 10 green output will turn off if it is on. 3 seconds after that point, it will turn on as long as the expression is true or Phase 10 green is on.

THEN Set Vehicle Detector #2 ON Set Phase 10 Green output OFF Delay 3 seconds Delay 3 seconds Set Phase 10 Green output ON

IMPORTANT NOTE: The order of executable statements and delay statements is VERY important. In the above example if the THEN executable statement 2 and 3 are reversed, the following is the result:

This results in a statement the sets Vehicle Detector #2 ON and Phase 10 Green OFF. It then turns Phase 10 Green ON six seconds later.

LOGIC FLAGS The ASC/3 supports 100 user-settable logic flags. The logic flags shall be Boolean (true or false) valued. The flags are accessible as testable elements and settable through executable statements. These flags shall be initialized to false upon controller restart. Flags set on shall remain latched on until explicitly set off. A typical usage for flags is as a mechanism to link several conditional statements together. The following example illustrates this usage:

Statement #1: IF …(10 testable elements) THEN Set logic flag #1 on;

Statement #2 IF Logic Flag #1 is on

AND … (Up to 9 more testable elements)

THEN Set Logic Flag #2 ON.



THEN …

This example uses two logic flags to link 3 logical statements together. In total up to 28 testable elements may be linked together in this example.


IMPORTANT NOTE: The order of executable statements and setting of logic flags is VERY important. In the above example if the statement 2 and 3 are reversed, the following is the result:

Statement #1: IF …(10 testable elements) THEN Set logic flag #1 on;



Statement #2 IF Logic Flag #1 is on AND … (Up to 9 more testable elements)

THEN Set Logic Flag #2 ON.

In this example, statement 3 is not evaluated until the next tenth of a second because the logic flag controlling it is not set until after it is required.

TESTABLE ELEMENTS The following list of testable elements shall be supported: All states are testable as ON or OFF. All timers are supported with greater than, less than, equal to, and not equal to testability of a user-defined value. Phase (0-16) States: (Phase 0 = any phase)

Green Yellow Clearance Red Clearance ON Next Check Ped Check Walk Ped Clearance Don’t Walk Omit Ped Omit Hold Force Off Call

Ped Call Detector Failure - - - - - - - - - - - -

Ring (1-4) Timers: (Phase 0 = any phase) MIN GREEN MAX GREEN WALK

YELLOW CLEAR RED CLEAR PED CLEAR

Ring Status (1-4)

INHIBIT MAX TERM MAX 2 MAX 3 OMIT RED CLEARANCE

RED REST PED RECYCLE FORCE OFF STOP TIME


Overlap 1-16 (Note: 1-16 is A-P respectively)

Overlap ON Overlap Green Overlap Green Extension Overlap Yellow Overlap Red Clearance Overlap Red -

Overlap Omit Overlap Walk Overlap Ped Clear Overlap Don’t Walk - - -

Coordination Status:

Coord Plan Flash Active Coord Plan Free Active Coord In Step Test Plan x (1-120) Active Check Current Cycle Length Check Current Offset value Check Current Split value/phase

Coordination Timers: Master Clock Local Clock Active Split Timer (ring)

Preemption Status: (# 0 = any preemption) Preempt input (#) is active. Preempt Run (#) is active. Preempt state = Wait for Preempt Preempt state = Delay Preempt state = Adv to Track Clr Preempt state = Track Clear Preempt state = Adv to Dwell Preempt state = Dwell Preempt state = Cycling interval Preempt state = Cycling Delay Preempt state = Adv to Flash

Preempt state = Flash Preempt state = Flash Delay Preempt state = Advance to Exit

Preemption Timers:

Delay Timer for preempt (#) Reservice Timer for preempt (#) MaxCall Timer for active preempt Duration Timer for active preempt MinDwell Tmr for active preempt TrackGreen Tmr for active PMT Cycling Delay Tmr for active PMT Hold Green Tmr for active PMT

Vehicle Detector 1-64 (0 = invalid entry)

Vehicle Det (#) is ON/OFF Vehicle Det Failure (#) is ON/OFF Vehicle Detector in Timer Delay Vehicle Detector in Timer Extend

DETECTOR VOLUME DETECTOR OCCUPANCY

Pedestrian Detector 0-16: (#0 = any detector) Pedestrian Detector (#) is ON/OFF Pedestrian Det (#): Absence Fail is ON/OFF Pedestrian Det (#): Lock Fail is ON/OFF Pedestrian Det (#): Erratic Fail is ON/OFF

TOD StatusMonth

Day Day of Week Hour Minute Second 1/10 of second


Logic Statement 1-100 is ON/OFF Logic Flag 1-100 is ON/OFF CIB/COB status All bits in the CIB and COB may be tested directly by bit number. NOTE: Some of these may also correspond to test conditions listed above.

Executable Statements The following list of executable statements is supported.

SET / CLEAR Phase 1-16 – Outputs (COB)PHASE GREEN PHASE YELLOW PHASE RED PHASE WALK PHASE PED CLR PHS DON'T WALK

SET / CLEAR Phase 1-16 – Inputs (CIB)PED DET HOLD PHASE OMIT PHASE OMIT PED PHASE CALL PHASE CALL PED PHASE

CALL BIKE PHASE PED2 DET PED EXT DET RED EXT DET CALL PED2

SET / CLEAR Overlap 1-16 (NOTE: 1-16 is A-P respectively)

OVLP GREEN OVLP YELLOW OVLP RED

TERM OVLP A-P NOW OMIT OVLP A-P

SET / CLEAR Load Switch 1-16 (NOTE: These are only applicable for use in TS2 type 1 configurations.)

LDSW GRN/WLK LDSW YEL/PCLR LDSW RED/DW

SET / CLEAR Vehicle Detector 1-64 VEH DET SET / CLEAR Preempt 1-10

CALL PREEMPT SEQ PMT KBD LOCK - -

- PMT INTERLOCK CALL LOW PRI PMT

SET / CLEAR Ring 1-4

INH MAX RED REST


MAX2 MAX3 OMIT RED CLR

PED RECYCLE FORCE OFF STOP TIME

SET / CLEAR Unit

TEST A-E I/O MODE A-E CYCLE BIT 1-3 OFFSET BIT 1-3 SPLIT BIT 1-2 ADDR BIT 0-4 TRK SWTCH FAIL IND LAMP CTRL EXTERNAL START AUTO FLASH LOCAL FLASH MMU FLASH MMU STOP TIME SET EXT TIME RESET TBC ON LINE DIMMING ENABLE IM PWR SENSE COORD SYNC TLM EXT ADDR - DIS PRETIME TLM SPARE 1 TLM SPARE 2 ALARM CNA1

CNA2 WALK REST MOD MIN RECALL INT ADVANCE MAN CONTROL EN STOP TIME ALL PH NEXT RX COORD FREE SPLIT DEMAND 1 SPLIT DEMAND 1 DUAL COORD - DB CRC - TMGPLN BIT A-C ENABLE DUAL ENTRY EN IDOT 5 SECT HD VDET PLAN A-C VDET DIAG A-C PDET DIAG A-C LOGIC FLAG 1-100 CIB (1-511) COB (1-767)


LOGIC PROCESSOR OPERATION

User Interface There are three specific screens dedicated to Logic Processor operation. The first, at MM-1-8-2, allows the user to program each of the statements, MM-1-8-1 contains the MANUAL enables for each statement. The third screen, MM-7-8-3 shows the status of each statement as well as the evaluation of the individual conditions. The following is the screen layout for the LP status (MM-7-8-3).

The topmost line contains the following information:

• Logic Statement #1-100 • Active state for the statement • Any active delay timer • Current result for the conditional statement (read-only)

The following lines shall contain the conditional and executable statements. At most, one blank space shall be provided for any groupings of unused statements. In the event that the user has programmed more than 15 statements, scrolling will be required to view the remaining else statements.

LOGIC #99 ACTIVE:Y TIMER:13.2S RESULT:F IF GREEN ON PHASE 10 IS ON F AND VEHICLE DET # 1 IS ON T OR MINGRN TMR ON PHASE 10 < 15.7 F THEN SET VEHICLE DET # 1 OFF SET GREEN OVERLAP B OFF SET YELLOW OVERLAP B ON ELSE DELAY FOR 15.7 SECONDS* SET VEHICLE DET # 1 ON

HIB (Present)

SIB (Present)

Map

Controller

COB (Past)

Logic Process Inputs

CIB (Present)

COB (Present)

HIB (Present)

SIB (Present)

Logic Process Outputs

Map SOB (Future)

HOB (Future)

Logic Processor System Diagram

Map (Past)

Map

TFB (Present)

Map (Present)


�� ##��$$��&&��''��

�� General Information When performing the Auto-Loop diagnostic test which automatically cycles through all of the individual diagnostic tests in sequence, the ASC/3 controller power should be disconnected and all loopback cables should be installed before the Auto-Loop test is started. When performing individual tests that require a loopback cables, power should be disconnected before the any loopback cable is installed. The following tables describe the configuration of each of the individual ASC/3 controller loopback cables. 33279G1 ASC-2100 A connector Loop back cable WIRE NO.

PREP ITEM

LENGTH (INCHES)

FROM ITEM

FROM TERM

FROM FIT

TO ITEM

TO TERM TO FIT REMARKS

1 1 8 PA f C PA s C 26 WHT 2 1 8 PA g C PA Z C 26 WHT 3 1 8 PA h C PA D C 26 WHT 4 1 8 PA N C PA t C 26 WHT 5 1 8 PA EE C PA a C 26 WHT 6 1 8 PA FF C PA E C 26 WHT 7 1 8 PA w C PA DD C 26 WHT 8 1 8 PA P C PA u C 26 WHT 9 1 8 PA T C PA CC C 26 WHT-W/NEXT WIRE 10 1 8 PA CC C PA R C 26 WHT-W/NEXT WIRE 11 1 8 PA R C PA AA C 26 WHT 12 1 8 PA S C PA r C 26 WHT-W/NEXT WIRE 13 1 8 PA r C PA k C 26 WHT 14 1 8 PA BB C PA Y C 26 WHT-W/NEXT WIRE 15 1 8 PA Y C PA j C 26 WHT 16 1 8 PA m C PA X C 26 WHT-W/NEXT WIRE 17 1 8 PA X C PA z C 26 WHT 18 1 8 PA K C PA c C 26 WHT 19 1 8 PA L C PA b C 26 WHT 20 1 8 PA M C PA F C 26 WHT 21 1 8 PA n C PA J C 26 WHT 22 1 8 PA v C PA H C 26 WHT 23 1 8 PA i C PA G C 26 WHT 24 1 8 PA x C PA e C 26 WHT 25 1 8 PA GG C PA d C 26 WHT 26 1 8 PA A C PA q C 26 WHT 27 1 8 PA C C PA HH C 26 WHT-W/NEXT WIRE 28 1 8 PA HH C PA y C 26 WHT 29 2 6 PWR AC+ S PA p C 20 BLK SPLICE W/PWR CORD BLK 30 3 6 PWR AC- S PA U C 20 WHT SPLICE W/PWR CORD WHT 31 4 6 PWR GND S PA V C 20 GRN SPLICE W/PWR CORD GRN


HARDWARE DIAGNOSTIC CABLES 33279G2 ASC-2100 B connector Loop back cable

FROM ITEM FROM TERM FROM FIT TO ITEM TO TERM TO FIT REMARKS

PB N C PB D C W/NEXT WIRE

PB D C PB AA C

PB P C PB E C W/NEXT WIRE

PB E C PB p C

PB i C PB F C W/NEXT WIRE

PB F C PB q C

PB R C PB Y C W/NEXT WIRE

PB Y C PB FF C

PB m C PB Z C W/NEXT WIRE

PB Z C PB HH C W/NEXT WIRE

PB HH C PB T C W/NEXT WIRE

PB T C PB a C W/NEXT WIRE

PB a C PB DD C

PB j C PB s C W/NEXT WIRE

PB s C PB A C

PB U C PB r C

PB V C PB t C

PB L C PB b C W/NEXT WIRE

PB b C PB GG C

PB M C PB c C W/NEXT WIRE

PB c C PB BB C

PB h C PB G C W/NEXT WIRE

PB G C PB CC C

PB g C PB d C W/NEXT WIRE

PB d C PB w C

PB n C PB H C W/NEXT WIRE

PB H C PB EE C W/NEXT WIRE

PB EE C PB k C W/NEXT WIRE

PB k C PB J C W/NEXT WIRE

PB J C PB u C

PB x C PB e C W/NEXT WIRE

PB e C PB C C

PB S C PB K C

PB z C PB f C W/NEXT WIRE

PB f C PB B C W/NEXT WIRE

PB B C PB W C W/NEXT WIRE

PB W C PB X C W/NEXT WIRE

PB X C PB v C W/NEXT WIRE

PB v C PB y C


HARDWARE DIAGNOSTIC CABLES 33279G3 ASC-2100 C connector Loop back cable WIRE NO.

DESCRIPTION OF WIRE

LENGTH (INCHES)

FROM ITEM

FROM TERM

FROM FIT TO ITEM TO TERM TO FIT REMARKS

1 26 AWG WHT 8 PC P C PC i C W/NEXT WIRE

2 26 AWG WHT 8 PC i C PC K C W/NEXT WIRE

3 26 AWG WHT 8 PC K C PC M C

4 26 AWG WHT 8 PC R C PC J C W/NEXT WIRE

5 26 AWG WHT 8 PC J C PC L C W/NEXT WIRE

6 26 AWG WHT 8 PC L C PC DD C

7 26 AWG WHT 8 PC m C PC H C W/NEXT WIRE

8 26 AWG WHT 8 PC H C PC N C

9 26 AWG WHT 8 PC n C PC j C W/NEXT WIRE

10 26 AWG WHT 8 PC j C PC k C

11 26 AWG WHT 8 PC a C PC PP C

12 26 AWG WHT 8 PC u C PC HH C

13 26 AWG WHT 8 PC v C PC A C

14 26 AWG WHT 8 PC Z C PC B C

15 26 AWG WHT 8 PC Y C PC c C

16 26 AWG WHT 8 PC S C PC g C W/NEXT WIRE

17 26 AWG WHT 8 PC g C PC AA C

18 26 AWG WHT 8 PC T C PC h C W/NEXT WIRE

19 26 AWG WHT 8 PC h C PC z C

20 26 AWG WHT 8 PC p C PC G C W/NEXT WIRE

21 26 AWG WHT 8 PC G C PC CC C

22 26 AWG WHT 8 PC q C PC LL C W/NEXT WIRE

23 26 AWG WHT 8 PC LL C PC BB C

24 26 AWG WHT 8 PC V C PC f C W/NEXT WIRE

25 26 AWG WHT 8 PC f C PC KK C

26 26 AWG WHT 8 PC U C PC E C W/NEXT WIRE

27 26 AWG WHT 8 PC E C PC y C

28 26 AWG WHT 8 PC EE C PC F C W/NEXT WIRE

29 26 AWG WHT 8 PC F C PC NN C

30 26 AWG WHT 8 PC r C PC JJ C W/NEXT WIRE

31 26 AWG WHT 8 PC JJ C PC MM C

32 26 AWG WHT 8 PC t C PC x C W/NEXT WIRE

33 26 AWG WHT 8 PC x C PC w C

34 26 AWG WHT 8 PC W C PC e C W/NEXT WIRE

35 26 AWG WHT 8 PC e C PC C C

36 26 AWG WHT 8 PC X C PC D C W/NEXT WIRE

37 26 AWG WHT 8 PC D C PC GG C

38 26 AWG WHT 8 PC s C PC d C W/NEXT WIRE

39 26 AWG WHT 8 PC d C PC FF C W/NEXT WIRE

40 26 AWG WHT 8 PC FF C PC b C


HARDWARE DIAGNOSTIC CABLES 33279G4 ASC-2100 D connector Loop back cable WIRE NO.

DESCRIPTION OF WIRE

LENGTH (INCHES)

FROM ITEM

FROM TERM

FROM FIT TO ITEM


1 26 AWG WHT 8 D 1 C D 57 C

2 26 AWG WHT 8 D 2 C D 50 C

3 26 AWG WHT 8 D 5 C D 60 C W/NEXT WIRE

4 26 AWG WHT 8 D 60 C D 49 C

5 26 AWG WHT 8 D 8 C D 61 C

6 26 AWG WHT 8 D 11 C D 55 C

7 26 AWG WHT 8 D 15 C D 56 C

8 26 AWG WHT 8 D 21 C D 58 C

9 26 AWG WHT 8 D 22 C D 9 C

10 26 AWG WHT 8 D 23 C D 38 C

11 26 AWG WHT 8 D 24 C D 3 C

12 26 AWG WHT 8 D 27 C D 12 C

13 26 AWG WHT 8 D 28 C D 36 C

14 26 AWG WHT 8 D 29 C D 10 C

15 26 AWG WHT 8 D 32 C D 6 C

16 26 AWG WHT 8 D 33 C D 4 C

17 26 AWG WHT 8 D 34 C D 47 C

18 26 AWG WHT 8 D 41 C D 20 C

19 26 AWG WHT 8 D 42 C D 13 C

20 26 AWG WHT 8 D 43 C D 16 C

21 26 AWG WHT 8 D 44 C D 14 C

22 26 AWG WHT 8 D 45 C D 19 C

23 26 AWG WHT 8 D 46 C D 18 C

24 26 AWG WHT 8 D 48 C D 17 C

25 26 AWG WHT 8 D 51 C D 25 C

26 26 AWG WHT 8 D 52 C D 30 C


28 26 AWG WHT 8 D 26 C D 40 C


30 26 AWG WHT 8 D 31 C D 35 C


32 26 AWG WHT 8 D 37 C D 39 C


HARDWARE DIAGNOSTIC CABLES 33279G5 25 pin FSK Loop back diagnostic cable WIRE NO.

DESCRIPTION OF WIRE

LENGTH (INCHES)

FROM ITEM

FROM TERM

FROM FIT TO ITEM


1 26 AWG WHT 8 P3 9 C P3 3 C W/NEXT WIRE



4 26 AWG WHT 8 P3 14 C P3 15 C




8 26 AWG WHT 8 P3 17 C P3 20 C




12 26 AWG WHT 8 P3 21 C P3 18 C




16 26 AWG WHT 8 P3 6 C P3 16 C

17 R1 1 S R3 1 S INSTALL ASSY IN CONN




21 26 AWG WHT 8 R3 2 S P3 12 C TRANSMIT 1

22 26 AWG WHT 8 R4 2 S P3 13 C TRANSMIT 2

23 26 AWG WHT 8 R3 1 S P3 24 C RECEIVE 1

24 26 AWG WHT 8 R4 1 S P3 25 C RECEIVE 2

33279G6 9 pin FSK loop back cable WIRE NO.

DESCRIPTION OF WIRE

LENGTH (INCHES)

FROM ITEM

FROM TERM

FROM FIT TO ITEM TO FIT TO FIT

1 26 AWG WHT 8 P7 1 C P7 4 C

2 26 AWG WHT 8 P7 2 C P7 5 C

33279G7 15 pin SDLC loop back cable WIRE NO.

DESCRIPTION OF WIRE

LENGTH (INCHES)

FROM ITEM

FROM TERM

FROM FIT TO ITEM

TO TERM TO FIT

1 26 AWG WHT 8 P5 1 C P5 5 C

2 26 AWG WHT 8 P5 3 C P5 7 C

3 26 AWG WHT 8 P5 9 C P5 13 C

4 26 AWG WHT 8 P5 11 C P5 15 C


HARDWARE DIAGNOSTIC CABLES 33279G8 25 pin Port 2 Loop back cable

1 26 AWG WHT 6.5 P2 2 C P2 3 C TXD/RXD 2 26 AWG WHT 6.5 P2 4 C P2 5 C RTS/CTS 3 26 AWG WHT 6.5 P2 20 C P2 6 C DTR/DSR-TO NEXT WIRE 4 26 AWG WHT 6.5 P2 6 C P2 8 C DSR/DCD

100-1044-501 Port 3A test cable

33279G10 Telemetry interface

WIRE NO. DESCRIPTION OF WIRE

LENGTH (INCHES)

FROM ITEM

FROM TERM FROM FIT TO ITEM TO TERM

TO FIT

1 26 AWG WHT 8 P1 1 C P1 7 C

2 26 AWG WHT 8 P1 2 C P1 3 C Ethernet Crossover Cable Wire P1 to P2 1 1 3 2 2 6 3 3 1 4 4 2 5 5 4 6 6 5 7 7 7 8 8 8

32864G1 ASC-2S/1000 power cable

ITEM # WIRE LENGTH " FROM/TERM TO/TERM

1 18 AWG GRN 6 P1-H P1-SHL

2 PWR CORD 18 AWG 3 COND 72 P1-C PWR-BLK (AC+)

3 PWR CORD 18 AWG 3 COND 72 P1-A PWR-WHT (AC-)

4 PWR CORD 18 AWG 3 COND 72 P1-H PWR-GRN (CG)


�� ##��$$��

��

General Information

Pretimed operation provides the capability to extend walk on selected phases. Extending walk means that the walk interval is expanded from its programmed time to an interval equal to the phase’s maximum green minus ped clearance plus any ped clearance timed during the phase’s yellow or yellow plus red clearance.

Main Menu 2-7 is used to select the phases whose ped services are to be timed by the “Pretimed Operation.” Pretimed phases are automatically converted to non-actuated phases with vehicle recall.

Pretimed Operation

The following diagram shows how a pretimed ped service is timed. Even though the phase is converted to non-actuated operation, the phase’s maximum green is used to establish the length of the walk. Normally, the length of the walk will be the maximum green time for the phase minus the time required by the ped clearance. However, if Coordinator is not free; a hold is applied at end of walk; or the ped clear through yellow or yellow plus red option is applied, the length of the pretimed walk may be reduced to the programmed walk or expanded beyond the phase’s maximum green.

WALK PC PC thru thru PC Yellow Red option option Y R Red Transfer MAX GREEN

Because a pretimed phase operates in non-actuated mode, the presence of a hold input when the walk completes its timing will result in the walk signal being held on and the ped service not being allowed to advance to ped clear. When the hold input is lifted, the ped service will advance to ped clearance if there is an opposing call or if there is no opposing call and the walk rest modifier isn’t applied.

As would be expected, the application of the ped clear through yellow or the ped clear through yellow and red options requires less of the ped clear to be timed during the phase’s green interval and allows the walk to be extended by the amount of ped clear timed in the phase’s clearance intervals. It should be noted that a pretimed walk is never allowed to extend beyond the end of the phase’s green interval.

Pretimed Operation During Coordinated Operation

When the Coordinator isn’t free, it uses a phase’s specified split time to calculate the amount of time the phase can remain green before it must advance to its clearance intervals. During coordination, the maximum green calculated by the Coordinator replaces the phase’s programmed maximum green when the length of the pretimed walk is calculated.

asc3 programming manual - university of idaho manual i table of contents 1.1. purpose of this...

Documents